Audio

170: How To Build A Highly Engaged Instagram Following With Sue B Zimmerman

 How To Build A Highly Engaged Instagram Following With Sue B Zimmerman

Today I’m excited to have Sue B Zimmerman on the show. Now Sue and I met through a mutual friend and I actually recently watched her speak at Ryan Deiss’ Traffic and Conversion Summit.

She is known as the Instagram Expert and travels across the world sharing her Instagram expertise. Today we are going to explore ways on how to increase your Instagram following and how to use Instagram to sell your products online.

What You’ll Learn

  • Sue’s strategy for building an Instagram audience
  • Where to start building your following
  • How Sue recommends generating content for Instagram.
  • The tools she uses to post on Instagram.
  • How she collaborates with other Instagrammers.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Ignite.Sellerlabs.com – If you are selling on Amazon and running Amazon Sponsored Ads campaigns, then Ignite from Seller Labs is a must have tool. Click here and get a FREE 30 Day Trial.
Ignite Logo

ReferralCandy.com – If you’re already getting steady orders every month, adding a refer-a-friend program to your store can give you a new sales channel. And ReferralCandy is the best in the business. Click here and get a FREE $50 credit towards your account.
referral candy

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and delve deeply into what strategies are working and what strategies are not with their businesses.

Now today I’m thrilled to have Sue B. Zimmerman on the show. And if you don’t know who Sue is, she is actually known as the Instagram expert, and she is going to teach us today how to start a highly engaged IG account.

But before we begin I want to give a quick shout out to Seller Labs who is a sponsor of the show. And specifically I want to talk about their brand new tool Ignite which helps sellers manage their Amazon sponsored ad campaigns. Right now I’m actually using this tool to manage my Amazon sponsored ad campaigns, and it makes things a heck of a lot more convenient.

So number one I’ve always found it a major pain to generate my PPC reports on Amazon, cut and paste the data over to an excel spreadsheet and use pivot tables before I’m able do any analysis. Now Ignite pulls all that info for you automatically and allows you to easily see what keywords are working and what are not immediately, there is no need to manually create reports or play with excel.

Second of all unless you’re a data geek, Amazon campaign data can be hard to understand, and what is cool is that Ignite makes keyword and bidding recommendations on the fly that can be applied with just a couple of clicks.

So let’s say one of my hankie keywords is bleeding money, well Ignite will alert me of that fact, and I can reduce that bid immediately. So bottom line Ignite makes managing your Amazon’s sponsored campaigns so much easier, and the fact that they provide me with alerts means that I no longer have to monitor my campaigns like a hawk.

So if there are keywords that are doing well, Ignite will tell me to add them to my exact match campaigns. If my keywords are losing money, well Ignite tells me to either remove the keyword or to reduce the bid. So head on over to sellerlabs.com/steve where you’ll find awesome tutorials on how to run Amazon PPC ads and the opportunity to try Ignite for 30 days for free. Once again that’s sellerlabs.com/steve.

Now I also want to give a shout out to Klaviyo who is also a sponsor of the show. I’m always super excited to talk about Klaviyo because they are the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store, and I actually depend on them for over 20% of my revenues. Now you’re probably wondering why Klaviyo and not another email provider. Well Klaviyo is the only email platform out there that is specifically built for ecommerce stores, and here is why it’s so powerful.

Klaviyo can track every single customer who has shopped in your store and exactly what they bought, and that makes it extremely powerful. So let’s say I want to send an email to everyone who purchased a red handkerchief in the last week, easy. Let’s say I want to set up a special auto-responder sequence to my customers depending on what they bought, that’s piece of cake, and there is full revenue tracking on every single email that I send.

So Klaviyo is the most powerful email platform that I’ve ever used, and you can try them for free at mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O. Now on to the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m excited to have Sue B. Zimmerman on the show. Now, Sue and I met through a Mutual friend and I actually recently watched her speak at Ryan Deiss’s Traffic and Conversion Summit. Now, she is known as the Instagram expert and travels across the world sharing her Instagram expertise.

She also runs two popular online courses called Ready Set Gram and Insta Academy, and she’s actually a well-known speaker that specializes in Instagram. So today what we are going to do is we are going to explore ways on how to increase your Instagram following, and how to use Instagram to sell your products online. And with that, welcome to the show Sue, how are you doing today?

Sue: Hey, it’s so great to be here, and yeah Ryan Deiss’s event just like rocked the house. That was the largest stage I have ever spoken on in my life, and I have to be honest, I was a little nervous.

Steve: So what’s funny is I was going to approach you afterwards, but then you were mobbed with like 20 people and I didn’t think I could fight my way into the middle there so.

Sue: Yeah, I think it’s because I was giving away a pen that really enables people to do Instagram stories, and because the conference is primarily men, their fingers are large, and it’s hard to do like the fine script on a phone. So everyone wanted a pen and I shoed everybody out into the hallway where there was really good, what I call #hotelfilterforgoodlighting, so we could take a ton of photos to post on Instagram. So like, I gave a little workshop in how to take the perfect selfie photo after.
Steve: What’s funny is one of those few conferences where there is always a line for like the men’s room, but there is no line for the women’s room which I always find odd.

Sue: Exactly, exactly, yeah.

Steve: So Sue, how did you get started in business and kind of what led you to specialize in Instagram?

Sue: Yeah, great question. So I’ve been an entrepreneur my whole life, I actually had my very first business when I was a teenager. And then through the years I’ve always been that person that saw opportunities and trends in primarily consumer product space. I was heavily involved with clocks and [inaudible 00:05:44], the little two dots that you put in the clocks.

And I even was on stage at QBC, with one of my businesses which was a double sided sticky tape that allowed scrap bookers to embellish their photos, because I’m the person who has always loved photos and my most prized possessions are my photographs.

And so it’s really ironic fast forward eight years after being on stage at QBC that I’m now teaching a global audience how to embellish their photos to put on Instagram, their digital platform using third party apps, and all kinds of fun tools to really enhance what I call their digital magazines.

Steve: You are thinking giblets, yeah.

Sue: And yeah, gibits [ph] to go, yeah digital magazine because like I, Steve, I believe that Instagram is essentially that, it is your digital magazine for your business, your brand your product or your service where if you craft the perfect bio, and we certainly can go over with that is a new show, awesome photos or videos not only per post, but they cohesively all go together as a whole magazine.

You can certainly attract the right followers, the right customers, the right clients and ultimately grow your business, and I really think that there is a big disconnect with you know, people understanding this. And so when I had my retail store on Cape Cod I was selling clothing, jewelry, and accessories all with a very preppy, nautical vibe.

And I quickly learnt that by posting images around the products that I sold, not just the products that I sold but the beach and the sunset and the yachts, and like the whole vibe of Cape Cod and Hide Ranges- which always got a lot of likes, I could essentially craft that perfect magazine. And eventually my business throughout that summer grew 40% from using Instagram, and before using Instagram I was using all of other social, because I taught social media off season when I did run my store.

So I’ve been versed in social media, I’m very visual; I catch trends and opportunities before they go mainstream. And I knew that Instagram was going to be a big deal because of the visual component, because of that magazine opportunity that you – and even because people always say, when they were walking in my store and they are like, “Can I post– can I take a picture of…

Steve: This is the physical store?

Sue: Yeah.

Steve: Okay, got it.

Sue: The physical store and I had an ecommerce store. Yeah, so people would walk into my store and I would always ask them after they purchase something if I could take a picture and usually they were like holding up what they bought, and they are like, ‘sure.’ And they are like, “Oh my God! I love Instagram.” And I’d be like, why do you love Instagram? And the answer over and over and over again Steve was, because it’s fun, it’s fun. And I don’t think people think of social media as fun, I think that they think of it as a time sack, and often pull down rabbit holes.

So I knew I was onto something from the success that I had at my store. And because I love teaching, empowering and helping other people make money, I knew that I had a platform to teach. And so I just started teaching, but you’ll be excited to hear that the way I got on stage and stage is all over the world is from doing podcast interviews, and the very first…

Steve: Interesting.

Sue: Yeah the very first one I did was with Michael Stelzner, the owner of Social Media Examiner. And as soon as he was done interviewing me he was like, “Damn, I need to get you on stage in Social Media Marketing World,” and I’ve been there speaking ever since.

Steve: That’s funny because that’s how I met Mike. He just had me on the podcast. The podcast literally went live like three days ago or whenever you post them, and so are you telling me that the speaker engagements should start coming in any minute now?

Sue: Oh, yeah, I mean, well here is the thing I believe. When you — I say yes to pretty much every podcast opportunity as long as it aligns with kind of where I am in my niches, and they have the market that I want to amplify and broadcast to, because I love that I get interviewed from people all over the world. From Australia, from Israel, France, Spain and I’m talking and people are, you know- I’m in their ears all over the world, and then they are opting into my email list because I have a free download that I talk about, and they are coming into my community, and that is how you grow a business.

Steve: Let me ask you this. I was curious when you were talking about growing your businesses 40%, the one on Cape Cod, were people actually going to your bio and clicking on the link, or were you getting that data from just whenever someone made a purchase you asked them, how they found you?

Sue: Exactly.

Steve: Okay.

Sue: So my store was tiny, like 10 x 12 on the inside, and then I got to merchandise on the outside and so it was a very, very intimate store in a community, like in a country club community.

Steve: Okay.

Sue: So it was kind of like friends and family and then you know visitors from the Cape. So every time someone checked out, it was mandatory for my employees to ask, how did they find us.

Steve: Got it, okay.

Sue: And often they would hold up their phone and say, “Oh my God! This picture on Instagram.” Like I have to have this anchor bracelet or I need this tunic, and by the way to the guys on the call, tunic is like a beach cover up.

Steve: Okay.

Sue: So yeah, so they would check a box and we would know where that sale was originated from.

Steve: Okay, and then in terms of your brand, Sue B. Zimmerman, where you teach these classes, like how do you generate traffic to that site? Is it primarily Instagram traffic also that leads to your courses and classes?

Sue: So that’s a great question, so the way my business model is set up is that we craft an epic blog post every week, and in that blog post not only is it written words teaching, but also a YouTube video. So I have a YouTube channel and today we hit 10,000 subscribers.

Steve: Nice.

Sue: So I’m super excited about that, and we get a lot of traffic from YouTube because of the search engine optimization from Goggle obviously.

Steve: Okay.

Sue: And when we publish that blog post Steve, we create custom links, UTM links so we can track, and we have different links for all of social. So we have a link for Instagram, Facebook, Twitter, YouTube. Those are primarily the spaces where I am most frequently broadcasting.

Steve: Okay.

Sue: And so we are able to track the success. Now we treat each blog essentially like a launch. So the blog is published, it goes to our email list first because those are the people who know, like, and trust me and are already in on the inside of my life and community, and have some connection to me. And then they are more likely to share it, comment on the blog and then after it’s gone out to our email list, that’s when I’m all in on social.

So that’s when I would post on Instagram, both my personal page @SueBZimmerman, my business page @theInstagramexpert, and occasionally on my company page which is @spzteam which is my team page, my team manages that.

Steve: Okay.

Sue: So we will amplify on Insta. I used to do a live stream on Periscope; I was an early adopter on Periscope. I have over 22,000 followers there, but things have really changed significantly over the years since being there. So now I amplify on Facebook Live, and I now have an Instagram Live strategy that I’m using to amplify even though it goes away as soon as you stop the broadcast.

Steve: Are you using that instead of Periscope now?

Sue: Yeah. It’s so funny you asked that, like as of yesterday, when I talked about a webinar that I’m doing this Thursday, I went on Periscope first, I had only 53 people watching live, and then I had a lot of replay, and then I did my second Instagram Live ever and I had over 360 people on.

Steve: Okay.

Sue: And here is the thing, they were so happy to see me, they were so engaged in like, “Oh my God! Sue is on Instagram Live, this is so great.” And I’m like, “Ask me a question, ask me anything.” And they are like, “Are you kidding me? This is amazing, I have Sue’s attention.”

So I know that Instagram Live is a good place for me to be. So now we’ve got the blog, it sits on our website. In the blog we also have some links to our free strategy guide, we have some links encouraging our audience to click to tweet, and we’ve got people leaving comments and people sharing it.

And I’m really proud of this blog because this year we were nominated as one of the top ten blogs from Social Media Examiner. So just to have that credibility, and the reason I’m saying this is not to brag but to say when you go all in and commit to doing something consistently over time, it really can pay off. And so we knew this is where we needed to create stellar content and become known as the Instagram educator. And I know my handle name is the Instagram expert, but I like to pride myself on being a really great teacher and educator.

So that is essentially what we do, and so the link on Instagram Steve, gets changed out for the various reason. One, usually the link is our Instagram strategy guide, and that’s what you see most frequently.

Steve: Okay.

Sue: That sits on our website, that sits on our Facebook page, but if we are in a launch, like I was when I did Marie Forleo B School a couple of weeks ago, and right now I’m in a launch with my business coach Lisa Larter, we have a webinar for Thursday. We switched out all those UTMs; we go all in on the launch. And right now we are driving traffic to synapse for the webinar, but before that we were driving traffic to our blog, and the article on our blog had to do with the content that people would want who would sign up for the webinar.

So it’s all about money, money mindset, like how to get a handle on your money. So the bog always matches up to the campaign that we are doing. So we can — you will love this obviously, we can drive traffic once people click on our blog, we can retarget with Facebook ads.

Steve: Sure.

Sue: And so the blog is always the seed to the next content, to the next campaign. And when I say seed it’s like we are not selling anything, we are giving great value through content that we can amplify. And then this Thursday when I do the webinar, you know right now my link is for signing up for the webinar, and then after the webinar the link will get switched out to purchasing the course or the class that we are offering from the webinar.

So it’s very, very strategic and it’s very formulaic, and we’ve had great success with launches when we do it this way, did that all make sense?

Steve: Yes. Let me ask you this, so there is a couple of things that you said there, so wherever you put together a blog post, you use the link in your Instagram and usually that link is the link to your blog post unless you are doing some sort of launch or promotion, is that accurate?

Sue: Yes, a launch or promotion and then when we are done with the launch or the promotion we go back to the strategy guide. The strategy guide, my Instagram strategy guide is always our list builder.

Steve: Okay.

Sue: So Suebzimmerman.com/guide gets anyone listening, our 17 page free Instagram guide, and that is where we build that. I know they can trust factor because we do have a nurture sequence, about seven days after you opt-in to that guide where you really get to know me more.

Steve: It sounds like that would be a better link because you are getting an email list, an email address as opposed to just a regular blog post, right? So Like what percentage do you have that link up as opposed to the content?

Sue: 75 to 80.

Steve: Okay, 75 meaning the opt-in or?

Sue: The opt-in, the opt-in is there most frequently.

Steve: Okay, got it, got it. Okay, and then once you have them you probably have an auto responder sequence that walks them through.

Sue: Yes, yes.

Steve: Okay, I’m just curious myself, like, how big is your Instagram following and like how much traffic does it actually drive?

Sue: Great question, so because I have three different accounts, there is — some of the followers probably follow me on both, so I have — I’m opening up Instagram right now. I don’t pay attention to my numbers as much other people might, but I have 46,900 on my personal account.

Steve: Okay.

Sue: So that’s a shit ton, that’s a shit ton, right? And then I’ve got on the Instagram expert which is my business account where I share Instagram tips, tools and strategies, I have almost a 1,000 more 47.7.

Steve: Okay.

Sue: And then on my team account we have almost 3,000, and here is what I want to say to the listeners. I have a ton of people following me and a lot of those followers could be 13 year olds for all I know, and aren’t necessarily my ideal followers. I really wish that people would unfollow me who aren’t there to engage, because they kill my engagement rate.

So you know, I get suggested to be a follower because in the bio on Instagram it says, I’m an Instagram marketer. So anyone searching for Instagram or marketing, I come up and they start following me. I pay attention to those who leave real authentic comments, and who actually engage in my content. To answer your question, we get about 250 opt-ins a week from Instagram.

Steve: Okay, okay.

Sue: So I care more about that number than my followers, and from that we can nurture people over time. Now this is not including any paid ads or Facebook and all the other stuff, you know.

Steve: Of course, these are just people clicking on your link in the bio and actually signing up.

Sue: Yes, yes exactly.

Steve: Okay, got it. And let’s switch gears a little bit. Let’s talk about selling physical products, because a large portion of my audience sells either on their own store or on Amazon. And so what I want to do today is let’s pretend that I’m an ecommerce store, which I am actually selling physical products, so it’s not that large of a stretch, and I’ve come to you for help, right? So what questions would you ask me, and how do you formulate a social media strategy?

So for example, my store I sell wedding handkerchiefs and wedding linens. So if I were to come to you for help, like how would you walk me through an Instagram strategy?

Sue: Well I love it that you have a very niche account; a lot of people don’t have that. So you are not just wedding, because wedding is so broad.

Steve: Right.

Sue: You got handkerchiefs and that’s so cool, like I love that. So what’s the most important thing for people to think with an Instagram strategy is who is your customer, and where do they hang out. You literary need to know where they hang out, where they vacation, where they shop, what their interests are. And I’m actually going to use one of my favorite Instagram accounts to really go deep with this stuff.

Steve: Sure, sure.

Sue: So the Drybar which is one of my favorite Instagram accounts is where you can go and get a blow out. So Alli Webb is the owner of the Drybar, I met her on [inaudible 00:21:32] Interview with her back in the day when Blab was a thing, and she not only has physical locations in the US, she also has some in Canada.

What I love about the Drybar are so many things. The main thing is that when I physically walk into the Drybar, I literally feel like I’m walking into their Instagram account. Alli knows that her customer who sits in the chair to get a blow dry has kids, likes fashion, likes fresh flowers, lots of people have dogs and they like funny quotes.

And so when you look at that Instagram account, it’s not just about a blow dry, it’s about their brand color yellow, their language that they use. Everything in their branding has to do with the bar, so all of their products are named after anything that you know, chase sack, tequila, money maker, like there are so many play on words, like a shot of this.

And so I love the branding and the language and the visuals around everything, and there is a lot of user generated content, there is a lot of celebration of the people who work for her. And so that knowing exactly what your customer or client loves will help you set your strategy up for success.

Steve: I just want to figure that out, like in a brick and mortar store, it’s a little easier but like if you are online how do you figure that out?

Sue: You’ve got to do surveys; you’ve got to survey the people who have either purchased from you in the past or inside of a Facebook group. Like ask them, I mean I would, I know from my free Facebook group, Instagram results for business and anybody can join that; there is 6,000 people in there.

I know from the pain points and the questions that they ask there what my content should be that I cover when I’m teaching, and then often you know, put into my paid course. And then I have my VIP group for my online course Ready Set Gram. So the more you communicate with and know exactly the language that they speak, and what they like, the more you can create content for them.

This is not about you and what you like, it’s about what do they love seeing and learning, and I think a lot of people on Instagram get this piece wrong. Does that all make sense to you?

Steve: It does. So the idea is to find out who your target customers are, and then create images that kind of follow through with that brand that appeals to those people. Here is a question that I always have with Instagram, like how do you measure the effectiveness of a campaign, outside of the link and bio?

Sue: Okay, I’m going to answer that in a sec, but let me just go back to one ninja tip for you before we go to the next question.

Steve: Okay, Sure.

Sue: So most businesses know who some of the brands are that not only do they buy your wedding handkerchief, but maybe they also buy — give me like the most popular designer dress, is it Valentino?

Steve: Vera Wang, Vera Wang.

Sue: Okay, so maybe they also, so you know that the people that buy your handkerchief also buy Vera Wang. So if you go to Vera Wang’s Instagram account, you can look at who their followers are, and you can start engaging in those followers. Now this takes time, this takes like creating a spreadsheet and really — when I say engaging, it’s not just like double tapping, liking, and writing a comment that says nice pic.

I’m talking about what is it that you like about what you are looking at and why, and you can get their attention. And so if you did this to five or ten accounts every day, you can get their attention and their eyeballs on you, because every time someone leaves a comment on Instagram you get a notification, and let me tell you something, everyone looks at their notifications.

Steve: Interesting, okay, so these are just followers of Vera Wang in this example, right?

Sue: Yeah, but people that follow Vera Wang are following them for a reason, and if they are following them and you are telling me that Vera Wang is one of your buckets, then that makes sense for you to be following that, or is it people that have their weddings at you know, in the Bahamas or at Turks and Caicos, or at the high end Regency, like knowing literary where your clients hangout on in Instagram, then going into those accounts and engaging with them.

Steve: Interesting, so are you looking for just the largest followers of that account?

Sue: No, I’m looking for the right followers.

Steve: The right followers, okay.

Sue: It’s never about being popular, it’s never been about the numbers for me, it’s always about the right follower.

Steve: Interesting, so what is your — how do you figure out what the right follower is?

Sue: So the right followers, if you go into Vera Wang and you’re looking into the followers and then you click onto their account and you see that they are getting married, and they are planning a wedding.

Steve: I see.

Sue: And you are like damn, they are planning a wedding, I got the perfect thing for them. Like you got to literary know what they are doing.

Steve: So you comment on them and then you tag them, and what would be an example of something you might say?

Sue: You don’t tag them, you just comment.

Steve: Okay.

Sue: And you can say, “Hey I see that you love Vera Wang and that you are having a wedding, I thought you might be interested in you know, I think you might be interested in my account.” I wouldn’t say I think you would be interested in buying this from me. I would just say you know, I think that you might be interested in my account, you know, very, very — it’s just like you are having a conversation with one person. Not all, not 600 million people on Instagram, but a real private conversation with the person that you think would be your ideal customer or client.

So I mean I could go even deeper with a comment, but it’s literally taking the time to craft a comment that makes sense based on the post that you are leaving a comment on.

Steve: Okay, that makes sense. So it’s really going deep as opposed to blasting so to speak? Like I’m going-

Sue: Oh my gosh, I cannot stand the blasters, get rid of them.

Steve: I know they are always, there is like a thumbs up or nice post or whatever, I just ignore all of those.

Sue: I block, I delete, block, and report anything that’s not legit.

Steve: Really, okay, interesting.

Sue: The more you do that, the more they’ll go away. No one messes with me anymore.

Steve: Okay, and so you get their attention and then hopefully they will go and check out your account. I’m just curious how frequently you do something like this. Is this every day?

Sue: Okay, so I don’t need to do this anymore, because of the way and my account is growing and the exposure I get from everything else that I do, but when I was starting out and I had under 1,000 followers, this was a strategy that worked extremely well.

Steve: Okay, so this is like a way to get your first 1,000 followers so to speak?

Sue: Yeah, and it’s a way to be – well is to continue to grow. So again I get 100 new followers every day on both accounts.

Steve: Okay.

Sue: And it’s because I’m often a suggested account to follower now, because I have so many followers and you know, I’m not like, oh my god, I have so many followers, but compared to most people I have a lot of followers. And so I’m suggested and people just start following me, but I look at a lot of these accounts that follow me and I’m like oh my gosh, I could never even look at that account or follow it, because there is nothing to do with what inspires me.

I only follow accounts that give me aesthetic value, who entertain me, educate me, or teach me something new. I’m not one of these people that follows just to be nice.

Steve: Okay.

Sue: I follow so that everything that I see in my newsfeed is content that I want to see, because here is the thing you need to know with the new algorithm, the more you double tap and like and follow random ass accounts just to be nice and just like they did it for me I’ll do it for them, that’s the content that’s going to show up in your newsfeed.

The more you are very discerning and selective as to who you follow and why you follow them, that content will show up in your newsfeed. And so you’ve got to be really strategic with not only what you are posting, but how you are engaging and commenting.

Steve: So in terms of people who follow you that are spammers, is it in your best interest then to block them, because if they don’t engage in your stuff, that hurts your account?

Sue: Yes, absolutely.

Steve: Okay. So let me ask you this question though, when and how often do you go through your account and prune the people who aren’t engaging?

Sue: I don’t do it anymore, because I don’t have time for it.

Steve: Okay.

Sue: But it definitely affects my engagement rate. So if someone were to say, oh, I just heard Sue B. Zimmerman on a podcast, she’s the Instagram expert and you go on and you look at my account and you are like wow! She has 47,000 followers, but you go and look at my post and you are like, okay, so she has that may followers, but she only gets like two to 300 likes per post, like what’s up with that?

Well number one, I don’t pay for likes, some people do. Number two, I don’t hire people in China or India to like my photos, some people do. Number three, I don’t use hash tag automation to get people to do things either. Everything you see on my account is 100% authentic, and so what I tell people is look at the comments that I actually do get and look at the conversation, but more importantly Steve, is I’m getting opt-ins to my list.

Steve: Okay.

Sue: And that is my success measure, and so I come out of these very differently than a lot of people on Instagram who feel like it’s all about, like, oh my God! You got to get the engagement rate where you want. Do I want more engagement? Absolutely, I would love more engagement, but you can’t force that.

Steve: Let me ask you this then, what is your view on using hash tags then?

Sue: Oh, I definitely you have to; I mean hash tags I think the magic is in the hash tags until you are like a famous celebrity or a famous account or a famous brand.

Steve: Okay.

Sue: Famous brands like people naturally follow and have notifications turned on. You don’t have to have such a strong hash tag strategy, but if you are looking to show up in certain conversations and I call them hash tag hubs, you need to be very, very, very strategic with your hash tags, and I do have a hash tag hymn book, Suebzimmerman.com/hh. It’s under $30 and it literary is the 35 top industries on Instagram, and the best hash tags to use that we researched.

Steve: I was going to ask you that question actually. So how do you choose a good hash tag? Are you looking for volume or you are looking for something niche?

Sue: You are looking for the places where the people who you are trying to attract hang out.

Steve: Okay. Are there any tools to help you figure out these hash tags?

Sue: Well, Instagram does suggested hash tags based on the ones that you use, and there are some hash tag tools out there that I don’t pay attention to, because I know how to find my best hash tags.

Steve: Okay, if you can give like one strategy for finding the hash tags that you use that would be great.

Sue: Yeah, so what you want to think about is like, maybe a broad hash tag around the space that you serve. So for me it’s Instagram for business.

Steve: Okay.

Sue: Instagram tip, Instagram strategy, Instagram speaker, Instagram webinar, social media, which is broad, but I’ll use event hash tags like #SMMW17; I’m speaking at Social Media Marketing World. Obviously I want to show up there using event hash tags like #TNCS2017 for Traffic and Conversion. I’ll use event hash tags before, during, and after an event so that I always show up in the top nine. Those are more niche, and I love event hash tags because I definitely want the people at the event to find me and connect with me.

So event hash tags, also location based hash tags. So I live in downtown Boston in a high rise, so I’ll do #Bostonbusinessowner, #DowntonBoston. I also have a house on Cape Cod, so I’ll do #Capecod or #Farlethheights where my house is, and it’s so important to do location based hash tags if you do workshops, and I’m doing workshops on the Cape and here in Boston. So businesses in the area will be like, Wow! She’s local; I need to connect with her.

So there is all kinds of strategies around your location, around your industry, around the products that you sell. So when I had my store and I sold nautical jewelry, #nauticaljewellery, #anchorenecklace, #nientackitredbaseballhat.

Steve: Do you look at the volume of those hash tags in determining which ones to use, or is it just what you think is relevant?

Sue: Both. So the ones that have a lot of people like okay, so Lily Pulitzer and Vineyard Vines, they have like preppy, like a lot of preppy hash tags in there, so you know you really can’t compete with those bigger brands and get seen in their hash tags, but you can get ideas of what would work for your business in those hash tags. So the most important thing to do Steve is to look and see what content is being curated in those hash tags, so that you don’t land in a hash tag that’s all porn or something.

Steve: Okay.

Sue: Sometimes people use random ass hash tags and they don’t even look at what content is being curated, and it’s like OMG! Do you really want your brand to be shown up in that hash tag?

Steve: Okay.

Sue: All the popular hash tags on Instagram I say stay away from. Like #Instagram you know, #likeforlike, #instafollow, #pickoftheday, #outfitofday. Like you and 600 million other people are using those.

Steve: I was going to ask you this question, how do you feel about like for like?

Sue: Nothing, No.

Steve: Okay, you don’t do any of those or share for share or okay.

Sue: Here is what I say, here is what I say Steve, and you can quote me on this. You should never ask for a follow, you should earn it by giving value.

Steve: Okay. Does that imply that you are also against paying other people for some exposure back to your page?

Sue: Yeah, I know people ask me all the time if they can pay me for a shout out, and I don’t. Everything I do is authentic. I am a collaborator and I tag naturally brands and businesses and people that I love. I am not an influencer; I mean I am an influencer. People send me free products all the time, and I do tag them in my posts, I talk about them in my Instagram stories, but I’m not looking to be making money this way.

There are influencer marketers that get paid to post on Instagram, I’m not that person. But it’s an industry and it’s definitely valid, I’m not dicing the industry, it’s just not what I do.

Steve: Okay, and so you would not pay someone to accelerate your account getting larger?

Sue: Never, because it’s not going to be with the right people for me.

Steve: Interesting, okay. Even if there was like another Instagram person out there who specializes in teaching Instagram, would it be relevant?

Sue: There is like 500 people that specialize in teaching Instagram or so they say.

Steve: Okay.

Sue: For me it’s always attracting the right person.

Steve: So let’s switch gears a little bit and talk about content, like if you can provide some tips, because that’s most of the story, right? You have to, yeah.

Sue: Yeah, yes, so yeah, so content, there is two types of content — I’m just getting a sip of water, hold on a second.

Steve: Sure.

Sue: There is two types of content; there is engagement content, and then there is traffic driving content. And on Instagram the content that gets the most attention is the engagement, is the fabulous photo or video that looks so good that it emotionally pulls you in, because you know, it’s making you laugh, it’s educating you in some way or inspiring you, and you are just like, oh my God! That’s so cool or that’s so funny, oh my God! I love that.

And so that’s the double tap, and I say don’t just double tap, like talk to Siri [ph] and say why you like it. Don’t just like do the lazy thing. If you are going to take the time to double tap, take the time to leave a comment, but then there is the promotional post, the post that you are posting to drive traffic to the thing.

So for me right now if you open up either of my accounts, you’ll see a promotional post, a traffic driving post, because I’m doing this webinar. Now these posts typically aren’t as pretty or exciting or interesting to some people to double tap, like, and comment on. However there are people that want to learn about money mindset, and then numbers that you need to pay attention to in your business, so that when I promote a webinar that I’m doing, people are interested, they are double tapping, they are liking and they are commenting.

But here is what the listeners need to know. If you do more engagement posts and less promotional posts, you’ll get the engagement, which means you’ll beat the algorithm, which means more people will see your posts when you are doing those engagement posts, because engagement is all about likes, comments and now saved post. It’s a new feature on Instagram where you can save a post by tapping on the little ribbon on the bottom right of every post, there is a little ribbon like tab that you can save a post, or you can take a screen shot of a post. And so Instagram counts that as engagement.

So the more engagement you get, the more reach you get. It’s not so much about the impressions, but it’s about the reach. And when you have a business account on Instagram which all your listeners should have, you can look at the reach and the impressions for each post on Instagram, and you can promote and boost each post on Instagram, and you can do ads right from Instagram when you have a business profile.

Steve: Do you boost your posts?

Sue: Occasionally.

Steve: Okay.

Sue: So it depends, if I’m in a campaign, yes or when doing Facebook ads. Our Instagram Ads do extremely well because we know all the different elements and Morgan on my team on the SPZ team does all of my Facebook and Instagram ads, and often gets interviewed on podcasts about Instagram ads. So if you want to have her on talking all about Instagram ads, she’s awesome.

Steve: Okay, what was I was going to ask you next? So with your account then what is your ratio of engagement versus promotional posts?

Sue: So I would say once a week I’m doing a promotional post for the strategy guide unless I’m in a campaign. I’ll do two or three a week.

Steve: Okay.

Sue: You know when I was heavily into — I’ll give Marie Forleo as the best example because it’s the biggest campaign that we do. It’s over a month long. Every third post was almost a traffic driving post, either to the training series, to the webinar or to buying B School.

Steve: Okay, and in terms of the engagment, like is there a certain percentage based on the number of followers that you shoot for?

Sue: No, I don’t shoot for anything other than real organic engagement. I really — to be honest Steve, I don’t get caught up in the numbers as much as in the comments and in the conversions.

Steve: Okay.

Sue: I just don’t, it doesn’t impact me that way, because I know I’m attracting people I’m meant to be serving.

Steve: It’s funny, it’s very interesting that we are talking because I had someone else talk about Instagram before you, and their strategy was completely different. They are all about like social proof, getting followers and then kind of driving that traffic even though the percentages wouldn’t be as high, it’s just interesting.

Sue: Yeah, I guess it’s because I’m such a seasoned, successful entrepreneur , and I know that community trumps everything, and authenticity and like I just, I don’t play the follow game, it’s so not my thing and it’s just who I am.

Steve: Can we talk about business accounts for a sec?

Sue: Yeah.

Steve: If you transition over to a business account, do you end up losing anything or is just seamless?

Sue: It’s seamless and I think you gain so much because you gain access to all the insights and the ability to assess how many followers, the gender of your followers, the demographic of your followers, what time of day do your followers engage? What day of the week do they engage? I mean talk about looking at data; you can do it right in the app under each post. You can view your insights from each post, it’s crazy, yeah.

Steve: So when you have this data, does that imply that you’re posting at a specific time also?

Sue: Yes, I know that 12 to 1PM EST is my best time to be posting, that is lunch time for me and then again typically six to eight at night, but it’s different for everybody.

Steve: Okay, and in terms of frequency, like how often do you post?

Sue: I’m finding that the less I post the more engagement I get, because I do show up at the top of the algorithm for a lot of people that follow me. So if I wait things out and don’t post daily, like I say within maybe 30 to 48 hours, I do a lot better with my reach.

Steve: I see, so you post just at most it sound like once a day.

Sue: Yeah, I mean once a day or once a day and a half, every day and a half.

Steve: Every day and a half, interesting, okay, wow! So there’s been other people I talked to that recommend posting like three or six time a day. It’s just very interesting.

Sue: Oh my God! I would unfollow them in a second. It’s too much.

Steve: So if you are looking at analytics that we were just talking about, like which specific metrics do you actually focus on in determining what sort of content that your customers like?

Sue: I’m looking — I used to spend a lot of time in Iconic Square, but now I just spend my time looking in Instagram and seeing what people — like I’m looking at the reach. I’m looking at the reach of my post, like you know; there is two numbers that you look at in your insights. It’s either; the impressions — now the impressions can be impressions from the same person more than once.

So someone logs into Instagram, they see your post, they log, they are doing their work, they go back and they see your post again because it’s still at the top of their feed, so those are the impressions, but the reach is how many people is it actually reaching. Those are the — that’s the number, like how many people is it reaching and what kind of comments and engagement are you getting.

Steve: Okay, and are there any tools that you use to like post on Instagram or manage your accounts.

Sue: Yeah, so I love Planoly, that’s my go to favorite right now, but also Hootsuite is awesome and Buffer, you can use Hootsuite or Buffer. Planoly now has, where you can plan your Instagram stories too. You can schedule your Instagram stories, which is a great new feature.

Steve: Interesting, so when you plan out one of these posts, do you still have to – I actually don’t do it this way, I do it manually, but do they just send you to a link where you actually start to manually approve it before it goes live?

Sue: So you download the app and as soon as you schedule the time there is a push notifications to your phone, it says, “Do you want to post it now?” And you say, “Post now,” and then you just double tap in the description, and then copy and paste your whole description that you write.

Steve: Got it.

Sue: It will direct to your desktop yeah.

Steve: What is your view on photo content versus video content now?

Sue: What’s my view on what? You went in and out?

Steve: Photo content versus video content.

Sue: I do both, I think videos tend to get more, I do a lot, I do animated gifts from my graphic designer. I also do, I also do every set hash tag, every 7th post I have a video tutorial that I do, so that’s a hash tag that I created, don’t go crush tagging my hash tag anybody, #every7thpost is a video tutorial that I teach. So video definitely has a huge, I think more people are interested in seeing good video, I also use the video right within the Instagram app which is the start and go video, which can really be a creative way for you to get content out there. So I do video and I like video.

Steve: Are you finding that it works better than images, or it gets more reach than the posts?

Sue: You know both do very well for me, and very well is so different for every person. I’m more concerned about the aesthetic magazine look and feel that we talked about at the beginning of the interview, and making sure that the content is always on point with who, you know, what my followers, what my ideal customer, client wants to see.

Steve: I see, so you are very concerned with when someone first opens your Instagram account, the layout and how everything comes together on that one page with thumbnails?

Sue: Yeah, I want each post to stand alone as a very, very valuable post, and I want you to be able to look at the whole feed and get a sense of who I am and what I do.

Steve: Okay, so last question here, when you are looking at someone’s account and the account is just bad, meaning there is no cohesiveness or anything, do you actually have that person go and delete like their images and start from scratch, or do you kind of just start from then on posting content that kind of matches the realm? Does that question make sense?

Sue: Yeah, I tell them to download my strategy guide. Yeah, I mean you can either transition into learning and doing it better and say this was me then, this is me now. I think people seeing how far you’ve come sometimes is actually quite exciting, or you can do what a lot of people is delete. People delete posts all the time, they don’t get engagement, or they don’t think is working.

Steve: Is that something you recommend doing, like if a post has no engagement you just delete it?

Sue: I don’t know, it all depends, I think it’s only human to keep things and show people how you’ve improved. I don’t need the social proof every day. I would rather people — I would rather be able to say to someone, I understand where you are because I’ve been there, and you know I’ve been teaching for almost five years now.

So I’ve learned a lot and I’ve tried a lot of different strategies, and Instagram is constantly updating, improving, and making this little app a positive experience for everyone. So I’m all in on Instagram and know that it is absolutely the platform that is most visually appealing to everyone who’s on social media.

Steve: Okay, we’ll Sue thanks a lot. I mean we’ve been chatting for quite a while now and I want to be respectful of your time. Where do we want to send the listeners? You mentioned a strategy guide, you want to just give a quick update again where people can find you?

Sue: Yeah, so first I want everyone to take a little challenge that I do when I do interviews now is love for you guys to come on over to @suebzimmerman if you are interested in seeing my comings and goings on my personal account, and that’s just simply understanding how to create a personal account. But more importantly my business account @theinstagramexpert and @theSPZteam. And the challenge that I like to do on this podcast is to post, to have you guys post a photo listening to this interview, taking a great photo, maybe a #deskie and using the #suebmademedoit.

Steve: Okay, yeah that will be interesting.

Sue: So when you do Sue B made me do it, you will be joined with over a 1,000 people who have taken this challenge, and you’ll be able to meet some other awesome people who have listened to me speak or do a podcast interview, and it’s a good way to connect to some awesome people. So that and then they should @mention your account as well. I don’t know what account it would be.

Steve: It’s My Wife Quit.

Sue: Oh, My Wife Quit okay, so there you go, and so that way Steve will get a notification that you @mentioned him as well, and then yeah, everyone here you should be definitely be downloading my strategy guide which is Suebzimmerman.com/guide.

Steve: Okay, that’s easy to remember.

Sue: Yeah, you got to make it easy; if it’s not easy people don’t do it.

Steve: Hey Sue, thanks a lot for coming on the show, really appreciate your tips, and I’m sure the listeners will find it very valuable.

Sue: Yes, absolutely.

Steve: All right, take care.

Sue: Bye, bye.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. I’ve actually been using some of Sue’s strategies for my own Instagram account, and my IG fan base has been steadily increasing as a result. For more information about this episode, go to MyWifeQuitHerJob.com/episode 170.

And once again I want to thank Klaviyo for sponsoring this episode. Klaviyo is my email marketing platform of choice for ecommerce merchants, and you can easily put together automated flows like an abandoned cart sequence, a post purchase flow, a win back campaign, basically all these sequences that will make you money on auto pilot. So head on over to mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

I also want to thank SellerLabs.com as well. Their tool Ignite is what I use to manage my Amazon PPC campaigns. Instead of the old tedious way of generating reports and analyzing your ad campaigns in Excel, Ignite aggregates all that info for you in one place and allows you to quickly visualize your data to make decisions fast.

So not only does it save time, but it also makes managing your Amazon campaigns so much easier. So head on over to sellerlabs.com/steve and sign up for a free 30 day trial, once again that’s sellerlabs.com/steve.

And if you’re interested in starting your own ecommerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six day mini course. Just type in your email, and I’ll send you the course right away, thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

169: How To Get Your First 10000 Email Subscribers With Bryan Harris

169: How To Get Your First 10000 Email Subscribers With Bryan Harris

Today I’m excited to have Brian Harris on the show. I was introduced to Brian by our mutual friend Grant Baldwin and I actually saw a video of Bryan speak at one of Noah Kagan’s events and I was really impressed.

Anyway Bryan runs the site VideoFruit.com where he reverse engineers what the top marketers are doing online and shows you how to integrate those strategies into your business.

Specifically, Bryan is an expert at growing your email list and launching a product. So today we are going to cover how to quickly build an email list and how to use that list to maximize revenue.

What You’ll Learn

  • How Bryan got started with VideoFruit and why fruit is in the name
  • Why Bryan specializes in email marketing.
  • The best list building strategies today
  • How to get your first 10000 email subscribers in any niche
  • How to structure your autoresponders
  • How to escape the promotions tab.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Ignite.Sellerlabs.com – If you are selling on Amazon and running Amazon Sponsored Ads campaigns, then Ignite from Seller Labs is a must have tool. Click here and get a FREE 30 Day Trial.
Ignite Logo

ReferralCandy.com – If you’re already getting steady orders every month, adding a refer-a-friend program to your store can give you a new sales channel. And ReferralCandy is the best in the business. Click here and get a FREE $50 credit towards your account.
referral candy

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and delve deeply into what strategies are working and what strategies are not with their businesses.

Now today I’m thrilled to have Bryan Harris from Video Fruit on the show, and we’re going to talk about strategies on how to get your first 10,000 email subscribers for your online business. This is a great episode, and I know that you’ll learn a lot.

But before we begin I want to give a quick shout out to Klaviyo who is a sponsor of the show. Now I’m always excited to talk about Klaviyo because they are the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store, and I actually depend on them for over 20% of my revenues. Now you’re probably wondering why Klaviyo and not another provider. Well, Klaviyo is the only email platform out there that is specifically built for ecommerce stores, and here’s why it’s so powerful.

Klaviyo can track every single customer who has shopped in your store and exactly what they purchased which allows you to do many things. So let’s say I want to send an email to everyone who purchased a red handkerchief in the last week, easy. Let’s say I want to set up a special autoresponder sequence to my customers depending on what they bought, piece of cake, and there is full revenue tracking on every single email too.

Klaviyo is the most powerful email platform that I’ve ever used and you can actually try them for free at mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

I also want to give a shout out to my other sponsor Seller Labs, and specifically I want to talk about their brand new tool Ignite which helps sellers manage their Amazon sponsored ad campaigns. Right now I’m using this tool to manage my Amazon sponsored ads, and it makes things a heck of a lot more convenient.

So number one, I’ve always found it a major pain to generate my PPC reports on Amazon, cut and paste the data over to an excel spreadsheet and use pivot tables before I’m able do any analysis. Well Ignite pulls all that info for you automatically and allows you to easily see what keywords are working and what are not immediately, there is no need to manually create reports or play with excel.

Second of all unless you’re a data geek, Amazon campaign data can be hard to understand, and what’s cool is that Ignite makes keyword and bidding recommendations on the fly that can be applied with a couple of clicks.

So let’s say one of my hankie keywords is bleeding money, well Ignite will alert me of that fact, and I can reduce that bid immediately. So bottom line Ignite makes managing your Amazon’s sponsored ad campaigns so much easier, and the fact that they provide me with alerts means that I no longer have to monitor my campaigns like a hawk.

If there are keywords that are doing well, well Ignite tells me to add them to my exact match campaigns. If my keywords are losing money, well Ignite tells me to either remove the keyword or to reduce the bid. So head on over to Sellerlabs.com/steve where you’ll find awesome tutorials on how to run Amazon PPC ads and the opportunity to try Ignite for 30 days absolutely free. Once again that’s Sellerlabs.com/steve. Now on the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m excited to have Bryan Harris on the show. Now I was introduced to Bryan by our mutual friend Grant Baldman, and actually saw a video of Bryan speak at one of Noah Kagan’s events recently, and I was really impressed. Bryan runs the site videofruit.com where he reverse engineers what the top marketers are doing online, and shows you how to integrate these strategies into your business, and specifically Bryan is an expert at growing your email list and launching a product.

Now, how important is email? 90% of the sales of my blog and a good portion of my online store sales are through email. So I knew I wanted to have Bryan on the show to see how he does it. So today we are going to cover how to quickly build an email list, and how to use that list to launch a product. And with that, welcome to the show Bryan. How are you doing today, man?

Bryan: Hey, thanks for having me on Steve, I appreciate it.

Steve: So what the listeners don’t know is that Bryan and I we were chatting before I hit record button. He was telling me all these things and I feel bad because he is going to have to repeat some of these things. But one thing that, for anyone out there who is not familiar with Bryan’s story, hey Bryan, give us the quick background how you got started with Video Fruit, and what does video and fruit actually have to do with what you do.

Bryan: It is a riveting example of how names don’t matter, and the worst name possible to pick it out. No, it started April 2013. I had a job working on a conveyor engineering company and didn’t like it. Read a Tim Ferriss blog post. It seems like half the businesses I know started with a Tim Ferriss blog post. So I read a blog post and started little — started making videos on the side for people.

I would go to — this still actually works by the way if people just want to kind of get started real quick, this strategy works well. I went to like the Envato marketplace; I this it’s as I said. I think it is videohive.com, maybe is the name of the video market place. Any way you can buy these templates like after effects and whatever the different, the final card, and different templates of these explainer videos, and then just like insert your graphics and your text into them, hit export and make these really nice looking explainer videos.

So I figured that little work flow via making some for different people that I knew and ask them, I said, “Hey, I got this really cool video, you want me to make you one? They said, “Yup.” So I made one for Noah, for App Sumo, made one for Navel. I didn’t know them, I just cold pitched them.

Steve: You just made it for them for free and they accepted your offer?

Bryan: Yeah, I was like, “Hey I made this cool thing.” Actually the first one I made was for Neil Patel. I had been reading Quick Sprout and the Kissmetrics blog, and he was working there at the time, and one of the ways that Kissmetrics grew in the early days of their blog was through info-graphics. So I just went and turned one of their info, like their statistic graphical info graphics into a video, into like a video info-graphics. You go to Kissmetrics YouTube channel you can probably still see them there, and some really bad videos by me.

But I just cold pitched Neil. I was on his email list, so he sent a newsletter out the next day after I finished the video and he replied to that video and said, “Hey Neil, dude, I love your blog, your info-graphics are great. I’ll turn one of your info-graphics into a video; I notice you don’t do video a lot. I hope it helps.” And he responded back in like no time. He was like, “Man, this is awesome, can we hire you to do more of them?” And I was like, “Yeah, I’d totally will do more if you pay money.”

So we talked and via email, I still have actually never talked to him on Skype or anything to this day, but… and they wound up hiring me and giving me a $3,000 a month contract to turn their blog posts into videos, like in person type of videos. So you can go and see some of those really bad haircuts, really bad camera. If you ever worry about like equipment when shooting videos, just go and look at the videos I made for them three or four years ago now, and it will give you an example of the low barrier to entry on video.

Steve: Okay, we’ll have to link one of those up in the show for sure.

Bryan: I don’t even have the ability to go look at them, I’ll go back. They are actually shot on a C9-20 webcam which is like the $90 webcam that like every video you see online, the first person video was shot in, ended like with those tears of lighting set up in the background. Like they had that video back in the day where they scheduled to do lighting, it’s pretty rough.

Anyway, so I did that, that allowed me to quit my job. I had that $3,000 a month contract and a few other little one off things, and that started Video Fruit. So I had this little strategy of making these videos. Other people were asking me how I made them, so I created a little course on how to make them. And then after I had reached out to the handful of people that I knew online via like Facebook groups I was in and what not, and sold ten or 20 copies of this course, I had the big question in my head of all right, now how do I get random people from the internet to buy stuff from me?

And I think that’s a question, like everyone starting out has. In real life, getting people to buy from you like isn’t a complicated process, it’s still hard, but like at the end of the day if it was like selling lawn mowing services. You can walk up to people house and knock on the door, and ask them if they want to buy your lawn mowing service, right? If you are at a coffee house like you can hire a dude to hold a san on the corner, go to all the cool hipster places, and pass out fliers and some of those people will come to your place and drink coffee.

But an online business, that does not exist. There is no place to go knock on the door, or place to hang out fliers. So a [inaudible 00:08:46] or just a practical thing I was having to solve. It’s all right, I had this course, I had these services, how do I get people to find me? So that’s where the name Video Fruit came from because in the early, early days I had a course. This course still exists somewhere, I don’t even know how to get to it now, but there is this course out there somewhere that teaches you to do this video stuff, and I was selling these services.

So I started a blog as an experiment to try to figure out, all right, how do I get random people from the internet to buy stuff from me? And I would just go and watch podcasts and read blog posts, and listen to all these different strategies that people like Ramit and Gary V. and Seth Godin and Pat Fynn were teaching, and I would just try to mimic them, copy them, model them, improve them, and see if they worked for me.

So if you like go way back in the archives on the blog, like one of the first couple of blog post you will see is one on Gary Vaynerchuk, one on Pat Flynn, one under me. I’m just breaking down, me taking their strategies, trying to reverse engineer them, try them for myself to see what works. And after about a year of that the thing that I found that worked, and actually this is interesting. So like dog training and like parenting advice are very similar, well, they are similar.

Steve: You have Kids, right?

Bryan: Yeah, we have a year and a half old and one on the way. Pre-one year old, they are very similar except you can’t use a shirt collar like kennel that will get you in trouble. But a lot of the actual training stuff is very, very similar. Anyways enough, what I was getting to is in the world — like can we just pay attention to dog trainers. They all bash each other, and they all disagree with each other, dog training, and parenting advice. I can go read Happiest Baby on the Block and read — what is that other one, that’s really popular?

Steve: There is a bunch; I’ve read most of them actually back in the day, yeah.

Bryan: [Inaudible 00:10:28] is the one I was thinking of. So you read that, go look at the Facebook group for baby wise and go look at the Facebook group for Happiest Baby on The Block, and the people just like hate each other. So all that marketing wasn’t quite as venomous, but people disagree just as much. Like you had one person over here talking about, well you have to have a podcast, and somebody over here talking about, if you have a podcast you are stupid because you can’t answer your podcast, just do written content. Other guys are like; video is the greatest thing ever.

But the one thing that was interesting after a year of like studying and reverse engineering and experimenting, the one thing that everyone agreed on was that an email list is the most effective way to sell stuff to people on the internet. So I started trying that, I was like, “All right, let me try starting to build and email list, because I got this course, and I got these services.” So theoretically if I have let’s say 1,000 people on an email list, I could email the list and say, “Hey, come buy my course,” or “Hey, come buy my services,” and a few people would.

So I spent, I don’t remember timelines, I’m losing track of the exact days on this, but once I found out that, that was about, I think it was January 2014, 2015? Yeah, 2014.

Steve: That’s 3 years ago, okay

Bryan: Yeah, about three years ago. Our focus was like, all right, my goal for this year is to grow my email list. I think I had like a 150 people on my list that I — I don’t even know how they joined, it’s some random stuff I did. I wasn’t emailing regularly or anything. And then over the course of that year my goal was to get to 10,000. 10,000 seemed like an inflection point at which there would be some critical mass, and I would be able to have a full time income from this.

So that year I stopped focusing on all the other strategies and just focused on, “All right, how are people growing email lists?” And I tried tons and tons of different strategies. In between January and October I grew the list from a 100 or so people to 10,000 subscribers.

Steve: Nice, okay.

Bryan: And at the point – and Steve you have to stop me any time, I’m rumbling here so-

Steve: No, no, we are going to dig deep into some of these strategies as soon as there is a good stopping point here. Yeah, go ahead.

Bryan: So you get to October, the list is right at 10,000 subscribers and I decided, all right, I’m going to launch some product. And I don’t know, maybe I just kind of forgot about the video course. The original intent was to sell the video course and sell the services, and by this time like a year had gone by, and I was like all right now, like what are people on my list interested in? Are they interested in video? Are they interested in something else?

So I went through this validation method, just looking back at all the content I had published over the previous like it’s ten months, because this was October, from January to October. And I analyzed that content, went through a little validation process with that list, and we can talk in details on. I think it’s a pretty good process that is a conglomeration of what a lot of different people teach, and came up with this product idea that I would just make a list of all the contractors that I used.

So like people that would design stuff, or set up little membership plugins or write stuff for me or design, a lot of them. There was like a list of 20 or 30 contractors. There is going to be a list of contractors, a grouping of all my swipe files. Because over the course of that year I had like taken screen shots of a bunch of landing pages, pop ups, Facebook ads, explainer videos, they were like six or seven different categories of swipe files I had.

And the third thing was the work flows that I used to outsource those things to be built. So like, “All right Bryan, you want this sales page to be created, how do you actually communicate to the coder to get him to like take the design and make? Or how do you communicate to designer to make a design that looks like something you’d like?” So there was those three things, it was called the vault; there was contractors, workflows and swipe files.

Steve: Was this your lead magnet or was that…?

Bryan: No, it’s the product I was going-

Steve: Oh, the product, okay, got it, okay.

Bryan: So, I had this list of 10,000. I had this product, and I don’t remember why but for some reason I lost the six of the 4,000 people. I don’t know if I had a time parameter on that, like you had to be subscribed for the next time something, but the actual emails went out. Opening cart on a Monday, close cart on a Friday, I think there were five, or six emails total and made $25,000 in that first week.

Steve: Okay, so let’s break that down. So when you didn’t know what you were doing, like how did you get those first ten case subscribers? Like what were you doing?

Bryan: Yes, there was a list. So think of it in four different buckets, going from zero to 100, 100 to 1,000, and 1,000 to 10,000. Maybe fourth bucket will be over 10,000, but just ignore that for now if you are underneath. So anytime you hear a strategy, so sequencing is important. You are going to hear a lot of strategies we are going to talk about now. You are going to read podcasts or listen to podcasts, read blog posts, all these different methods, you will hear lots of different things, there is a lot of different ways you can grow an email list.

So what you have to do, what I did was bucketed them in one of those three buckets. For example, Facebook ads, that’s something you hear people talking about all the time. I just got an email a while ago from someone, he was like, “Hey, the only way I grew my email list is through Facebook ads.” If you are just starting out and you have under a 100 subscribers, and the first thing you try to do is grow your email list through Facebook ads, you are completely screwed.

That works really well, but it’s also an advanced strategy, because if you’ve never bought ads before, just writing ads is hard, targeting ads are hard. Cutting lead magnets to people who opt-in for is hard. Cutting email sequences that lead from a lead magnet to buying is hard. So many might be on a podcast and tell you about their cool funnel they had. If the first thing you try to do is go build that, you are done, like the chances of you being successful are really, really, really low. So that’s a great strategy but it doesn’t go on the zero to 100 bucket. It goes in the 1,000 buckets and sometimes the 10,000 in that bucket.

So one great strategy you can start with if you are in the zero to 100 bucket is make a list. Think about the first 100 people as like your ambassadors, like your launch team. These aren’t people you are worried about selling to, these are the people that like you and know you already, and people that can introduce you to the people that are going to buy from you in the future. So a lot of people want to start out by trying to find random people in the internet to opt-in to their list.

You need to able to do that eventually, but the best place to start is with people you already know, and then getting them to introduce you in a very natural, non-weird, car sellsy kind of way to other people that are interested in your exact topic. So-

Steve: So for you personally, like who is this group?

Bryan: Yes, so it’s open up your phone, look at people you’ve texted, look at people you’ve had phone calls with, look in Gmail, look at sent emails, look at Facebook groups you are part of, look at people you’ve twittered, people… just make a list of all the people you are in contact with in regular life. And everybody has 50 to 100 people.

Most people have over 200 people they are in regular contact with or they have talked to in the last six months to a year, and just send them a message that sounds something like this. “Hey, this is — insert your first name. Hey, this is Bryan, I’m starting a new project where I’m going to do X. So where I’m going to teach people how to start an ecommerce store like Man or I sell handkerchiefs, where I’m going to try to figure out how to get random people from the internet to buy stuff from me. Or I’m going to try to figure out how to paddle board.”

A cool approach you can take in this topic just as in a side is using a learn out loud approach. So if you are not sure about your topic, just choose something you are interested in, you can always change later. So if you are interested in learning magic tricks, “Hey, this is Bryan, I’m going to start a little weekly challenge, or I’m going to start to learn how to do magic tricks, I thought this might be something you’d be interested in, do you want in?”

That’s your text, that’s your email, that your phone call, that your whatever communication method you have. 90% of the people will say yes. Once they say yes…

Steve: Because they know you, right?

Bryan: What’s that?

Steve: Because they know you.

Bryan: They know you, yeah and this is interesting. Like think about it from your perspective Steve. Like some dude you went to high school with 20 years ago, 10 years ago, however long it’s been since you were in high school. If John that you were in in 11th grade in English with that you kind of see on Facebook every now and then, messaged you and said “Hey Steve, dude, long time no see, hey, really random thing, but I’m starting this challenge where I’m going to try to learn a new magic trick, like I thought it would be fun and I think this might be something you just like to follow, do you want in?”
Like yeah, that’s really cool, like I don’t really care about magic that much, but that sounds entertaining. At the least it sounds entertaining and maybe through watching your videos I’ll be interested in doing that someday. And maybe if you create a course or a product of some sort six months to a year from now after I watch ten of your videos, maybe I’ll even buy it, but I’ll definitely introduce my other friends who might be interested in the topic too.

Steve: Okay.

Bryan: So just start — it’s a very natural thing, it doesn’t have to be weird, it doesn’t have to be funky at all. Almost anyone can get 100 subscribers in 24 hours just by doing that.

Steve: I want to take a moment to thank ReferralCandy for being a sponsor of the show. Now in this day and age, word of mouth is a huge driver of business for most ecommerce stores, and the best way to amplify word of mouth marketing is through a referral program, and this is where ReferralCandy shines. With just a couple of clicks of the mouse, you can add a referral program to your ecommerce store and reward your customers for telling their friends about your shop. And this tactic works wonders, and in fact it is not uncommon to get a ridiculous return on investment.

So for example, Greats Footwear who is a ReferralCandy customer is currently seeing a 20X ROI, and referral word of mouth marketing is also useful for building up your social media presence as well, because everyone is talking about your company with their friends on Facebook and Twitter.

And the best part is that ReferralCandy is a set it and forget it service, requires no technical set up and they are giving My wife Quit Her Job listeners 50 bucks to try them out if you go to promo.referralcandy.com/Steve. Once again it’s promo.referralcandy.com/Steve to get a $50 credit to try out the service risk free. Now back to the show.

So for your video outreach, when you were reaching out to Noah, Navel and those guys, was that after you had already had 100?

Bryan: No, I had no email list, and so let’s divide this into two categories. You have grown an email list and that’s selling a freelance service.

Steve: Okay, got it.

Bryan: So to say, like it depends on — well, so for just talking about building an email list, start with the people you already know strategy works well. If you are trying to start with selling a freelance service, there is a whole different strategy which we are more than happy to talk about.

Steve: No, that’s okay. Let’s go down the email route first.

Bryan: Sure.

Steve: Sorry, I thought you used them to help you grow your list actually.

Bryan: No, no.

Steve: Okay.

Bryan: And we can give, if you want we can — I have a couple of blog posts I have written about the freelance route if people are like…

Steve: I’ll link those up if you want to send them to me.

Bryan: Yeah, remind me, I’ll give you the links so people can go explore that route too because that honestly, if you are looking for the quickest way to make money online after being in this for three and a half, four years now, that’s the quickest way that exists is doing the freelance service route like I went with Noah, and Navel and Neil Patel.

So we’ll link those up, let’s go back to email list, because email list is the most sustainable way to grow and to keep growing a business that doesn’t require you knocking on doors constantly. It’s a perfect blend of like, passive income and like really good income. Freelance is a good route, like this is what I did, I used freelance to get me out of my day job so that then I could focus on building a sustainable business, because unless you are one of the few people that want to start some kind of agency that you have 50 people employed and doing this agency approach, the freelance stuff you usually run on the runway on that fairly quickly. So just to give you context for both of the approaches.

Steve: Okay.

Bryan: All right, get us on track; I forget where we were there.

Steve: So you did this zero to 100 and…

Bryan: Yes zero to 100, let’s go with one more strategy there, so strategy one, invite everyone you know.

Steve: Right.

Bryan: We gave you a couple of scripts there. Second strategy that you can use is, go to any community that you are a part of. So a couple of examples of communities you can be a part of, you can be a part of — like let’s use just like online marketing because that’s what’s I’m in mainly.

Steve: Okay.

Bryan: Actually let’s not use that, issues like exercise, like if you are trying to grow an exercise, nutrition, fitness type of email list. Like you are probably in some online communities, and if you aren’t there is a lot of them that exists around this topic. Like type in, like I’m in Nashville, so I’ll type in like natural fitness group, and there is going to be 30 different Facebook groups that pop up for that.

Go join a couple of those and then spend the next week, this doesn’t have to take any more than seven days. Spend the next week and each day set aside five minutes to go engage in that group. So three things for engaging, like a couple of posts, comment on a couple of posts and make a post or two yourself, and the post you make yourself, don’t make them you asking for anything, like trying to get somebody to do something.

Phrase them as questions. Like, hey guys I found this good blog post from Jackson Bloore, it’s talking about intermittent fasting, have any of you experimented with interment of fasting before? It’s is something I’m interested in trying myself.

Like a non-promotional approach, but a questioning, asking and using the group as a resource for your approach. After a week of engaging you can go in for an ask. So the ask would look something — like the first week would be you commenting, you liking, you asking for feedback, not in a promotion type of way at all. Do that for seven days and at the end of seven days then go in for an ask, and this would be a soft ask.
.
You could say something like, “Hey guys, so I’m going to start a 30 day challenge. Currently I weigh 250 pounds and my goal is to lose 40 pounds over the next 90 days, and I have learned from you guys some different approaches, some different things I can experiment with. I would love your support and I would love your guidance as I go through this. If you’d like to follow me through this journey and give me support and give me guidance and use it to help anybody you know, just leave your email address in the comments section.” If you do that in five or ten different Facebook groups, you will add 50 to 100 subscribers to your list. It works.

Steve: Okay, yeah.

Bryan: Those are two approaches you can take if you have no connections in the industry; you have no existing assets at all. You are starting from scratch, the zero to 100 bucket. You do those two things, you have 100 subscribers within seven days is kind of the parameter we put on. Most people can have that in 24 hours just by inviting people they know already.

Steve: Okay, and then the next bucket is from 100 to 1,000 you said?

Bryan: Yeah, next bucket is 100 to 1,000.

Steve: Okay.

Bryan: So the first thing you want to do here is get some of your assets set up. So most people want to start setting up websites and setting up email services and trying to decide between ConvertKit and Drip and ActivateCampaign and all that stuff before they start their list, don’t do that.

The zero to 100 bucket requires a pen and a piece of paper and a phone and nothing else. No website, no name, no nothing. Once you get to 100, then take all those email addresses you’ve written down on a piece of paper, put it into your spreadsheet or however you have collected those. Don’t send people — caveat, in that zero to 100 bucket, don’t sent people to a landing page.

Just get their email address down on a piece of paper, remove all barriers to entry for people. So when you are texting people don’t text them your URL or sign up, but ask them what’s the best email address for you? Okay, so when you get to 100 to 1,000 bucket, what you have at that point is a list of 100 email addresses written down on a piece of paper. At that time you need to go set up some of the basic stuff. Like go set up a ConvertKit account. If the idea of spending $29 a month is like you are not going to be able to buy groceries this month, go set up a MailChimp account.

But you are going to have to give up MailChimp eventually because it sucks when you go to scale more or less. But if you have to, go use MailChimp to begin with, but know within 90 to 120 days you are probably going to have to switch. So if you can bear to spend $29, go set up a ConvertKit account, that’s a great place to start.

So go set up your email account, go set up your blog if you don’t have one already, go to bluehost.com, use the Stock WordPress theme, don’t hire a designer, don’t ever tell me you are waiting to launch your blog because you are waiting for the design to be set up. Just use a stock theme, set up your ConvertKit account, make sure in the side bar you have a little integration to ConvertKit. ConvertKit will get you everything you need to do that, and then you are ready to go.

Once you get your basic stuff set up you are ready to go. The next thing I would encourage you to do is to start blocking off 15 minutes a day in order to write.

Steve: Okay, so you don’t need content before you start gathering the addresses. The content comes after your first 100?

Bryan: Yeah, because after the first 100, think of those first 100 as your, like your ambassadors, your launch team you are going to use.

Steve: Okay.

Bryan: We’ve gone through the first seven days and we did 100 people, now we are going to spend about a week getting our assets set up. We are going to get the email service set up, we are going to get the blog set up, and then we are going to write for 15 minutes a day, 250 words. 250 words a day and press publish on that at the end of the day Friday. And what we are going to write on, we are going to ask that list of people, we are going to brainstorm out a list of 15 to 20 questions. Let’s take the topic of like magic tricks.

Steve: Okay.

Bryan: So first brainstorm out a list of questions you have on the topic, like I picked this topic because I was randomly curious. Somebody asked me to speak the other day and I don’t really doing speaking that much, well, yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Bryan: So you know what I’m going to do, I’m going to do one talk a year and at that talk should be something crazy, like I’m going to do — I can’t share that, okay, so how did I do what I’m going to do? What I’m going to do in 2018, I’m going to speak at Jeff Goins conference, that’s the only talk I’m going to do between now and then, and I’m going to do this magic trick that’s going to like blow people’s mind, at least that’s my theory right now.

So I was researching like large scale long con magic tricks. Like something that would take me 18 months to set up, right? And I started looking around, and I found like David Copperfield back in like the early 1980s made the Statue of Liberty disappear. That’s like in the Guinness Book of World Records, the biggest object ever be — disappear in a magic trick before. So like I was just researching on Reddit, researching on YouTube and different places, like what a big – like you walk through the Great Wall of China. That was very cool.

Then I was thinking, all right, how did he do it? And people have made YouTube videos of how he made these things happen. So just by giving you that example there, I’ve already listed out like three or four questions ahead, like what are some really good long con magic tricks. Like stuff that took people a decade to make happen, because they like had to set it up so far in advance. What are some of the biggest magic tricks that have ever happened? How did David Copperfield make the Statue of Liberty disappear?

If you are going to start an email list on magic tricks, those are three great blog posts to start with. Like what is a list of the 25 best magic tricks ever? Show me; break them down of what happened with them. So-

Steve: So this 15 minutes that you are talking about per day, is it to find these questions or is it to write these pillar posts that you are talking about?

Bryan: So let me make a loop on that.

Steve: Okay.

Bryan: So first step is list out all your questions. Brainstorm them from your head, and the first email you can send to that list of 100 people once you have imported them in your ConvertKit account or whatever you are using is to ask them, “Hey, thanks you so much for being a part of launch team. I appreciate you, what question do you have? Or what like curiosities do you have around magic, around doing magic tricks? Is there anything that pops up?”

So out of sending that email, first is asking me your introduction to your email, that’s going to be your first email you have to send. You are not having to write a blog post or anything, you are just asking them a question. You are going to get another five to ten questions out of that. You are going to brainstorm five to ten out of your head. You are going to ask your list, you are going to get five or ten more, and then each week I just want you to pick one of those questions and spend 15 minutes a day answering that question.

By the end of day on Friday I want you to publish a blog post, send that blog post out to your email list with your answer to that question. So let’s walk that through, what that looks like through the week. So let’s say you have your list of 20 questions. The question you pick for week number one of your blog is, how did David Copperfield make the Statue of Liberty disappear?

Okay, so the first day you are going to spend at least 15 minutes. You are going to do a little bit of research to see how he did it. You are going to find a couple of videos really quickly of how he did it. Day number two, you are going to start writing out how he did it. You are going to make some screenshots, you are going to make some diagrams, you are going to write it out, you are going to show how he set it up and spend the next Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday writing that blog post.

Maybe include some video embeds from YouTube; maybe do your own diagrams to show people how that happened. What’s really cool about this approach is if you are taking a learn out loud approach, you are actually learning about this stuff as you are going. So the long con magic trick would be a lot more likely to happen for me in 18 months if I were to start a little magic blog on the side, because I would force myself to learn it via teaching, and the best way to learn anything is to teach it.

So on Monday you pick the topic, you outline it, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday you write on it and Friday you put everything you’ve written on your blog. You go to your email service, you write a quick little summary and put a link to that blog post and send it out to your email list.

Steve: Okay.

Bryan: That’s how you start. So that’s the set up asset piece. You set up your website, you set up your email list, and you start writing for 15 minutes a day. What this does- and I recommend when you start, especially if you’ve not done this before, you start by publishing once a week. Several reasons for that; Number one: it forces you to learn quicker, it forces you to learn the business side; it forces you to learn the topic matter quicker.

Second reason is every blog post you publish is a form of product validation because 90 days from now you are going to be at 1,000 subscribers on your email list if you do the other stuff we are about to talk about.

And once you get to a 1,000 subscribers, you need to start working on your first product. But to create your first product you do not want to do what most people do and just pick a random idea and try to figure out what you think people want and build that. What you are going to do is look back at your analytics over those past 90 days, and look at the blog post and emails you have sent out and analyze them and see which topics, which categories people have been the most interested in.

So, for example, if over those 90 days you have written three blog posts breaking down magic tricks that people have done. You used three more blog posts of you creating magic tricks yourself, three other blog post where you — I don’t know, I don’t even know what magic tricks topics would be used, [inaudible 00:32:07] or something different like contraptions people have made, right?

So you have three or four different categories you’ve written in, tools, breakdowns, and magic tricks inventions, right? So at the end of your 90 days, you are going to look back and just make a little spreadsheet, which one of those categories did people comment on the most, share the most, read the most, click on the most? And-

Steve: Can we back up a little bit Bryan. So as you are writing these posts, do you have to have your blog set up to capture all these email addresses?

Bryan: Yes, so there is a few basic things and we can talk about this for two hours. But yeah, part of the asset setting apart is setting up some basic stuff on your website to collect emails as well.

Steve: Okay, got it.

Bryan: A really quick rundown of that of that is use SumoMe, set up a welcome mat, set up a pop up and make sure the theme you use on the side bar you have something to collect an email on. There is more advanced stuff you can do later, but right now just focus on those things.

That will take you an hour max, you just use Sumo me, and I think SumoMe is free still, I think they have played on some prizes, I don’t know if it’s not, but there is lots of things that would do similar things. I think Lead Pages has a similar plugin as well but yeah, you do want that asset setting up phase, you do want to set up some basic email capture.

Steve: Okay, got it. The content itself is going to start generating more addresses as its being shared and that sort of thing, right?

Bryan: Yeah, that’s not the primary method, but yes it will generate email addresses, we can talk about some direct email generation techniques here in just a second. I just hope people have full kind of view of how that is going to go from setting up those assets; the email list is being run. There are some tactics you can use for that, and then how that’s going to result in you actually having a product to sell that’s based on that list.

Steve: Okay.

Bryan: So as you are evaluating that content you’ve written over the last 90 days, you are just going to break it down by category, see the category people have engaged with the most, and then you are going to go through a validation process on a product in that category. And we can link Steve, maybe we can link up a product validation post we wrote that will give people a lot more in-depth that we can go to on that.

Steve: Absolutely, sure.

Bryan: Just know when you are writing each week, in the beginning, your 100 people are going to be seeing it, you are also going to be doing some list building strategy that is completely separate from your content as well. So your list is going to be growing, so more people will see it each week, but as people see it they are validating and reassuring and showing you what product to create, because after the end of that 90 days you have lots and lots of interest in like magic trick breakdowns you do, well your product needs to be on that not the other topic that didn’t get any interest at all.

So there is a whole methodology where you can figure out that product but that’s kind of the basic framework for it. So let’s talk about growing the list in the 100 to 1,000 category. So the content is going to help a little bit, but in the beginning it’s not going to be a massive contributing factor. There is a couple of different strategies that you can use in this phase – I’m trying to pick out, let’s see. Let’s focus on two of them.

One of them, one of the kind of easiest and funnest is to do podcast interviews. So podcast interviews is actually a really good example of a strategy that works well in one bucket, and then you kind of phase out others as you go later.

So podcast interviews if you do correctly and this podcast isn’t a good example of that. So don’t pay attention to what I’m doing here. Go look at some of the older interviews that I have done. Go look at the Mixergy interview from two to three years ago; I’m trying to think of another one, oh Lead Pages podcast, ConversionCast episode. I don’t know, it’s in the first 50 episodes; go listen to that one, but if you do, podcast interviews are really easy to get.

If you have your website set up and if you’ve published a couple of posts, podcast interviews are looking for people to interview actively. If you have one ounce of credibility, and that credibility can be built by having a website set up and having a few posts on it, and you do some basic outreach stuff, you can land a podcast interview each week.

The key to making podcast interviews grow your email list though is two things. Number one; knowing exactly what topic you are going to be talking about on that interview before you start. Okay, that’s sort of the obvious, but you will be surprised how many podcast interviews don’t even prep you for that.

Steve: I did not prep Bryan by the way or anything prior this.

Bryan: Yes, just be a little prep, just spend 30 minutes prepping for that, right? So you know the topic, that’s something you can do. Don’t rely on the host to do that for you, just work it in the emails as you talk to the host. And number two, have a downloadable that you pitch multiple times on that podcast interview, but don’t be weird about the pitching of it.
So an example if I were to prep properly for this podcast and was trying to use it as a list building strategy I would say, “Hey you know, so I’ve put together a special bundle for everyone here, you get a videofruit.com/Steve, and there is a listing of some email outreach scripts you can use to align your first podcast interview. There is some email sequences you can use when you do your first product clause, and there is also a video walking you through how to pitch the freelance service thing we talked about.

So that page as of this recording doesn’t exist, but what you can do is after the interview, go set up. Like during the interview just invent whatever the download is you want to give away and pitch the URL.

Steve: So notice that Bryan did suggest certain URLs already in this interview that I’m going to link it up.

Bryan: Yes, I’m going to have to set up the different accounts for Steve, thanks. By the time you listen to this podcast interview we will have that set up…

Steve: well played Bryan, well played.

Bryan: Not of right now, and if Steve will follow make up with me like in a month, I will show how many email subscribers you get from that just so you can see. So let met you give you an example of how this works. I did one with the ConversionCast episode – I don’t know, that’s been a couple of years ago now, and we picked up like 350,000 email subscribers in that one podcast interview.

So find other interviewers, other people that are doing podcast on your topic or tangential topics. Pitch them on an interview, and then have a downloadable that you either have prepared ahead of time or that you prepare during the interview just like I just did, and give the URL out on the interview. Second where you can go super ninja on that is to use something like lead links or have a text opt-in code.

So you can say, “Hey, if you want to get all these downloadables – and I’m not going to set this up, so don’t do this, but text Video Fruit to 50500, and you can just have all those.” And what would happen is you text that, it would send you a message back just saying, “Hey, if you want to get the downloads, just enter your email address here,” and then we’ll email you those things and you build your email list from that.

So that’s one great way to build in that 100 to 1,000 category. Podcast interviews are really easy to book, they might feel intimidating if you’ve never done them before, but they are not. You can totally start with low hanging fruit. Start with people that don’t have superpower of their podcast and learn.

Another good resource for this, Kai Davis has done a lot of teaching on like doing podcast interviews. So you can go maybe prep a little bit and read some of Kai’s stuff, and then have a downloadable for them. So that’s technique number in the 100 to 1,000 bucket. Technique number two is one that has been around forever, and it’s called guest posting.

Google — if I remember, I’ll put this in that resource link I gave you, videofruit.com/Steve. There is a certain way…

Steve: Sorry, go on, sorry, I apologize.

Bryan: No, that’s fine. There is a certain way you can guest that works really, really well and it’s called Expanded Guest Post. So just Google for time’s sake, I don’t know how long we are going here Steve, just Google expanded guest post. I’ll include in this videofruit.com/Steve link as well, and it walks you through how to do guest posts so they build your email list. Because a lot of people will spend tons and tons of time writing a guest post.

I had a coaching client a year or so ago, they spent 25 hours writing a guest post for this really popular fitness site and he picked up like 20 subscribers from it. That’s not worth your time, you can literally just go knock on people’s doors and collect email addresses quicker than that. You can randomly message people on Facebook groups and communities you are in and get email addresses quicker than that.

So be sure that you build your guest post in a really good way. So let me tie these two tactics together we’ve talked about. We’ve talked about podcast interviews and guest posting. There is a lot of other things you can do, these are two of the easiest ones to can start with. So I used a podcast interview on the ConversionCast podcast for Lead Pages a couple of years ago to pick up 350 email subscribers.

After that podcast interview, I then pitched the Lead Pages content editor and said, “Hey, I just did this podcast interview with Tim, it went rather well, we got these many comments, and we got this unsolicited feedback from it. I would like to do a follow up guest post on your blog, and just go into more depth on this topic. Would that be something you would be interested in?” They said yes. I did that, I used the expanded guest post framework that you can go read about more and picked up on it.

It was like 1,500 or so subscribers, maybe it was a 1,000. It was right at 1,000 subscribers from that one guest post. So 350ish from the podcast episode, 1,000ish from the guest post, and then about six months or a year later I followed up again. I said, “Hey guys, I have this other idea for a blog post to kind of build upon this topic even more, would you all be interested in letting me write a guest post?” And they said yes, and we picked up a little over a 1,000 subscribers again from that.

All total from just those three instances, our podcast interview and two guest posts, we picked up over 3,000 email subscribers, just from doing those two things.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to tell you about a free resource that I offer on my website that you may not be aware of. If you are interested in starting your own online store, I put together a comprehensive six day mini course on how to get started in ecommerce that you should all check out.

It contains both video and text based tutorials that go over the entire process of finding products to sell all the way to getting your first sales online. Now this course is free and can be obtained at MyWifeQuitHerJob.com/free. Just sign up right there on the front page via email and I’ll send you the course right away. Once again that’s MyWifeQuitHerJob.com/free. Now back to the show.

I’m going to estimate that you are going to get maybe five from this one, so I’d keep your expectations low.

Bryan: Yeah, but for some of these that’s what’s the good strategy in the 100 to 1,000 bucket, because at where I’m at now we are over 100,000 email subscribers. Like picking out five subscribers just isn’t worth the time, but there is other things, there is other assets we have that we can use that same time and have exponential more growth.

So I don’t like to focus on podcasts and like Steve had to follow up on me 100 times getting me to do this podcast interview, and I’m glad I did, but it’s not something we do from like a direct growth perspective right? But if you are not in that 1,000 bucket, you are scrapping and you are getting every subscriber you can.

So a podcast episode that you have to spend an hour for and prep for 30 minutes for and you pick up 30 subscribers isn’t totally worth your time. Like do ten of those and you have 300 subscribers. Just do them over and over and over again and try to leverage those podcast interviews into guest posting opportunities where you use that expanded guest post framework. So those are two things, you can just focus on those two things and get to 1,000 subscribers in 90 days if you just execute those two.

There are some other stuff that we don’t have enough time to go through every single strategy that exists, but-

Steve: Let’s skip ahead to like, if you have — to where you are now. Let’s say you have like over a 100,000 subscribers, what are some of your larger scale tactics form that point on?

Bryan: So one thing that we use to grow, one of the main things we use to grow from 10,000 to 100,000, it took us about a year and half to do that was partnerships, and partnerships we’ve tried three or four different kinds of packaging of those. One – so this is just an observation thing. I still just look at what other people do and try to model that and improve upon it. That is the main thing I do. So I’m like, all right, what did Noah do to grow AppSumo to 750,000 subscribers in like a year or two? Because that’s been crazy growth.

Or what is James Clear doing to have, I don’t know, three or 400,000 email subscribers now. So one thing AppSumo does a great job with is partnership, and you have to really look at strategies behind that strategy to see this sometime, but they’ll do a partnership with – I’m trying to think of an example off the top of my head.

Steve: Teachable?

Bryan: I don’t remember how they structure that one.

Steve: Okay.

Bryan: But let me use one outside of the context. I don’t want to say that it’s something they didn’t, but one example of doing that that we’ve done is — actually this works really well. this actually gets a little — this could be in the 100 to 1,000, definitely 1,000 to 10,000 bucket. And we still do this today because it doesn’t take much time, and it still grows the list by a couple of 100 every month, and without us really doing a whole lot.

So we’ll team up with other people to have products, tangential products to ours. So for example Jeff Goins, Jeff Goins sells a course and his main topic is like writing and building a platform for authors. So every launch he’s done, the last three or four launches, we’ve donated an entry level product of ours to him that he can use as a bonus in his launch.

So we have a course — my entry level course on list building, and anybody that’s bought his course in the last three launches has got that product for free. What that does though on our side, for them to get that product, they have to go, enter their email address, or actually no, Jeff just sends us a CSV file of all of his buyers, and we onboard all of his buyers into our course. So we will pick you know 400 or 500 buyers in a launch, and we’ll pick up 400 or 500 email subscribers.

These aren’t just email subscribers; these are people that have paid money to someone to directly vouch for us. These are like, these people buy at three times the rate, or there about of typical email subscribers. These are great, they are free, all we did was donate a product. So it’s worth, once you get over a 1,000, it’s worth creating a product just to do the strategy with, and just do one of those a month. You get 500 email subscribers a month, that’s 6,000 subscribers over the course of the year; just from giving an entry level product away, like it works really well.

Another example is doing like a partnership launch, like we would do these, let’s see, this is the summer of 15, we grew it from 12,000 subscribers to 40,000 subscribers between our launches in the spring and in the fall. And the only thing I did was I reached out to people and said, “Hey, I would like to do a webinar with you. But let’s not call it a webinar, let’s call it a workshop, and let’s not pitch anything, let’s make it complete value add. And I’ll give you the recording of the workshop later on where you can use a lead magnet to opt in on your site. You could use it as a bonus in your course, I’ll even write a guest post where we take that webinar and turn it into a written content. You can SEO for and use for email nurturing and stuff in the future.”

So I just reached out to a bunch of people and said, “Hey, here is my idea, I have never done this before, but I think it could be cool.” And I think there is probably somebody that said no, but I think everyone said yes to it. And what happens in that arrangement is, let’s say me and you did this Steve. We basically do everything for you, so all you have to do is say yes. We have one little quick call to make sure we are align on the topic, and then do analysis of your list and what not. And then a week later we give you a Google doc, it’s called the kick off doc and it has every email you send to your list, all the links, the love [ph] age. Exactly, everything is going to work.

So it’s completely painless from your side, and then you just send a couple of emails to your list and say, send your My Wife Quit Her Job list and say, “Hey, we are going to host this workshop with Bryan on this building, we have this podcast episode on this topic. We are going to have a free workshop on this topic as well. We are going to go into more depth, Bryan is going to answer your question live. In the podcast episode we did go into depth on what if you tried to reach out to everyone in your strategy? What if you tried the form strategy and you still don’t get to 100? What do you do then?”

We didn’t go into depth on other strategies, like what to do if the podcast and guest posting strategies didn’t work. We didn’t even touch what to do in the 1,000 and 10,000 mark. We didn’t touch how to have $100,000 launch. We didn’t do any of that, so in this workshop we are going to talk about all of that. So if you like the podcast episode, come register for the workshop. Like that’s a really good pitch actually, you could…

Steve: It is, I was like Bryan, are you pitching me right now because this is…

Bryan: Yeah right, so just sick, it’s like use a podcast interview to pitch someone to do a workshop. No, I’m kidding. So if Steve emailed that out to his list like a 1,000 of you would opt-in for that. And all Steve — all I did was do all the work for Steve, pitch Steve on doing it, and Steve emailed his list directly to a landing page that I am, because I’m doing all the work. So we send the follow up emails to make sure they get live. We host the webinar with some follow up emails after to make sure you get the replay, and we grow our list by 500 to 1,500 people.

So I did that 30 times in that six month time frame between our spring launch and fall launch and grew from list 12,000 so to 40,000 between launches. And you don’t even have to have a product to sell. You just have straight value add, teach live on the website — live on the webinar. The cool thing about that strategy is, unlike guest posting where you have to come up with new unique content every time, on a workshop you just do the same workshop. You don’t have to create new content. It’s just like a speech; you just give it over and over and over again.

Now if you are good you try to improve it, and make it better and what not, but that’s one strategy that’s worked well. Another thing you can bolt on the end of that is do a pitch at the end where you sell something and split the commissions with your partner.

Steve: Right, yeah that’s something that I have done in the past and that works really well too.

Bryan: Right, let’s tile these things together. Let me give you another example, so you can just see how this works, and you can go Google search all this stuff as well. So I did a podcast interview of Pat Flynn, I don’t know, a year and a half ago probably. We did the interview, I think it come out December of 15 maybe, and I may be getting my dates wrong, just Google Bryan Harris, Pat Flynn, whatever and it will pop up.

So Pat reached out to me and asked me to do a podcast interview. You could also pitch Pat; you don’t have to wait for him to reach out. You can actually pitch people. I wouldn’t start with Pat if you are just starting off. Start with people one or two ranks above you, not ten ranks above you.

But just for context of how this works, Pat asked me to do an interview. So I did a podcast interview, after the podcast interview, I did everything I could to make that the comment section of that podcast interview be the most commented on podcast interview ever. I think it got to number three. There was like 750 comments.

So I emailed my list, I jumped in and replied to a bunch of comments. I think he’s redesigned the site now, and I think all those comments, I don’t know if they show up anymore, but I was really bumped when he redesigned those, but just from a pure vanity metric stand point I was just like one of the record, I didn’t quite get it but anyway. Then I emailed Pat like a month or two later and I was like, “Hey Pat, people loved our podcast episode.” And by the way that podcast episode is on product validation, so if you want more in depth stuff on that, I’ll link that up in that videofruit.com/Steve thing as well, so you can go get that, you can listen…

Steve: One other tactic is to repeatedly say the URL with the podcast interview also.

Bryan: And this is not even my intent at all, just so you can go get it, and we’ll do a cool course for our email and ask 70 subscribers and people can see how it works. Anyway so we did the podcast interview. A few months later I emailed him and said, “Hey Pat, the podcast interview went really well. We got 700 plus comments, here is a few snapshot of people that have had good success with the stuff we talked. What if we did a no pitch webinar? So we are not selling anything, you are not buying any relationships with your list or drawing of or pulling out of the relationship bank at all. Let’s just do a workshop where we teach this building stuff in more in-depth.”

So he said yes. I sent him the kick of doc with all the emails written, the landing pages set up. Everything done for him, all he had to do was email the list twice. And we picked up, I think from that workshop we picked up around 3,500 email subscribers from it.

Steve: Nice.

Bryan: And after that I was like, “Hey Pat, what if- and like a month later I had a course launch going on, this was last spring. So hey Pat, so you have 3,500 hundred people that registered for this workshop, what if I just count all of those people as leads for you being an affiliate for this 10K sub launch. So they didn’t opt-in to buy anything, but I’m just going to say any of these 3,500 people that buy 10K subs; I’ll give you half the money for them. All I want you to do is just promote it a couple of more times as well, so email at a time or two, social media or something.

So he did and I don’t remember his numbers now, they are probably are public on his income report blog, but I think he generated around 50 to $60,000 of affiliate income that started with a podcast interview, that then turned into a workshop, that then turned him into him being an affiliate for 10K subs, right so-

Steve: Crazy man, yeah.

Bryan: You can start with just a little podcast interview and leverage that into all different types of other stuffs. So I don’t remember what the question was now, I’ve talked so long, but there are some examples of some I guess more advanced things you can do. Partnerships work well. SEO or something, follow Bryan Dean backlinko.com, he is a genius at that. He is the best minimalist blogger I think that exist.

Steve: He’s got 37 posts I think.

Bryan: Yeah, I think it’s – yeah it’s like 35, because he deletes older posts, and he – I don’t know if he shared his numbers publicly, so I don’t want to share his numbers, but they are really, really, really good. He has almost no employees, no contractors. He writes one blog post maybe every three months and just destroys it with SEO. And so on SEO; just go do what Bryan says.

Steve: He was a guest on my podcast, if you guys want to Google My Wife Quit Her Job Bryan Dean, you’ll listen to that episode.

Bryan: Cool, yeah so SEO is another one. PPC for Legion, it works really, really well. That is more advanced. Don’t start that now even if it might be attractive, that’s something that’s working really well for us. We are adding two to 300 subscribers a day to our list from that plus two to three X in our money that we spend on those people within 30 days, so that’s a great [inaudible 00:52:28] opportunity.

Those are the three main things we are focused on, and there is other stuff. Like I’m experimenting with some funky Instagram stuff right now that’s — I haven’t seen people talking about this strategy, but I might talk about it publicly if we try and get any kind of result out of it. But I’m trying — I’m just kind of experimenting with some random stuff, but for the most part our growth strategy is this. What’s working already, do that until you’ve run it all the way through until it stops working, like maximize what’s working.

So the three things that work for us are SEO, partnerships and PPC. So 80% of our efforts are focused on those on grow, the other 20% we just do random crazy stuff just to have fun and sometimes we’ll just pick up stuff that works. So maybe this Instagram stuff works for us, and actually getting leads on Instagram is as easy as getting people to buy. So that’s what we are kind of experimenting all the way to the funnel with that to see if we can make that work. It probably won’t honestly, but hopefully we’ll add a fourth main channel to our growth strategy by the end of the year.

Steve: Just curious Bryan, how much are you paying per lead when you are running your ads?

Bryan: Okay, so let me context this, because this is something that people talk about a lot and is completely misleading and doesn’t matter at all. So what matters in your business, assuming you have cash at all, assuming you have like 100 bucks or 1,000 bucks or 100,000, like whatever your cash is, what you spend doesn’t matter, what matters is how much you make off that money. So like I paid a coach six months ago $10,000 for the day, that’s a lot of money to pay.

Like it took me three weeks to decide to spend the money and I still was hesitant, and was nervous the entire time. But it isn’t about the 10,000, it’s about what that 10,000 makes me, and this is a really super basic concept that I didn’t get until recently, this is why I’m talking about it.

Maybe all of you understand this and this is stupid, if so just fast forward, but it isn’t about, like if I spend a dollar on a lead, because if the one dollar lead only produced 50 cents, I lost 50 cents. If I can buy a lead that cost me $12 and that lead produced $100, I’ll buys as many of those all day long; I don’t care if I can get a dollar lead because the $12 leads are working.

So these are the two things we track in PPC Steve. We track our CPL, cost per lead, and RPL, revenue per lead. Those are the only two numbers that matter. How much does the lead cost and how much does the lead generate, and that percentage, the profit margin between those are what we optimize for. So to answer your question specifically, we are anywhere from $2 to $4 a lead now on the funnels we are running, but that’s the average.

The ones that produce the most revenue cost more. They are usually in the $10 to $12 range. So the $2 to $4 leads, like the actual people that pay $2 to $4 — we pay $2 to $4 for don’t produce as much income as the more expensive leads. I don’t really know why that is, but there is probably some crazy analytical reason we can dig into for that.

Steve: Interesting.

Bryan: RPL, CPL or CPL, RPL, those are the two things to track, how much are you spending on a lead. Don’t optimize for that, optimize for the margin between them, and that might mean that you pay more money per lead, but you are generating a larger profit margin almost every time, for us at least that’s been the case. The more we spend on a lead, if the funnel has done well, this is assuming a lot if things in here.

This is why this is an advanced strategy — Usually the profit margin goes up, so as we increase spend per day. If we are spending ten bucks a day, and some of this doesn’t even matter. If you are spending 1000 bucks or 1,000 or 10,000 a day, scaling up is usually where you see that CPL go up and the profit margin matters.

Steve: Bryan, we’ve been chanting for quite a long time, and I want to be respectful of your time. Where can people find you if they have questions for you, and what is the URL of that downloadable again?

Bryan: Yeah, so videofruit.com/Steve is going to be the magic downloadable that we are going to set up between the time of recording and the time that this goes live. We are going to have a bunch of different links of all the different resources we mentioned, also on the show notes, I’m sure Steve will have this as well. But if you want to grab a few other things and maybe we’ll throw a few special little bonuses in there as well or a few different pieces of software that we build recently.

Steve: And when are we doing that webinar you said?

Bryan: Yeah man, let’s talk about it. We’ll do a webinar; we’ll do a web pitch webinar, and go more in depth on this. We’ll work out the details of that. Maybe that will be on that page as well.

Steve: All right, it sounds good Bryan. Hey thanks a lot for coming on the show, I really appreciate it.

Bryan: Thanks Steve. See you.

Steve: All right, take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. Bryan Harris is one of the best guys in the industry when it comes to building an email list and creating a high converting sales funnel. So make sure you go check out his site and sign up for his newsletter. For more information about this episode, go to MyWifeQuitHerJob.com/Episode169.

And once again I want to thank SellerLabs.com. Their tool Ignite is what I use to manage my Amazon PPC campaigns. Instead of the old tedious way of generating reports, analyzing your ad campaigns in Excel, Ignite aggregates all that info for you in one place, and allows you to quickly visualize your data to make decision quickly.

So not only does it save time, but it also makes managing your Amazon campaign so much easier. So head on over to Sellerlabs.com/Steve and sign up for a free 30 day trial. Once again that’s SellerLabs.com/Steve.

I also want to thank Klaviyo which is my email marketing platform of choice for ecommerce merchants. You can easily put together automated flows like an abandoned cart sequence, a post purchase flow, a win back campaign, basically all these sequences that will make you money on auto pilot. So head on over to MyWifeQuitHerJob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s MyWifeQuitHerJob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

Now I talk about how I use these tools on my blog, and if you are interested in starting your own ecommerce store head on over to MyWifeQuitHerJob.com and sign up for free six day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

168: How To Make 8 Figures Selling Boxed Software Using Google Shopping With Daniel Parker

168: How To Make 8 Figures Selling Boxed Software Using Google Shopping With Daniel Parker

Today, I’m thrilled to have Daniel Parker on the show. Daniel is someone who I met at the Ecommerce Fuel Live conference in Savannah, Georgia and he actually taught me a few things that I was not doing with my Google Shopping ads that I promptly fixed as soon as I got home.

Daniel runs MyChoiceSoftware.com which is an online store that sells boxed software online. Selling off the shelf software is an incredibly competitive niche but he does extremely well making well over 8 figures last year. Enjoy the show!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Daniel got into ecommerce and why he decided to sell boxed software
  • The margins for selling software.
  • How he differentiates himself from the thousands of other stores selling the exact same software
  • How he advertises his store.
  • His main sources of traffic
  • How to optimize Google Shopping campaigns

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Ignite.Sellerlabs.com – If you are selling on Amazon and running Amazon Sponsored Ads campaigns, then Ignite from Seller Labs is a must have tool. Click here and get a FREE 30 Day Trial.
Ignite Logo

ReferralCandy.com – If you’re already getting steady orders every month, adding a refer-a-friend program to your store can give you a new sales channel. And ReferralCandy is the best in the business. Click here and get a FREE $50 credit towards your account.
referral candy

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and delve deeply into what strategies are working and what strategies are not with their businesses.

Today I’m thrilled to have Daniel Parker on the show, and Daniel’s ecommerce store is pretty unique in that he created an eight figure ecommerce business selling boxed software like Microsoft Office, and he did it with Google Shopping, crazy, right?

But before we begin I want to give a quick shout out to Seller Labs who is a sponsor of the show, and specifically I want to talk about their brand new tool Ignite which helps sellers manage their Amazon sponsored ads. Right now I’m using this tool to manage my Amazon sponsored ad campaigns, and it makes things a heck of a lot more convenient.

So number one I’ve always found it a major pain to generate my PPC reports on Amazon, cut and paste the data over to an excel spreadsheet and use pivot tables before I’m able do any analysis. Now Ignite pulls all that info for you automatically and allows you to easily see what keywords are working and what are not immediately, there is no need to manually create reports or play with excel.

Second of all unless you’re a data geek, Amazon campaign data can be hard to understand, and what is cool is that Ignite makes keyword and bidding recommendations on the fly that can be applied with a few clicks.

So let’s say one of my hankie keywords is bleeding money, well Ignite will alert me of that fact, and I can reduce the bid immediately. So bottom line Ignite makes managing your Amazon’s sponsored ads so much easier, and the fact that they provide me with alerts means that I no longer have to monitor my campaigns like a hawk.

If there are keywords that are doing well, well Ignite tells me to add them to my exact match campaigns. If my keywords are losing money, well Ignite tells me to either remove the keyword or to reduce the bid. So head on over to sellerlabs.com/steve where you’ll find awesome tutorials on how to run Amazon PPC ads and the opportunity to try Ignite for 30 days for free. Once again that’s sellerlabs.com/steve.

Now I also want to give a shout out to Klaviyo who is also a sponsor of the show, and I’m always excited to talk about Klaviyo because they are the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store, and I depend on them for over 20% of my revenues. Now you’re probably wondering what makes Klaviyo so special. Well Klaviyo is the only email platform out there that is specifically built for ecommerce stores, and here’s why it’s so powerful.

Klaviyo can track every single customer who has shopped in your store and exactly what they bought. So let’s say I want to send an email to everyone who purchased a red handkerchief in the past, boom. Let’s say I want to set up a special autoresponder sequence to my customers depending on what they bought, well that’s piece of cake, and there is full revenue tracking on every single email.

Klaviyo is the most powerful email platform that I’ve ever used and you can try them for free at mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O. Now on the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast; today I’m thrilled to have Daniel Parker on the show. Daniel is someone who I met at the Ecommerce Fuel Live Conference in Savannah, Georgia last year, and he actually taught me a couple of things that I was not doing with my Google Shopping ads that I properly fixed as soon as I got home.

Now Daniel runs mychoicesoftware.com, which is an online store that sells software online, which is an incredibly competitive niche. But he does extremely well making well over eight figures last year, and today what I plan on doing is to pick Daniel’s brain on how he is able to compete in the cut throat space of computer software. And with that, welcome to the show Daniel, how are you doing today man?

Daniel: Hey, pretty good.

Steve: So give us a background on how you got in ecommerce and why box software of all things that you could sell?

Daniel: Yeah, so I came out of an engineering background writing enterprise part systems back in 2007, 2008 writing the backend for AutoZone, and like most people coming out of school I had a lot of student loans, so I ended up having two or three jobs. One of these other jobs was writing marketing software for a music and cancer promotion.

Well, one of the senior leaders in our software engineering company ended up leaving and going into software with his cousin who had been selling software online for a number of years. I got into that business, learned that business, learned that if you added a value added service on top like digitalizing the products for people, or getting the logistics to them faster, you could get huge swerves of people that were willing to work with a smaller boutique firm, that didn’t want to work with the CDWs and the Neweggs of the world where they dealt with large offshore teams or automated response queues, or just people that really didn’t know how the software worked, they just knew customer service.

So jumping into this we took the approach of getting really highly trained people that could speak to these people from a point of interact and explain what the software did, how it worked, how it was going to benefit them, and then gave them expert pricing around that, so I learned that business.

Fast forward a couple of years and a few other engineering jobs, I got an invitation to come work for My Choice Software with my partner now, and we basically focus on the same model. So we took something that was highly competitive with high brand awareness, that had a pretty decent size of reseller market, and we just took really intelligent people on the front to speak to these IT directors, these managed service providers, all the people that were buying for other people.

And we focused on developing those people as part of our marketing approach, our marketing and sales parts. And then through that we ended up building up quit a robust set of ad spend, where today we run about a 15% [inaudible 00:06:38] across the entire board, but we do have 40% return from our customers.

Steve: I was just about to ask you that, so what are the – so just for context for the people listening Daniel sells software like Microsoft Office for example. A lot of these tools from companies that are just well known and well branded, and so Daniel I’m just curious what the margins are like for just selling like just the pure software excluding the services?

Daniel: Yeah, so just the pure software is running right around 20, 25%.

Steve: Okay so it’s basically impossible, or it’s really difficult just to make money selling software by itself?

Daniel: Right, so you’re always trying to up-sell, you’re always trying to sell a service. You’re basically hunting for the people out there in the waters that are going to buy two or more units.

Steve: Okay, and then the way you kind of pitch yourself where your value add is the service?

Daniel: Correct, so we’re adding service on top, we’re adding knowledgeable stuff, short call cues, instant downloads. We’ve done quite a bit to speed up the delivery of these products for different customers so that they can get in their needs bun which ends up – most people these days want to be able to install an app instantly, get it right away. So we’ve done a great deal to alleviate that issue of receiving the box in the mail, installing it and then going through that entire process.

Steve: So just to be clear then like your target customer is not someone like me, it’s someone who runs a company?

Daniel: So yeah absolutely. So we do have a large consumer base, but consumer base in software has a seven year return cycle, so meaning if I sell you Office today, seven years from now you’ll probably buy Office again unless you’re buying a subscription. So we specifically hunt for company buyers that are going to repeat, buy but even more specifically we’re searching for computer repair shops, computer service centers, anyone that has — computer consultants that have a large number of clients where they are doing the buying and purchasing for those customers.

Steve: Okay, and so before this interview I actually went ahead and did a couple of searches for like Microsoft Office for example. And I noticed that in the main AdWords – I didn’t see any of your ads, but you like dominated the Google Shopping ads, and so I was hoping to talk about that a little bit, because I know that there’s just tons and tons of companies selling the same software that you are. And so how do you advertise your store, and how do you kind of convey your value add to the people?

Daniel: Well, that’s kind of a multi point question, is the question…

Steve: Let’s talk about getting customers in the door first.

Daniel: Yeah so getting customers in the door, all right so some companies focus on SEO, some companies focus on straight AdWords. We decided to focus on product listing ads because our target customer was either searching for a skew or they were searching for a full end title, or they were searching for some variation in the title.

So when we went about kind of developing our plan, we decided that we were going to chase down every possible optimization that could be done in AdWords like product splitting by title, different content in the descriptions for different ratings trying to convey all the information the customer needed in the first four seconds of being on the page, and then allowing them to make a snap decision on, is this what they were looking for, and then we use keyword shaping.

But basically our approach was always to try to separate the consumer from the business user. So everything in our AdWord strategy is the first couple of times you search you’ll see us a lot, and then once we learn more about the customer we start to narrow that focus.

Steve: Okay so let’s talk about that process because from what I remember in our conversations what you do is pretty intricate and pretty detailed, so let’s just focus on PLAs for a moment.

Daniel: Sure.

Steve: So what do your sales funnels look like and how do you run your PLA ads to weed out these people who are going to be buying often?

Daniel: Yeah, so the funnel specifically is to reduce the barrier to entry to get somebody and get them on the phone or on chat as fast as possible. So when you hit our product pages, you’re seeing chat with us now, speak with a representative of the office in the United States, just high availability imagery and content messaging to say, “Hey, we are here, we are able to negotiate on price, we are able to set this up for multiple people.”

So the end user – you’ll end up getting a portion of them that will communicate through and they’ll ask some general questions about the product, and we try to include that in the product messaging so that it’s all upfront. And what we’re trying to do is suck up the people that are business buyers, anyone who wants two or more.

So anyone who wants to two or more we pull out by the sales team once they’ve gone through and made a purchase, we solicit them directly, they’ll go into a different remarketing group, we’ll pay more for them, there’s a number of techniques that go into it.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of the number of people who actually take advantage of the live chat and that sort of thing, what percentage is that and then what is your close rate for the people that you actually do manage to get on the phone?

Daniel: So the close rate for people on the phone is quite high, I think as long as – the element of selling software is like selling a toilet seat, right? You know that you are in the market for a toilet seat, but you just don’t know what toilet seat is going to save your fixture. So essentially when you get these people on the phone rarely are they worried too much about price, they are trying to find the unit that’s right for the equipment they have.

So you’re never really having to fight much on price with the basic consumers because they’ve already determined that they want to buy it from you, they like the trust factors on the site, they have a good feeling about it. So the customer service is really getting them the in-depth information that they need, but it scales on complexity.

It’s much easier to say, “Hey yeah this is Microsoft Office we want to install on your computer,” as opposed to, “Well this is how many licenses of this $7,000 SQL Server you need for the cores in your computer with 6 VMs and all of this more complex licensing information.” So our staff for the most part except for the most junior people are trained to answer the simple, this is what will work on your computer, all the way up to, this is the licensing compliance diagram that we need to follow to make sure you’re complaint with Microsoft.

Steve: So does that imply that your Shopping campaigns, you convert well enough on like the first click, or do you do a bunch of things, like I’m trying to get into depth about how you run your Shopping campaigns. So I understand you probably have this broad funnel for keywords, and then you try to grab as many of those people as you can, but like how do you kind of extract out and target just the big buyers with your Shopping campaigns?

Daniel: Sure, so the main thing about the – so there’s two factors. First off we take a whole product approach, we get somebody in with the cheap products so that we can remarket them and re-solicit them because you’ll pay up to the full profit if not more on those preliminary hooked products like Microsoft Office to identify and target a repeat buyer.

So for us, that’s simply just look at their email, look at their website, figure out that they buy more stuff, re-solicit them with a coupon, and then have the sales team call them. On the larger products front, like when we’re selling SQL Server or we’re jumping into a new product line, we’ll specifically go out there, measure the competition, see who is not following the Shopping guidelines. We’ll target them, we’ll build up their entire product base that they’re advertising, and then we’ll block their IP and advertise on top of them and absorb those sales.

Steve: So let’s back up a little bit, the reason why I’m asking these questions is you mentioned before that software only carries a 20% premium, right?

Daniel: Right.

Steve: I mean margin, and so when you are writing these Google Shopping campaigns, you mentioned the hook items, so you’re not making any money at all for example selling Microsoft Office in that case?

Daniel: On a single license of Microsoft Office we make practically no money.

Steve: Okay, and so the key is you’re getting these people in through Google Shopping, and then you’re finding the people who are the big whales so to speak, and then you’re doing a lot of outreach to those people?

Daniel: Exactly, so an example of something that happened this week, a customer that we acquired back in November on a deal spread ended up doing $195,000 deal to do database servers in Haiti. So that one hooked product that absolutely came through our PLA network, got this guy in, got him talking to a sales person, built up that level of trust, and turned into $200,000 deal down the road.

Steve: So let me ask you this, how do you – because that first round of Google Shopping is not profitable per say and you make all of your profits kind of on the backend, how do you measure like the ROI of your campaigns?

Daniel: Sure, so we basically have a benchmark, we basically are picking the positions we want to be on certain products and then measuring those accounts across the longer line. So it doesn’t make sense to advertise heavily on something like antivirus, personal antivirus. It will go on a bargain bin; we’ll basically make sure that we follow all the SEO guidelines, we wrote our own tool to do this called Feed Doctor that optimizes the products for brand position and ranking inside Google PLAs.

We make sure all those details are as good as it can be, and then we look at what we spend on Microsoft Office in a week. So we’ll find that we can spend 15% on Microsoft Office, still turn a profit, look at the total amount collected, and we’ll find that in five sales somebody buys two or more. So if 20% of customers are buying two or more, it actually turns the rollers [ph] on the entire investment into that product channel as a positive return on ad spend.

So instead of being 25% on the line item, we’re looking at a genre of products that lead to further sales down the road, and we’re calculating that as a whole.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to tell you about a free resource that I offer on my website that you may not be aware of. If you’re interested in starting your own online store, I put together a comprehensive six day mini course on how to get started in ecommerce that you should all check out. It contains both video and text based tutorials that go over the entire process of finding products to sell all the way to getting your first sales online.

Now this course is free and can be obtained at mywifequitherjob.com/free. Just sign up right there on the front page via email and I’ll send you the course right away. Once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/free, now back to the show.

So from what you just said, are you implying then that the two or mores you kind of assign a certain weighting factor to it when you’re measuring the effect of this on your Shopping campaign?

Daniel: Correct, so the conversions are tracked in two ways, we track the total units sold and then we also track the amount of converted clicks, and then we’re weighting those based on a ratio. And there is a factor in price point there too. If you’re too cheap or too expensive it can affect that ratio.

Steve: Okay, so I also noticed that you dominate the Google PLAs, which kind of implies to me at least that you’re spending more money than the competitors, is that accurate or how do you dominate those search rankings?

Daniel: Sure, to a degree, search rankings in Shopping ads are different than any other search rankings out there. The ranking statistics are based on Google’s effected click through rating, and they measure that against their compliance statistics. So if your description is less than let’s say 300 words or you don’t have 1,000 by 1,000 image or you don’t have the brand in title, all of these factors kind of go into how Google assigns your rank, and how they assume your click through rating.
So they basically pick the people that best matched that product search or whatever somebody is searching for and puts that up top. So do not – bidding over top somebody else, you’re just Google’s best pick for what they think people are looking for, and then you validate that with your ability to process those transactions on the backend.

So we’re showing stars, we’re doing Google transit stores, we’re doing promotions, we’re doing sales, we always make sure to show free shipping, promotional text, and as compared to our competitors, they don’t even have the review stars on their products. We aggregate reviews at probably 50 to 100 a day on products. So once you have a certain amount of reviews on products, your product will immediately stand apart in the top Google product search when you have it on the primary screen.

Now when you get into the secondary screens where people are ranking by price or ranking for the buy box there, it is a different set of statistics. In that case they’re typically saying, “All right, these products are the same thing, these guys have a better price, but they meet our bidding and compliance standard.” So there’s actually three different sets of rules, and what we found is before we fixed our data we were paying on average 3 to $5 a click, after we got all our data into compliance, really optimized everything, it was $1.50, and we were getting way more through put.

Steve: Okay so let’s go through all the elements of compliance if you would, at least the most important ones, let’s try to highlight those.

Daniel: Sure, so image size, brand, and title.

Steve: So image size you mentioned it should be a square image of at least 1,000 by 1,000?

Daniel: Well, they say 800 by 800, the minimum is 300 by 300, but they scale these images in different places. So they are going to use these images in dynamic apps, they’re going to use these images in display ads; they’re going to use these images on mobile. So they say 1,000 by 1,000 but sometimes people have 1,000 by 1,000 white cube and a little tiny product in the middle.

Ultimately the image that you pick needs to be attention grabbing, and in our case we’re kind of limited by how many changes we can make because it’s someone else’s brand. But if you have a high contrast image elements that you can convey that set you apart from other people, in a parallel they find the people with children or people in the photos tend to get a better click through rating, and just one of the things that guys at Google told us way back was rotate your product boxes by 30 to 45 degrees and you’ll get a better click through rating with a 3D image than a flat image.

So we went through the process of kind of doing those best practices and then we made sure that all the details that we could sell out were correct, that we had the best image quality, the best descriptions, the descriptions are pretty important.

Steve: Are you allowed to put promotional language in your images for Shopping?

Daniel: You’re not supposed to and you’re not supposed to put it in your actual product description as well. So they are kind of hard on that, but they’re not doing too much visual checking. They are looking at the density of words that they can read from it though it’s not as much like Facebook where Facebook has a 30% policy for text image, in Facebook you’re only supposed to use 30% text.

But PLAs for us, it’s really been making sure the descriptions are great are kind of one tactical play that we look at is we look at the display tab in Google Shopping in AdWords, and we find out that these keywords are generating clicks for these items so that we craft duplicate items with different keyword subsets in the title to closely match someone’s searches.

Steve: Okay, so let’s talk about that a little bit. You’re saying you’re figuring out which keywords people are using to search for your software and then you’re putting those in the title tags?

Daniel: Correct.

Steve: Okay, and are you putting those in the description as well – so you’re duplicating products?

Daniel: Right.

Steve: The exact same product but you’re using different verbiage?

Daniel: Right, and the way that we get around the duplicate products thing is we change the description enough so that it’s changed so that it’s not exactly the same. They’ll have some similar key points like the specifications will be the same, but the writing over top will be different. They’ll also have a different product ID, a different product skew, and occasionally they’ll have the same UPC but it’ll just be a different display of it.

Steve: Interesting, so inventory wise though it all pulls from the same inventory?

Daniel: In some cases, sometimes you have two versions of Microsoft Office home and business and they have two different skews, then you’ll provide both of those skews. But Microsoft took this approach way back, they created a product and then they created 25 different skews for that product. What we did was we took those 25 skews and we keyword shipped around what people would be looking for to get to those.

Steve: Okay, when in reality it’s the same software just packaged differently?

Daniel: Right, and the one thing that nobody seems to understand clearly about Shopping is it’s all keyword driven. The only thing that you can eliminate is negatives, but it’s looking for keywords in your title and it’s looking in the first couple of lines of your description.

Steve: So in terms of your description, does it pay to have a really long description, or is it just as you just mentioned just the first couple of sentences?

Daniel: So it still uses the Google SEO laws, so you’re still trying to get 300 words, and they basically say in not so many words on some documents that I’ve seen that you’re penalized for not having 1,000 characters or more.

Steve: 1,000 characters, okay.

Daniel: Yeah, so they understand the product descriptions and SEO page regulations are different, but they look for 1,000 to 5,000 characters in that description even though they might not display it, they might display it somewhere else later. And really specifically in SEO standard practices, you want the keywords that you’re trying to focus for on the first line, so if you add those keywords that you’re trying to focus on in the first line of your product description, you’ll see them highlighted from the Google Shopping page when you’re in the actual Google Shopping perspective.

So if you put Microsoft Office home and business, and that’s in the first line of your description, that’s going to be highlighted as well as the keywords it matches in your title.

Steve: Okay, just the other day I was looking through my PLA ads and I’ve noticed that some of my products never get any impressions and they’re very similar to the products that do get impressions, and I did follow a lot of the things that you suggested which is doing the structure markup which we’ll talk about in a little bit, and I have alternative images. What other ways besides – so we’ve talked about the image, we’ve talked about the description, what else is there?

Daniel: So you can use back in the titles, but it depends if you get the list view or the grid view. Grid view basically takes all of the candidates that came back for that search term and they put up the candidates that have the best return for them or the best projected return. So to even be considered you have to have the keyword matching in your description, in your title, and sometimes they look at any sort of product typing that you’re submitting.

So let’s say you searched for bed linens and a comforter, you probably will see all bed linens, but let’s say you have a comfortable that goes with that that you wanted to show up in the same thing, Google will look at that taxonomy and say, “Look, these are the products that get the best clicks, we’re going to just exclusively use this taxonomy.”

So later on if you want to show me this example, I can take a look and basically determine on a finite level why it’s not getting searches on that query.

Steve: Sure, I was just asking about your software though, it seems like you have all these different skews, do all of them get impressions like in your feed?

Daniel: So we actually, we scale them on the backend, so after they go through the – we kind of call the checked bucket, we throw them out there, we throw them out on super high bids and we monitor their click through, and then we sort them into a priority bidding scale where we determine they’re either great value, best value or special value, and based on what we see in their performance in click through, based on an advertising subset of one month, we basically determine how much we’re going to pay to bid on those things.

And then we monitor what keywords they’re getting clicks on, what negatives they’re working with them, but we don’t ever want to be in a position where two things are competing against each other. For example we have ten different versions of home and business and they are all different skews, but we found that during our test of home and business, one performs really well.

So we’re going to bid high on that one and then low on the other ones and then grade them across that scale, because you don’t want to end up having two of the exact same product competing against each other.

Steve: Okay, so in the beginning you’re bidding really high for like a month just to gather data from what it sounds?

Daniel: Correct.

Steve: Okay and then based on that data you pick the ones that have the highest click through rate, bid higher on those and then bid lower on the ones that don’t?

Daniel: Right and we’ll also use priority stacking, so something that has…

Steve: Let’s talk about that actually yeah.

Daniel: Yeah so the priority stack is pretty interesting, it seems they got – limited the ability to bid on keywords, you have to kind of negatively shape a keyword and look at the value of that keyword. So for example I don’t know if Skype is listening to us, but it just started showing me Microsoft Office ads.

Steve: Okay, it could be.

Daniel: Off topic there. So with the keyword priority it’s like you want to take your top performers that you want to spend the most money, and put them in the high priority campaign with the keywords that you know are going to generate sales.

Now you might have some broader keywords, and you might want to create a standard priority campaign where you have the same set of products, but you bid less for those products on the standard campaign or the standard keywords that are broad like Microsoft Office. How do you know which Microsoft Office they’re looking for? You don’t, so you are going to take some candidates for that, you’re going to set up bid schedule.

But if they go highly specific you want to bid high, if they are broad keywords you want to bid kind of mediocre, and then you have your bottom bid which is keywords that aren’t truly related, somebody searched for example not QuickBooks software, but they searched for accounting software and it generated a sale after 30 clicks or something like that for QuickBooks.

So we’ll put that in the bottom bid, we’ll eliminate accounting software from a – to high priorities where we’re going to spend a lot, we’ll throw that in the bottom bid, and if they happen to come across this for 15 or 25 cents, then we’ll take the deal, and then we frequency capped the two bottom ones.

Steve: Okay and then how often do you actually reevaluate the keywords and everything, like how often do you look at your campaigns?

Daniel: Everyday.

Steve: Everyday?

Daniel: Everyday.

Steve: Wow, okay so you’re looking at negatives every – do you use software for this or do you do it manually?

Daniel: A little bit of both, so we’ve built our own reports that kind of find where things have gone out of work or out of performance, and we use rules to turn stuff on and off. Like if something – the biggest dagger in product listing ads once you get a high budget is you’ll find something that was performing great and it was performing great, and then somebody came along with a better price of the exact same product, undercut you, you’re still getting clicks but this guy has the exact same product with a slightly better display and all of your sales drop out.

So you have to use rules to basically – rules and reporting to determine if your products on a line item level are still performing, and then that has to be matched against their price points. You need to know when your competitors are doing, so we have charged that point what the competitor pricing is, and there is quite a bit of work that has to go into just maintaining a single PLA set of campaigns with about 2,000 products. It’s a full time job for two people.

Steve: Wow, okay so that implies that your Shopping campaigns like the ads themselves are very granular, meaning like the keywords that you’re targeting are just very specific to individual products instead of like the way I kind of – for example like I do it. I target like broader keywords since we own all of our own brands.

Daniel: Yeah, so it’s specific to products but it’s also specific to what has produced a better yield on the follow up. So if they look at a set of keywords, they are now trying to trace those sales all the way back to, were these consumers, or were these business people? If they’re business people, are they going to come back and buy again from us or should we let them go. So they are then trying to pull this into two sets of campaigns, they’re trying to do a B to B campaign and a B to C campaign, and the B to C ends up feeding the B to B.

So once we find something, a set of metrics that works well for a B to B client, we import those from the B to C into the B to B set of campaigns.

Steve: Okay so what for example would be a good metric?

Daniel: For example we’ve found places where someone searches on a specific skew. When they search on those skews, we’ll have a bucket in the B to B high priority that we won’t have the negatives for that, whereas the consumer one will have the negatives, and the bidding rate in the B to B is about double what the B to C is.

Steve: I see.

Daniel: So we’ve picked out habits and keyword subsets where B to C people – a consumer would never search for a skew or GTIN of a product, a business person looking for pricing on those would.

Steve: Wow, okay.

Daniel: So when those opportunities show up, we want to guarantee that we have the most visibility possible.

Steve: Interesting, so are you also ramping – you’re doing retargeting as well, right?

Daniel: Yes.

Steve: Retargeting at least, so you are bucketing the business customers differently in terms of your remarketing as well, right?

Daniel: Somewhat yes, they get into a B to B emailing queue, we don’t have to as much trying to remarket them as we would just the general consumer, so we leave remarketing pretty flat and then we feed those to the sales guys to go after them.

Steve: So how do you keep track of all this, I’m just trying to think of how I would do it here, so you’re tracking different keywords that lead to higher sales volume like two or more is what you mentioned. How do you make that correlation?

Daniel: A lot of spreadsheets.

Steve: Okay, I was going to ask if it was manual or whether you had something on the backend that kind of…

Daniel: We actually have two very talented data science guys that we picked up and taught them marketing specifically for analyzing these correlation sets.

Steve: I want to take a moment to thank ReferralCandy for being a sponsor of the show. Now in this day and age word of mouth is a huge driver of business for most ecommerce stores, and the best way to amplify word of mouth marketing is through a referral program. This is where ReferralCandy shines, with just a couple of clicks to the mouse you could add a referral program to your ecommerce store and reward your customers for telling their friends about your shop.

And this tactic works wonders; and in fact it is not uncommon to get a ridiculous return on investment. So for example Greats Footwear who is a ReferralCandy customer is currently seeing a 20X ROI. Referral word of mouth marketing is also useful for building up your social media presence as well, because everyone is talking about your company with their friends on Facebook and Twitter.

And the best part is that ReferralCandy is a set it and forget it service, requires no technical setup and they are giving My Wife Quit Her Job listeners 50 bucks to try them out if you go to promo.referralcandy.com/steve. Once again it’s promo.referralcandy.com/steve to get a $50 credit to try out the service risk free. Now back to the show.

Okay, I wonder how many other people are doing this, I mean in your space it’s really competitive, I feel like it’s almost a must, right?

Daniel: Very few people take the approach that we do; most people invest into marketing, find out that their view is that it’s unprofitable and then they turn it off. Our view is specifically if something is unprofitable, turn it down, or relook at the opportunity to figure out if there is money coming out somewhere else. For example if you sell antivirus and then they end up buying Office and a mouse and a desktop and a monitor and all this other stuff, then antivirus is also on your most valuable PLA product.

Without understanding what’s going on in that repeat buying zone, effectively PLAs are just one time sale. So anyone who’s going into the PLA market to sell a single product, it’s dangerous because you really want to focus on the repeat buyer and what you can resell after the fact, because the cost of PLAs are going to keep going up. The cost of selling a $20 knife will probably be $20 within the next year.

Steve: Especially since Amazon is jumping in there, right?

Daniel: Well Amazon has been in there and Amazon’s behavior point was they didn’t have the data right before. So now they’re going to buy the penny buckets on there and hope that their brand and their SEO is going to take over, but that doesn’t stop you from for example if you’re a reseller like we are using our ability to do the SEO correctly on these things.

If we buy a product cheap enough and they’re selling on Amazon for cheaper, we just direct them to Amazon and keep a portion of the profit and have somebody else fulfill it.

Steve: Okay.

Daniel: So if you’re managing the spend correctly and you’re managing the people, like somebody lands on your page, you get their email, maybe you’re not the cheapest price and you can extrapolate that, send them on to Amazon, then remarket them again.

Steve: Interesting. I’m just trying to think, so on the backend can you recommend any software for like people out there who are listening to actually do some of this analysis, or do you literally need like dedicated data scientist people?

Daniel: A really simple software that’s out there Data Feed Watch, a lot of people use it; their analytics platform gives you a nice line item view of what’s working. Also looking into crafting your custom reports on what your click ratios are, what you click throughs are by product ID and taking a hard look at those to see where it’s performing, and then taking a look at what your hooked products are.

We take a lot of the data and sales and we use that pier to throw it in to Google feeds, and then we match, we do a report every week where we match that data, then we just export from AdWords into that to kind of determine what our line item cost per product is. But yeah there’s quite a bit of work, there’s companies like WisePricer that go out there and scrap the data and try to set your prices and do all these different things to try and help you win, but there is no magic bullet that does the profit report.

There is nothing that says, “Okay, here is your analytics data, here is how many people came through PLAs, here is what came back to your site.” You really have to track those opportunities, measure the UTM values when they come in, track that back to the product that caused that sale and the time frame and look at it at a very granular level, and then get used to doing that process three or four times a week to determine what your effective product sales are.

Steve: Okay, I want to leave the readers with stuff that’s immediately actionable – or the listeners I should say. In terms of the feeds – so we talked about a couple of things with the image and the description, any low hanging fruit that you would say that a lot of people are just making mistakes on with just their feed?

Daniel: Yeah, brand in title, brand in title, too many times someone says, “I don’t want to add my brand name in there because it’s not really relevant to the product.” Well throwing your brand in there will get you more organic search, it’ll get you more search in general, so always have brand in title. Like it’s just – it’s one of those things where you’ll never know when a customer will remember your brand and go back to it, and you’ve just gotten free money from it.

So Google PLA has the widest base of customer search for products, not putting the brand in title is like paying an extra quarter on every single click.

Steve: Do you put at the end or the beginning?

Daniel: Typically you put it at the beginning, but if you’ve got a long brand name you can always toss it at the end. I know some companies that are resellers where they’ll take their company name and toss it at the end just so they get that brand authority.

Steve: There is already a field in the feed for brand though, that’s not good enough?

Daniel: Correct, that’s not good enough.

Steve: Okay, any other tips than just the feed?

Daniel: Make sure the first line of your description has the keywords that you want people to search for.

Steve: Okay and we talked about structured markup, any tips there or – actually let’s talk about it, we forgot to talk about that. So why is structured markup important, first of all what is it and why is it important?

Daniel: All right, so structured markup is effectively how you’ve told Google to read your site. So in the case of products, Google is going to scrap your site and they’re going to try and gleam whatever data they can. Unfortunately it’s not a great scientific process for them, like they need to get the GTI end of your product, they need to know what the product ID was in your feed that it’s running against.

They need to be able to cleanly read the images and alternative images, they need to know what the description content was, they need to know how many reviews are on this page, who wrote those reviews, how many reviews you’re getting a day. It’s all really, really important, so structured data is how you communicate that to Google.

If somebody doesn’t have structured data, they’re not getting stars on their organic search, they’re not going to get the stars on their product listing ads, their dynamic remarketing for product listing ads is not going to work correctly. A lot of things will go much, much better on a straight up performance level if Google can read that information.

Additionally if your price changes on your product page and your pricing structure data is not set up correctly, they’ll actually pause your product in your merchant center, and so either your feed updates, or if they’ve taken the time to review and say, “Okay this is the new price.” So having that structured data there is important because they are going to read it every time they send a customer there, and if they have to make an adjustment, you’d much rather communicate that information to them.

Also things like in stock, out of stock, if a product goes out of stock on your site, and you don’t want to market it any more, then you can update that out of stock in your structured data. Google will pick that up when a click comes through, and they’ll mark it out of stock for you so that you’re not spending advertising on it.

Steve: So in terms of the structured data, does that imply that the structured data can be different from what’s actually on the page, like Google doesn’t pay attention to the page that much anymore?

Daniel: Correct, so in the case of products, you might want to have a better structured data that is great content for — in our product descriptions we have lots of pictures, we have lots of tables, we have all sorts of different content which we don’t necessarily want Google to read. So we give Google a optimized bid of description that we feed them into a JSON variable underneath the HTML that’s optimized for what we want to show to Google for when they search our index or page.

Steve: That’s interesting, I was thinking the opposite, like for the structured data I would include like a 1,500 word post or something, but to make the page look okay in the description I would just keep a small paragraph, what you’re suggesting is the opposite of that?

Daniel: Right, so you still want to have whatever the SEO standard is, but you want that to be in a clean readable format so that they just read through it, they don’t have to read line breaks, all of that other stuff, you just give them the structured data and say, “This is the information on the product, read it, go back to business.”

Steve: Okay, cool Daniel, man we’ve actually been chatting for 40 minutes about Google shopping, who would have guessed it?

Daniel: I love Google Shopping man.

Steve: No you are a master at it, it’s crazy the amount of work, I mean I know selling software is difficult, but it just seems like all the extra stuff that you’re doing on the backend is essential, and you are right, I have students in my class, where they try these things and it doesn’t work and then they give up. But they’re just looking at it from the point of like a direct sale.

Daniel: Sure, and it really has to be sculpted over the organization, you need to pick a sacrificial lamb that will get people through the door, put it out there and work hard to retain those customers.

Steve: So would this all change if you had your own branded products, I mean it wouldn’t need to be this intricate then, right?

Daniel: Correct, so if it was a branded product, we would basically state that we would pay 50% or 75% of the first product sale to get them in the door, then we would focus the entirety of our profit generation efforts on the backend.

Steve: Right, okay, so backend meaning like email and direct sales?

Daniel: Email, direct sales, up-sell, down-sell, all of those components because Shopping is getting a lot more expensive and it’s purposely difficult to manage. You need a lot of people to do it, so your effective profit rates will fluctuate wildly; it’s just not a metric that should be used to generate direct profit on its own.

Steve: Interesting, all right Daniel, thanks a lot for your time and if anyone wants to know what you’re up to, where can they find you and I know you got a bunch of businesses on your own, feel free to tell everyone what you’re working on.

Daniel: Sure, so My Choice Software is our ecommerce business. We have the Safe Harbor Group, which is or merchant service business kind of specifically targeting the ecommerce community. Then we have Business Tech Pro which is our software development group that develops apps, websites, marketing funnels, different products for different clients, and then we have Extended Shield which is our new B to B application allowing businesses to sell extended warranties for all of their product offering stuff.

So if you sell diamond rings we basically create a warranty, the tax rate on the end of your ecommerce process or in your store, and you’re able to produce that up-sell afterwards. Then I recently started a new blogging initiative called Sound Decisions where I’m taking all my headaches and frustrations with all of these different businesses and opportunities, and kind of venting them out there.

So we’ve got some interesting stuff about the upcoming changes to Shopify, we have some interesting stuff on how to develop with multiple people on there and then kind of some business driving decision articles as well. So I’m not nearly as good as you Steve, but hopefully one day I’ll be able to quit my job as well.

Steve: Hey don’t forget to mention your Shopify plug-in.

Daniel: Yeah the Shopify Plug-in is a new categories app. We took all the power of standard Magento tree categories and we brought them to Shopify. So it’s absolutely a game changer for anybody looking to migrate to Shopify, it gives you that last element of organization that you’re really truly looking for.

Steve: Yeah, if you have like nested options and that sort of thing, right?

Daniel: Yeah, you can go infinitely deep, you can have 1,000 category depth trees.

Steve: Cool Daniel, hey it was a pleasure having you on the show; I really appreciate your time man.

Daniel: Hey, thank you so much Steve.

Steve: All right, take care.

Daniel: Take care.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Selling box software is probably one of the hardest products to sell. Daniel has actually taught me a ton about Google Shopping, and I’ve been able to take his advice and improve my ad visibility dramatically. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode168.

And once again I want to thank Klaviyo for sponsoring this episode. Klaviyo is my email marketing platform of choice for ecommerce merchants, and you can easily put together automated flows like an abandoned cart sequence, a post purchase sequence, a win back campaign, basically all these sequences that will make you money on auto pilot. So head on over to mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/ K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

Now I also want to thank SellerLabs.com as well. Their tool Ignite is what I use to manage my Amazon pay per click campaigns. Instead of the old tedious way of generating reports and analyzing your ad campaigns in excel, Ignite aggregates all that info for you in one place and allows you to quickly visualize your data to make decisions fast.

So not only does it save time, but it also makes managing your Amazon campaigns so much easier. So head on over to sellerlabs.com/steve and sign up for a free 30 day trial, once again that’s sellerlabs.com/steve.

And if you’re interested in starting your own ecommerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away, thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

167: Key Takeaways From Sellers Summit 2017 With Toni Anderson And Steve Chou

167: Key Takeaways From Sellers Summit 2017 With Toni Anderson And Steve Chou

Today, we’re doing a special episode because I’m not interviewing anyone on the show. Instead, I brought Toni Anderson back on the podcast to do a recap of Sellers Summit 2017.

Now if you don’t know Toni, she’s my partner in crime and she’s actually been on the show 3 or 4 times already. Anyway, the Sellers Summit is a conference that we throw every year and today we’re going to talk about what worked, what didn’t and some key takeaways.

Click here to buy the virtual pass for Sellers Summit 2017

What You’ll Learn

  • Two new features of the conference that made a huge difference
  • Key takeaways from the Sellers Summit speakers
  • Why the round tables were so popular

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Ignite.Sellerlabs.com – If you are selling on Amazon and running Amazon Sponsored Ads campaigns, then Ignite from Seller Labs is a must have tool. Click here and get a FREE 30 Day Trial.
Ignite Logo

ReferralCandy.com – If you’re already getting steady orders every month, adding a refer-a-friend program to your store can give you a new sales channel. And ReferralCandy is the best in the business. Click here and get a FREE $50 credit towards your account.
referral candy

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and delve deeply into what strategies are working and what strategies are not with their businesses.

Today I’m thrilled to have Toni Anderson back on the show, and what we’re going to do is we’re going to talk about some of the behind the scenes actions from our annual ecommerce conference, the Sellers Summit 2017.

But before we begin I want to give a quick shout out to Klaviyo who is a sponsor of the show. Now I’m always excited to talk about Klaviyo because they are the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store, and I depend on them for over 20% of my revenues, and you’re probably wondering why Klaviyo and not another provider. Well, Klaviyo is the only email platform out there that is specifically built for ecommerce stores, and here’s why it’s so powerful.

Klaviyo can track every single customer who has shopped in your store and exactly what they bought which allows you to do many things. So let’s say I want to send an email to everyone who purchased a red handkerchief in the last week, easy. Let’s say I want to set up a special autoresponder sequence to my customers depending on what they bought, piece of cake, and there is full revenue tracking on every single email.

Now Klaviyo is the most powerful email platform that I’ve ever used and you could actually try them for free at mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

Now I also want to give a shout out to my other sponsor Seller Labs, and specifically I want to talk about their brand new tool Ignite which helps sellers manage their Amazon sponsored ad campaigns. Right now I’m actually using this tool to manage my Amazon PPC ad campaigns, and it makes things a heck of a lot more convenient.

So number one I’ve always found it a major pain to generate my PPC reports on Amazon, cut and paste the data over to an excel spreadsheet and use pivot tables before I’m able do any analysis. Well Ignite pulls all that info for you automatically and allows you to easily see what keywords are working and what are not immediately, there is no need to manually create reports or play with excel.

Second of all unless you’re a data geek, Amazon campaign data can be hard to understand, and what’s cool is that Ignite makes keyword and bidding recommendations on the fly that can be applied with just a couple of clicks.

So let’s say one of my hankie keywords is bleeding money, well Ignite will alert me of that fact, and I can reduce the bid immediately. So bottom line Ignite makes managing your Amazon’s sponsored ads so much easier and the fact that they provide me with alerts means that I no longer have to monitor my campaigns like a hawk.

If there are keywords that are doing well, well Ignite tells me to add them to my exact match campaigns, if my keywords are losing money, well Ignite tells me to either remove the keyword or to reduce the bid. So head on over to sellerlabs.com/steve where you’ll find awesome tutorials on how to run Amazon PPC ads and the opportunity to try Ignite for 30 days absolutely free. Once again that’s sellerlabs.com/steve. Now on the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today we’re doing a special episode because I’m not interviewing anyone on the show today, and instead I brought Toni Anderson back on the podcast to kind of do a recap of Seller summit 2017. Now I you don’t know Toni, she is my partner in crime, and she’s actually been on the show three or four times already.

The Sellers Summit is actually a conference that we throw every year. Actually I probably shouldn’t say every year since this is only year two, but it is a conference that we put on to teach people about ecommerce, and today we’re going to talk about what worked, what didn’t and some key takeaways from the speakers. So how are you doing today Toni, thanks for taking the time to be back on.

Toni: Bang, thanks for having me again.

Steve: So okay it’s year two, and I don’t know about you but I was kind of worried about hitting a soft ball slope, like year one went so well that I didn’t actually think we could do better. So how did you feel going on to second year?

Toni: I’m glad you’re telling me this now and not pre-conference. I actually – I knew this year was going to be so much better and I think for two reasons and I know we’re jumping this a little bit early, but the mastermind that we did which was new that we added this year and the roundtables that we added this year. I think those two things in my mind were going to make this conference significantly almost more advanced than it was last year.

Steve: I just remember and for people who aren’t used to running conferences, I remember Toni put down and increased hotel block, and the way this works is like you’re committing to filling certain rooms in the hotel. I got really nervous I remember when you did that.

Toni: Yeah and then that makes me nervous whenever you get nervous.

Steve: When I get nervous, no you’re supposed to be the rock, remember?

Toni: Right, I try, I try.

Steve: So I actually thought that this year’s conference was significantly better this year, like we kind of took the same no fluff attitude, and put together another actionable curriculum based conference. And I actually thought that the quality of the attendees was better than last year’s, and what’s cool was that a bunch of the attendees from the previous year actually launched profitable ecommerce businesses within a year.

Toni: And I think that was really exciting to see people that we met the first year and these are people you might have known them from your course but for me they were complete strangers, to meet them in year one and then see them again in year two and hear about their success. To me that was probably one of the best things about the event and the people that were there.

Steve: Yeah, and we probably have about Dean in the past, but he basically launched a product I want to say two months after last year’s summit and then he qualified for the mastermind this year which meant that he made $250,000 in revenue within a year which is pretty cool.

Toni: And I think that’s exciting because I think people like Dean and then we had Carlos [ph] who hit a goal, Chris Nelson who wanted to be able to join the fuel forums, that was one of his goals after year one, and I think to see people take action and have those success based on either the relationships they made or the stuff that they learned at the event, to me is kind of why we do this.

Steve: Yeah, the only thing for me is I felt like it was a lot more work this year, maybe it’s because I ended up speaking four times, so I never felt like I could relax, like I always had this anticipation of having to get on stage, but I had a blast, I had a blast.

Toni: You should stop signing yourself up for sessions I feel.

Steve: Maybe we should have you do more sessions; I think that’s the kick, because people did like your talk a lot according to the surveys, so maybe you should do even more.

Toni: But I’m glad.

Steve: So one thing that I kept getting complimented on was actually the networking aspects of the conference. I actually didn’t feel like we did anything differently than last year, like we catered in lunch, we had cocktail parties every night, but for some reason everyone said the networking was even better, what are your thoughts on that?

Toni: It’s funny because I agree with you, that was the one thing that we didn’t change at all because I think you and I both know the power of networking and know that some of the – the reason why you attend the conference because you can buy the virtual pass, and you can get all the information in a recording that everyone that attends is getting. But the real value in attending the event is the networking and being able to sit face to face with speakers, with other attendees, people that are more successful, people that are just same level.

I think that’s the thing, the value that you get from actually making the commitment to attend an event, and so I thought it was funny that people thought the networking was so much better because we kept it exactly the same.

Steve: Actually one thing – this is candy [ph] right now, one thing we did do differently was we invited the speakers from last year to come again without even having them talk, and so they were just hanging around and answering questions for everybody. Maybe that was the difference, I don’t know.

Toni: And I think that’s a great point and I didn’t think about that at all, but I think definitely and we love our speakers, like we want all of them to come back every year even if they don’t have something new to share just to be part of the event.

I think another thing that we did this year that made it easier for people to network is in our private Facebook group we had people starting doing live, Facebook lives or even not if you didn’t live video you could just post a video that you had prerecorded, and I think there were people that showed up at the event who felt like they knew each other even though they actually hadn’t met, but because they had done a video, just everyone seemed more relatable right off the bat.

Steve: Yeah I think last year FB live wasn’t that prevalent, right?

Toni: Yeah, in fact I think it was maybe just launching.

Steve: Yeah, okay maybe that was it, yeah we all did videos, which was great and the attendees started doing videos too. So I actually felt like I knew some of these people even before the event even started which is pretty cool.

Toni: And I think even though you see people’s picture on Facebook or on their webpage, seeing them talk and interacting with them even on a short Facebook Live is really – it makes a difference in then meeting them in person, because you feel like you already know them even if it’s just a little bit.

Steve: Mm-hmm and I think the other attendees felt that too, and I remember people started kind of getting together and saying, hey you want to grab dinner even people like well before the event even started.

Toni: Yeah and that was something we did different this year too was we created those dinner spreadsheets so people could sign up to do dinner groups and sometimes they were topic based like advanced Amazon sellers who were wanting to transition to your own website, and sometimes it was just people that wanted to meet and hangout and just talk general ecommerce. And I think that was helpful too because it allowed them to organize pre-event as opposed to five o’clock, everyone is tired from the day and everyone is trying to figure out, know one has each other’s number or contact information and it’s a little crazy.

Steve: Yeah, I know that was pretty key because I remember last year one of the feedback that we got was it was kind of intimidating to go to a conference where you don’t know everyone, and so by allowing people to kind of connect beforehand, that actually added greatly to the networking I guess at the event. Maybe that’s what did it, I don’t know.

Toni: Yeah and thanks to Susie, who coordinated a lot of that for us. She was one of our attendees who was local, and she did a really great job in really getting those groups together.

Steve: Yeah she coordinated all the dinners if I recall, right?

Toni: Yeah.

Steve: So before we get into the kind of like the key takeaways, let’s start by talking a little bit about what we did differently this year. So first of we kind of kicked off the conference by running a special mastermind session, so basically we sold a special pass where we screened attendees to make sure that they made at least $250,000 in revenue.

Then we locked ourselves in a room, catered in food and we spent the entire day helping each other with our businesses, like everyone took turns in the hot seat, told the group about one strategy that was working very well for their businesses, and then one problem that they’ve been struggling with, and then everyone in the entire group helped them solve that problem.

What was really awesome for me was how open and how comfortable everyone was and how willing they were to reveal their problems and their triumphs and even reveal their products on Amazon, like typically people tend to be a lot more secretive about their Amazon products. I actually ended up learning a lot myself, and by the end I actually felt really close to the mastermind attendees. What was your experience Toni?

Toni: I totally agree, basically the exact — because I know we were in separate rooms but I was – and I’m not as ecommerce advanced as some of the people even in that room, but I loved that they were so willing to share strategies because I think a lot of times in some of these Facebook groups that we are in, people will share just enough but not the full strategy because they don’t want to give things away that could hurt their sales, and I felt like that was not the case in the mastermind groups at all.

People were so honest and really, really willing to say, hey you should try this or you should do this because it’s working for me and here is why.

Steve: Yeah, and I think we didn’t have any competitors in the mastermind groups, so we did really a good job of screening those people out so that people didn’t really feel like anyone else in the room was directly competing with them, which allowed everyone to kind of reveal their niche and all their strategies, which in a lot of cases are applicable no matter what you sell.

Toni: Definitely, and that was what was fun and I think it was also fun to see people help other people make the connections maybe with a tool or a person that could help them grow their business, and that happened a lot in our room just sharing even the resources.

Steve: And there were some pretty high powered companies in there making seven even eight figures in revenue which is pretty cool too.

Toni: Yeah.

Steve: One other thing we did for the masterminds, we actually invited some of the speakers to help moderate and just lend their opinion to kind of jumpstart stuff, to kind of facilitate, and so I think we had Mike Jackness, we had Dana, we had me, you, we had Jeff Cohen and Rawse [ph]. And so it was great, everyone lent really strong opinions, a lot of people came in actually doing really well and they just needed some direction on where to focus their efforts, and I think collectively we were able to steer people in the right direction on where to focus their efforts next.

So let’s talk about the next major change, the roundtables. Now, this was actually Toni’s idea, so I’ll let her describe it, and I just remember being very skeptical at first.

Toni: I think that’s an understatement for sure. One of the things that I think really helps people is that when you go to a session and you are in a group with 50 to 100 people in a session and the speaker has time for Q&A at the end and it’s usually not a lot of time, maybe five to seven minutes, there is a lot of people that either they just aren’t comfortable asking the question, they don’t want to ask a dumb question or they don’t want to – I think we’ve all been in a room where the person asks these super specific only applicable to their exact business question and everyone else in the room is eye rolling and slumping back in their seat.

So the roundtable allows for attendees to sit in a very small group, eight to nine people, with a speaker or an expert and talk and ask those really specific questions. They’ll ask the questions that they maybe were intimidated to ask in the session and get a lot more in-depth of an answer, because we all know that when you have five minutes for Q&A at the end of the session, the speaker is trying to get to three or four people just to be courteous and to be able to move throughout the group.

I think roundtables allowed people to stay with the speaker for an hour and really talk in-depth about whatever topic they spoke on at the conference. From the feedback we’ve received, people really enjoy getting that, it’s almost like one-on-one, it’s not exactly one-on-one but I think people loved being able to sit there, ask a question, then ask the follow up and then have someone else in the table either give more information like being able to help or even then piggy back on that question and ask another question. It really allows for a great discussion for a pretty extended period of time on a specific topic.

Steve: I remember in my table I think there was only like ten people, was that the case for most of the tables?

Toni: Everybody had ten including the speaker, so nine was the max of the attendees.

Steve: Okay, I just remember like we talked about – so my topic what I talked about was getting past Amazon and then getting sales in your own online store, and I remember we started out my roundtable kind of talking about some of the strategies that you can do on your own so as to get customers, then we started getting kind of philosophical and like why are we doing all this stuff, how much money is enough, and it actually turned into a really interesting discussion that was really thought provoking for me and the rest of the people on my table, I don’t know, what was your table like?

Toni: That’s funny because mine was the exact opposite. So I did a roundtable on Pinterest, and we basically opened up people’s Pinterest accounts, went into their ad manager, adjusted things, found ways to tweak, add copy or just go into their accounts and actually working on it right and in there, which I think is the benefit of that small group, because obviously you can’t do that in a classroom setting of 50 or 100 people, but you can easily do that when you have a table of six or seven.

What was nice is Carol [inaudible 00:15:53] was in my group and she is very, very savvy on Pinterest and so she was actually able to help people at the table as well, so it kind of turned into this Pinterest mastermind really all sharing ideas and things that were working and tweaking and giving advice on how to make things better. So ours was very practical, everyone had their computer open, we were all logged in to the Pinterest dashboard, and we were making changes at the table.

Steve: Dude that’s cool, that’s really cool. One thing that I actually liked was all the speakers – because I kind of went around to the tables afterwards and kind of talked to the other speakers, and they all found it really rewarding themselves, and the fact that they were just present and they went to all the events, they stayed for the roundtables, I think that just had a tremendous impact on the attendees as well.

Toni: I think so too, and one of the fun things about the roundtable and obviously we did this towards the end of the event but we still had one more networking event after that is that I think it gave people that – and I’m an extrovert, I think you are an extrovert, it’s not hard for us to approach people that we don’t know, but I think it is hard in a big setting like a conference to just walk up to a Scott Walker or Greg Mercer if you’ve been following them for a long time and you’re almost a fan, right?

But when you sit at the small table with them for an hour and you really feel like you get to know them, then later on when you’re at the networking event that night they are a friend, you’re not a fan anymore. So it changes the dynamic of the relationship and I think it gives people more confidence even to continue those networking and masterminding throughout the rest of the event.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to tell you about a free resource that I offer on my website that you may not be aware of. If you’re interested in starting your own online store, I put together a comprehensive six day mini course on how to get started in ecommerce that you should all check out. It contains both video and text based tutorials that go over the entire process of finding products to sell all the way to getting your first sales online.

Now this course is free and can be obtained at mywifequitherjob.com/free. Just sign up right there on the front page via email and I’ll send you the course right away. Once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/free, now back to the show.

And compounding on that point, a lot of us kind of stayed out really late at night, and I remember I was hanging out with Mercer and Jackness with a bunch of the attendees and Mercer, he’s kind of like a low key guy, but you get him like past midnight and he’s hilarious. It was really good hanging out with everyone and the attendees and we all became really good friends just from hanging out late at night.

Toni: I have to take your word on that one.

Steve: I’ve got video in case Greg ever messes with me, I got a couple of things that I can use against him.

Toni: And I think that’s what makes our speakers amazing and I think they’re amazing even without this, but you and I both have been to events, actually have been together where the speaker comes on the stage, gives a great talk, you and I are both supper impressed and then the speaker is MIA for the rest of the event. That just is not the case with our speakers, I mean they are available and around, you’re eating lunch with them, you’re networking with them, they are going to all the other sessions, like they are sitting there in the sessions but they are not speaking.

I think that’s really valuable because, one it makes them so much more relatable to the attendees but then two that shows everybody that they are still learning too, they’re still wanting to grow their business, none of our speakers has arrived. And I think they are very good at letting people know, hey I’m only speaking because I’m an expert in this specific topic, but I still need to learn all these other things.

Steve: Yeah, I think I’m going to take some credit here. I think it’s because all of us are just friends and a lot of us go to the summit just to kind of hang out, and so it’s not like we just want to speak and then leave, we actually want to hang out with each other, and the attendees are really cool too. It’s kind of just a given atmosphere, it just happened naturally, it’s not like it was planned but it just happened.

Toni: Well and I think – and we won’t say any names but you talked to some pretty big speakers who wanted to speak at our event that we basically turned down because they wanted to fly in and out.

Steve: That’s correct, actually that’s one of the first questions I always ask, like are you just going to give the speech and take off, or are you going to stick around and hang out? It’s almost like a requirement to stick around and hang out.

Toni: But there is still so much more, I mean obviously the sessions were very valuable but the amount of value that the attendees get from the extra is – you just can’t really even put like a value on that to me.

Steve: Yeah, absolutely. All right, so we switch gears a little bit and talk about some takeaways?

Toni: Sure.

Steve: Yeah, so I’ll start and there’s one statistic actually that Greg talked about in one of his talks, I just want to talk about a little bit. In one of his slides he said that the people who start on ecommerce and keep at it for a long time always do better, and he quoted this statistic which was pretty cool to me, “For people selling less than 18 months, 50% of them made between $157 and $2,500 a month, but for the people selling more than 18 months, 50% were making between $1,000 and $12,000 a month,” which just goes to show that this is not a get rich quick scheme, you’ve got to really think about it in terms of the long haul, and if you stick with it, the revenues will only grow over time.

Toni: That’s true, I wasn’t in his session, but that’s a great takeaway.

Steve: Actually I wasn’t in but I actually watched all the videos after the fact. So here’s how we did it, so Toni and I obviously we couldn’t be in any of the same sessions because we had to moderate each of the rooms with the speakers. So we run two tracks, and so Toni was in charge of one and I was in charge of the other, so between the two of us we saw all the talks, how come you didn’t see Greg’s, where were you?

Toni: I was watching my kid’s graduation right outside the room via Facebook Live.

Steve: Oh I didn’t realize that, okay.

Toni: So I stepped out, so I missed — I saw the very beginning and I saw the very end, but I missed the mid of it because I was outside on Facebook Live watching my kids graduate, but not winning parent of the year for that, but anyway thank goodness for Facebook, right?

Steve: See yeah Toni always takes one for the team, and she always lets me know it when she takes one for the team.

Toni: Yeah, you didn’t even know that till right now.

Steve: I didn’t know and I always sacrifice my birthday. For some reason this is second straight year where I’ve been celebrating my birthday in a hotel at the Sellers Summit.

Toni: Yeah but you won’t let us eat your cake, so come on.

Steve: Yes, yes I don’t like attention for birthdays these days.

Toni: I know. One of the takeaways I had and this was from Dana Jaunzemis who is I think I want to be her best friend, I don’t think she feels the same way about me, but I’m pretty sure that that’s how I feel about her, and I don’t think she does anything publicly as far as she doesn’t have a course or a podcast or anything like that, but if you ever have an opportunity to hear her speak and interact with her, I highly recommend it. She is brilliant.

I’m not sure where I – I don’t know if this happened in just a conversation, networking or within her session, but she talked about the tasks that we do on a regular basis on our business, and she said she categorized all her tasks to daily, weekly and monthly, and she basically built her business so that anything that had to be done daily or weekly was something that she never touched and she wasn’t involved in it at all.

The only task that she was involved in were the monthly tasks, and I feel like for those of us who have been doing this for a couple of years and our business has been growing but now we’re sort of at that next level, I’m realizing that in order to move to the next point in my business I have to pull myself out of the daily and weekly tasks, because that’s where I’m focused as opposed to focusing on the big picture items that will actually bring in more money. For some reason the way that she said it, it was one of those light bulb where I thought, oh this is what I’m doing wrong right now, this is why I’m feeling very overwhelmed with some of the things that I have to get done.

So that’s on my list to start implementing this summer is to work on eliminating myself from those daily and weekly tasks.

Steve: Actually her entire talk was kind of eye opening, just how she kind of focused on the things that were generating the most revenue and kind of put all those other things off to the side. It’s…

Toni: Most profit, most profit.

Steve: Most profit, that’s correct yes.

Toni: Yeah, I also want to build my little profit metrics too, that’s on my list as well.

Steve: Yeah and — actually switching gears, I watched Manuel Becvar’s talk last night, he talked about product sourcing and I kind of liked his no nonsense approach to it.

Toni: Yes.

Steve: And there is this one story that he told during his talk where he got into some disagreement with his vendor, they sold them some stuff with defects and I think – and you can correct me if I’m wrong but I think he went to the Canton Fair, found this vendor, sat in his booth and would not leave until the vendor was willing to give him a refund or some sort of concession. And everyone that came into the booth, he went, hey, don’t work with this guy, he’ll screw you over, and then within like a couple of minutes the vendor kind of caved, and gave him what he wanted, that was a pretty cool story.

Toni: Yeah, you could see the room too getting very excited when he was telling that story, because everybody wants to be that guy that will do that but nobody is really brave enough. And Manuel if you know him, he’s very soft spoken, he’s very quiet, and to think of him like sitting there and doing that was pretty cool.

Steve: Yeah I know and not only that, it was just really interesting to see his approach to the whole sourcing process. It’s very structured, like when my wife and I do things it’s kind of all based on like the relationship, we don’t have like a whole bunch of these contracts and it was just really interesting to see all these formal documents that Manuel had with this vendor as well.

Toni: I loved his talk and one takeaway I had from his talk, and it’s funny because I feel like every talk I took something away, but sometimes the takeaways were really small but I think will affect my business in a big way. But one of the things he said was he gives a lifetime guarantee on all these products that he sells, and he said, I see these people on there doing 90 day guarantee, or whatever, a year or six months. He’s like lifetime, the wording matters and most people are never going to come back to you in five years and ask for the guarantee, they are just not.

He said but to just say lifetime over some other period of time with an end to it makes a difference when people make the purchase.

Steve: Yeah actually that – I think L.L. Bean has that same guarantee, right?

Toni: Yeah I think [inaudible 00:26:12] might do something similar too, but I know L.L. Bean is lifetime.

Steve: Yeah totally. Interesting I actually did not pick that up from his talk.

Toni: Yeah that was the moment – because we don’t do a lifetime guarantee and we make a big deal that we have a guarantee and I thought this is silly, because if someone emails me in a year I’m still refunding them or replacing it, I’m not going to hold them to whatever we say we are doing anyway.

Steve: Actually that’s true, so in that respect you may as well just offer the lifetime. I didn’t think of that actually.

Toni: Yeah, that was one of those moments where I was like, uh that’s a good idea and I need to do it right now and I can because it’s easy to implement.

Steve: I’m just trying to think of wedding handkerchiefs like they get a divorce, are they going to return the handkerchief to me, I guess I would take it back.

Toni: Would you re-embroider someone else’s name?

Steve: Yeah hopefully they’ll get married again and then in that case we’ll offer them a coupon.

Toni: That’s right.

Steve: Two for one.

Toni: That’s right.

Steve: All right so let’s see. The next talk that I watched, and I’m pretty sure you weren’t in Brian Johnson’s talk, right, you were in the other one?

Toni: I wasn’t yeah.

Steve: Brian Johnson is known for just doing Amazon PPC and teaching it, he teaches a course. I loved how he defines specific guidelines on how to refine your campaigns, and the thing with Brian, he runs a whole bunch of different people’s campaigns, and so he actually had metrics defined to see how well you were doing like in terms of click through rate, what your conversion rate should be and that was kind of eye opening for me because it gives you some metrics with which you can gauge your own campaigns, so I thought that was really cool.

Toni: That’s on my list to watch this week because I’m not a great Amazon PPC person, so I’m excited to watch his.

Steve: So what was going on at the same time as Brian’s, I can’t even remember, was that Brandy’s maybe?

Toni: I do not remember, hold on I can look at my – I can probably look at the calendar.

Steve: No that’s okay.

Toni: It was Greg Mercer, he was doing that.

Steve: Oh it was Greg’s okay. You were at graduation, that’s probably why.

Toni: So one of the talks that I will probably watch six times on video was Bill D’Alessandro’s. He did a talk on automation and he automates I feel like everything in his business, and his talk made me realize that there was a lot of things that we have people involved in that don’t necessarily need to be involved in it, and that there are tools that we can use that make the job actually much more productive – it’s much more productive to get it done with the tool as opposed to a person, and then you still have that person for when you get to a certain point but there is a lot of things that you can automate in your business.

The amount that he does is like ridiculous levels of automation, but I could see even in his talk how I can just make three or four small changes in automating some things that we do using some pretty inexpensive tools.

Steve: Yeah, actually Bill and I kind of have the same philosophy and he’s just taken it to the next level, like I’m pro like a computer and try to get the computer to do as much as possible and not rely on humans, and he just took it to a different level. It’s really obvious like in his house, I don’t know if you ever talked about this with Bill, but in his house he has every single device and appliance automated with his Amazon echo.

So he can walk in the room and say, turn on the TV, or play this music or whatever and he has all these devices hooked up to it, and so as a result he spends most of his time like gardening his vegetable garden with his girlfriend.

Toni: In his talk there was so much information in his talk that I feel like even if you watched it a couple of times you would get something new out of it because there’s just — it’s a lot to digest but definitely opened my eyes to some things that I’m not doing in my business, and I think most people that I talked to aren’t doing as well.

Steve: Yeah totally, and then Bill’s business is kind of on a different scale, he’s got like six or seven child companies as part of his umbrella company. He really has to automate a lot with the stuff that he has, and he’s just done a really good job with it.

Toni: Speaking of children, another takeaway I had was that a lot of people have their children work with them Steve.

Steve: I unfortunately only have two workers and they are not of age yet, but actually I was surprised, so the running joke here is I always make fun of Toni because she employs her kids to do everything and then she pays them with like [inaudible 00:30:27] and food, and I was making fun of her and then all of a sudden like these other mums – it’s always mums, these other mums came and started raising their hand and posting pictures of them working with their kids too. There’s got to be some log into that, I don’t know.

Toni: Here’s what I thought was cool; I’ll joke in the side on that was that it was fun to see the amount of people who did have it, like Dean’s son is working with him and his son is an adult and not getting paid in sloppies [ph], but it was cool to see the amount of people that did have their kids working with them and then their kids had gone on to spin off and start businesses.

One of the girls Julie who was in the mastermind, she has a ton of kids but she has her younger kids are still working with her but then her oldest daughter has this six figure business span off from what her mum was doing. So I think that was really neat to see the people that had started this several years ago and now their kids are doing it too and their kids are actually pretty successful.

Steve: I mean that’s great story Toni, but like when they are young, like just seeing the photos, they don’t look happy, they’re just like I guess I want to eat dinner tonight so I’ll pack these necklaces.

All right so one of my favorite talks was Rachel Miller’s, and she talked about how to create a viral Facebook fan page and I was just shocked, I mean she’s created multiple one million plus fan pages, and it’s been amazing like she can take these Facebook fan pages and drive traffic to products and make a killing. I’ve actually since enrolled in her class and it’s just eye opening how she does it, you were at her talk, were you?

Toni: I wasn’t and I wanted to be but you wanted to be there too.

Steve: Oh no, okay usually I let you choose whatever talk that you want to go to.

Toni: All right I’m not sure about that, but no I was actually in Bernie’s talk, and he gave a really great presentation on how to create these customer feedback loops, and one of the things that I thought was interesting is he has a tool called Efficient Era which you and I both use, and I realized in his talk that I was not using it to its fullest capability at all. What I really got from it is that when you get this data no matter what tools you use, what are you then doing with the data to upgrade your business?

I think that’s where a lot of people get hang up is that they invest in tools, there are tons of them that you can use to develop your business, and then they don’t actually analyze the data that they’re getting from those tools and necessarily make changes. So I thought that he did a good job of giving people ideas about when you’re getting this data about your products or about your returns or about your customers, then what do you do to improve on that or improve on your products and things like that to grow your business.

Steve: Yeah, you know I’ve actually taken a different stance on just stats over the years, like I try not to emphasize too much on the stats unless I’m going to actually do something about it, because traditionally in the past since I’m an engineer I’m like a big stats freak, but then I just – my wife actually started this, she’s like do you ever look at those stats and what have they done for us? And I don’t really have a good answer most of the times.

Speaking of which Mike Jackness, he did a great job, he always makes fun of me in his talks and we had called a truce prior to it, but despite the truce he actually made fun of me again, so he’s got to pay back, he’s got to get some payback for that. But it was really interesting for him to talk about how he’s grown his ColorIt business to a multi seven figure business in such a short period of time using giveaways.

My key take away from that is if we can create a rabid audience by giving away your product, like you’re giving them something away for free, they appreciate your company that much more, and they become rabid fans and they are much more likely to buy from you in the future. So I remember he was collecting email addresses and getting shares at some ridiculously low – like he was paying pennies on the dollar for email addresses which is pretty amazing.

Toni: Yeah, and it was interesting because he and Scott Voelker, I think Scott went first and then Mike spoke right after him and it’s like their sessions piggy backed off each other and we didn’t really know that that was going to be the case. But Scott talked about how to launch products in a non review world now that Amazon has made the changes and you don’t have incentivized reviews any more.

He had some really great strategies for basically using contests and giveaways to launch a product – not giveaways but contests to launch a product and how he had set up these landing pages and the whole – it was neat because he actually walked people through his case study that he had done. I cannot even remember the product that he was launching, maybe he didn’t even say it, I’m not sure, but he walked people through how exactly he went about building the buzz and everything around the product to then naturally get those reviews as opposed to the old way.

Steve: I want to take a moment to thank ReferralCandy for being a sponsor of the show. Now in this day and age word of mouth is a huge driver of business for most ecommerce stores, and the best way to amplify word of mouth marketing is through a referral program. This is where ReferralCandy shines, with just a couple of clicks to the mouse you could add a referral program to your ecommerce store and reward your customers for telling their friends about your shop.

And this tactic works wonders; and in fact it is not uncommon to get a ridiculous return on investment. So for example Greats Footwear who is a ReferralCandy customer is currently seeing a 20X ROI. Referral word of mouth marketing is also useful for building up your social media presence as well, because everyone is talking about your company with their friends on Facebook and Twitter.

And the best part is that ReferralCandy is a set it and forget it service, requires no technical setup and they are giving My Wife Quit Her Job listeners 50 bucks to try them out if you go to promo.referralcandy.com/steve. Once again it’s promo.referralcandy.com/steve to get a $50 credit to try out the service risk free. Now back to the show.

I think that the key difference between both of their strategies was Mike was giving away his own products and I think Scott was giving away products that were related to what he wants to sell, and both strategies ended up working pretty well.

Toni: Yes, Scott was giving away tennis shoes I think, but I know he was…

Steve: I think they were Jordan’s, right, or something like that yeah.

Toni: Well, they weren’t Lebron’s, right?

Steve: They weren’t yeah, yeah; no one wants those any more.

Toni: No [inaudible 00:36:51].

Steve: Let’s see who we are missing here like…

Toni: But you went to Steve’s with Instagram and Facebook ads.

Steve: Oh yeah, so this was like a more advanced talk, so in order to get stuff out of it you actually had to understand all the fundamentals of Facebook, and what was key with his – so Steve – so the reason why I had him speak was he actually helped me with my Facebook ads.

The guy knows a lot, and he’s worked with a lot of large companies, and really the key these days for making profitable Facebook ads is video, and kind of how to structure campaigns in such a way that you can bring people back over and over and over again until they are ready to buy. So it was a pretty eye opening talk for me. I know a lot of people in the audience it was a more advanced talk, but very valuable if you even dabbled with remotely with Facebook ads.

Toni: Well, and then we had a video marketing company with Gen Video there and I know you did a case study with them over Christmas time and I know I think you presented, I wasn’t in that talk but you presented it with Jason.

Steve: Yeah Jason did most of the presenting, I just came on at the very end to kind of present my data, and these days like influencer marketing is huge. I remember if you guys listened to the podcast, I had Emmanuel Eleyae on, and he actually based his entire seven figure business on influencer marketing, so I was itching to try it, hooked up with Jason from Gen.Video, run my own influencer campaign and it was a success.

I’ve already kind of documented a little bit on the blog, but we also gave a 401 talk at the conference about it which was pretty cool.

Toni: And if I remember correctly the videos that you had were made for you with the influencer, can you now use these videos in your Facebook marketing?

Steve: Yeah, so what is cool about Gen Video is one, you can actually have these videos posted underneath your Amazon listings, and also you have the rights to the videos, so you can actually take clips of it and then use them in your Facebook ads, you can actually post the videos directly in your site like outside of YouTube, and that’s one of the big value ads of using a service like Gen.Video.

Toni: Yeah that’s on my list too, I was in a mastermind this past weekend and almost all we talked about was video on Facebook.

Steve: Yeah, and it kind of ties in to Steve Weiss’s talk, video, video, video. I mean that’s like the future of Facebook; they’re really emphasizing Facebook Lives and other video formats.

Toni: One of my favorite speakers always is Jeff Cohen from Seller Labs and his talk – it’s tough when you’ve got that 4:00PM time slot because everyone’s brain is exploding, but he’s always so informative and he’s a great speaker, and he just talked about evaluating your listings to figure out if you’re not selling like where that problem lies, whether it’s in your copy, whether it’s in your PPC, now where is the problem, is it your images, and he really walked people through step by step on how to evaluate your listings when items aren’t selling well.

Steve: Let’s see who we’re missing here, Brad Moss, I don’t think you watched that one because you wanted to watch the other ones so I let you.

Toni: Of course.

Steve: But amazing talk, so Brad is a former Amazonian in charge of Seller Central and what was interesting about his talk was he has this perspective from the inside, he was running Seller Central, he knows what Amazon wants, and so in his talk he actually kind of broke down the necessary action items that you should take based on your output statistics of like the data that Amazon is giving you.

I know that’s kind of like a cryptic description but it was really amazing because he has this inside knowledge of Amazon, he knows how things work and based on how your products are doing in certain metrics that he was measuring, he was able to tell you what you should do next with your listings and how to improve them.

Toni: It was interesting to meet him and talk to him, and he did talk a little bit about this on the panel discussion at the end just how the mind of Amazon works, and I think everybody wants to really understand Amazon and why things happen the way they do, and he did bring a lot of really valuable insight.

Steve: Yeah absolutely, and well we should talk about Cynthia a little. I stayed for Cynthia Stine’s talk and it’s always really interesting because she’s on the cutting edge of people’s accounts getting suspended. One takeaway and if you guys takeaway anything from this, like she was telling me that Amazon is really cracking down on certain things because there’s lots of mass fraud going on right now. So do not change the bank account that is associated with your Amazon account right now, because it will almost result in instant suspension right now.

Toni: Wow, that’s a great…

Steve: Crazy right?

Toni: Yeah, I feel like Amazon is really security wise really beefed a lot of things up lately just in general.

Steve: Yeah, and there is more to it than that, I mean she was just talking about what’s going on in the landscape, all the kind of evil things that sellers are doing right now and basically how to keep your account in good order so that you don’t get suspended, and what to do if you do get suspended as well.

Toni: Oh that’s one of the things that I love about our speakers in general is they are all up there sharing tips and strategies that are all Amazon approved. So people aren’t getting up there and telling you things that are going to get your account suspended which I appreciate.

Steve: Yeah and here’s what I like too, everyone there is actively selling, it’s not like they are talking about stuff there was like an year ago, everyone is actively selling and they are all up-to-date on the latest happenings.

Toni: Well, and then you did a Q&A with Jared Stark from Law Trades, which I know people love getting free legal advice when they can.

Steve: Yeah, so it was different because it was perfect timing because Amazon had just rolled out their new brand registry, and so we fielded lots of different questions on trademarks, what it covers, how much it costs and basically a whole bunch of these legal issues also where people were accusing other sellers of trademark infringement, patent infringement and what to do in these certain cases. So I actually learned a lot and it was free instead of having to pay someone like $300 an hour.

Toni: That’s right, a free legal advice and you can’t turn that down.

Steve: And of course we had Pam who talked about how to get products over to your warehouse from overseas, how to ship your products directly to Amazon’s warehouse for people who weren’t doing that already, always eye opening stuff.

Toni: And what I love about Pam is that you can always find her during the event, so if you have any questions about logistics she is almost always available to answer those whether it be in a session or just walking around the event.

Steve: And she’s always so willing to help, and what I really like about her company is that she really will hold your hand through that entire process. So if you’re brand new and you’re kind of scared about importing, Pam will definitely make you feel comfortable about it.

Toni: For sure and I didn’t get to see your talk.

Steve: Oh yeah, what did I talk about? So I talked about breaking the shackles away from Amazon and moving to your own online store, and I guess if there is one key take-away from my shop is that a lot of people start driving traffic to a website without having the necessary infrastructure in place because you have to have ways to get people back to your store over and over again to get them to buy repeatedly, and there’s other different things that you can do just to make sure – a lot of different things that Amazon does that you need to do as well in order for your own store to be successful.

All right Toni I think that covers most of the talks right, am I missing anyone here?

Toni: I think we got them.

Steve: I think we got everyone, yeah so once again I know tickets for the Sellers Summit sold out really quickly; I think we sold out this year at the end of February because once again we limited ticket sales, and I think we had a pretty long wait list again, right?

Toni: Yeah we did.

Steve: And so this year once again what we’re going to try to do is we’re going try to bring the conference to you guys. So if you didn’t get a chance to actually attend the conference we‘re selling virtual passes but we’re also doing a live Q&A webinar. So first of all, all the video sessions are available for purchase, you get them in HD, you also get an MP3 version and all the slides, but we’re holding a live Q&A webinar with a bunch of the speakers on June 26th.

So right now we have myself, we have Mike Jackness, we have Jeff Cohen, we have Scott Voelker and we have Greg Mercer, and what we’re going to do is we’re going to solicit questions from everyone who either attended the conference or purchased a virtual pass, and we’re just going to go ahead and answer all those questions live on the webinar, and in addition we’re also going to be fielding questions live during the webinar and hopefully will answer all the questions that you might have on some of the sessions that were given at the Sellers Summit.

Toni: We did this last year and it was really fun to be able to just — for our attendees and people that bought the virtual passes to be able to interact with them and get their questions answered by people that are really working on it right then and there.

Steve: And this live Q&A webinar will be recorded as well and added to the repository for the virtual pass. So even if you end up missing the live session you will be able to watch it on video, and if you submit your questions we will be sure to get to them and your answer will be recorded on the video in case you can’t make it live.

And finally the last question that I’m hoping to answer here is – I actually don’t even know the answer to this, you probably know the answer to this Toni, where and when is it going to be next year?

Toni: We haven’t decided yet, we’re working on it.

Steve: You always say we, but I actually have very little say, you kind of tell me where it’s going to be and when it’s going to be at.

Toni: I’m working on it.

Steve: You’re working on it, okay. So are we looking at like July to make the announcement or?

Toni: We’re looking at July, well, definitely the timing of the event will still be probably a little bit earlier in May next year, I know people had some conflicts with high school and college graduation, so we’re trying to push it up a couple of weeks, and plus Steve for some reason doesn’t like to have his birthday with me, he’d rather have it with his friends back home, but we’re going to try to push it up a couple of weeks, and we’re just doing some final hotel scouting and we should be probably in the next couple of weeks putting the ticket up on sale.

Steve: Really okay.

Toni: So get that page right Steve.

Steve: I know one person in particular who was complaining loudly about the whole graduation thing, but she was a [inaudible 00:47:00] fan, so we didn’t really listen to her very much.

Toni: We don’t cater to [inaudible 00:47:03] fans, sorry.

Steve: So what was really cool and this is kind of how I want to close it, what’s really cool is Toni and I we kind of run this conference together and our reward for the last couple of years has been to go to the NBA finals, so this year we hit games one and two and both brought victories I might add.

Toni: Very fun.

Steve: Yeah very fun, it was particularly rewarding to see us win it all, so go warriors.

Toni: That’s right.

Steve: Okay, anything else Toni that you want to add, any other key take-aways?

Toni: Just really a big thank you to our speakers and our attendees and our sponsors who really make the event what it is, I think it’s their – and that’s why I just like the word synergy, I really do think that them all working together really makes this event really special and something different than the other events that are out there.

Steve: And special thanks to Liz who did most of the work, right Toni if I understand?

Toni: Absolutely [inaudible 00:47:55].

Steve: Zack and Todd who handled a lot of our AV, and once again what’s funny about the Sellers summit, it’s like a family business. Toni brings in her entire family to help with the conference. I ended up paying them real cash though, was that supposed to be the case?

Toni: It’s hard when they grow up, when your brother hits over 40, he somehow wants the paycheck, right?

Steve: Yeah, what about your nephew though, Toni’s nephew did our video for us?

Toni: Yeah, and I will say about the video because we’ve had a lot of questions about this and I know some people are still on the fence, is that the video is not just the slides with someone talking, you actually have a video of the speakers and the slides are then merged in together. So the slides will get big when they’re talking about something real specific on the slide and then you go back to seeing the speaker which to me I love.

I love being able to watch the speaker actually talk and interact, and then see the slides when I need to, but sometimes it’s hard for me to watch recordings when it’s just slides and audio because if they’re off the slides you tend to sort of day dream, right?

Steve: Mm-hmm, absolutely. Yeah actually that’s one of the big value adds like we didn’t really skimp on the video quality or anything like that, we didn’t just like take the raw footage and slap it on there, Toni’s nephew actually took the painstaking effort to edit everything and super impose the slides on top of the videos to kind of reproduce the live experiences as much as possible.

Toni: And he listened to all the talks, so I fully expect him to be launching a business in the next year, right?

Steve: See that’s the thing; see I think we should be paying him in slow piece, because he probably got more out of the talk than the money that it was worth, right?

Toni: For sure.

Steve: Yeah, anyways if any of you guys have any questions about the summit or the virtual pass, feel free to email me directly or Toni, that’s toni@sellerssummit.com or steve@sellersummit.com, and we’re here to answer your questions. All right Toni thanks a lot for coming back on the show, and yeah here is to the NBA finals next year once again.

Toni: All right go warriors.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Both Toni and I are thrilled with how the Sellers Summit went this past year, and all the session videos are actually currently up for sale at sellersummit.com/virtualpass, and if you sign up by June 26th we’re actually doing a live Q&A webinar with four of the speakers at the summit to answer all of your questions. Once again that’s sellerssummit.com/virtualpass. Now for more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode167.

And once again I want to thank Seller Labs. Their tool Ignite is what I use to manage my Amazon PPC campaigns. Instead of the old tedious way of generating reports and analyzing your ad campaigns in excel, Ignite aggregates all that info for you in one place and allows you to quickly visualize your data to make decisions fast.

Not only does it save time, but it also makes managing your Amazon campaigns so much easier. So head on over to sellerlabs.com/steve and sign up for a free 30 day trial, once again that’s sellerlabs.com/steve.

I also want to thank Klaviyo which is my email marketing platform of choice for ecommerce merchants. You can easily put together automated flows like an abandoned cart sequence, a post purchase flow, a win back campaign, basically all these sequences that will make you money on auto pilot. So head on over to mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/ K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

Now I talk about how I use these tools on my blog and if you’re interested in starting your own ecommerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away via email, thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

166: How To Thrive As An Artist In This Day And Age With Jeff Goins

166: How To Thrive As An Artist In This Day And Age With Jeff Goins

In this episode, I have Jeff Goins on the show. Jeff is someone who I met a Fincon years ago where he gave an awesome keynote speech. He’s the author of 4 books including a national bestseller called The Art of Work: A Proven Path to Discovering What You Were Meant to Do. He also runs a course called Tribe Writers where he teaches others how to get your writing noticed.

Anyway the reason why I decided to bring him on the show is because I wanted to interview a creative professional who makes a killing with his craft. And as part of running my blog, I often get readers who complain about how they can’t make money with what they enjoy.

Well Jeff is an incredible writer who built an audience of 100,000 people in 18 months. He’s pursuing his passion and making an awesome living while he’s at it. Enjoy the interview

What You’ll Learn

  • How Jeff turned writing into a full time living.
  • Jeff’s primary revenue sources.
  • How he sells his books
  • How many books he’s sold
  • How to make money writing
  • How to find out what people want to read before starting.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Ignite.Sellerlabs.com – If you are selling on Amazon and running Amazon Sponsored Ads campaigns, then Ignite from Seller Labs is a must have tool. Click here and get a FREE 30 Day Trial.
Ignite Logo

ReferralCandy.com – If you’re already getting steady orders every month, adding a refer-a-friend program to your store can give you a new sales channel. And ReferralCandy is the best in the business. Click here and get a FREE $50 credit towards your account.
referral candy

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and delve deeply into what strategies are working and what strategies are not with their businesses.

Today I’m thrilled to have Jeff Goins on the show, and Jeff is actually one of the most successful writers I know, and today we’re going to discuss how to make a living in the creative arts.

But before we begin I want to give a quick shout out to Seller Labs who is a sponsor of the show, and specifically I want to talk about their brand new tool Ignite which helps sellers manage their Amazon sponsored ads. Right now I’m actually using this tool to manage my Amazon sponsored ad campaigns, and it makes things a heck of a lot more convenient.

So number one I’ve always found it a major pain to generate my PPC reports on Amazon, cut and paste the data over to an excel spreadsheet and use pivot tables before I’m able do any analysis. But Ignite pulls all that info for you automatically and allows you to easily see what keywords are working and what are not immediately, there is no need to manually create reports or play with excel.

Second of all unless you’re a data geek, Amazon campaign data can be hard to understand, and what is cool is that Ignite makes keyword and bidding recommendations on the fly that can be applied with just a couple of clicks.

So let’s say one of my hankie keywords is bleeding money, well Ignite will alert me of that fact, and I can reduce that bid immediately. So bottom line Ignite makes managing your Amazon sponsored ad campaigns so much easier and the fact that they provide me with alerts means that I no longer have to monitor my campaigns like a hawk.

If there are keywords that are doing well, Ignite tells me to add them to my exact match campaigns. If my keywords are losing money, well Ignite tells me to either remove the keyword or to reduce the bid. So head on over to sellerlabs.com/steve where you’ll find awesome tutorials on how to run Amazon PPC ads and the opportunity to try Ignite for 30 days for free. Once again that’s sellerlabs.com/steve.

Now I also want to give a shout out to Klaviyo who is a sponsor of the show. Now I’m super excited to talk about Klaviyo because they are the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store, and I depend on Klaviyo for over 20% of my revenues. Now you’re probably wondering why Klaviyo and not another provider. Well Klaviyo is the only email platform out there that is specifically built for ecommerce stores, and here’s why it’s so powerful.

Klaviyo can track every single customer who has shopped in your store and exactly what they bought, this is extremely powerful. So let’s say I want to send an email to everyone who purchased a red handkerchief in the last week, easy. Let’s say I want to set up a special autoresponder sequence to my customers depending on what they bought, that’s piece of cake, and there is full revenue tracking on every single email I send.

Now Klaviyo is the most powerful email platform I’ve ever used and you can try them for free at mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O. Now on the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast; in this episode I’m going to be talking to Jeff Goins. Now Jeff is someone who I met at FinCon years ago where he gave an awesome keynote speech. He’s the author of four books including a national bestseller called The Art of Work; he also runs a course called Tribe Writers where he teaches others how to get their writing noticed.

Now the reason why I decided to bring him on the show is because I wanted to interview a creative professional who makes a killing with his craft, and as part of writing my blog I often get readers who kind of complain to me about how they can’t make money with what they enjoy. Now Jeff is an incredible writer who built an audience of 100K people in just 18 months, he’s pursuing his passion and he’s making an awesome living while he’s at it. And with that welcome to the show Jeff, how are you doing today man?

Jeff: I’m doing great Steve, thanks for having me.

Steve: Yeah give us a quick background story for those people in the audience who don’t know who you are, tell us about your business and whether being a writer was actually your plan from the start.

Jeff: Well if you haven’t heard of me you’re like most people, so no big deal, I hate when people are like, oh you probably heard of me. It’s a big world and it’s okay if you never heard of me.

Steve: Jeff is really modest by the way, he’s big time but he always self-duplicating is the right word.

Jeff: It’s a big internet, there’s a lot of people out there. Yeah so I’ve always been a creative, I love that word, I used to draw Garfield comics in grade school, I started playing guitar in high school, we started a band called Decaf because we had three guitars and no drums. So if you got decaffeinated music it’ll probably sound like that it’ll be percussionless.

Steve: That’s how you got your wife if I recall, right?

Jeff: Well no, we met in college and I met my wife because she didn’t know how to cook meat and she was throwing a party and she asked me to be the grill master, and it just kind of hit it off from there.

Steve: Okay, for some reason I remember you playing the guitar or something like that but anyway sorry; go on, I didn’t mean to interrupt.

Jeff: Yeah well so I took her on a date two weeks before I was leaving to go on to Luther band for a year, this is after college and I wrote a song and I said, hey do you want to date? And she’s like you’re leaving and you want a girlfriend, and she’s like fine whatever. And we wrote letters to each other for a year while I was travelling all over the country and this is in 2005, 2006. The band had one cell phone that we all shared, so really we communicated with each other for an entire year through hand written letters, very like 1945 style, old school courtship.

Steve: So were you a professional writer at this point?

Jeff: No, so I was sort of first forwarding ahead. So I always thought I would be a rock start though, I always thought I’d play – I thought, man my dream is to play music for a living, and then I did that after college, I was a Spanish patron and so as you can see I’ve got a lot of relevant skills that are building on each other. I was reading your credentials by the way Steve and I was like, oh like this is what is like a real successful person looks like.

Steve: Whatever man.

Jeff: I went to a small liberal arts college in Illinois, I went there because the tuition was cheap and we didn’t make much money and so I could go there for scholarships and grants for free, and I went to college and the first time I’d seen my college was freshman orientation. I never visited the college because it was the only one I could afford to go to and it ended up being a great education.

So I didn’t really know what I wanted to be, I was pretty good at Spanish at the time, and so I wanted to go to Spain, I wanted to travel and so I guess I made my mind and Spanish was something in my Spanish register. If you go to Spain all your classes will count as Spanish credits and you can basically major pretty easily. So that’s what I did and I had actually two majors, religion, and Spanish just because I was interested…

Steve: All very practical majors, how about that.

Jeff: Like things building up on each other, and in my spare time I had a job as writing tutor just to make some money. I always liked writing, I didn’t want to study English though because as you know, being in college you write a lot regardless of whether or not you’re an English major, and so I was always taking a writing class or two every semester because it was just something that was interesting to me.

I was always good at English, I won all those school spelling bees and stuff like that, but it was just this that thing I did, I never considered it as a vocational path and I think I certainly didn’t think of myself as a writer, and the answer is no, it was always just something that I did. I remember watching a Ted Talk once with Elizabeth Gilbert and she said, “Writing is my home, not in the sense that it’s like a place that I am from, but she says home is the thing that you always return to.”

I love that definition and for me writing was this thing that was always an escape for me. So when I was in middle school like a lot of middle schools I loved comic books, so I would create my own comic books and I would write these stories and I would draw these super heroes that looked a lot like the X man. I would do it on three ring call it route, no book paper, three in a spiral ring, no book paper and then I would bind these books together with twisty ties from the bread bag in our kitchen and that was — my first book was a comic book.

And then when I played music, my favorite part of playing music was writing songs, writing original songs, and then in college I was studying Spanish and I didn’t have a computer in college, and so I’d go to the computer lab late at night and when I was really, really stressed during finals like two, three o’clock in the morning I’d go to the computer lab and I’d open up a web browser and write an email to myself and send it to myself because that we didn’t have DropBox and that’s how we’d save things in the cloud so to speak.

I would write little stories, I’d write little essays, I’d write little articles, and it was just this thing that I did to relieve stress. Then after college I toured with this band, I had this girl on the hook that I dated for two weeks before I left for a year, we wrote letters, and my favorite part of touring with the band going all over the country playing all kinds of venues, really living this life that I thought this is my dream, it actually ended up being – it was fun but it ended up being kind of underwhelming.

Anybody who has ever toured with a band will tell you that like playing music on stage is a tiny fraction of how you spend your time and most of it is driving, sitting in a van. And I realized it wasn’t as glamorous as I thought it was, and my favorite part of that even on tour was I was responsible for keeping the team blog, and once a week I would write an update to our friends and family and what little fans we had and say, here is what we did this week, and that was my favorite part.

Steve: So how did that lead to money, sorry Jeff I want to get to like the money?

Jeff: Slowly and painfully, so I mean I forgot about all that stuff and so seven years after that I was working for a non-profit and much like your story Steve, my wife got pregnant by me fortunately and I was like I got to pay for this. And I made about $30,000 a year at the time and my wife made about a similar amount and we were living fine on that, but she like your wife wanted to stay home and be a mum for a while and we could not afford for her to do that, and so I became very motivated to find a way to make money, period.

Around that time I was sort of frustrated with my job, again I can really relate to your story, you go through these motions, you get up, you say hi to your spouse, eat breakfast, go to work, come back. I didn’t hate my job, some people really hate their jobs, and I think that that’s a blessing, like I think it’s a good thing when you hate your job because you know something has to change.

I didn’t hate my job, I was comfortable in it and I think that’s the most dangerous place for a person to be is comfortable because then you can just kind of drift through life and never really make the kind of changes that are going to lead to the kind of life that you ought to be living. So I was comfortable and getting ready to become parents made me a little uncomfortable and I realized I’ve got to figure this out.

I also realized what I was doing was not what I wanted to be doing for the next ten years. I was approaching 30 and I was going, gosh if I keep doing this every year I get a little raise, my boss gives me a little bit more money, a little bit more responsibilities, I’m not going to get fired and I could do this for the next ten years, no problem. What I foresaw was a mid life crisis, I saw myself turning 40 and going, what have I done with my life? Nothing bad necessarily, but not what I felt like I was meant to do.

So I started reading books and going to seminars and conferences and I tried to – I felt like I had an itch that I couldn’t scratch and I remember reading in a book that somebody said, the way that you find your dream is not by looking forward but by looking backward, and that the act of dreaming is not an act of discovery but of recovery. I just started to do this thing [inaudible 00:13:29] an author calls listening to your life.

He says, “Before we can tell our lives what we want to do with it, we need to listen to our lives telling us who we are.” I kind of went back through the chronology that I just shared with you and I realized that the thread, I’ve done so many different kind of weird things, travel, music, art, I was an actor at one point, in college I was involved in theater. All these different creative things and the thing kind of tying it all together was writing, that was the thing that I kept returning to, and I thought maybe I’m supposed o be a writer. So I started this blog, I started to take off, I spent about a year…

Steve: Is this Goins Writer, sorry.

Jeff: Yeah, yeah, yeah.

Steve: Okay, got it okay.

Jeff: And then around that time we got pregnant and tried to figure out a way to take this blog that was really an outlet for me and turn it into a source of income. It took a year to kind of build the audience and then the second year as we were getting ready to have our son I turned it into a six figure business, went from making zero dollars to $150,000 in about six months after [inaudible 00:14:42].

Steve: That’s amazing, okay so can you give the audience an idea of how you’re doing today in terms of like books sold and how many books you have out, that sort of thing.

Jeff: Sure, so my business model is I write books, I’ve written five books, so far the last book today it’s sold about 50,000 copies, a little bit more than that now. That came out in 2015 and that was the best-selling book out of all of them, but the book that started it sold about 10,000 copies, the next book sold about 20,000, so all together we’re probably – I don’t know pushing 75, 80 maybe.

Steve: Nice, one question I had for you was how does one make money writing in the first place? So I was actually offered a book deal by Wiley once and the offer and payment was like nothing, and then I would have to sell a ton of books to make any loyalties at all. So at least to me it didn’t seem like writing with a publisher was the right route to take.

Jeff: Right, yeah that’s a bad deal. So my business model is twofold, one I write books and I make enough money off of book advances and loyalties for me and for my family just doing that. The second business model has been for several years I teach people how to succeed as a writer, teach them how do what I do primarily through online courses, and all together that’s about a million dollar business every year.

So how does one make money writing? I think the safe answer is you make money writing the way that really you run most businesses which is through multiple streams of income, and so I think the dichotomy here is you can get any money writing or you can make millions of dollars if you’re an outlier. The truth is I know a lot of working writers who are making $50 to $200,000 a year and you don’t know their names and that’s okay.

But I think if you want to be an author there’s sort of two options and I have done both. One is to self publish my first book, sold 10,000 copies in the first year and this is how I got started was I wrote a book, I self published it just as an eBook on Kindle and I made $16,000 in six weeks and I was like, oh my God, I can do this. Remember at the time I was making $30,000 a year and so this was huge and this happened like days before our son was born.

So during those sleepless nights I just kept hassling and finding other ways to sell this book and kind of built on this and ended up getting into online courses and that sort of thing, and then a book publisher offered me a deal and the first book deal was low, it’s $5,000. The next one was $15,000, one after that was $50,000, the one after that was $150,000.

But it was a revenue stream and while that money was coming in I would go and tackle another one, and like I said through that, through some affiliate stuff, by the end of the first year we were at 150 grand.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to tell you about a free resource that I offer on my website that you may not be aware of. If you’re interested in starting your own online store, I put together a comprehensive six day mini course on how to get started in ecommerce that you should all check out. It contains both video and text based tutorials that go over the entire process of finding products to sell all the way to getting your first sales online.

Now this course is free and can be obtained at mywifequitherjob.com/free. Just sign up right there on the front page via email and I’ll send you the course right away. Once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/free, now back to the show.

Let’s talk about just going back to the beginning when you launched that first eBook, did you already have an audience through the blog?

Jeff: Yeah, so the first six months I went from zero to 72 email subscribers.

Steve: 72,000 or?

Jeff: 72.

Steve: Seven two okay.

Jeff: Seven two. I share this because I had a friend who started a blog and by day six he had 6,000 people a day visiting his blog, I mean it just kind of went viral and he’s like that’s how I knew I was supposed to be doing this. I started my blog and six people really…

Steve: I know that feeling by the way.

Jeff: You know what I’m saying, like you see somebody hit a home run and you go, why should I even do this, and it’s not like you’re not succeeding, it’s just comparatively speaking it feels like you’re failing. So it took me six months to get 72 email subscribers not like the sexy internet entrepreneurial story you’ve had. And then I was like I guess I need an eBook or something and I put that together and reached out to some people, asked them to share it, and then I went from 72 to 1,000 subscribers.

I feel like once you get to that point that’s when things start to become real. 1,000 people is a lot of people, I don’t have 1000 friends, I may have 100 or 200 friends, but to have 1,000 people want to listen to you, that’s a big deal. That was at month six, by the end of month 12 and I was blogging every day, this was 2011, and I was doing it just to practice and get better, and get this out there.

There wasn’t necessarily a goal to make money at that time; this was this itch that I was trying to scratch but then we got pregnant and then I heard these stories, I remember reading Darren Rowse’s blog and other blogs and going, oh like this is the thing that people do. So I started trying to figure that out, by the end of the year I had 10,000 email subscribers and I was making no money. I went to a conference, a public speaking conference; I was like maybe I can speak for a living.

I was just trying to find ways to make money and I was coming up empty. And then at that conference, I met a woman named Kerry Walkers who especially at the time was coaching a lot of online entrepreneurs and business owners. And I said, hey I am – she was a big deal and we had lunch at this conference and I said, how do I monetize my blog? She said, how many email subscribers do you have? I said 10,000, she goes, oh you’ve got a six figure business there.

I said, no I’ve two figure business, I think I made like 12 off of this last year from Amazon credit or something, I don’t know. And she goes, here’s what you’re going to do, and she told me what to do, and it was very simple, do a survey with your email list, ask them what they want, ask them how they want it, and ask them what they’re willing to pay. I did that and they said, we want an eBook, we want to learn about how you built your blog and we’ll pay you $5 for it.

And so afraid to charge anything, I said, okay here’s two eBooks for two for $2.99 and I launched that in January of 2012 and I made $1,500 in a weekend and that was incredible to me, that was a paycheck and I made it in two days. And I was like I will do this every month but that product wasn’t that great, it was a PDF, it was what we now call a minimum viable product. I threw it together, it took me a few weeks, I based it on the keynote presentation of a talk I did at one of my sisters who was in college at the time at a journalism class about why you need a blog.

And so I turned it into an eBook and I sold it, made a few thousand dollars off of it. I wasn’t proud of it, took it down and turned it to a full length book that I released in May and that’s the one I made that $16,000 in six weeks and one I made about $50,000 off of that product that year, that was a self published book. Then I got a traditional book deal, then later that year launched an online course, made about $70,000 off of that.

These things kind of kept building on each other, like I’m not good with numbers, I’m not good with money, I don’t manage our bank accounts and I have always been the slacker in our marriage and the dreamer, and the person who says, hey I’m going to do this and my wife kind of rolls her eyes. And I told her, I said, I’m going to make it – I think this was in January, I said, I’m going to make it so you don’t have to work when we have our child.

Our son Aden was born in May and my wife had – because she had a cesarean, he was four and a half weeks premature, she got I think three months off and she was kind of down to that last few days before her leave was done and she had to tell her boss whether or not she was coming back to work or not. All the while $50,000 was just sitting in a pay bill account and one day I checked it.

Steve: That was awesome.

Jeff: I sat down with her and I go, oh hey – and she knew stuff was happening, but I was just like, oh I made 500 bucks today, she’s like, wow that’s cool. We didn’t know how much it was adding up and I opened up the laptop and I showed it to her and I said, hey you don’t have to work anymore, there’s your salary and then it just…

Steve: So Jeff let’s start from the beginning because this is where a lot of people have problems, so how did you get your first 1000 subscribers?

Jeff: So I…

Steve: What is it you write about, how did you choose what to write about?

Jeff: I was a marketing director at non-profit and I like what Derrick Silva [ph] says about this, what’s obvious to you is amazing to others. I started my blog and it was driven by I think ego. I saw people like Michael Hyatt and Seth Godin tantalizing the world with their ideas and I thought, I’ve got ideas, people should listen to me, I want to be a writer, how do I do this?

And I realized that deep down inside I was a writer, I needed to be writing, and I didn’t know what to write about. So you go back and this is still on goinswriter.com, you go back and you listen to those early blog posts and I’m totally copying Seth Godin and Michael Hyatt and Steven Pressfield and all my heroes trying to find my voice and failing.

Then one day I saw the marketing director for this non-profit and I’m reading a session which I had done every Monday morning for about six months at this point on writing, on copy writing and how to write more effectively, on why nobody cares if you’re good, they care about how you can persuade an audience and how you can be very clear in your message.

I realized what if I just took that, put that on my blog, I mean I spend hours comparing this presentation than I did in front of a team of a dozen writers and marketers in our organization, I’m just teaching them how to do their jobs better, I’ll just put that on my blog, take those notes and turn it into a blog post. I did that and keep in mind I’ve got like just a handful people that are visiting my blog everyday at this point.

That’s when I started seeing my first few comments, and any time I wrote about writing versus leadership, or marketing or something that I didn’t really have any business talking about at that point, people responded. To me it was really interesting because I thought, this is obvious, everybody knows this, everybody knows you can go read Copyblogger and learn about copy writing, or go to ProBlogger and learn about blogging.

I realized for whatever reason that this audience that I was starting to reach didn’t know that and I was – the way in which I was sharing it as a writer, as somebody who has a bit of appearance in that sense it was connecting with people, and so that’s how I decided to start writing about writing.

Steve: How did you get those first like handful people to find you, like how did you market your blog in the very beginning?

Jeff: I did it through relationships, so I’m fortunate to live in a city like Nashville which is not like New York or San Francisco or even Atlanta, but it is a growing community of creatives. I remember sitting on my couch one day following these people on social media and going, what do these people have that I don’t have? These bloggers and influencers, and the online entrepreneurship community in Nashville was just beginning, but I saw this happening, I was following people on Twitter, so what do they have that I don’t have?

I realized they all know each other, like in real life like they’re really friends, and so this person tweeting this thing and linking to so and so’s blog post and sharing this thing on Facebook, they have real relationships. And it was sort of [inaudible 00:27:33], I was like; oh like this doesn’t just happen on the internet, offline relationship leads to online connection. So I started asking these people on to coffee.

One of them ended up being Michael Hyatt, he very generously said yes and we had coffee and I just made a follow up with him, I stayed in touch with him. I did this with about a dozen people, people that were peers and also people that were major influencers. Some of them said yes, some of them said no, and I just kept working on my blog, and then one day I “launched my blog,” I redesigned it. I got a friend design an actual header for me versus it just saying Goins, Writer.

I launched it once I figured out what this was about and I emailed all those people and I said, hey I’m launching my blog, I’d love for you to share it, and a lot of those people tweeted about it and shared it. This was months into the blog actually existing, and that was how I got probably the first surge of traffic, that was the day when everybody tweeted about it and shared about it when I got like 600 people to come to the blog, and I was, hey this is awesome.

Looking back I didn’t have an email list or anything and I was like 600 people came to my blog and the next day it was back to six.

Steve: Right.

Jeff: I realized I’ve got to find a way to keep these people here, and that’s when I started thinking about things like building an email list.

Steve: So in your class do you actually advice that people go to a bunch of conferences and meet people, like is that part of the curriculum?

Jeff: I teach a few courses, the main one is called Tribe Writers which is a course about how to become a professional writer. I think networking is part of the job and I think it’s always been part of the job. I read this Hemingway biography years ago about the 1920s expert community living in Paris of which Hemingway and James, Joyce and [inaudible 00:29:32] and all these soon to be famous authors were a part.

Part of what made these people the famous authors they are today is the community that they were part of, that they all connected with each other, affirming and sharing their work with the world when nobody else cared about who they were. So I do think relationship is important. Do I think you have to spend thousands of dollars going to conferences a year? Not necessarily, but you have to spend a little bit of time connecting with somebody on Skype, on Twitter, in person ideally at some point.

So I do think getting in front of people and building some kind of relationship with them is really, really important but the most important part of that Steve that most people neglect is the follow up. So you and I are talking here not because we met at FinCon four years ago, but because we’ve maintained a relationship and we’re not like best friends, but we’ve stayed in touch, I’ve paid attention to the stuff that you are doing.

I think once you meet somebody in person you have a face of voice, they become a real person, and when they email you or you see them in your social media stream, you pause, and you think, oh like this is a real person, I’m going to pay more attention to what they are doing. So I think yeah real life interaction with real life human beings is part of the job.

Steve: This is kind of awkward Jeff because I thought we were best friends, but that’s beside the point…

Jeff: This is our DTR.

Steve: So I know you teach a class about this and let’s assume that the writing part is done and you’ve kind of found your voice, once you’ve found your writing and this is my personal opinion that blogging, starting a blog today is a lot harder because there’s a lot more other mediums that are just trying to grab everyone’s attention. So what are some of the principles that you preach outside of just the writing part?

Jeff: So one of the things I advocate for is a lot of people talk about niching down and find your niche, and I actually disagree with that, this a little bit counterintuitive to sort of traditional internet marketing business advice. It may sound semantic but I think it’s more significant than that. If you look at the world’s most powerful communicators, if you look at some of the biggest bloggers today, they are not niched down.

Seth Godin writes on a variety of topics for lots of different demographics, Michael Hyatt does the same, and what I think powerful effective communication does is it connects with a worldview. So what I teach our students to do is — the first step in the process is whether or not you think like you are a good writer or you’ve found your voice, you still have to clarify your message, and the way that you do that is by identifying a major worldview that your content connects with, and great communicators…

Steve: Give me an example with your own content for example.

Jeff: I’ll give you an example with your content Steve, like you might say you are sort of in the small niche helping would be internet entrepreneurs launch their own little niche businesses or start an online store as you guys did. But I know your story and underneath that story is this worldview, which is we shouldn’t have to come home everyday exhausted doing things we don’t love without the energy to actually enjoy all this work that we’re doing, and so we should be able to enjoy our work and spend majority of our time doing things that we love like spending time with our kids. That’s a worldview.

Steve: That sounds just like your worldview, amazing okay.

Jeff: Yeah, it’s a worldview and everybody might go, oh yeah that’s true I agree with that, but what you believe is not what you say, it’s what you do, and lots of people don’t live that way. Tim Ferriss has a worldview; his worldview is you should minimize the amount of time that you’re working so you can maximize the time you do the things that you enjoy. That worldview really says work is bad. Some people love work, I actually love work; I don’t think work is bad.

So the point is not whether you have a good or bad worldview, you need to have a clear worldview, and I think that a worldview statement is best summarized in this sort of framework. Every ______ can or should _____.

Steve: I was just going to say I agree with that because I was following some blogs that do a lot of teaching and they do it very well, but the blog itself does not have a personality, and so that’s why I kind of stopped going back, whereas some of the other blogs that have a personality to it and like someone who is the face of the blog, I tend to visit more because I’m curious about them in addition to the content.

Jeff: Yeah, here is the thing you can win over an audience with a topic niching down. I’m not saying it’s a bad way to build an online presence, but typically for a lot of the content creators, a lot of the writers building these audiences it gets boring, because say you knit cat sweaters and you love cat sweaters and you’ve got this cat sweater knitting community, and you start a cat sweater knitting blog and you love, love, love it and then your cat dies and the last thing you want to hear about is cat sweaters and now you’re stuck with a million knitters who want to listen to you, and you’re done with it, you’re stuck, or you’ve got to start from scratch.

But look at somebody like Seth Godin; I think he’s a great example of this. Seth’s worldview is the system is broken but we can fix it. He started out kind of in a niche, he started out in the marketing niche talking about things like promotion, marketing, building companies, sold the company to Yahoo, and then he started writing about business.

But you go to Seth’s blog today and he writes about politics, he writes about his frustrations with the TSA, he writes about [inaudible 00:35:55], he writes about anything and everything and his diehard fans of which I am a part of that tribe read it all, because it doesn’t ever feel off topic, because what Seth is doing so well is there is a theme, there is a worldview woven throughout everything that he’s writing. So he just looks at something and goes, this is broken and this is broken and that is broken, and he just wants you to think differently.

But if Seth had had an early win which he did almost two decades ago with the marketing thing and just kept talking about marketing over and over and over again, he would have never been able to do that. And so I think effective communication, building a tribe today that you’re going to take somewhere, like as the market changes, as the world changes, it needs to have a worldview.

It doesn’t mean you can’t talk about a specific topic, I talk about writing, but my worldview is every creative person can succeed. You mentioned this at the beginning of the show; can you be a successful creative? I absolutely believe that this is the core frustration professionally speaking that I have which is that I know so many talented people musicians, artists, writers who go, well I can never do that because they just have this limiting believe that nobody cares about art because of that creative work.

It’s just not true, I know so many people, you probably know a lot of people who are very, very creative, who are also smart at business and making a good living for themselves and their families. So that worldview, something that I can take to other areas of interest and I do, I haven’t written five books about writing. I have one book about writing and then I wrote four other books about different areas of life that interest me.

That’s because I’m writing with a worldview so that as my interests change, as the world changes my writing can change with me and my audience will follow that process.

Steve: I think I agree with you on the worldview part in the long run, but I almost feel like when you’re just starting out it helps to be the best at a very narrow topic, would you agree with that?

Jeff: I think so; I think it’s a good way to begin a conversation. If I walk up to you – again I think the best way to think about blogging and all this online stuff is like think about real life and how do people really work. If I walk up to you, not a party and I don’t know you and I say, hey it’s nice to meet you and you tell me 27 minutes of your life story and why you believe the things you believe in, what your values are, that’s bit much.

What you’re probably going to do if you’re smart and everybody is good at this meeting in person, if you wanted to develop some kind of friendship or a relationship with me so that we actually can be best friends Steve, you’re going to say, hey where are you from, what do you like, and you’re going to try and find some common area of interest, and over time you’re going to build on that and as we build trust with each other we’ll share more private parts of what we think, what we believe with one another.

But I do think – so with blogging yeah it’s good to pick an idea, some sort of topic to sort of focus on, but do that with the understanding that over time this topic could lead to this topic and that topic. I think another great example of this is like Chris Guillebeau. He did kind of niche down early on, he was the travel guy, but he was the whole time, he’s writing with a worldview and what is that worldview? It’s that just because other people do it doesn’t mean you have to live that way, the whole idea of living an unconventional life.

So it’s unconventional to try to go to every country in the world and he did it, it’s unconventional to start an online business especially when he did it. So he started creating this portfolio, this body of work that’s all connected with this worldview. So I don’t think you can start a topic, stay super focused on it, that’s all you talk about without thinking about where is this leading and am I weaving the worldview through this right now.

I mentioned Tim Ferriss, he did the same thing. Tim Ferriss’s worldview is I mentioned work, that’s kind of the message of the 4-Hour Work Week. His deeper message is truly about like life hacking, that you can put in the minimum amount of effort and get the maximum results if you do it right. You can do that with work four hours a week, you can do that with health, the 4-Hour hour Body, you can do that with learning any skill, the 4-Hour Chef and on and on.

So I think powerful communicators whether they’re doing this on purpose or not, what makes their messages so interesting and makes their tribes so committed to them is a worldview.

Steve: I want to take a moment to thank ReferralCandy for being a sponsor of the show. Now in this day and age word of mouth is a huge driver of business for most ecommerce stores, and the best way to amplify word of mouth marketing is through a referral program. This is where ReferralCandy shines, with just a couple of clicks to the mouse you could add a referral program to your ecommerce store and reward your customers for telling their friends about your shop.

And this tactic works wonders; and in fact it is not uncommon to get a ridiculous return on investment. So for example Greats Footwear who is a ReferralCandy customer is currently seeing a 20X ROI. Referral word of mouth marketing is also useful for building up your social media presence as well, because everyone is talking about your company with their friends on Facebook and Twitter.

And the best part is that ReferralCandy is a set it and forget it service, requires no technical setup and they are giving My Wife Quit Her Job listeners 50 bucks to try them out if you go to promo.referralcandy.com/steve. Once again it’s promo.referralcandy.com/steve to get a $50 credit to try out the service risk free. Now back to the show.

So let me ask you this, so up until this point we’ve just been talking about content, content, content, do you feel like that is the majority of the battle?

Jeff: What is, finding a worldview, creating content?

Steve: Finding a worldview and creating great content.

Jeff: If for a writer just period.

Steve: For a writer who is trying to do this for a living.

Jeff: I think most writers want to write and they don’t know why or what they want to write about or who they want to write for and I think that’s okay. I didn’t know, but you cannot stay stuck there and be successful, so is it the majority of the battle? Yeah, I mean probably, I mean as much as I would say it’s great to know the right people and have some sort of business strategy or smart model, really, really great content, really great messages have a way of selling themselves.

A lot of times we’re trying to take mediocre messages and find some gimmick to help them spread really far when in fact we should just be focusing on making better stuff.

Steve: I can agree with that to a certain point. There was this guy, I don’t know if you read Mark Manson?

Jeff: I don’t know.

Steve: He’s a personal development blogger and I read one post of his and I was instantly hooked just by his content alone, but in my opinion he’s just exceptional, whereas the majority of people’s writings that I read, it does not hook me that way. So I guess if you’re exceptional then that’s good enough, but if you’re just above average so to speak, it seems like the other factors that you mention like the context, the networking and the business sense carries a much larger role.

Jeff: Yeah, I mean I think that it’s always problematic to say if I just do this one thing it’ll work, if I’m just a great writer it’ll work, if I’m just a great entrepreneur it’ll work. I’ve been running a business now for the past four almost five years and like this year I actually learned how to do finance right. Now I actually know every single day how much money we actually made, not what the shopping cart told me, not what the PNL told me a month, or a quarter, a year later.

And that was the thing I was like; I’ll just let somebody else figure it out. Most of the stuff, it’s going to take a branding of a few skills. I think to be a writer today you’ve got to be one part a great writer, one part a fairly savvy marketer and one part sensible business person. I love this idea of the portfolio life which was an idea coined by a business philosopher named Charles Handy.

In 1989 he basically projected that in the future we would all have multiple jobs; he predicted what we now call the gig economy. He said in the future you’re not going to have one job; you’re going to have like five different kinds of jobs at any given point. You are going to have at least five if not closer to ten careers. He advocated having like portfolio marriages every ten years, you just divorce.

Steve: I didn’t know about that part, okay.

Jeff: I was like oh okay interesting. Yeah, the idea is you are not one thing, and this idea of mastery, it’s really cool but most of us have more than one interest, and I think the future of mastery is really being able to take a few skills and combine them in your own unique portfolio. In fact Robert Greene author of a book called Mastery said the future belongs to people who can take multiple skills and combine them in interesting ways.

Steve: That’s interesting, I actually just quit my job of 17 years last year as an engineer and that was a really hard decision, but I can kind of relate now. I had a whole bunch of stuff going on and it was just time.

Jeff: Yeah, no I totally get that.

Steve: Let me ask you this question, how deliberate are you in some of the metrics, like do you look at keyword research for your posts or anything along those lines or is it just pure writing?

Jeff: Neither of those extremes. When I first started, keep in mind I was a marketing director so I had a working knowledge of search engine optimization, I understood that if I wrote pretty good stuff, had smart headlines, that if I was writing about kiddy sweaters, having the word kiddy sweater in the title of the blog post was not a bad idea, and then getting people to link to it was a good idea as well.

When I started I really was just practicing in public, it was my form of accountability. I’m going to put this on the blog every day because if I don’t I’m hiding and I just wanted to get better as a writer. As the audience grew, as my business matured I started measuring more things, I became an entrepreneur because I became a dad and I was like, okay I’ve got to build a business, I’ve got to figure this out.

I did start looking at metrics and getting into some of that stuff because if I didn’t I wasn’t going to be able to support my family, and so went from hobby to profession. I really liked it, but I’ve never been super metrics oriented, so now as our team has grown, I’ve delegated a lot of that stuff and not deferred it. Like I used to hire people and go, hey do all the stuff I don’t want to do and I realized that’s irresponsible leadership.

These days I delegate most of the stuff I don’t want to do and I do focus on the writing and then the team, I’ve got a team of about four people now and they report to me, here is how this blog posted, I’m like okay great, I’ll write more about that. I still create all the content but in terms of revenue, page views, growth on the Facebook page, those kinds of things I just don’t gig out on that.

It’s something that I did for a season because when you’re starting something you kind of have to do everything initially unless you just got a bunch of cash lying around that you can use as startup capital. But I think that’s a good thing, and so these days I get reports that I sometimes look at and mostly stay focused on the few skills that I feel like I do best.

Steve: Let me ask you this Jeff just to kind of conclude this interview since we’ve been talking for quite a while, someone comes to you and they are a writer let’s just say, what path or what advice would you give them just to kind of get their first 1,000 subscribers so to speak, would you recommend they start out with a blog, an eBook or what would you recommend?

Jeff: So you mentioned blogging earlier and one of the things that I have been hearing over the past year, year and a half is this question, is it too late to start? Yes it’s true that there are hundreds of millions of blogs out in the world now and that there’s lots of voices and people have picked up on the fact that you can build an audience online and replace your income and have an online business and do all this amazing stuff.

So it is noisier, it is more cluttered, I think that’s true. At the same time every year, I mean I teach thousands of writers, people who are just beginning and I see many of them, I don’t even want to call it a reap, they make the transition from this is an idea, the average writer makes less than a dollar a month to making thousands of dollars a month and turning this into a nice little side gig and for some people even a full time career.

So I really do believe now is still the best time to be a writer, and I do not think blogging is dying, maybe blogging as it existed say when you started Steve in 2007, obviously lots of things have changed. 2006, 2007 if you had a blog period you were remarkable, like people were like what’s a blog? But the internet is not going away, websites are not going away, a blog is just a website where you put content on there, and it’s good to own your presence on the internet and it’s good to have a place where you can send people, where you can communicate with them via email.

Email marketing trends, all the ones that I read are still going up to the right, so all these declines that we think are happening by and large are not, a lot of these are myths. So what is the thing that you should do? I think first of all start blogging, most writers are not doing this and all that means is get a website and get an email list. I don’t care if you actually “blog” but write something new once a week and send it to your subscribers, and then give them something for free for paying attention to you.

I think the first step is just an eBook just because even today many people will go, oh free book, I will download that and read that. You could get into webinars and all these other things which are great but there are barriers to entry for those things, there is a learning curve for those things.

Get a website, get an email list and write 1,000 word article that is good enough, that has enough interesting information, enough inspiration or entertainment value, whatever it is that you offer the world and then turn it into a PDF that people can get when they sign up for your email list, and you will be on your way to getting a tribe. Then from there I’d start writing for other outlets, other websites, I know somebody who recently built his blog to 100,000 email subscribers in about a year using Medium, just writing posts on Medium.

Steve: Interesting.

Jeff: Yeah but I mean that’s kind of getting ahead of…

Steve: This is the outliers.

Jeff: Yeah, well I think it’s a great strategy but he’s guest posting and I saw that guest posting is a great strategy. A lot of times you hear people say, oh this thing is over, go do this and maybe that’s true for like the bleeding edge, but blogging is still working really well. My numbers all of them are still going up every year, my students, thousands of them, their numbers are still going up, I’m not seeing this decline of blogging or email marketing.

Things are always changing and fluctuating and you should pay attention to that, but if you want to be a writer, get a website, get an email list and then take your best idea and in 1,000 words turn it into a downloadable PDF that people can start reading when they sign up for your email list and then just get attention to that, and I think guest posting is a free way to bring traffic to your website.

Steve: Cool Jeff, one last thing just as kind of set expectations, how long do you this takes to actually gather 1,000 or 5,000 email subscribers when you’re first starting out, like how long should you be doing this before you might tell yourself, hey this isn’t working?

Jeff: You know a lot of people want to promise quick results here, and like I said it took me six months because I didn’t know what I was doing. I know this was years ago.

Steve: Six months is fast in my opinion.

Jeff: Yeah sure, I’m coaching a group of people right now, it’s basically a mastermind group taking a dozen people through this process to go from essentially zero to an online business or publish a book or whatever their goal is, but going from like making nothing off of their writing to making something. We have one person in the group who went from 50 email subscribers in the past nine months to 260 and she’s proud of that, and she’s on her way.

I have somebody else who went from a few hundred to like 12,000. Yeah, so I think results do vary as you know, I mean there’s no like perfect formula if you do it this way it will always work this way. I will say that my friend Bryan Harris who is a ninja at this stuff has consistently demonstrated that you can do it in about 90 days; you can get to 1,000 email subscribers. I think that’s great, that feels fairly aggressive to me but I’ve seen it happen, I know that it’s possible.

So how long should it take to get 1,000 email subscribers, I don’t know, I’d say three to six months, at 12 months if you’re still struggling it may be worth evaluating what you’re doing right and what you’re doing wrong. When should you quit? Well, I heard this thing from Shawn [ph] West, I don’t know if you know him, he goes by Shawn West; his name is Shawn became shawnwest.com [ph].

He said any time you try to do something, give it two years before you expect to see any results, before you quit and move on to something else, and I kind of love that counterintuitive advice in our world of quick and dirty fast hacks to easy riches, what if you just took a long time.

When I heard that I really resonated with that, because when I started my blog I actually had an old blog that I had been writing on for four years and it had got to – I got 250 email subscribers over the course of our years and I was stuck, it just wouldn’t go beyond that and it is because I wasn’t doing this stuff that I mentioned, I wasn’t writing with a worldview, I wasn’t guest posting, I wasn’t networking with other people in the space.

So when is started goinswriter.com I told myself I’m going to write in that every day and I’m going to give it two years to try to get at least 250 subscribers before I quit, because if I get 250 subscribers in two years what took me four years to do it previously I’m getting double the results, that felt good to me. Then when I heard Shawn say that give something two years before you quit, I liked that, but you’ve got to believe in this and this has to be important to you.

So how long should it take? I don’t know, I’ve seen it take three to six months, sometimes longer. How long should it be before you quit? I think it should take a while, and if it’s easy to quit then maybe it wasn’t worth doing in the first place.

Steve: Yeah it’s funny, the advice that I give everyone is — for me personally I always are willing to commit three to five years on any project that I start actually.

Jeff: Yeah I love that, that is so counter control by the way, I mean how many people do you know that are like, I’m trying this thing out, we’ll see how it goes and you’re like, well how long have you been doing this? Well I’ve spent about four and a half years, so we’ll see. Nobody does that, they don’t even do that, people don’t do that with jobs. How is your new job? I think it’s okay, but I might give it another five years. People don’t do that, I love that Steve, I mean I think…

Steve: Oh you’re talking to a guy who was in the same company for 17 years or so.

Jeff: Oh yeah, I think we live in a commitment phobic world today especially when you’re talking about people who are our age or younger. I think that just some things take time and I think success in just about anything definitely takes time, and if it doesn’t take time enough then it doesn’t last.

Steve: Cool Jeff, hey thanks a lot for your time, we’ve been chatting for longer than I was expecting, but the conversation was good and now we’re best friends, right?

Jeff: Totally.

Steve: So where can people find you if they want to learn more about you?

Jeff: Well thanks Steve, it’s my pleasure certainly to be such a [inaudible 00:58:03]. You can go to my blog goinswriter.com. If you want to learn more about building an online audience you can sign up for my email newsletter, and so get a free eBook about how I did that thing you mentioned at the beginning, how do you 100,000 email subscribers in the first 18 months, and you can get that for free at my website at goinswriter.com, G-O-I-N-Swriter.com.

Steve: Cool, well Jeff thanks a lot for coming on the show, really appreciated.

Jeff: It’s my pleasure.

Steve: All right take care.

Jeff: Thanks.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode, and I hope that Jeff’s story has shown you that you can make it as an artist if you perfect your craft, and incidentally he just released a book called Real Artists Don’t Starve that you should all check out on Amazon right now. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode166.

And once again I want to thank Klaviyo for sponsoring this episode. Klaviyo is my email marketing platform of choice for ecommerce merchants, and you can easily put together automated flows like an abandoned cart sequence, a post purchase flow, a win back campaign, basically all these sequences that will make you money on auto pilot. So head on over to mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/ K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

I also want to thank SellerLabs.com as well. Their tool Ignite is what I use to manage my Amazon PPC campaigns. Instead of the old tedious way of generating reports and analyzing your ad campaigns in excel, Ignite aggregates all that info for you in one place and allows you to quickly visualize your data to make decisions fast.

So not only does it save time, but it also makes managing your Amazon campaigns so much easier. So head on over to sellerlabs.com/steve and sign up for a free 30 day trial, once again that’s sellerlabs.com/steve.

And if you’re interested in starting your own ecommerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away, thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

165: How To Create A Sales And Email Funnel For Your Store With Austin Brawner

How To Create A Sales And Email Funnel For Your Store With Austin Brawner

Today, I’m thrilled to have Austin Brawner back on the show. I met Austin at the Ecommerce Fuel conference 3 years ago and we’ve kept in touch since. In fact, I had Austin on back in episode 65 a long time ago.

Austin runs the Ecommerce Influence Podcast and also helps ecommerce companies grow with his site Brand Growth Experts. He’s also the CMO of an ecommerce company called Boom Boom Energy.

Austin is a popular speaker on marketing for ecommerce and helped scale a company from 0 – 11 million in 2.5 years with email marketing.
Anyway, Austin has a unique perspective because he works with companies so deeply to improve their business and today we’re going to pick his brain.

What You’ll Learn

  • The thought process behind the sales funnels he created for Boom Boom Energy
  • The exact email campaigns that he implemented with Boom Boom
  • How to run a free plus shipping offer campaign
  • How to price your upsells and downsells

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Ignite.Sellerlabs.com – If you are selling on Amazon and running Amazon Sponsored Ads campaigns, then Ignite from Seller Labs is a must have tool. Click here and get a FREE 30 Day Trial.
Ignite Logo

ReferralCandy.com – If you’re already getting steady orders every month, adding a refer-a-friend program to your store can give you a new sales channel. And ReferralCandy is the best in the business. Click here and get a FREE $50 credit towards your account.
referral candy

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and delve deeply into what strategies are working and what strategies are not with their businesses.

Today I’m thrilled to have Austin Brawner back on the show, and he was a guest way back in episode 65. Recently Austin took over as CMO of a company called Boom Boom, and today’s podcast will analyze Austin’s exact thought processes as he restructures the sales funnels of his company, it’s going to be awesome.

But before we begin I want to give a quick shout out to Klaviyo who is a sponsor of the show. Now I’m always excited to talk about Klaviyo because they are the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store, and I depend on Klaviyo for over 20% of my revenues. Now you’re probably wondering why Klaviyo and not a different provider. Well Klaviyo is the only email platform out there that is specifically built for ecommerce stores, and here’s why it’s so powerful.

Klaviyo can track every single customer who has shopped in your store and exactly what they purchased which allows you to do many things. So let’s say I want to send an email to everyone who purchased a red handkerchief in the last week, boom. Let’s say I want to set up a special autoresponder sequence to my customers depending on what they purchased, that’s a piece of cake, and there is full revenue tracking on every single email.

Now Klaviyo is the most powerful email platform that I’ve ever used and you can try them for free at mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

I also want to give a shout out to my other sponsor Seller Labs, and specifically I want to talk about their brand new tool Ignite which helps sellers manage their Amazon sponsored ads. Right now I’m using this tool to manage my Amazon sponsored ad campaigns, and it makes things a heck of a lot more convenient.

So number one I’ve always found it a major pain to generate my PPC reports on Amazon, cut and paste the data over to an excel spreadsheet and then use pivot tables before I’m able do any analysis. Well Ignite pulls all that info for you automatically and allows you to easily see what keywords are working and what are not immediately, there is no need to manually create reports or play with excel.

Second of all unless you’re a data geek, Amazon campaign data can be hard to understand, and what’s cool is that Ignite makes keyword and bidding recommendations on the fly that can be applied with just a couple of clicks.

So let’s say one of my hankie keywords is bleeding money, well Ignite will alert me of that fact, and I can reduce the bid immediately. So bottom line Ignite makes managing Amazon’s sponsored ads so much easier and the fact that they provide me with alerts means that I no longer have to monitor my campaigns like a hawk.

If there are keywords that are doing well, Ignite tells me to add them to my exact match campaigns, if my keywords are losing money, well Ignite tells me to either remove the keyword or to reduce the bid. So head on over to sellerlabs.com/steve where you’ll actually find awesome tutorials on how to run Amazon PPC ads and the opportunity to try Ignite for 30 days for free. Once again that’s sellerlabs.com/steve. Now on the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I’m thrilled to have Austin Brawner back on the show. Now I met Austin at the Ecommerce Fuel conference I want to say about three years ago and we’ve kept in touch in touch ever since, and in fact I had Austin on the podcast back in episode 65 a long time ago.

Now Austin runs the Ecommerce Influence Podcast and also helps ecommerce companies grow with his site Brand Growth Experts. He is also the CMO of an ecommerce company called Boom Boom Energy. Prior to getting married last year – congrats by the way Austin, Austin was a popular speaker on marketing for ecommerce and helps scale a company from zero to 11 million dollars in 2.5 years with email marketing.

Anyway Austin has a unique perspective because he works with companies so deeply to improve them and today we’re going to pick his brain. And with that welcome to the show Austin, how are you doing today man?

Austin: Hey good Steve, thanks for having me back, I’m excited to be here and to talk again about ecommerce.

Steve: By the way I didn’t mean to imply that like all your speaking went downhill after marriage, I’m sure you know that.

Austin: It’s like he got married, he’s done.

Steve: Now he’s in Thailand, he’s just living on the beach. Yeah so for the listeners who don’t know or remember you, give us a quick background how you got in ecommerce and actually how you ended up being the CMO of Boom Boom Energy.

Austin: Sure, so it has been a while I think since we chatted last time. I first got involved in ecommerce I guess it’s about four years ago or something like that. I was really interested — I was working in this company in Los Angeles, it was a startup, a healthy vending start up, and I watched how we basically grew the business from when I got there, we were doing like maybe 200 grand in sales to 11 million dollars in about two and a half years and we did it through email marketing and really building these automated sequences around our sales team to grow the business with an influx of email leads.

I saw this and we built these really sophisticated email sequences targeting people based on their behavior, and I had a bunch of friends who were in ecommerce and I saw that what we were doing was not being done in ecommerce. So I first started working with a couple of different companies, brought over some of these email sequences that I was using, rebuilt them for ecommerce.

I had a lot of success driving sales, really kind of fell in love with ecommerce here and best marketing, started the Ecommerce Influence Podcast where I interview experts and business owners who have grown ecommerce businesses typically from like a million dollars to ten million dollars plus, and have been involved with this growing ecommerce businesses for the last four years.

I took over as the CMO of Boom Boom Energy about two months ago and have been kind of rebuilding what they’re doing and building it into more of like a structured tracking data jam company.

Steve: Okay since we’re going to be talking about Boom Boom Energy today just give us like a quick five sentence overview of what the company sells.

Austin: We sell the world’s best energizing nasal inhaler. What that means is that it’s a small inhaler that you basically breath and it’s all natural essential oils, so invigorates, energizes you, you don’t actually smell [ph] anything, you’re breathing in a scent that kind of clears your head, enhances your breathing, provides you a kind of a blast of intense reflection, we say it’s like gum for your nose.

Steve: By the way Austin is going to be sending me some of these and I’ll report back on it, I was a little skeptical…

Austin: Steve said it was sketchy, so I said I’m coming to convert him which is basically that’s a big issue that we actually have with the product because it’s a product where people kind of need to be able to experience it. The first time you like breath in the scent you understand immediately why it’s important and why people like it. We convert fans really, really well at conferences or now we’re working on getting that messaging online.

Steve: Does that mean that you guys are doing a lot of free giveaways of your product?

Austin: Exactly, we actually are, we’re working right now on a free plus shipping offer.

Steve: Okay yeah, let’s talk about that real quick.

Austin: So that’s something that we’ve been experimenting with over the last I guess let’s see the last month really is when we realized that we had to get this product in people’s hands. And so we started on Facebook and we had a lot of success with kind of like a rap video, we talk about Boom Boom that became relatively viral, meaning a lot of people are sharing it, it’s got like 1.7 million views at this point.

Steve: Wow, okay. What does a rap video have to do with Boom Boom Energy?

Austin: It tells the story about Boom Boom like what it is. It shows people using it; it shows people getting energized and kind of explains the product. We realized it’s a top of the funnel thing, like people have to have a little bit of an understanding what the product is. So we got that video, we tried a couple of things and we started promoting it, people started sharing it and we got all these views for it.

Steve: So is this like a high production quality video?

Austin: Yeah it is, it is. It’s in the same kind of – we looked at some of the videos that have done very well on Facebook in the past, dollarship club was one of them, beard – what’s the guy’s name, the beard guy?

Steve: Steve Brand, oh beard guy yeah right.

Austin: I can’t remember the name like beard club or something like that, and we looked at those and we created one that was similar, obviously we’re like it’s still a bootstrapped startup so a much smaller production value, but still it’s giving us really good results.

Steve: How much were you paying per click?

Austin: Paying per click per view?

Steve: Oh yeah actually per view and then I assume a portion of those people actually click through, right?

Austin: Yeah a portion of them click through but our focus has been to try to get people to watch the whole video. Looking at numbers in the last month, we’re getting like 0.002 cent views and then we’re able to get people to really be able to view 95% of the video for about 3 cents.

Steve: Okay, wow that’s really good and so then you’re retargeting these people, right?

Austin: Yeah then we’re retargeting these people, so and when I say that we’re able to get them for 3 cents we basically were – if I take the amount of money that this video is generating and I look through the amount of money it’s generating it’s attractive enough. We spent and looked at the number of people that were viewing 95% of the videos; we’re paying basically 3 cents for people to view the video which is really good.

Steve: So let me ask you this, the video probably doesn’t generate sales on its own, does it?

Austin: It doesn’t, not really, it does some but not that many, the focus for us is to open the top of the funnel. So we want to get as many people viewing this video and then we take a look at the people that have viewed the full video or 75% or 95% of the video and then retarget people based off of that. It drives people to our site as well.

So we have basically these campaigns, these free plus shipping campaigns that we’re running to people who have viewed a large like 95% of the video and that converts really well, we get basically like between four and five dollar CPAs on this free plus shipping offer.

Steve: Can we talk about the offer itself, so what are you giving away and how much are you charging for shipping?

Austin: So we charge – we give away a triple pack of these Boom Boom inhalers, they are typically 16.95 on our website plus shipping of 4.95. We give away the free plus shipping offer…

Steve: So they’re paying 4.95 and you’re paying around $3 or $4 to acquire the customer?

Austin: They pay 6.95.

Steve: 6.95?

Austin: 6.95 for shipping, we pay between $4 and $5 to acquire the customer on some of our best campaigns, so we’re basically like — at this point we found that we can basically set these things up where we’re just paying – and also that the product costs us 6.95.

So we’re basically losing like $4 to $5 to acquire a customer but that has been at this point kind of like our goal is to figure out how we could get to a point where we could acquire a customer for between like $4 and $6 because where we’re starting to work on is the backend with the up-sells, because that’s where we’ve realized if we have opportunity for the product like it’s good for us to go out and give away a bunch of products and we go do that at festivals where we’re happily giving away inhalers to people and we just want to be able to do it online.

So we basically this is the way of $4 to $5 loss and then right now we’re kind of dialing in our up-sells. Again we’ve been doing this for two months, so we’re still at kind of like the testing stage right now, but the products that we’re using; we’re actually using Ezra’s Zipify pages. So I drive people from a Facebook retargeting ad to a Zipify sales page and that kind of talks about the product, they learn about it, then they click add to cart.

It takes them to the product page where we have a free plus shipping offer where I basically take in the product and set it up using shipping weights so that the free version they just add to cart and it’s zero dollars, they’re going to pay 6.95 in the US. Then on the back end we’re using one click up-sell Ezra.

Steve: Ezra also aha.

Austin: Ezra as well and we’ve been dialing a couple of offers up-selling. We’ve been testing basically up-selling people in with 30 pack which is a much larger, it’s like an $80 purchase and then also testing a festival pack which is a bunch of [inaudible 00:14:03] lanyards and hats and like a larger group of these products and having some success with that right now. It’s still early in the testing stage for this.

Steve: Okay can I ask you a quick question before you go on, like how did you determine that you want to pay $4 to $6 to acquire a customer?

Austin: Good question, so we looked at the potential up-sells that we had as a business and we broke down an up-sell tree and said, well if we can get between like a 7 and 10% take rate on an up-sell at $80, we’ll be able to – and maybe like a 2% or 1% take rate on a down sell, we should be able to have an acceptable CPA of around $6, and when I say acceptable CPA meaning that we’re going to be able to buy traffic, buy customers at 100% break if our up-sell is taken at that rate and the down sells taken with that rate.

So we looked at it and like well if we could hit this level the CPA we can dial in up-sells and our down sells we should be able to buy traffic at completely break even.

Steve: Okay and then you know that once you have the customer since this is kind of like a consumable product, right?

Austin: It is, it’s typically like use for 30 days, and so we know that there is a lot of people that will come back and make a second purchase. Like for us right now there is a big distribution side of the business and like it’s partly online to try to exposure people to the product online, but for us like getting critical mass and helping in that, it’s kind of like a red bull or like fiber energy [ph] where people look at fiber energy.

It’s hard for us to think back what fiber energy looked at when it first came out, but there is almost a critical mass where enough people know what it’s all about that they’ll buy it from like a [inaudible 00:16:04] counter top, that’s our goal. So getting these new people to try it, convert it over into fans and customers. So if we can buy traffic at break even and then we know that once people are fans of it they’re going to come back and they’ll purchase from us over and over again.

Steve: I see so the idea is just to get it break even and then you can scale it until it has the mind share and then people will just start buying this stuff on their own?

Austin: Yeah people start buying this stuff on their own, people will come back and buy triple pack, a lot of the times people will buy them either for festivals, during December time or they’ll buy them for working and they liked having Boom Boom around. So that’s our goal with the free plus shipping offer. It’s been kind of a little bit of a long route to getting there because showing up when I first started working with them I came in I was like, okay well let’s go step by step and look at the different factors.

You asked about how we figured out the acceptable CPA level for us?

Steve: Mm-hmm.

Austin: When I first started working with them Google analytics wasn’t even set up.

Steve: No way, okay.

Austin: So it was not tracking correctly, there was a lot of like how do you go through and do Google analytics audit, it was actually a good shout out to I think Shopify put together this pretty detailed nice little thing. If you are in a position where your Google analytics, you’re not sure if they are tracking correctly, there is a Shopify tutorial that will walk you through exactly what you need to do, so I set that up…

Steve: How did you know it wasn’t tracking properly?

Austin: It wasn’t tracking.

Steve: Oh it wasn’t tracking, okay never mind okay.

Austin: It wasn’t tracking; there was something wrong with the cart that was installed. So I started going through, did an audit, from there set up online goals that have been enhancing ecommerce tracking and started dialing in. That was the first step to making sure that we understood a lot more about the business, set up something called campus which is kind of interesting, not totally sold on yet but do you use campus by the way?

Steve: No I don’t, you wanted to talk about it real quick or no?

Austin: It’s like – yeah I’ll talk about it because it’s kind of interesting, it’s like an ecommerce dashboard where they help you calculate CPAs from different channels, you can put in your marketing spend for different channels and then it will calculate using Google analytics what your CPA for each channel is which can be helpful.

It takes some time to get set up and it’s not a perfect solution, but if you’re struggling with something like that I’d recommend setting up campus.

Steve: Are you talking about like your CPA across all of your Facebook campaigns because you have your top funnel and then you have your free plus shipping offer, are you talking about calculating the CPA as a whole?

Austin: As a whole yeah, yeah, yeah, so like you can put your email spend and then it’ll track all your purchase that come in through email and give you a CPA of your email channel.

Steve: Okay yeah I was going to ask you that question next actually because you have all these Facebook ad campaigns and you also have a backend email and it’s sometimes hard to calculate your CPA, I mean with all that stuff going on?

Austin: Yeah it is, it is difficult, I think like – and that’s some of the stuff we’re going through as we’re transitioning and trying to move towards a more I can mention like data driven business. It’s how to calculate — our goal – it’s definitely not perfect, there are some sort of like our goal is to drive people through Facebook, capture emails and make sales.

We also have a lot of people that come through with okay we capture their email through our free plus shipping like exit overlay and then they’ll got through the email sequence and purchase from there. So it’s definitely like a branded version.

Steve: Like my version, we’re doing a free plus shipping offer right now too and we actually collect the email on the add to cart. So they go to landing page and you have to have an email address and then the action button is actually add to cart and then actually adds them to the cart, and then I had this whole funnel for that and then I have the up-sell and the down sell. I’m curious what your – so your up-sell is you’re selling a 30 pack?

Austin: Selling a 30 pack yeah.

Steve: Is that after they’ve entered in their information for check out or is it before?

Austin: So with one click up-sell it’s completely afterwards.

Steve: Afterwards okay.

Austin: They’ve completed the transaction, they press purchase, and then a page pops up. All they do is they press purchase and it charges their card again, they don’t want to put any more information in and that is one nice thing about the one click up-sell is they just press the button and it’s charged separately through Strike like purchasing together in Shopify and pairs it for the customer.

That’s one of the big things; I was looking a lot on all these different free plus shipping opportunities like those. If you look at ClickFunnels – what are you using for your free plus shipping?

Steve: I just code everything myself, I have my home grown cart, so I have freedom to do whatever actually. Right now I‘ve chosen to just do the up-sell immediately after they’ve added to the cart, I’ll show them something that’s very similar to what they bought and offer them like an insane discount of like between 30 and 40%.

Austin: Okay yeah exactly so you’ve got it afterwards. If you’re not coding yourself there is a couple of different options out there for you if you want to create an up-sell. There is ClickFunnels, there is CartHook, there is one click up-sell, and looking at the different options the reason why I like one click up-sell is that it does pair the carts.

If you’re using ClickFunnels you’re not going to have combined customer records, it’s going to be done with the ClickFunnel’s cart, and it’s kind of messy. So that’s why one click up-sell works for us, it’s like even though it’s checking out with Stripe and we’re paying a little bit on each one of those things, it pairs in the Shopify back end and so we’ve got the actual information of the customer.

Steve: Yeah it makes sense otherwise you’re trying to combine two different carts, right?

Austin: Yeah it’s annoying exactly.

Steve: Yeah okay, what does your down sell look like?

Austin: So the down sell is our festival pack, so our down sell is 50% off a $59 pack that gives people a hat, a lanyard and a couple more boom booms, and again like right now we’re just purely like a point where we’re just driving people through this thing and like it’s too early to tell if it’s even going to be successful.

I think what’s important for people who are listening is the thought process behind it and if you want to experiment with something like this in the end, we just realized like our goals are a little bit different than maybe some other businesses. We just try to get as people into try it as possible and figure out a way to make something super appealing so we can acquire these customers and that’s working. Acquiring the customer is working whether or not we’re going to be able to dial it in to make it so that it’s at break even, that’s still to be determined at this point.

Steve: Sure, sure, how did you determine the price of your up-sell, like what criteria did you use?

Austin: Well we try to give [crosstalk 00:23:47].

Steve: It’s pretty expensive, right?

Austin: Yeah the up-sell?

Steve: Yeah.

Austin: Yeah so I actually looked at it from – I was talking to Richard from the Funnel Engine who’s been doing some of this type of stuff and we kind of were chatting about different price points, and basically $70 was kind of a range like $70 in profit was kind of arrange in what we thought we would be able to hit if 10% of the people were going to take this thing. I came up with this I’m doing reaching out to other people who were already in free shipping offers and seeing what their up-sell take was.

So I was like, okay if we can get it dialed in at like between 7 and 10%, then the only way it’s going to be able work on Facebook is if we can have a price point at this point because it can be quite expensive to acquire customers.

Steve: Yeah okay, so it’s just mathematically driven based on a few assumptions of your conversion rate and how much it’s costing you essentially?

Austin: Exactly and it’s not – that’s like the keyword like you can’t – I feel like if it’s not going to work for us, it’s not going to work, it’s more an experiment that if it does work out we have a goal to get, if it doesn’t then we’re going to trust the video.

Steve: I want to take a moment to thank ReferralCandy for being a sponsor of the show. Now in this day and age word of mouth is a huge driver of business for most ecommerce stores, and the best way to amplify word of mouth marketing is through a referral program. This is where ReferralCandy shines, with just a couple of clicks to the mouse you could add a referral program to your ecommerce store and reward your customers for telling their friends about your shop.

And this tactic works wonders; and in fact it is not uncommon to get a ridiculous return on investment. So for example Greats Footwear who is a ReferralCandy customer is currently seeing a 20X ROI. Referral word of mouth marketing is also useful for building up your social media presence as well, because everyone is talking about your company with their friends on Facebook and Twitter.

And the best part is that ReferralCandy is a set it and forget it service, requires no technical setup and they are giving My Wife Quit Her Job listeners 50 bucks to try them out if you go to promo.referralcandy.com/steve. Once again it’s promo.referralcandy.com/steve to get a $50 credit to try out the service risk free. Now back to the show.

Okay so you got that going, what other changes have you made since you joined?

Austin: So I’ve been focusing on email marketing because when I work with businesses almost 100% of the time they are under optimized on email and they’re not driving enough sales really on the life cycle of the customer. So I’ve been going in and setting up funnels like follow up funnels for people who come through the free plus shipping offer when they sign up. They then will receive emails following up and reminding them about making this purchase.

Steve: How big is that funnel actually, the free plus shipping funnel like how many emails is it and what does the general flow look like?

Austin: So the general flow is six emails I believe, and the flow is reminding people initially about the free plus shipping offer because they sign up but they don’t take it, then my only goal is to get them to take that offer. So initially the first email is just driving them to the offer page.

The second email is communicating what the product is all about and that’s a big issue for us because people think about snipping something and it’s a big thing when I convey to people, it’s like if you’ve ever smelled menthol you understand, you probably have an idea what the product is like, but it’s communicating this all natural, sharing the brand story, the social proof, so the following email is social proof related.

So we’re going to be sharing with people reviews, other people that have been using the product again to establish credibility, following up with the free plus shipping offer after that and then changing over to like a 10, 20% off offer that escalates from 10 to 20% off in the following two emails. So I call it bio dice sequence and I talked about this a lot on my podcast on different webinars that I’ve been hosting.

This works with pretty much any business. People come in, you give them whatever – they sign up through an email pop up; you initially give them their offer right away, so whatever you use, whether it is free shipping 10% off, whatever. You give that offer to them immediately, then you start hitting people with your brand story, with reviews to your product. You figure out when they’re most likely to purchase, so if they don’t purchase right away like in how many days are they typically going to purchase.

If that’s two days then you don’t give away any discounts until two days. After that then you start targeting people with a discount letter, something that incentivizes the people who’ve passed the threshold when they are typically in the purchase. You incentivize them and help them make a decision and try to grease the wheels to make them become a customer, help them become a customer.

Steve: And what do you do with these subs if they don’t end up buying after the entire sequence is over?

Austin: They’re just tossed into the newsletter sequence and then they’ll receive a campaign from us once a week.

Steve: Okay.

Austin: But that doesn’t happen until they pass through the sequence.

Steve: Right.

Austin: And then if they churn like I’m always – I clean the list as well, it will be like three to six months just for people who don’t open up emails.

Steve: I’m just curious; do you get a lot of people complaining about the shipping cost?

Austin: Help with free plus shipping?

Steve: Yeah.

Austin: We do get some but it’s a pretty like solid free plus shipping offer like typically they look at it from 16.95 plus 4.95, it’s over $20 and they’re 6.95, so the value is there and a lot of people will ask us for free products just on Facebook, I’m sure you get the same thing.

Steve: Yeah, yeah.

Austin: People will be like, oh give us your product.

Steve: I was just curious if you had the same experience we were but yeah, yeah.

Austin: We do get people but it’s like I don’t know it’s like you’re not going to get – we can’t give it away really for free.

Steve: Okay because I might be wanting your testimonials on your second email or whatever, Steve Chou of My Wife Quit Her Job.

Austin: Exactly Steve Chou thought it was sketchy, now he uses it ten times a day.

Steve: Okay so we got that bio die campaign, what other areas of the life cycle do you kind of track?

Austin: So from there the next step in what I look for, for Boom Boom and also for any other companies and I have worked with a ton of large ecommerce companies and we always focused next on what to do after someone makes a purchase. So you’re going to have a post purchase sequence. How I typically target a post purchase sequence is in best actions for people, what would you like your customers to do?

If you would like them to write a review, if you would like them to post a picture on Instagram, if you would like them to refer a friend, whatever type of best actions you want to put in to your post purchase sequence. Also like you want to thank them for making your purchase, whatever you want to do, you put that in your post purchase sequence over a period of maybe like 14 days depending on your product again like it’s all dependent on what – if you’re selling refrigerators it’s going to be quite a bit different than selling energizing nasal inhalers that are consumables.

Then I look at and try to figure out when people typically make a repeat purchase, and depending on your products it is going to be different. So if for your products it’s 45 days or 42 days, then what I like to do is let people go to that point, so the average person is going to make a purchase, let them get to that point and then start – because you want them to be able to make as many full price purchases as possible.

At that point you’re going to focus on incentivizing them to make their next purchase, so that’s where the discount letter could come in where you’re going to be hitting people up with offers and trying to incentivize them to make that second purchase because that’s where your profit is going to come from. I think a lot of times people underestimate [inaudible 00:33:02] and the effect that [inaudible 00:33:04] have on their business.

One of it is I was talking about email marketing is because it’s very toll limited. If you’re going to be reacquiring a customer off of Facebook, maybe they purchased from you already and you pay $15 or something to acquire them for the first time.

If you’re going and you’re reacquiring them on Facebook for another $15, your profit margin is very slim on that customer. If you’re able to get them and reacquire them through email, your profit margin is very, very high on that person because you’re just paying a fixed cost, you’re paying Klaviyo or whatever or MailChimp, you’re paying a fixed cost and it’s much better for you. That’s the focus is to try to reacquire them with incentives when they pass that level of repurchase.

Steve: During this win back campaign are you running concurrent ads on like Facebook and Google display to get them back as well?

Austin: Yes, so one of the nice things about Klaviyo and what they’ve done recently in the last like six months is they started up so you create the customer audiences based on segments that you create within Klaviyo. So Klaviyo if you have customers who come in, it’ll track all their behavior on your website, so if somebody makes a purchase, you can then create a segment of people who have made one purchase and have not purchased again let’s say if the sequence is going in 45 days.

So at that point when people make a purchase and don’t repurchase in 45 days they’ll be added to a little segment of people and you could sync that to Facebook. So you could have that created customer audience and then when people are added into that customer audience they will then be targeted with whatever ad that you’re running if you want to retarget them using that audience. So you can have emails going out, at the same time stack that with retargeting ads on Facebook using the Klaviyo and Facebook integration.

Steve: Cool.

Austin: That also works if you’re going to be passing people through like at 45 days you may have a customer audience at a certain amount and then 60 days it may switch to a different offer, and you can set it so that the audience automatically adjusts and they’ll be now triggered on a different email.

Steve: Klaviyo is going to be sponsor of this podcast I think by the time this episode comes out.

Austin: Oh nice.

Steve: Yeah this is really powerful and all these audiences are dynamic meaning Klaviyo syncs all the different audiences in real time, so they’re always up-to-date which is pretty cool.

Austin: It’s really cool; I mean it’s a game changer, so they came out.

Steve: Okay so we got the win backs, anything else?

Austin: The other campaign that I focus on is a VIP campaign. This one when you’re looking at the people who really drive your business, most businesses are going to be at some variable of like the 80/20 rule where 20% of the customers are going to drive 80% of the sales. I’ve looked at maybe 60 different ecommerce companies; I would say ecommerce in general it’s more like 20% driving between 65 and like 70, 75% is typically what I see.

That means there is a very small limited group of customers who are driving a vast majority of sales and are ultra responsive to your marketing. So what I do is I focus down on about the top 10, 5 to 10% of the customers and I set up a campaign I call it the ‘ask and receive campaign.’ So I’ll set it up in Klaviyo where I look at my customers and say, when people hit $200 in revenue and have purchased three times they are automatically added to my top 5% because that’s where they qualified.

So I set up a segment in there and the moment people hit that it’ll start triggering a campaign that follows up with them and usually about 15 to 20 days later it says, talks about why they’re valuable, how I appreciate them being with us and I’ll give them some sort of a discount on the next purchase. That goes like crazy; I actually got one campaign that’s running with a 97% open rate on this email.

Steve: It’s ridiculous, okay.

Austin: Because it’s targeted to ultra highly responsive people who have all the VIPs. So that drives them, they take this coupon; they make another purchase that’s very successful.

Steve: Let me ask you this question, when those people have purchased like could you have gone away with knocking them a coupon and they probably would have purchased anyways?

Austin: It’s possible, we can give them like not give away a coupon, give that a try, you could just follow up with an email with these people and thank them, they may purchase again. Typically what I do is I’ll send them like a thank you, also like one of the things with this company that I was talking about its 97% open rates, we don’t really discount at all. So it’s like it’s the only thing that we give them and it’s more framed as like a thank you for being a great customer for all these years and so that’s the framing of it.

We also follow up with a survey that comes out — that goes to them basically 10, 15 days later that asks them for their feedback. It’s like a 25 question survey, it takes about five to ten minutes to fill out for these people, but our goal is to get the information from these top customers. We want to know when they found us, what they’re looking for; it’s like a unique insight into our well of customers.

Steve: Interesting okay.

Austin: About 25% of people filled that out for us and it also drive some sales as well.

Steve: So do you then change the copy on your landing page according to the survey answers?

Austin: So we actually – it determines a lot, it determines like what products we bring out, a lot of the questions are related to products. So we found out that this particular company that I was working with — we try to figure out what products to bring out next and like 80% of our VIP customers said the thing that they were most excited about was more t-shirt designs which kind wasn’t on the radar.

So that immediately switched to be in kind of top of the list which is everyone wants more t-shirt designs, and these are the people that are spending a vast majority of the – driving the vast majority of our sales, let’s give them more t-shirt designs.

Steve: Okay this is what the previous company you consulted with, right?

Austin: Yes this is not with Boom Boom.

Steve: Okay interesting, and so you do that primarily for information gathering not necessarily to extract maximum profit it sounds like?

Austin: Yeah this one is mostly for information gathering, it’s like trying to have a conversation with your best customers, they’ll give you email and information, see if you want to follow up and talk to them. The same thing happen like you’ll notice with Bonobos, Bonobos if you go to any guide shop, any guide shop they’re filled with suits.

If go to Bonobos.com, one of the things they’re showing everywhere is suits. The reason is because they did some customer research and found out that their well of customers, the people who were spending the vast majority of their – driving the vast majority of their sales were buying suits.

So even though it’s a small percentage of their actual purchases, it’s the vast majority of their revenue. So they realized that from having conversations with their customers, learning what they’re purchasing and they redesigned their landing pages, redesigned their guide shops to focus on the high ticket items the suits that were driving the vast majority of their profit.

Steve: So let me ask you this, when you’re creating look alike audiences for your customers, do you do the look alikes for the wells [ph] or do you do look alikes for your general customers, like how do you generate your look alikes?

Austin: It’s a good question; I mean it’s tough because we have — typically the wells serve a small percentage in each…

Steve: Of course.

Austin: A big chunk for look alikes. In an ideal world yeah you take your look alikes from your best customer, you take your best customers, and you make look alikes based off of them. So let’s put it this way like if you could go – you figure out what your, the minimum number of the higher percentage customers you have that you could turn into a look alike campaign, export that and make that a look alike campaign. So don’t use the entire audience, use the better part of the audience if that makes sense.

Steve: Yeah so for our store we’re using like repeat customers since most people just buy once for the wedding and then don’t come back unless they get divorced which hopefully doesn’t happen. But there are a subset of people who are actually higher in age that come back for more, so that’s kind of why I asked the question just to see how you guys are doing it.

Austin: Yeah it’s definitely focusing on those the better customers.

Steve: Okay and then are you doing all of this stuff for Boom Boom right now as well?

Austin: So I’m doing this for Boom Boom right now, there is one of like looking at coming into a kind of a fresh business where the opportunity is. It was focusing on top of the funnel with Facebook and then also on the back end with retention campaigns, these ask and receive campaigns, post purchase, the bio dice, so building all those on Klaviyo has been kind of my first step.

I’ve been doing like this consulting for the last couple of years, I had even a marketing agency working with some of the largest ecommerce brands out there. So I’ve been taking that and bringing it to Boom Boom and then I’m also working with – Drew Sanocki and I are also working on kind of a two day intensive where we build all the stuff out for different brands.

Steve: Let’s give Drew a quick plug here nerdmarketing.com if you guys want to check it out. So Austin that’s great, I mean we’ve been chatting for quite a while now and you gave a lot of great nuggets, and thank you so much for giving an insight to actually how you approach like a brand new company and kind of dissect the different strategies and what to tackle first.

Austin: Yeah it’s been no problem in that it’s definitely a learning experience for everyone. I feel like when you come in you’re trying to find opportunities, you’re going to start with the foundation the basic analytics and then get those to set and kind of testing different things and see if you can find one that scales.

Steve: Maybe we’ll have to do a little bit of follow-up to see how your campaigns are doing maybe like six months later and see where things are as well.

Austin: Yeah that would be great, we’d love to.

Steve: Cool, well in the meantime Austin tell the listeners where they can find you online if they have any questions.

Austin: Yeah so the best place to find me would be to go to brandgrowthexperts.com, that’s where Drew Sanocki and I my business partner have our website, we talk a little bit about how to send smart and more profitable emails, and we’re actually hosting an event in March after Traffic and Conversion Summit March 13th to 14th where we’re going to be helping about 15 different businesses, brand owners build out these campaigns. So if you’re interested go to brandgrowthexperts.com and you can learn some more about that and what that looks like.

Steve: Cool, well hey Austin thanks a lot for coming on the show man, really appreciated.

Austin: Hey Steve, thanks a lot, I really appreciate your checking with me every time and yeah I’ll talk to you soon then.

Steve: All right, take care man.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. What I love about Austin is that he knows what he’s doing and he has this track record of working with companies and blowing up their sales. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode165.

And once again I want to thank Seller Labs. Their tool Ignite is what I use to manage my Amazon PPC campaigns. Instead of the old tedious way of generating reports and analyzing your ad campaigns in excel, Ignite aggregates all that info for you in one place and allows you to quickly visualize your data to make decisions fast.

Not only does it save time, but it also makes managing your Amazon campaigns so much easier too. So head on over to sellerlabs.com/steve and sign up for a free 30 day trial, once again that’s sellerlabs.com/steve.

I also want to thank Klaviyo which is my email marketing platform of choice for ecommerce merchants. You can easily put together automated flows like an abandoned cart sequence, a post purchase flow and a win back campaign, and basically all of these sequences that will make you money on auto pilot. So head on over to mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/ K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

Now I talk about how I use these tools on my blog and if you’re interested in starting your own ecommerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away via email, thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

164: How To Use Instagram To Create A 7 Figure Ecommerce Business In Under A Year

How To Use Instagram To Create A 7 Figure Ecommerce Business In Under A Year

Today I’m happy to have Bishoi Khella on the show. Bishoi and his partner Ibrahim started MyTruwood.com which is an affordable and stylish wooden watch company. Now what’s cool about their company is that they managed to generate 1 million dollar in sales in their first year using only Instagram as their marketing channel.

And as you all know, Instagram is a great way to market your ecommerce store if you know what you are doing. Clearly Ibrahim and Bishoi know what they are doing and today, we’re going to find out their strategies and tactics.

What You’ll Learn

  • How they discovered their niche
  • How they manufacture their watches.
  • How he found his vendors
  • The price differential between the US vs China
  • How long it took to get his first product to market
  • How much he invested to get started.
  • Why he picked Instagram and not another platform.
  • How to leverage Instagram for sales

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Ignite.Sellerlabs.com – If you are selling on Amazon and running Amazon Sponsored Ads campaigns, then Ignite from Seller Labs is a must have tool. Click here and get a FREE 30 Day Trial.
Ignite Logo

ReferralCandy.com – If you’re already getting steady orders every month, adding a refer-a-friend program to your store can give you a new sales channel. And ReferralCandy is the best in the business. Click here and get a FREE $50 credit towards your account.
referral candy

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and delve deeply into what strategies are working and what strategies are not with their businesses.

Today I’m thrilled to have Bishoi Khella on the show, and what’s unique about Bishoi is that he used Instagram to turn his wooden watch company mytruwood.com into a seven figure business in under a year, and today we’re going to talk about exactly how he did it.

Now before we begin I want to give a quick shout out to Seller Labs who is a sponsor of the show, and specifically I want to talk about their brand new tool Ignite which helps sellers manage their Amazon sponsored ads. Right now I’m using this tool to manage my Amazon sponsored ad campaigns, and it makes things a heck of a lot more convenient.

So number one I’ve always found it a major pain to generate my PPC reports on Amazon, cut and paste the data over to an excel spreadsheet and use pivot tables before I’m able do any analysis. Now Ignite pulls all that info for you automatically and allows you to easily see what keywords are working and what are not immediately, so there is no need to manually create reports or play with excel.

Second of all unless you’re a data geek, Amazon campaign data can be hard to understand, and what’s cool is that Ignite makes keyword and bidding recommendations on the fly that can be applied with a couple of clicks.

So let’s say one of my hankie keywords is bleeding money, well Ignite will alert me of that fact, and I can reduce the bid immediately. So bottom line Ignite makes managing your Amazon sponsored ads much, much easier and the fact that they provide me with alerts means that I no longer have to monitor my campaigns like a hawk.

If there are keywords that are doing well, Ignite tells me to add them to my exact match campaigns, if my keywords are losing money, well Ignite tells me to either remove the keyword or to reduce the bid. So head on over to sellerlabs.com/steve where you’ll find some awesome tutorials on PPC and the opportunity to try Ignite for 30 days for free. Once again that’s sellerlabs.com/steve.

I also want to give a shout out to Klaviyo who is also a sponsor of the show. Now I’m always super excited to talk about Klaviyo because they are the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store, and I depend on Klaviyo for over 20% of my revenues. Now you’re probably wondering why Klaviyo and not another provider. Well Klaviyo is the only email platform out there that is specifically built for ecommerce stores, and here’s why it’s so powerful.

Klaviyo can track every single customer who has shopped in your store and exactly what they bought. So let’s say I want to send an email to everyone who purchased a red handkerchief in the last week, well that’s easy. Let’s say I want to set up a special autoresponder sequence to my customers depending on what they purchased, piece of cake, and there is full revenue tracking on every single email.

Now Klaviyo is the most powerful email platform that I’ve ever used and you can try them for free at mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O. And if you’re interested in starting your own ecommerce store go to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six day mini course. Just head on over to the front page, enter your email and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email. Now on the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast; today I’m happy to have Bishoi Khella on the show. Now normally I actually don’t interview anyone on the show that I haven’t actually met personally, but they put together a great pitch that just happened to coincide with material that I was looking for.

Now it’s a two person company, Ibrahim and Bishoi, they started mytruwood.com which is a company that sells affordable and stylish wooden watches. Now what’s cool about their company is that they managed to generate almost a million dollars in sales in their first year using only Instagram as their primary marketing channel.

As you all know Instagram is a great way to market your ecommerce store if you know what you’re doing, and clearly Ibrahim and Bishoi know what they’re doing and today we’re going to find out their strategies and their tactics and kind of break it down for you. And with that welcome to the show Bishoi, how are you doing today man?

Bishoi: Great Steve, thanks for having me man, appreciated.

Steve: Yeah so Bishoi why wooden watches and how did you get into the ecommerce?

Bishoi: So me and my partner Ibrahim we started our company in our last semester in university, and we just saw tried and we just thought we should try something, we might as well try it in our last semester and if it doesn’t work out we just end up going on jobs that we had lined up. So we started it and it ended up taking off and we didn’t take our full time offers and we just continued working on this ever since.

So the reason why we started wooden watches is because we’ve been looking at products to sell, we’ve always had like some entrepreneurial mindset, we’ve always been looking at products that we could sell and try to make some money off of it, but it transitioned into so much more than that like we’re so deeply rooted in this company and our mission and we just ended up coming across a few watches and a few sunglasses that were made out of wood.

We were like wow, these are beautiful and we wanted to buy them ourselves but as students we have a debt and we have student loans and stuff like that, and so we couldn’t justify paying like $300 to $400 for a nice wooden watch. So we were like, hey let’s try to make it ourselves, maybe make one or two for ourselves and see how it goes, and then we were able to get our costs pretty low. So we were like, hey let’s actually start this as a business because we were trying to do ecommerce anyway, so then it transitioned into something like that.

Steve: Where did you find these wooden watches?

Bishoi: Just on the internet, so as I was like goggling I think you know you see a ton of ads as you’re like scrapping the internet and we just saw another company, I’m not going to mention who they are but…

Steve: Sure of course.

Bishoi: We saw another company and then we were taken back, we were like, wow this is so beautiful but we click on the link and we see that like it’s like literally 300 bucks and we were like we can’t afford a watch that much, we were trying to search for the company with like something that’s more affordable for the masses and more of like an everyday watch, and that’s why we set out to create Truwood.

Steve: Okay and did you have like a process of researching your niche, or is this just something that you came across because you wanted one of these and so you decide to sell them?

Bishoi: Well it started like that, it started because we wanted it and we kind of assumed that a lot of people were in the same boat as well as that it’s such a unique product, not many people have even seen one before, and so you kind of want it, but at the same time you can’t justify spending X amount of dollars on such a new product that you don’t even really know about, like you don’t know how it’s going to look or something like that, because it’s so new, you don’t see this often.

So we wanted to set out to create something that’s affordable for everyone, and we kind of take our vibe of our company a lot differently than our competitors, so they more market it like a premium luxury product while we try to be like that friendly show company. We put smiley faces on our emails, we connect with our customers like that, and we try to stay away from like the professional – that type of company.

Steve: Okay, I guess what I was trying to get out was like was it like a quantitative analysis like did you judge the market size or were you just really interested in the product and you kind of knew that there was demand for it?

Bishoi: Well we definitely, it’s a mixture of both. So we did know that the product had demand based on our competitors and at that time we saw that they were getting some fairly good traction, people were like, wow I’ve never seen something like that. So in terms of that, but then we did a ton of research like to figure out who we can market this to and how we can get it out at different angle then what’s currently out there in the market, because we believe that to be able to come in and compete in an industry you have to either be significantly different, your product has to be significantly different, or you can market it to a different type of niche or a different type of person than what’s currently out there in the market.

We couldn’t find anything that was for the low end – not really, I wouldn’t say our products are necessarily cheap, cheap in terms of cost but they’re definitely one of the cheaper options out there, and we didn’t want to sacrifice on quality either. So we set out to make a really good watch for an affordable price and maybe take a hit on the margins, but at the end of the day it helps us with planting more trees in the end because more people are going to be drawn to it.

Steve: Yeah let’s talk about that a little bit because you’re positioned kind of uniquely, so first of all you are not going for the high end, right?

Bishoi: No right now we focus on the low end market, not even low end just the average medium size and medium consumer, but we’re definitely transitioning into having some higher end models just so we can capture a wide range of the market, but right now we’re primarily focused on the affordability of our product.

Steve: And then you also plant, is it ten trees I can’t remember for every sale?

Bishoi: Yeah it’s ten trees for every order definitely.

Steve: Can you talk about like how that has affected your sales or do you have any correlation?

Bishoi: Yeah definitely, so planting the trees was something we were very adamant about and we want to do that for sure because our products are made of wood, and so we’re taking away from the environment in that aspect, but we wanted to give back like ten times more than we were taking or hundreds of times more than what we were taking.

So like one watch can probably – one tree can probably make thousands of watches, and so we plant ten trees for every watch or every order, and so we give back thousands of times in return just because we don’t want to be taking from the environment.

Our whole goal here was to create a sustainable business and also it does resonate well with our customers, but our focus here was our product first and then having a social aspect associated with the business is definitely a bonus, and is something that people can get behind easier. But I’d say that the primary focus for us was creating a great product and then having a social aspect actually just adds to the benefit of the whole purchasing process.

Steve: How have you leverage that social process, like do you have like a fan page that kind of emphasizes trees and protecting them?

Bishoi: No we actually don’t have like a specific separate page for that, we try to push the story through our website and through our Instagram page, and through any marketing channel we do we always push the fact that we plant ten trees. But our focus here is that we want our customers to love the product itself and fall in love with the actual product, and then the mission behind our company just adds value to the whole experience rather than being a company that, hey we plant trees but we also give you a wooden watch.

So our focus was more we sell watches but we also plant ten trees at the same time, rather than it being a focus on the trees and then you also get a watch, because anyone can go out there and plant ten trees for much cheaper than they would for buying a watch, and so our primary focus has to be on the products.

Steve: No of course yeah and it’s actually for the people who are listening out there, it’s always great to have some sort of story behind your product and the fact that you plant trees kind of lends a nice back story for your company.

Bishoi: Yeah definitely, we think so too.

Steve: So where do you get your watches manufactured, is it in the US, Asia?

Bishoi: Yeah our watches are made in Asia right now.

Steve: Okay and how did you find your vendors, because you mentioned before there is not a lot of people doing this right now?

Bishoi: Yeah so we started on Alibaba, I’m sure a lot of people who are in the ecommerce world would know about this. So Alibaba is a great company that connects suppliers with people who are looking to supply something or is looking to manufacture something. So we just started searching and we did endless searches on Alibaba for someone who would make a wooden watch for us, and we started hitting up not even wooden watch manufacturers but regular watch manufacturers.

Some people would say they couldn’t do it, so we did do quite a bit of search to find a good one and we went through a ton of prototypes with a ton of different manufacturing companies until we found the one company that we were really happy to be working with, and we’re confident in the quality of the products that they make for us.

Steve: So when it comes to designing a wooden watch, none of you guys have a design background, do you?

Bishoi: No we don’t.

Steve: Okay, so how do you convey – I imagine you have to have a factory that works with wood, right?

Bishoi: Yeah definitely of course.

Steve: Okay and then did they already have things that they had already made for other customers at the time, or were you putting out literally a new product from a new manufacturer?

Bishoi: No it was – they have made wooden watches before, so it was easy in that sense that we don’t have to create like a whole new machine or some process that would be able to make the wooden watch, so they already had the process in place, we just had to design the watches.

The great thing about our current manufacturer and the ones we worked with, a lot of these guys actually help you with making the designs so they have their own engineering team, their own design team and you could really put your ideas in words and send them kind of like pictures of other watches and be like I like this part of it but I don’t like that, or I want to add this to it and put it all in words and even try to send them drawings or maybe kind of a mark up on the computer and they’re able to draw it out.

Then once you sign off on the design they end up sending you cut drawings and then you approve those cut drawings and you’re good to go.

Steve: Okay so it’s not like you put together the cut drawings, you found watch styles that you like, picked and matched different pictures that you liked and then had them create the mark ups for you?

Bishoi: Yeah definitely and also in words too like just explaining, so we like this color, and they also have a ton of like what do you call it, just designs of exactly what they have, so like they have maybe a booklet of 5,000 arms like hands for the watch, they have a booklet of 5,000 crowns of the watches they have and then we kind of put together, we went through everything and put together in that sense and also based on other designs we’ve seen in the past.

Steve: In order for them to do work for you, did you have to purchase a lot for your first purchase?

Bishoi: You usually negotiate the terms prior to you ordering a sample just because let’s say you order samples then they just tell you that it’s 500 bucks for a watch and then that’s not the price point you wanted to be at. So we negotiated the terms prior to ordering samples and then once everything is good to go in terms of how low you wanted the cost to be we’d get the samples, but we’ve never had to actually pay out any money for the mass order until we approved the samples.

So you can imagine the samples are pretty expensive compared to the bulk order because they don’t know if they have you in lock yet, you know what I mean?

Steve: Sure, how much did you pay for the samples and how many units was your first order?

Bishoi: It depends on what sample we got, I’d say anywhere from 80 to 150 bucks per watch, yeah it’s somewhere around there, and our first order I think was for maybe 300 watches, something like that.

Steve: Oh okay, so not that high, and then meanwhile they were putting together custom watches for you?

Bishoi: Yeah completely custom, they are completely our designs yeah.

Steve: So let me ask you this, how did you convey to them that you were like a serious player, because I would imagine they get requests like these and it requires significant resources on their part?

Bishoi: Yeah definitely so a lot of these companies they do have minimum order quantities. We got lucky in the one that he kind of is always behind us and he actually believes in our ability to take this where we needed to take it, and so he actually made an exception for us in being able to get the minimum order quantity down to 300 units. Then ever since then our orders have been way larger than that like we just ordered probably over 10,000 watches back in November.

Steve: And when you had to make those orders like do you have to focus on one style or could you mix and match different styles?

Bishoi: Yeah so that’s the thing too is they don’t like to – I can’t tell them I want five watches of 50 different styles, so that’s another thing like we had to really negotiate and tell them, hey don’t worry, just trust us, we’re not looking for just a onetime manufacturer, we want someone that we can partner with and we can build our company with them.

So we were able to sell them on us and then they were able to just let us do lower minimum order quantities on different styles.

Steve: So that first 300 order, was that a single style then?

Bishoi: No that was six styles actually.

Steve: Oh six styles, okay so then you ordered 50 of each?

Bishoi: Yeah that was the lowest, I don’t think you can even – I’m pretty sure that’s unheard of in terms of getting something manufactured, but we did pay a premium for that. Obviously they wouldn’t have done it if they were losing money on it and we did definitely pay a premium compared to what we’re paying right now for our watches.

Steve: Can we talk about the margins for that first order?

Bishoi: They were pretty low; I think it was, gross was probably 50%.

Steve: Really okay and then what are they now on the bulk mark?

Bishoi: They are 70 gross.

Steve: Okay and you had to order like 10,000 in order to get that, get those margins?

Bishoi: Oh yeah definitely.

Steve: Okay and how long did it take you to get your first product to market then?

Bishoi: So what we did was we ordered a ton of samples from different manufacturers and so we got the first – we thought we were going to do it in like a tiered system where we try one manufacturer then see the samples, if we like them we’d go with them, if not we’d go on to the next one. But what we found was that was taking way too long before we could get to market because now we have — the lead time for our watches are two months, so every time we have to wait and start a new guy, that’s a two month waiting period.

So we ended up buying a ton from different manufacturers, comparing them all and then…

Steve: What’s the turn, are we talking about like 10, 20?

Bishoi: Oh year around like eight let’s say.

Steve: Eight okay.

Bishoi: Until we found the one that we are really happy with. The first one we got for example, it was a wooden watch and so it is made out of wood and you touch it and it would give you like splinters and we were like, okay this manufacturer is a right off, yeah that was crazy and we were actually set out to make the thinnest wooden watch in the market.

We tried to do that at least and so that was our goal, and the first manufacturer gives us this like bulky watch that we would not – like it was completely opposite of our vision for the company, and so we had to really like just be like, hey we’re not going to worry about how much we spend on prototypes because at the end of the day once we get it working that money will be insignificant compared to the upside of having a great product.

So we just ended up going all at the same time trying to hit up a ton of manufacturers all at the same time and not worry about, hey let’s not spend an extra couple of a hundred bucks on another manufacturer.

Steve: How much did you invest to get started including that first turn to get an order?

Bishoi: The big part of our success actually was in Canada where we are based out off, there is a grant with the Ontario government, it’s called the starter company program, and what they do is they offer grant money, free money for startups for young entrepreneurs.

So that was huge for us because I went through the program with Ibrahim and we sat down – they actually teach you a ton of stuff, we were business students, so there was a ton of overlap but in the end of the day you get to pitch to a panel of judges…

Steve: Oh cool.

Bishoi: And if they like your idea they give you the grant money, and that really helped us because we were students, we at this point were students and we had a ton of student debt to pay off and rent and food and were not living at home. So we did need the money to start it off with the grant and that really helped us a lot.

Steve: How much was the grant?

Bishoi: It was 5,000.

Steve: Okay, nice, okay so you started for five grand, awesome. So you mentioned that your main sales channel was Instagram, so first of all why did you choose Instagram and not another platform in the beginning?

Bishoi: So Instagram is great just because you could see the picture, you have full occupation of the person’s screen and so for that split second as they are scrolling you kind of have their full undivided attention on that one area, and so that was a big reason. We also have a couple of friends that have also been in the ecommerce businesses and they’ve seen success through Instagram, so it was kind of an easier lead for us to try it out and that’s why we chose Instagram over the other ones.

Also in terms of competition, Facebook is probably one of the bigger advertising platforms out there and there’s just – if you’re trying to compete in the US and Canadian markets there’s so many companies competing for that same space, and so starting out we don’t really have too much money in order to test a lot of stuff which is the type of strategy you have to play with Facebook.

You have to do a lot of testing in order to hit the cost per click that you’re looking for. So we decided to go with Instagram just because it was a good way to start because we didn’t have too much money to invest in testing on it, yeah.

Steve: Okay and just to be clear this is like organic Instagram traffic, right?

Bishoi: Yeah exactly, I’m not talking about paid through Facebook yeah.

Steve: So let’s say you have this Instagram account with zero followers, can you walk me through how you started it up?

Bishoi: Yeah so we have an Instagram page with zero followers and we just started hitting up company — large pages that have a good following in our niche and we just started to hit them up and we tell them, hey do you mind posting a picture of our watch for us for X amount of dollars? We just kept growing our roster that way.

Steve: How many pictures did you have in your account before you started reaching out?

Bishoi: Probably ten, we tried to fill up the page, so like if you are on our main Instagram page like right at the home page of our page, you’d see like the full page of pictures.

Steve: So when you were hitting these Instagramers up, what follower accounts were you looking for, how much does it cost to have them post a picture of yours?

Bishoi: It varies significantly depending on the size of the account and how engaged their follower base is. So we started off with literally the smaller accounts because we couldn’t afford to pay a million follower accounts.

Steve: So how big is a small account in your ads?

Bishoi: Like 50K.

Steve: 50K okay.

Bishoi: Yeah 50K.

Steve: And when you’re measuring engagement what are you looking for?

Bishoi: We are looking at comments, we’re looking at likes and we’re looking at as a percentage of their follower base, and if the comments are real or fake we’d also look at that because a lot of these influencers are part of groups and the groups try to help each other by commenting on the other person’s photo. So that ends up improving the score of the photo and so for us we counted that as fake even though they are real people, they are real followers but we try to go for those real, real accounts at the beginning just so we could have a good return on our money in order to reinvest it.

Steve: What’s a good percentage?

Bishoi: In terms of engagement?

Steve: Yeah comments versus followers.

Bishoi: We try to go for anything over 2% depending on the actual account. So if the account has a million followers you’re typically going to get a lower engagement in terms of percentages because it’s harder to engage a higher percentage of a million people.

Steve: Do likes matter for you or is it just comments?

Bishoi: Likes definitely matter, like if we have a 50K page with 300 likes that’s kind of a red flag to us that, hey this guy is probably not, he doesn’t have real followers.

Steve: What were the percentages of likes look like, like you mentioned 2% for comments, what about for likes?

Bishoi: No I was talking about 2% in total for engagement.

Steve: Oh engagement, okay comments and likes.

Bishoi: Yeah exactly.

Steve: Okay got it, so that 50K person like how much would you pay, let’s say they followed your criteria?

Bishoi: Anywhere from 50 bucks – no actually I’d say anywhere from 30 to 50 bucks for a 50K account.

Steve: Okay so that very first Instagram account that you hit up and they posted a picture, did you get any sales from it?

Bishoi: Yeah we actually did, we got a few sales and we were super stoked and then we ended up continuing with them for a couple more weeks and so we kind of outgrew that size and then continued to the higher follower accounts, and we kept kind of trying to scale up that way in terms of being able to afford more larger accounts yeah.

Steve: So it was profitable immediately?

Bishoi: In terms of marketing side yeah definitely, right away we were able to generate a return.

Steve: Okay, that’s basically one sale right if you’re paying 30 to 50 bucks.

Bishoi: Yeah definitely that’s like one or two sales and we’re good to go.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of finding these people like do you have a specific strategy for it?

Bishoi: Nothing really specific, our strategy has been just to find accounts that are niche and then vet them based on how good the account is.

Steve: Is it just based on hashtags or like how do you find these accounts?

Bishoi: We just search it on Instagram really; we just search whatever like whatever we were trying to target. So if we’re trying to target something that’s for couples, we try to search for couple pages and stuff like that, just hashtags or even in the search bar you just type like anything and it even shows people right away, so yeah.

Steve: Okay can you give me an example of like one of your successful accounts in the watch space or…

Bishoi: Like an actual account?

Steve: Yeah or just something, you don’t have to give the actual name but like give me an idea of an account that actually buys watches that you’ve used.

Bishoi: Oh in terms of a niche, right is how you’re talking?

Steve: Yeah, yes.

Bishoi: Oh yeah definitely, we do a lot of advertising on nature pages because our whole premise is we plant ten trees and so that also engages with those followers highly as well.

Steve: Interesting so those nature followers they are not necessarily looking to buy watches, right?

Bishoi: No, definitely not. They might be and a lot of the times they do want to buy watches too because like the watches are pretty unique and a lot of people like to give them as gifts, so it does help in that sense.

Steve: Okay and so can you just kind of run down like your top three, say nature pages, what else?

Bishoi: Nature pages, probably – I’m trying to think which one would be a second, I’d say probably like animal pages.

Steve: Animal pages okay.

Bishoi: Yeah, so like our goal for us really was just so we could be able to handle large target for a one time with one single post, and so by hitting up any of these pages you’re likely to have someone that’s going to be able to buy your watch. So just having the size of the page being so large you’re definitely going to get a lot of people that are interested in your type of product.

Steve: Okay how do you – animals, that sounds really random, was that just an experimental thing or did you start out going, hey I want to target animal pages?

Bishoi: Yeah it definitely was, it definitely was experimental.

Steve: Okay and in terms of approaching them, one, how do you find their contact info and how do you approach them and what do you write?

Bishoi: We find their contact info on their page, a lot of these people who have a ton of followers they know that their account is good for advertisement and so they have their address on Instagram, or a lot of times you could just DM them, but a lot of times they don’t answer just because of the size of their account, they get a ton of people reaching out to them every day.

Steve: Okay and so you try to – they probably leave an email address or something like that?

Bishoi: Yeah a lot of the times they do, they leave an email address in their bio and you could just hit them up that way.

Steve: And so what would you write to them as an initial contact?

Bishoi: It’s really hey — actually let me try to pull it up if I can.

Steve: Sure.

Bishoi: It’s just basically introducing ourselves and introducing our company and we feel like our product would be great on their page and their followers would probably likely engage with our photo, and we also try to leverage other accounts that we use. So we like check out our post on so and so’s page and see our engagement compared to other ads that they run, and we were able to leverage it like that.

Steve: Okay and in terms of talking prices do you ask them for that upfront?

Bishoi: Yeah straight up we ask right away on probably one of the first messages, we’re like, hey do you mind sending us your pricing for your page and then they send it back and we try and negotiate if we don’t feel like it’s a fair price, but most of the times these guys are pretty aware of what they should be charging for their accounts, so you could end up paying anywhere from like 300, 400 and 500 dollars just for a shout out and I’m not even talking celebrity, I’m talking about like just regular pages.

Steve: So what’s a good ROI for you in order to keep going with an influencer?

Bishoi: For marketing we were aiming to have under 15% just because our margins are so low compared to other watch companies because that was our overall goal, so we really have to be cognizant of how much we’re paying for it.

Steve: So we’re talking like a 6X return on ad spend then?

Bishoi: Yeah around 6X yeah.

Steve: Okay interesting and was that just a number that – like how did you come up with that number?

Bishoi: So we kind of had like a goal for net profit because we don’t even pay ourselves really much right now, and so without having a goal for net profit we kind of worked up that way.

Steve: So let’s say you find someone who is like a 4X ROI, do you just stop working with them?

Bishoi: No, no we don’t try to generate a return on every single account; we try to have it generated on overall return on our portfolio if you would say.

Steve: Okay so that’s like kind of what I was asking then, so if you find someone – like what are your factors for continuing on with them and when do you just outright stop, like what’s the low threshold and the high threshold?

Bishoi: So a lot of the times you could gauge the success of account not even by the sales but by the amount of visits you get right after you post, so let’s say I have a post with them at 3PM and then I’m constantly monitoring the traffic to our website and if we see some sort of a spike, then we know that the account is pretty real and pretty good because really their only job is to drive traffic, it’s our job to make the sale, and so we can’t really judge the quality of the account based on the amount of sales we get, we kind of try to judge it by the amount of traffic we get to a certain extent.

If the traffic is from a country that isn’t likely to purchase, then obviously it’s not as valuable as the traffic from the US or traffic from Canada who are more likely to do purchases online, you know what I mean?

Steve: Yeah, how long does the link stay in their bio?

Bishoi: A lot of these guys don’t do links in bio; we try to push them to our Instagram page which is how we kind of grew our follower base pretty high as well. Just by pushing them through our page and so that gives us the opportunity to get a follow from them and be able to sell later on and provide content as well.

A reason why our Instagram page if you look at it has such great engagement compared to others is because we decided that we’re not just going to be pushing products down our customers’ throats all day long, we’re going to be providing great content that they like to engage with and also push our products. We actually push the great content more than we push our products just because providing value has been key for our success.

Steve: So let’s talk about that, let’s talk about the content that’s actually on your page, like what are some of the photos that you like to post?

Bishoi: We were a nature based company in terms of our social initiative and so number one right off the bat is nature scenic areas like in different areas of the world. Number two would be…

Steve: How do you get those photos?

Bishoi: We actually get them off other pages and they’re kind of happy for us to use their photos because that ends up driving traffic to their pages, because we always put like photo credit so and so. So it ends up driving traffic to the person who posted the photo and it provides great content for our follower base, so it’s kind of a win-win.

Steve: So there’s not a watch in that photo then?

Bishoi: Sorry in the specific photo that we post?

Steve: No I mean you mentioned like you have photos from all over the world, like do they contain watches or they are just nature photos?

Bishoi: Oh no they’re just purely flat nature photos, just regular…

Steve: Okay.

Bishoi: Yeah exactly.

Steve: Got it, got it, but then you do have photos obviously with your product in, right?

Bishoi: Yeah of course, so we try to do like a two to one ratio where for every photo of nature or engaging content that isn’t related to our product, we do one of our own product photos.

Steve: When you say engaging content, are you talking about like your photo linking to a post or literally just the photo?

Bishoi: I’m talking about literally just the photo, like content that people like and engage with in terms of – like so if I were to post a ton of product photos on all my page, our account would not be as valuable in terms of how greatly people are engaging with there just because people tend to engage with product shots rather less than they do with like nature, nice looking pictures, you know what I mean?

Steve: Can you talk about like your highest performing Instagram post and what you wrote in the comment section?

Bishoi: Yeah so probably our highest performing photo has definitely been a nature photo, I’m trying to think which one but I don’t have one right off the top of my head, but usually it’s related to the photo and just like whatever comment we could come up with that’s related to the actual picture.

Steve: Okay so it’s much more about the photo and very little about the comment, like you don’t spend that much time on the comment?

Bishoi: Oh yeah no definitely finding great photos has been our key – definitely been the key for us.

Steve: Okay and so just by paying influencers your account just gradually builds up, so what percentage would you say – okay and you’re guiding people to your account, so they actually have to click twice just to make it to your site, right?

Bishoi: Yeah so usually the thing with Instagram is that they don’t let you put links in the actual comment of a photo but they let you put it in your bio on your page, so they‘re going to have to click twice anyways because if they want to get to the influencer’s bio they’d have to click on the influencer’s profile. So our idea was like we might as well push them through our page, maybe a get a follow out of it and then also drive traffic to our Instagram page as well as the website.

So either way they’re going to be clicking twice and so we’d rather have them click twice through our page rather than through somewhere else.

Steve: So would you say then that almost all your sales are mobile sales?

Bishoi: A lot of them are, a good percentage of them. I think what happens is though and I think that’s true for a lot of ecommerce businesses is the initial view is on mobile and then they come back later on desktop and make the purchase. So there is still kind of a healthy split but I think the initial like viewing of our company is on mobile.

Steve: Okay so you’re paying influencers and you’re putting together good content on your page, what are other factors that you’ve used to build up your account?

Bishoi: On Instagram?

Steve: Yeah.

Bishoi: Those are definitely the two main things, great content and if you know shout outs through bigger pages that gives you more publicity to your page. I think those are the two main things and I don’t think that there may be anything else really other than those two big factors.

Steve: Okay because I noticed on your account that you don’t follow anyone either, so you don’t like follow random companies with hopes that they will follow you back?

Bishoi: No we tried out too, I mean you see a lot of companies doing that, we just try to follow like the one account we follow is our partner in helping us plant these trees and that’s really what we do right now.

Steve: Okay so let’s go back and talk about finding the advertiser spot, like how did you come across the animals one which sounds really random to me?

Bishoi: A lot of these guys actually hit you up; they are looking to make money as well so they’re trying to reach out to people, all day we get probably ten emails a day of influencer accounts trying to ask us…

Steve: Interesting, how did you get on that list because we hardly get hit up for anything on Instagram?

Bishoi: Really, we actually didn’t sign up for any list, we didn’t do anything; it’s just like actual individual accounts that are trying to generate money I guess. I guess how we get noticed is by running shout outs on other pages and then these smaller pages are people who are reaching out to us see our ad on another page and then they are like, oh he must be running ads, let me try to email him, you know what I mean?

Steve: I see, let me ask you this, is there a special way that you search for specific instagrammers that are selling advertising?

Bishoi: There are platforms out there, we haven’t used them ourselves, but I know there is a platform called Shoutcart and there is a ton of other platforms similar to that, [inaudible 00:38:33] I think is another one. So these are influencers who want to have a platform to sell their advertising space on and that’s completely like regulated too, so you pay the company and the company pays the influencer. Those are the people that actually are actively try to seek out business through publishing their page on a website.

Steve: But in your case you are just doing it organically essentially, right?

Bishoi: We’re doing it ourselves just because we like to develop a long term relationship with all our influencers like we have chats with them, it’s not like a strictly business relationship just because that also allows us to get good rates on the pages and it allows us to have like if we wanted to post one another company had a post we’d get precedence.

So it’s definitely value in developing that personal relationship with each and every one of these accounts that you work with because the backbone of your business is kind of based on them being there for you especially it’s like if that’s your main focus starting out. So we try to do it ourselves, also you’d be negotiating better rates just because if you have a third party middle man they are definitely going to be wanting to take a cut as well, and so you just by cutting them you make some extra money or save some extra money.

Steve: Okay and so when you’re reaching out to these influencers then, so you actually hop on Skype and you negotiate with these guys?

Bishoi: No we talk to them just through chat.

Steve: Just through chat?

Bishoi: Just through chat yeah.

Steve: And in terms of analytics you kind of work out when they’re going to post it and then you just look at your analytics for that specific time to see what happens?

Bishoi: Yeah exactly and another thing we do is coupon codes specific to the page just so we can see how well they carry us, but we found out that around 50% of customers don’t even use the coupon code, so we just scale it up that way just so we can get kind of an accurate estimate of how many sales they get, so like if someone got one coupon, they likely have got two sales actually.

Steve: I see so coupon codes is primarily how you track each source?

Bishoi: Yeah exactly definitely.

Steve: Okay and like – because I would imagine you have multiple campaigns going on in any given day, right?

Bishoi: Yeah definitely, we probably run a few, definitely a few ads every day.

Steve: So let’s say something works with an influencer, like how soon do you schedule out another one?

Bishoi: That was a big thing starting out, when we first started we didn’t have a big roster of accounts, so we kind of had to run them every day or every other day, and a lot of the times these pages don’t even like to do that and they flat out reject that offer just because if they’re pushing the same product every day it reduces the quality of their account and they lose a ton of followers every time they post an ad.

So the tradeoff has to be there in terms of how much you’re willing to pay them versus how low their followers are going to go based on the ad.

Steve: So what would you say is like the average frequency that you do in between campaigns for a given influencer?

Bishoi: Right now we do three, four, anywhere from three to five days actually.

Steve: Oh okay.

Bishoi: Yeah we try to give a healthy space just because also you got to keep in mind that these followers have already seen the post like a couple of days ago and pushing them every day, we try to — by spacing it out by like three or five days you end up getting new people to the page as well because these pages grow a lot faster than your typical page, so any of these pages could grow by, within five days it could grow by thousands of followers. So you end up showing it to more new people that way as well.

Steve: And in terms of – I’m trying to think, in terms of finding the average like could you provide some guidelines on like how you do it, not necessarily like what you see in the average but in terms of just doing the research on what pages could be potentially beneficial to your company.

Bishoi: Yeah so it’s tough to say like exactly what I was trying to explain earlier is that we run an ad on a dog page or like an animal page and we’ve seen success from that, so it’s tough to say which is going to get you the success. But I’d say that when you’re first starting out take two things that you think are in your target market and in your niche and then when you have little extra money to try new things out on, try pages that have great engagement that might not even be related to what you’re selling.

Steve: What is your hit rate then?

Bishoi: In terms of?

Steve: In terms of like paying for an Instagram ad and getting a positive ROI, like what portion of your budget is for experimentation versus ones that you actually know generate cash?

Bishoi: At this point we’re not really experimenting in terms of like just trying out accounts that we might already know we’re not really sure of, right now we have a pretty good roster of great accounts that we work with, and so we only take on board new great accounts like our hit rate is pretty good now just because we’ve had so much experience with other accounts over the last year, and so yeah we try to only bring people on board that are actually going to do well for us, so there is less experimentation now rather than when we first started.

Steve: But how do you know someone is going to do well for you?

Bishoi: It’s just how big their account is and how great their engagement is and how much they’re charging, because like I said these influencers are pretty attuned to how great their followers are or how great their engagement is, so for example I think it’s easier to explain with an example. So let’s say like a two million follower account reaches out to you and goes, hey would you like to buy promotions for us $25 a post.

So that means right off the bat I wouldn’t even look at that account just because no two million follower account would be charging only $25 a post unless it was a fake account. So just by the amount of money that they’re charging for their account and they know the value of it, that also is a good significant determinant of how good the account is.

Steve: I guess what I’m trying to ask is like do you get demographic information because I know like for our customers, there is actually a pocket of customers that are over the age of 55, like do you actually look at demographics and everything?

Bishoi: So a lot of times when we hit off these influencers, now a lot of these influencer pages actually change their profiles to business profiles, and so they do have demographics on Instagram where you could ask them for screen shots of the age, the time their followers are mostly engaged. There is a lot of analytics on Instagram now and so that also does help in our decision making process. It tells you the age, the geographic location, and also the times that the posts do much better than others.

Steve: Okay to kind of just sum up what you’ve been saying is you start out small with influencers that are very closely tied to your niche, I guess in your case would you target like people under watches or?

Bishoi: We try to do watches and also nature because those are the two main aspects of our business specifically, and so it’s easier to find a nature page than it is to do a watch page for us, and so that’s kind of why we were hitting the nature pages hard. There is not many watch pages out there and if there are a lot of their engagement isn’t as great because you know most people would love to like a photo of a nature beautiful scenic area rather than like a watch sitting on a table, you know what I mean?

Steve: Of course, of course, okay and in terms of rates can you just kind of give some general guidelines on how much things cost for so many followers?

Bishoi: Yeah so anyone under I’d say 200,000 followers is going to charge you anywhere from $50 to $100. Once we get to the million follower mark you’re paying anywhere from $300 to $500 per post.

Steve: Okay and then 2% guideline in terms of engagement which includes likes and comments?

Bishoi: Yeah, I mean you’re going to get accounts that have way higher than that, but sometimes you’ll even get accounts with lower than that. That’s just based on the size of the account, so if the account has a lot more followers you got to be more lenient in terms of how high you need the engagement rate to be. So when we’re dealing with like million follower accounts we try to aim for anything over 1% is great.

Steve: Okay and then have you ever tried anything larger than that?

Bishoi: More than a million followers?

Steve: Yeah.

Bishoi: When you’re talking about over like a couple of million you’re talking about celebrities and that’s a whole another ball game in terms of how much they charge. So a celebrity who has a couple of million followers would charge you probably a couple of thousand versus what a page with the same amount of followers would charge you.

Steve: One thing I forgot to ask you was the creative that you have them share, is it a unique photo just for them?

Bishoi: No, so we have a great photographer on board and we have a bunch of photos that we think are our best photos and so we send them out to all of them and there is not a unique photo that they’ve taken. A lot of influencers do that actually, they get you to – especially the photographer influencers, they’ll get you to send them a product and they take the photo themselves and they post it on their page and it’s a unique photo to their page and no one has ever seen before, a lot of them do that.

I’d say the only negative aspect to that is you can’t really control how prominent the product is in the photo, so in the influencer’s best interest the product is hidden in the background, in your best interest the product is out in your face just so that people can actually see the product. So there is kind of a mismatch there, so that’s why we try to send them our photos just so we can control the quality of the photo.

Steve: Okay and in terms of your photos then, are they photos that you have posted on your own account or are these unique photos?

Bishoi: They are a mixture of both, so sometimes we get a brand new photo that we’re really hey this is nice, let’s wait before we post it on our page, let’s try it on ads and see.

Steve: Okay but do you ever do a photo that’s already on your account?

Bishoi: Yeah all the time.

Steve: The highest performing one okay.

Bishoi: All the time.

Steve: Okay and do you just choose your highest performing picture than at that point?

Bishoi: Yeah definitely it’s so much easier to choose a photo based on your profile just because you can go through your page and see how well it did on your page and if it did well on yours it’ll probably do well on others as well.

Steve: Okay and Instagram ranks photos based on engagement, and so with the influencers – let’s see what am I getting at here, with the influencers is it really obvious that something that they post is going to get a lot of engagement based on prior engagement?

Bishoi: Yes because that…

Steve: You’re seeing what I’m getting at?

Bishoi: I get exactly where you’re getting at, yeah that’s been a big switch for us, and that’s why we’re kind of trying to explore other marketing mediums just because Instagram now is becoming really tough to do well on versus probably a year back when we first started. So a big change that they did was posts are no longer chronological, they are based on the time, and so when I go, if you had posted first and then someone else had posted second, you’d see your post first then someone else second.

Now the algorithm has changed in terms of what you see on Instagram, it’s based on how you engage with that person’s account. So if I start liking your photos much more often than I like John’s photos, then I’m going to be shown your stuff a lot more than John’s and I might not even see John’s, you know what I mean?

Steve: Right, yeah.

Bishoi: So that’s been tough for us in terms of Instagram just because now obviously a promotional post on a shout out is not going to do anywhere near as well as what the page actually posts, so if it’s a nature account they post nature photos, you’re almost never going to get a good performing ad photo equivalent to a good performing nature photo.

Steve: Right.

Bishoi: So that really hurts in terms of just the reach, just the audience because they don’t show the ad to as many people as they used to because it’s not chronological anymore and they also determine the score of the photo within like ten minutes in their algorithm. So it’s easy actually for Instagram to tell what an ad photo is versus a regular photo on the person’s page just by in the first ten minutes you see how high the engagement is going versus the other posts on my page, and then they could easily tell right off the bat that this photo is kind of a bad photo, let’s not publish it, let’s not show it to as many people.

Steve: So how does that affect you going forward and like your advice for the people listening?

Bishoi: It’s great to start off with Instagram just because you could get a wide reach and start growing your page and getting more social proof to your page, but right now our marketing spend has almost doubled within the last like couple of months just because of this new algorithm and that’s why we’re heavily focused on diversifying our marketing.

Steve: Cool man. Hey Bishoi I really appreciate your thoughts on Instagram, if anyone is interested in your watches or wants to get a hold of you where can they find you?

Bishoi: Yeah so we have a website, it’s called www.mytruwood.com, just shoot us an email and we’ll definitely hit you back up within like 24 hours at the very most.

Steve: Yeah and just to be clear it’s spelt T-R-U.

Bishoi: Oh yeah definitely thanks for that, it is a little weird doing the spelling just because we couldn’t get the domain, but yeah it’s good.

Steve: Yeah I’ll link it up in the show notes but just in case like if you want to check it out and his account it would just obviously link to that, it’s very well done. Hey Bishoi thanks a lot for coming on the show man, I really appreciate it.

Bishoi: Awesome man, thank you Steve.

Steve: All right take care.

Bishoi: Take care as well.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Now Bishoi’s success with Instagram just goes to show you that there are a bunch of different ways to market an ecommerce business and you start to find out what’s working and then focus on it. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode164.

And once again I want to thank Klaviyo for sponsoring this episode. Klaviyo is my email marketing platform of choice for ecommerce merchants, and you can easily put together automated flows like an abandoned cart sequence, a post purchase sequence, a win back campaign, and basically all of these email sequences that will make you money on auto pilot. So head on over to mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/ K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

I also want to thank SellerLabs.com as well. Their tool Ignite is what I use to manage my Amazon PPC campaigns. Instead of the old tedious way of generating reports and analyzing your ad campaigns in excel, Ignite aggregates all that info for you in one place and allows you to quickly visualize your data to make decisions fast.

So not only does it save time, but it also makes managing your Amazon campaigns so much easier too. So head on over to sellerlabs.com/steve and sign up for a free 30 day trial, once again that’s sellerlabs.com/steve.

And if you’re interested in starting your own ecommerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away via email, thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

163: How To Successfully Sell Products In Saturated Niches With Grant Yuan

163:  How To Successfully Sell Products In Saturated Niches With Grant Yuan

Today, I’m thrilled to have Grant Yuan on the show. Grant runs the EcomCrew podcast along with Mike Jackness who I had back in episode 119.

Anyway, Grant runs a bunch of different businesses which include a cutting board store at CuttingBoard.com and a few brick and mortar stores like Cinnabon.

But the reason I wanted to have him on the podcast is to show how you can take something simple and saturated like cutting boards and turn it into a thriving ecommerce business.

What You’ll Learn

  • Grant’s strategy for SEO
  • Why your domain is still important
  • How Grant advertises cutting boards online
  • Grant’s greatest source of sales
  • How Grant makes PPC ad campaigns profitable.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Ignite.Sellerlabs.com – If you are selling on Amazon and running Amazon Sponsored Ads campaigns, then Ignite from Seller Labs is a must have tool. Click here and get a FREE 30 Day Trial.
Ignite Logo

ReferralCandy.com – If you’re already getting steady orders every month, adding a refer-a-friend program to your store can give you a new sales channel. And ReferralCandy is the best in the business. Click here and get a FREE $50 credit towards your account.
referral candy

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and delve deeply into what strategies are working and what strategies are not with their businesses.

Today I’m thrilled to have Grant Yuan on the show, and Grant runs the ecommerce store cuttingboard.com where he sells cutting boards, and he’s actually going to teach us how to be successful selling saturated products online.

Now before we begin I want to give a quick shout out to Klaviyo who is a sponsor of the show. Now I’m super excited to talk about Klaviyo because they are the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store, and I actually depend on Klaviyo for over 20% of my revenues. Now you’re probably wondering why Klaviyo and not another provider. Well Klaviyo is the only email platform out there that is specifically built for ecommerce stores, and here’s why it’s so powerful.

Klaviyo can track every single customer who has shopped in your store and exactly what they bought which allows you to do many things. So let’s say I want to send an email to everyone who purchased a red handkerchief in the last week, easy. Let’s say I want to set up a special autoresponder sequence to my customers depending on what they purchased, piece of cake, and there is full revenue tracking on every single email that I send.

Now Klaviyo is the most powerful email platform that I’ve ever used and you can try them for free at mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.
I also want to give a shout out to my other sponsor Seller Labs, and specifically I want to talk about their brand new tool Ignite which helps sellers manage their Amazon sponsored ads. Right now I’m actually using this tool to manage my Amazon sponsored ad campaigns, and it makes things a heck of a lot more convenient.

So number one I’ve always found it a major pain to generate my PPC reports on Amazon, cut and paste the data over to an excel spreadsheet and use pivot tables before I’m able do any analysis. But Ignite pulls all that info for you automatically and allows you to easily see what keywords are working and what are not immediately, there is no need to manually create reports or play with excel.

Second of all unless you’re a data geek, Amazon campaign data can be hard to understand, and what’s cool is that Ignite makes keyword and bidding recommendations on the fly that can be applied with just a couple of clicks.

So let’s say one of my hankie keywords is bleeding money, Ignite will alert me of that fact, and I can reduce that bid immediately. So bottom line Ignite makes managing your Amazon sponsored ads so much easier and the fact that they provide me with alerts means that I no longer have to monitor my campaigns like a hawk.

If there are keywords that are doing well, Ignite tells me to add them to my exact match campaigns, if my keywords are losing money, Ignite tells me to either remove the keyword or to reduce the bid. So head on over to sellerlabs.com/steve where you’ll find awesome tutorials on how to run Amazon PPC ads and the opportunity to try Ignite for 30 days for free. Once again that’s sellerlabs.com/steve. Now on the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I’m thrilled to have Grant Yuan on the show. Now if you don’t know who Grant is, he runs the Ecom Crew podcast along with Mike Jackness who I had back in episode 119. Now if you’re a listener of the Ecom Crew podcast, you probably haven’t heard from Grant in a while because well he’s been busy working on his businesses.
Mike has been hamming it up and monopolizing the microphone and going off on color. In fact word on the street is that Grant is the brains behind everything and is the better half of the relationship. My plan is actually arrest this guy away from Ecom Crew to join My Wife Quit her Job.

Anyway Grant runs a bunch of different businesses which include a cutting board store at cuttingboard.com and a brick and mortar store like Cinnabon, but the reason I want to have him on the show today is to show how you can take something simple and somewhat saturated like cutting boards and turn it into a thriving ecommerce business. And with that welcome to the show Grant, how are you doing today?

Grant: Hey Steve, I’m doing great, thank you for having me on the show and thank you for the kind words beforehand, and I mean my goal is closing one another, but it’s very beneficial when we have a third party to help break the dispute. Obviously I am – there’s going to be the better half, I don’t know what to say about that, so now that I’m here now that you’ve said it it’s got to be true, right?

Steve: Of course, yeah I mean it’s always fun to [inaudible 00:04:54] Mike, I mean he’s just so easy.

Grant: Yeah, he just has to like maybe pour out a coloring bag in like his frustrations after he hears this podcast about it.

Steve: So give us the quick background, your background and how you got into ecommerce and maybe touch upon what it’s like working with Mike at the end who knows.

Grant: Yeah so Mike and I we’ve had a very long learning background obviously and of course we’re actually friends not friendenemies sometimes we pretend we are, but we were doing quite a bit of affiliate marketing back in the day, and at one point we realized even though the business was doing really good that we needed to have a lot more value than we were bringing. It really dawned on us after we had a seen a lot of what was happening in the Google side of things that we needed to pull it.

I know that’s almost overused word these days but the reality is the affiliate business is more or less going the way of the turtle [ph] bird, there are things that will stay around but we decided that rather than waiting to see what was going to happen we needed to offer something of value. So rather than just recommending or doing a business where we drive traffic and then unload it to somebody else, we had to take that traffic and then build upon that.

So we decided that ecommerce was going to be what we were going to do since we know how to build traffic and for better or for worse we got into selling fitness equipment as the very first thing which is death by sales and cuts in some ways, but it’s also it was a huge learning experience at the same time.

Steve: So why cutting boards?

Grant: That’s an interesting question as well. I would say it was more an opportunity than anything, and a lot of what Mike and I do is when we go and find ideas, I wouldn’t say we’re so smart as to find a wonderful niche and then go attack it, I think that would be giving us a little bit too much credit. We find domains that are available and we find an idea that we believe that we can capitalize on.

So we take a few things, the cost per acquisition, the competitive niche of the industry and then we kind of factor those two and figure out based on search volume and a bunch of other things whether or not we should go for it and then we just go after it. So it’s a clamor of opportunity really more than anything.

Steve: So you chose to sell cutting boards because of the domain or – what was the primary rationale for going to cutting boards of all things?

Grant: Yeah the domain was available, I know it sounds completely ridiculous, but that’s what it was and it wasn’t exactly available, it was owned by a restaurant owner in North Carolina that sold barbeque and I figured that he probably wasn’t going to put the domain to good use as well as I was. I wouldn’t say that he got a bad deal out of it, he definitely got a fair amount of money, but I’m pretty sure I’ve added a whole lot more value to that domain during the me time.

Beforehand though how much did I know about cutting boards? I would say not too much and now I know a whole lot more, but I do have a fair amount of passion for it. I think it’s a really interesting market, I do a lot of cooking, so it wasn’t that bad for me to jump into, I like what I do and that matters a lot.

Steve: Okay, so in terms of how much you paid for the domain, is it like four figures, five figures, like what are we talking about here?

Grant: It was like low five figures.

Steve: Low figure figures, okay wow. So do you recommend that people do that today, like if there is a good domain, like build a business around that? What I’m trying to ask you is how important is the domain in terms of ranking; I would imagine you got these domains for ranking purposes, right?

Grant: Yeah, Mike and I we get a lot of keyword domains and you can probably find 100 opinions if you ask 100 people in the industry. Our opinion is that keyword domains do matter and if you can find one and if you can build on it, it makes life a lot easier and that really kind of explains our MO.

I would say that there is a lot of people that do just fine without it, I mean you’re look at somebody like Man Crates, I don’t think anybody was ever switching for a Man Crate before that came out or a Modcloth or any number of brandable companies out there. It just so happens that we come from an SEO background and we know how to attack that angle the best.
If you come from a generic marketing background, then Facebook and your other ads could do just as well, but it really depends on your core strength I suppose. If you think that SEO is the way to go then keyword domains are great, if you belief that marketing and branding is the best way to go, then I don’t think it would matter.

Steve: So how much of a difference would it make between getting like cuttingboard.com versus like cuttingboardhq.com or something along those lines?

Grant: Or like mikeswood.com or something like that?

Steve: Well something with cutting board in it but maybe with like a small third word, you know what I’m saying?

Grant: Got it, it’s a pretty big drop off, and based on what we’ve known from previous experience in the industry if you were to put like a numeric scale to it, if you had the keyword domain such as cuttingboard.com, I would assign like a weight of ten, and if you had cuttingboardfactory.com, I’d probably assign anything other than the poorer version down to like a six or a five at best.

Steve: Interesting.

Grant: Once you get into the three word, or anything like that you start losing off on a lot of the main branding ability and also the keyword strength. What I mean by that is for example long tail keywords, for example let’s just say you’re selling bike parts and you could have bikeparts.com, but then you might have twinbikeparts.com, you might have stevesbikeparts.com, the long tail just becomes infinitely bigger once you get to a three factor out there.

So when you have the two factor, just two words of bike parts, then you have a whole lot more broad encompassing search visibility, but it also requires that you do a whole lot more optimization. So a lot of it is requiring that even though you have this great domain, you need to know how to utilize it properly. So yeah even a guy with a million dollars is a great domain it’s not going to do anything unless he knows how to work it properly.

Steve: So in terms of the domain, is this all from your experience buying domains in terms of like your rating factors?

Grant: We’ve had a very long history of doing domains back in the affiliate days, that’s where I really got my experience. I started off in 2003 and I actually had even an academic background in search in some ways and…

Steve: Interesting, okay.

Grant: Yeah I graduated from a program called informatics which meant that I studied data, and at the time people were like you study what, I’m like I study data, and they are like well that
sounds really boring. I’m like it kind of is, but nowadays people are like, oh yeah data cool, big data. So back in the day how do you find data, well you organize it, then you index it and then you put a search engine on top of it.

So I kind of understood what the search engines were looking for especially back then was the computational abilities that was then. There is only so many things that you can do to really be able to filter out and do like in other rankings and everything that Google did, so a lot of the methodology that we used started off from a very engineering focused standpoint where we kind of reversed engineered like why would an engineer do it this way or do it that way.

Most people tend to go by the old lady says that a horse rides throughout the sky and drags like a big ball of fire behind it, and so the old lady says this and that’s kind of how most people do SEO. They go on forums and they read everything, but I really do think that if you have an engineering type of mind and especially software development mind and think about things rationally and try to understand systems and databases, now it’s going to be a whole more complicated but you kind of try to piece it together from almost like the molecular level up until the engine has failed, then you can really truly understand what is going into the search engine optimization.

So that’s like a long way of saying that being there from the very beginning from the early days of SEO, I think I’ve had the benefit of seeing how the theory and application of SEO has developed throughout the entire time to what it is now. This is equivalent of growing up learning how to work on something simple like a 1970s mustang, then now you’ve got like a Tesla.
If you start with a Tesla you’re going to be completely overwhelmed because it is electronic and nobody knows what the hell is going on underneath.

Steve: Okay we’ll get into that in a little bit, but first I want to talk a little bit about the business itself, so first of all are these cutting boards drop shipped or do you store inventory or do you have your own brands or all three?

Grant: We do a little bit of each, I would say that we warehouse most of it, and from our experience in the drop shipping side Mike and I both felt pretty burned in the fitness industry. When you can’t keep a promise to your customer, it makes life very, very difficult and if anything in the ecommerce face, and I’m sure you know this all too given your customer base as well, they don’t react well when you don’t deliver on promises especially for high value items.

If you have a low value item I think that your error ranking get a lot higher, but that said ecommerce is pretty brutal, people make a lot of noise when things go wrong and it gets published prominently, and so you don’t have a lot of room to screw up. So drop shipping I try to avoid it when I can because of those kind of problems, so I tend to inventory.

Steve: Okay and then cutting boards are heavy and so does that imply you have a warehouse like a big warehouse?

Grant: Yup I’ve got multiple warehouses. I use a warehouse in the East Coast and then I serve a warehouse myself and then I use Amazon for different items, but I try not to rely on Amazon for most anything that’s important, which is kind of the opposite of most other people and maybe even Mike.

Steve: Yeah actually Mike has gone all Amazon for fulfillment even, but I’m curious what your rationale is for having both the 3PL and your own warehouse?

Grant: A lot of it is due to the weight factor and the other part is due to the customer experience factor. When your items weigh as much as mine do which is an average of 15 to 20 pounds a piece, then…

Steve: Okay.

Grant: Yeah shipping like zone 7, zone 8 all the way from Seattle and so anybody paying attention UPS and FedEx when they break apart their parcel, shipping they base it on zones and anything local to you is probably a two to three zone, and then for me I’m based in Seattle. So Texas and the mid west would be zone four or five, and then the East Coast and the North East would be a zone seven, eight.

Yeah it got very expensive, when I started off I would ship a package to Texas and it would pass me about $25 to New York or Maine and may end up costing me almost $28, $29. That was with a discount through a consolidator, and without a consolidator I probably would have paid $35 to New York and when you consider my product itself my cost fully, you’re getting to you’re not going to make money margins over at that point. So it was more of I had to get this done rather than I wanted to.

Steve: Why not a 3PL in both places?

Grant: That’s a good question. One of the things that prevents me from getting a 3PL for the west coast is we have a little bit of customization that we do on our products, and that ends up mattering quite a bit for us. That’s kind of the direction that we’re looking to go, so the other issue too is that starting off the business, I’m really, really big on understanding your product more than anything.

The lessons that we learned from shipping ourselves, we applied it to our 3PL, so we reduced our return rate, we reduced our breakage rate, we reduced our dimensional – I mean everything like that. The other thing too is that now after having done it for three years I’ve just renegotiated my small parcel rates, and we’ve got some amazing, amazing deals and a lot of that is just because I understand all the ins and outs of shipping now.

Steve: What are some things that you learned that you actually applied to the 3PL; can you give me an example?

Grant: Yeah absolutely, so just the way that our boxes are being packed and everything, we went through about five different configurations on how we pack our cutting boards. When we first did it we just did a paper and wood and pretty much they would just get beat up especially on a long haul, they just got dropped a lot and who knows what, but they just weren’t being protected.

Then we tried bumble wrapping and then we had other issues, too much time to get it done. Then we finally figured out these custom form quarters that we put in there would work out, and there was quite a few other things that we just kind of realized going in that we had to explain to our 3PL how to do from the get go. Otherwise if they simply did it their own default way which is almost the way Amazon does it, you have a small item thrown in a big box and it gets slumped all over the place, and then you have a lot of damage.

Steve: Okay, I see, it makes sense. Let me ask you this though and this is something I’ve just been thinking about, what’s special about your cutting boards versus me going to like a Bed Bath & Beyond and picking a cutting board, why would I want to pay $40 in shipping or $25 in shipping?

Grant: One thing is that we do have free shipping over 75, I know that’s a pretty high limit compared to what a lot of other people are, and your question is really on point though. If you’re buying something under $50 you most likely are not going to be buying from us, and I don’t really cater to that kind of audience as well because of exactly what you said, you can buy a bamboo or plastic cutting board anywhere, and honestly I don’t really want to compete for two to three dollars, it’s not a good market to be.

So we compete at the higher end, our average order is going to be in the $100 range. The boards that we sell, you can’t really get them at Bed Bath & Beyond. You can probably them at Williams Sonoma or Sur La table or another high end type of place, but in that way our product is pretty niche unless you’re a business and you’re buying just a big volume of cutting boards, and we were pretty competitive on that side.

Steve: Okay, so you basically cater to people who are really in on that cooking I guess so to speak?

Grant: We cater to…

Steve: Or chefs.

Grant: Yeah definitely that crowd, and it’s kind of a interesting mix, we don’t really have a true finger on our audience which is really bothering to me and Mike always keeps telling me, oh man I don’t understand how you’re not on Facebook anymore.

My explanation is that it’s actually really hard, our demographic is all over the place and even a look alike doesn’t always perform that well, and it’s old people, it’s young people, a lot of people buy them as presents, and cooks who like cooking anything from the CEO to a triathlon runner to the guy playing video games to Ali that’s doing [inaudible 00:22:22], it’s really hard to say.

Steve: So you’re not running Facebook ads because of this?

Grant: When we do run them, it gets pretty cost prohibitive at some point unless say a certain time of the year like the holidays. So we run them pretty strategically, but if we run them all the time my feeling is that because it a commodity type item and because the price point is so high, it doesn’t quite make it into the impulse buy type of Facebook kind of golden goose territory that you really need your Facebook ads to be in.

Steve: Okay can we talk about like the commodity part a little bit, you said you sell other people’s products and you have your own line. What is the split in terms of your sales for that?

Grant: Before when we started we were obviously not making our own just because of the risk factor involved, but I would say we went from being 100% of reselling other people’s products and now we’re closer to 50% resale and then the other 50% is our own product. That’s after gross margins like when you start off at 50% cost of goods and then you’ve got another 30% shipping and then add in the 3% merchant fees and everything like that, you kind of wonder what am I doing here? Is this a business or am I running a charity where I hope to get food donated to me?

So we really had to again do something based on necessity of the business more than anything to start getting our own product in. So sourcing was a really, really important part of the business.

Steve: Okay so that was always part of the game plan, right?

Grant: I would love to say that I had a massive game plan in the beginning. The thing that I essentially knew and I’ll be pretty honest about this, we knew that there was a good amount of traffic going there in terms of search terms, and I knew that I would do probably pretty well ranking, but after that I was going to let the customer dictate what I was going to do.

So in the very beginning I just put up a smart [ph] board of everything on to the site to see what stuck, and then once I know what was doing well, then I started trying to source that product.
So in a way it’s kind of reverse engineering and yet I can’t talk, it’s kind of reverse engineering what the customer wants and then going from there.

Steve: I want to take a moment to thank ReferralCandy for being a sponsor of the show. Now in this day and age word of mouth is a huge driver of business for most ecommerce stores, and the best way to amplify word of mouth marketing is through a referral program. This is where ReferralCandy shines, with just a couple of clicks to the mouse you could add a referral program to your ecommerce store and reward your customers for telling their friends about your shop.

And this tactic works wonders; and in fact it is not uncommon to get a ridiculous return on investment. So for example Greats Footwear who is a ReferralCandy customer is currently seeing a 20X ROI. Referral word of mouth marketing is also useful for building up your social media presence as well, because everyone is talking about your company with their friends on Facebook and Twitter.
And the best part is that ReferralCandy is a set it and forget it service, requires no technical setup and they are giving My Wife Quit Her Job listeners 50 bucks to try them out if you go to promo.referralcandy.com/steve. Once again it’s promo.referralcandy.com/steve to get a $50 credit to try out the service risk free. Now back to the show.

Okay so I noticed just today I just typed in cutting board and you are the number one spot for cutting board, so a couple of questions, is SEO your primary source of traffic or do you have other sources – what are your top three sources of traffic and sales?

Grant: Organic traffic is definitely going to be there and then we do PPC ads for sure and…

Steve: AdWords?

Grant: Yup we do AdWords.

Steve: Shopping?

Grant: Yup, and the other source of traffic is just going to be I’d say email marketing.

Steve: Okay, let’s talk about SEO because we kind of started this conversation out that way, how the heck do you get the number one spot for cutting board and how much does the domain have to do with that?

Grant: The domain is going to help a lot, the domain to me is what I call a force multiplier, and based on the amount of work that you put in with the keyword domain it magnifies the amount of work that you get done. What kind of number I can put on there, I’m not really sure but I would say your job gets about 50% easier with a keyword domain, and again that’s just my opinion, I know a lot of people are going to not believe in that, but ranking number one I guess I probably have a little bit…

Steve: Yeah you got proof.

Grant: More way behind what I say, but I don’t want this to be Grant says buy keyword domains so everyone goes to buy keywords domain, it doesn’t quite work as easy as that. I already forgot the other part of your question, I apologize.

Steve: Okay so ranking today still depends a lot on links, so I imagine you achieve that along with your domain by building links, right?

Grant: Links are definitely really good and I don’t think I would ever be in the camp that links are not relevant and a lot of that still comes down to the fact that if we do the engine comparison we’re still running on combustion engines and Google still runs on link as paid link. Anybody that says otherwise simply does not have a fundamental understanding of the technology and pockets like implementation of how Google works.

The page rank algorithm has been there forever, it’s been modified heavily over the years that it’s been around but at the base of everything it comes down to linking. Now anybody that takes that at face value and just goes out and buys a bunch of links is going to get completely monkey hammered because of the granularity that you have to do when you apply that type of strategy.
So links do matter and content of course matters, but I think what people really make a mistake on is that they go for volume versus quality, and I think that’s really been our fundamental approach during all of our time doing SEO.

Steve: So what is your strategy for link building, like can you just kind of walk me through how you get links?

Grant: For one thing I don’t automate anything which puts me probably in the 1% and I think most of – I see people out there automate, a lot of them use other — I would say maybe 30 to 40 – I mean it’s hard to say for sure, but if I had to guess probably at least half of the SEO people out there are using techniques such as just black hat, or they don’t know they are black hat and they’re just going to get them banned.

Steve: Just to be clear, you’re not black hat at all, right or grey hat even, are you like pure white hat?

Grant: I wouldn’t say that I am completely white hat because I go after links and I believe that’s what it takes, but do I spam people for links, like no. Do I go and buy links off people kind of way, no, but do I go after links, I mean I do. So to me links are the thing at the end of the day that really helps you out, so [inaudible 00:30:49] kind of believes that the minute you start going for the link itself as opposed to doing it for the common good of mankind, then that makes me an evil person and so…

Steve: Yeah [inaudible 00:30:58] stepped down too.

Grant: Yeah exactly and he’s kind of has a vested interest in protecting Google and not making his life harder, but all the black hat guys out there play by a whole set of rules and they obviously go for links and they go after a lot of like social media linking.

Steve: Yeah it’s actually amazing like this whole world of buying links was kind of exposed to me relatively recently, within the last couple of years where you can buy links on really high class publications, it’s crazy.

Grant: Oh yeah.

Steve: But you’re not doing that, so let’s talk about like what you do.

Grant: So what I do and this is why I actually think I’m fairly successful at SEO for this whole time is that I’ve always approached it as a humane problem as a opposed to a technology problem, and that’s going to sound really bizarre, but it’s almost like the idea of how many people know their neighbors these days, for example do you know your neighbor Steve?

Steve: I do mainly because I want them to be on the lookout for me like when we go on vacation and stuff.

Grant: Okay, got it. How many of the people down the street do you know?

Steve: Not as many, we know our immediate neighbors the best.

Grant: Okay and I think this is a common answer for just about everybody. I would say most people probably don’t even know their neighbors these days, and to me that’s kind of the difference of SEO by automation versus SEO by manual nature which is that getting to know your neighbor is difficult because you’ve got to go out there, you kind of have to expose yourself and you’ve got to really literally go door to door, knock, say hello, make friends, put effort essentially.

I would say my SEO strategy is really not amazingly strategic, it’s simply that I put effort into actually trying to meet people and do what it takes to just…

Steve: Are you talking about in person or just outreach like email and Skype and that sort of thing?

Grant: Both, I mean I’ve been known to call up people just to introduce myself and obviously if you call up somebody with the whole idea of getting a link, then that’s really scummy in my opinion, that’s like cold calling to do sales, and that’s where I think a lot of SEO guys fail because they don’t have any other objective in life other than to do sales. I think that if you actually have the objective of building a long term relationship or helping somebody out, then I think that is a huge amount of benefit to you both.

Now is that easy, I really don’t think so but…

Steve: Let’s talk about like one of your strongest links that you have built, and talk about how you approached even starting that relationship in the first place.

Grant: Okay yeah sure I would be glad to. This actually goes back to one of my older websites; I actually had a website that was doing food reviews back when Citysearch used to be popular if you remember that website.

Steve: Yeah I do.

Grant: This was before Yelp started up and in the Seattle area I was actually beating Yelp and Citysearch pretty well for quite some time until I actually got a Google penalty which is hiring in all sorts of ways. I know there goes all my…

Steve: Credibility, it’s all gone yeah.

Grant: Yeah exactly. I got penalized, this guy doesn’t know what he’s talking about. To cut the long story short is I actually belief and I still even to this day I’m not totally sure why I got penalized because I was completely white hat on that side, but I actually believe I got penalized because I rose up too fast in the amount of quality links I was getting. So I beat some kind of predetermined velocity profile and I just hit it out of the [inaudible 00:35:15] my pack and they just said no, it can’t be real, and then they just like bully [ph] me.

So part of that, when I was doing that I had a website that catered to just telling people where to go get food, and so naturally I got links from food bloggers and everything like that, but what I really wanted to do was get links from high level authorities like the Seattle city government website, the other major institutions in the area, there is a few like big hospitals and a lot of people flying to Seattle for great medical care, we’ve got very, very good health care over here and doctors.

So when you are in the area you want to find a place for food. Nowadays you can go to Yelp of course but back then you really had to look. So to me hospitals were like a great source of links and you might say, well how on earth do you get a hospital to link to you? My whole approach was just to start calling up people.

Steve: You called people at the hospital?

Grant: More or less, I mean essentially I built like a brochure like a catalog of places to eat and everything like that and put it in a nice little brochure and I called them up I was like, hey I know that you guys offer services to families that are around in the area and you know a lot of them move for a night and they need to place stay, I’ve got a few restaurants over here and they offered coupons specifically for you guys.

I put this brochure together and I’d be happy to put this over here, I’m not getting paid for anything but our whole organization, all we do is we recommend restaurants, that’s all we do and we have a website and you can see it, so would you be interested? I would say 80% of the people said yes, I mean they didn’t say yes immediately, there was a lot of well we got to go check in with their people, and I would say out of that 80% none of them got back to me and then I followed up again.

I never followed up within like two days or anything, I took my time just kind of slowly but surely in this kind of stuff and then eventually I made my way in a whole bunch of ways like that.

Steve: How did that work for cutting board though, like you’re actually selling something on the site, right?

Grant: With cutting board, my link development was quite a bit different, I mean I can’t go into a hospital and say, hey you know…

Steve: Sure yeah exactly.

Grant: I think your cancer patients, a cutting board over here, but the idea is fairly similar. I do things like try to get my name out there for various like do good things. So if I find that there is a program that’s in need of cutting boards or whatever, it’s like a match, we’re going to show up and be like, hey pretty guys need cutting boards and I’ll offer them like a nice package or something like that.

Steve: Like a cooking event or something?

Grant: Yeah or help sponsor for example there is like culinary schools out there and a lot of them do job training programs, so I might give them like a scholarship or something and say, hey here’s something for you guys. If you want to link to me that’ll be great, if not just – if you go send me a picture of something that shows the word summer. Here’s where I differ from a lot of people, I’m willing to put it out there and not get a return, and a lot of people are absolutely completely opposed to that, and they’ll say something like, well I tell you what I’ll give you $50 and you put a link back to me.

To me that just sounds like garbage, I don’t believe in that. I think that’s very low class and I think that’s tasteless, that’s kind of like when I was asking about do you know your neighbors, do you go to your neighbor without knowing him and say, hey I’m leaving for a week to Hawaii, can you watch my house, feed the cats and pet my dogs?
You go to your neighbors and I did this with my neighbors, it sounds like really, really cheesy but I went to a local pastry shop, I got like the nicest cake that I could find. I went to go meet my neighbors, like hey I’m Grant, I’m new to the neighborhood whatever.

Steve: We did that same thing with fruit, we use fruit, but yeah we did the same thing.

Grant: Exactly, so I did that with like my closest like six neighbors. I said hi to all of them, give them a big cake or whatever and now I can like talk to them. The same thing, there is this like a domain for example that I’ve been working on for cheese, it’s probably been three years at this point and every probably four to five months I just contact this guy and I say, hey how is the going blah, blah, blah and he’s trying to sell this domain for like a million dollars or so, and he might be able to get it, I think it’s unrealistic elevation but I just keep in contact with him.

In the event that maybe he decides he wants to sell it one day, but I don’t go up to him and say, hey you’re going to sell, you’re going to sell, you’re going to sell. Obviously if he wants to sell for a price that I want to pay that makes him happy, then I’m happy to transact but otherwise I actually tell him, my advice goes against my own benefit and I’ll say something like, hey this guy got pretty big into the industry, I’d probably approach him to see if he can get you a million. The guy is like really, I’m like yeah, if you get it, good for you, if not I’m still here.

Steve: So your strategy is just like a really long term, it’s more like human engineering so to speak, it’s like a long term strategy, you do good things, and then good things will happen almost?

Grant: Yeah, that’s why I say my – I almost like hate to call it a strategy.

Steve: That’s boring Grant, sorry I know.

Grant: I know it’s called be a good human being and treat other people well, and understand that when you treat a lot of people well, a lot of people are going to treat you well back, but there’s going to be those that do like to be treated well and not treat you well back us too. I think that’s what the SEO world to me it’s like just a complete access pool of human cells because by nature of SEO you’re trying to take, take, take, take and you don’t give.
It’s hard to find somebody that’s willing to give and be okay with the give and the take, so my strategy is not complicated, it just involves like altruism, and no expectations and good things happen.

Steve: I will tell you this, my blog probably didn’t take off until I started going to conferences where I was just meeting a bunch of people making lots of friends in person, and after that started happening we just started kind of helping each other, and that was like a big turning point for both of my ecommerce businesses. So I guess, I mean it kind of is in line with everything that you just said, by becoming friends with other webmasters or business owners you can help each other and be mutually successful.

Grant: Yup exactly, and I apply that to everything, I mean you mentioned Cinnabon. I know almost all of the Cinnabon guys up and down the corridor in Washington, Oregon, I’ve been to conferences. Every time I go there I try to talk to as many guys as I possibly can, and I’m not doing things like, hey how much revenue are you making, what’s your net profit, how much is your rent like, all this kind of stuff; I’m just here to get to know people, do all those kind of stuff. So I guess in a way I’m kind of like the true Chinese business man.

Steve: That’s true.

Grant: We go and get drunk, we eat a bunch of food, and then somehow another like business mix in like a year later and nobody has mentioned anything about pricing, it just kind of shows up at your doorstep.

Steve: Can we talk a little bit about your AdWords real quick. I know you are – for the stuff that isn’t your own I imagine your margins are less and there is probably other people selling that same product. So how do you manage to get Shopping and AdWords profitable for those ads?

Grant: That’s a very good question; the reality is that I think depending on your industry you might not even be able to run AdWords profitably. Cutting board is commodity and there is a lot of people that sell it and unfortunately you’re going to have guys like Amazon, Macy’s, Bed Bath & Beyond and other people that are competing with me on the same product. Now they’re going to have better buying power, they’re going to have better logistics, they’re going to have better everything.

So at the end of the day if they have a higher long time value for their customer, then they can pay a higher acquisition cost, and they also have a much deeper data set on with their buying, so they have a lot more trends that can work for them. In that case what I’ve always found is that if you try to bid for number one or number two spot, you’ll usually get your face ripped off if you’re not careful.

That’s because you’ll get the most amount of clicks, usually the conversion rate isn’t always as good, so you’re willing to pay a premium to get those people, and unless you’ve got like extremely high margin product, you can’t really afford to be playing that tennis game of attrition with your competitor. So the way that I do it is I – it’s almost like the guerilla warfare of PPC, I mean I kind of go in there and like attack when I can, so I do a lot of day partying, I do a lot of hour partying, I go and I select states based on my shipping rate.

If I’m in the North West and I’m shipping to Oregon, California, that’s really good for me and my 3PL, I can attack all those states around there really easily. Texas is a very hard state for me to ship to profitably, there is a number of other states that tend to have people that are in the bunnies and they tend to have like destination surcharges and everything like that like remote delivery, Wyoming would be one like North Dakota.

They are not very populated but it’s one of those like if I’m not bidding 100% to cover California then why am I even bothering to bid Wyoming and other places like that. So it’s a very selective targeting, and when I do it too day partying is also pretty important because depending on your niche, most people generally do buy on a Monday and Tuesday morning and Friday people tend to turn into tire kickers and everything like that, weekends are generally pretty good, but it really depends on your industry too, and so our partying too.

I think the number one mistake people make, they leave their ads running 24 hours, but anybody shopping to buy anything at two o’clock in the morning generally is a tire kicker, and you get lot of those tire kickers that click on just about every ad possible. So people that are bored have nothing better to do at 2:00 AM that are just shopping around, and so you get a lot of people just milking up your PPC cost over there.

So yeah there is very few ways that you can go and attack the big boys because they probably – you just hope that they’re using an agency that groups everything into like one monthly percentage because there is executive up there saying what’s our ROI and somebody just says, oh 3% and he goes, okay.

But that guy is not going to ask what’s our ROI on three o’clock on a Monday, and if they are 50% there, then you can probably go and make a nice little 35% right behind them, but if they are negative 10 on a Friday at 2:00 AM, then you don’t even bother showing up for that Friday, you just let them take it on the chin and then you find another day.
So it’s really just like letting the big guy go down in front of you and you just kind of trail behind, so that’s kind of what I do.

Steve: Okay so basically you run them and then you find out when the most optimal places, times and that sort of thing and then you just pick your battles?

Grant: Yup exactly.

Steve: Okay. I also, we’ve been chatting for quite a while and I did want to touch on this a little bit, why brick and mortar like Cinnabon versus another ecommerce store, what are the pros and cons of each?

Grant: That’s a good question too. I’ve got to say honestly there’s a lot of times I’ve wondered to myself especially when I’m at the Cinnabon store making a roll over there like I wonder…

Steve: Oh you actually go and work there yourself?

Grant: Oh yeah absolutely, I’m probably going to make a lot of enemies by saying this, but I don’t believe in the four hour work week, I think Tim Ferriss is a good guy, but I do think that this idea that we can just outsource all of our labor to a VR – well not a VR but…

Steve: VAs.

Grant: Yeah remote workers and everything and just live a life of managing people, I think it’s more of a fantasy and a dream that we can aspire to, but the reality is that most of us will never be able to work that kind of situation. I say that because brick and mortar is – let’s say it’s been the business model that has been with us forever, physical stuff has been far more prevalent than online and not to say that brick and mortar is better by any means, I mean look at like Macy’s is closing 100 stores and The Limited all closing out.

Retail is having a reckoning and that’s for sure and malls are definitely going to have a reckoning too. In the Seattle area our malls are generally A malls, malls are rated on A, B and C, and most of America is getting malls in the C rating which means that they are on the way to becoming extinct, but in demographics and metro cities they have been doing well, most are doing still very well.

So you look at the Cinnabon which is a very basic operation and it’s a franchise and we make cinnamon rolls and we make people happy, that’s kind of our model, we wow people and it’s a good product, I enjoy making cinnamons and I enjoy selling them and people that come to our store are happy and at the end of the day we close up. At nine o’clock work is done and everybody goes home, then we start over at seven o’clock the next morning.

Ecommerce kind of runs all the time, so the idea that — a brick and mortar is to me much more scalable on a passive kind of income type of objective if you are a people person, because you can hire people that will have your interests and you interact with them and you hire managers. Ecommerce scales rapidly, ecommerce can do a lot of things really good. The trouble with ecommerce though is that you’re competing against the best, the brightest, the smartest, the most overworked people in the world which are hungry young men essentially [inaudible 00:51:29] women.

I mean there is a lot of women entrepreneurs out there so I don’t want to discredit them, but everybody knows that there is like advantages in ecommerce, so you have a lot of smart people coming in to the space and try to attack everything. You also have a lot of guys with a lot of big pockets such as [more mark hims] [ph] on everybody trying to go after a lot of market share. You compare that with Cinnabon which is more of an effort based kind of business and there is certainly nothing that’s going to get very creative, it’s a very standard business that has very set rules that have been applied at the franchise level, but my competition is simply the weather.

Steve: That’s true.

Grant: My long term existential competition is Amazon to take wells and moles [ph] but if my moles are in a metropolitan area that has a high paying demographic and they keep coming to the mall, then I don’t really have an existential risk. Every year I know that my rents are going to be going up by 2% on a steady basis, I know that I’m going to get traffic.
Ecommerce I don’t know what’s going to happen in three years, is Amazon going to destroy everybody, are they going to eat my cake, am I going to get penalized by Google because I said something stupid on this podcast because Steve is so popular. Some of the others are like, oh well Grant is doing some black hat stuff and that’s kind of the crux of it which is that the viability of both models, there is something very, very different about it.

So for me I wouldn’t go so far as saying that one is better from the other, but I would say that it is a good divestment or a good diversity edge. If one thing happens to me on one side, then it’s not going to happen on the other, and for as well as I’m doing on the cutting board side our Cinnabon stores we have multiple, they do more in revenue than I do on cutting board and it’s like that’s a much more simpler business and the margins are acceptable.

They are not like ecommerce margins but they are definitely livable. If I had to do it I could probably run a Cinnabon store for the rest of my life and live my life in comfort, so it’s not a bad thing.

Steve: Okay, interesting, cool. Yeah I think you’re the first person we’ve had on who does both ecommerce and brick and mortar, so it’s pretty interesting to hear. But Grant I’ve had you on for a long time, I really appreciate your time, if anyone wants to find you where can they find you?

Grant: They can find me at EcomCrew.com, and you can find myself and Mike over there, and just look for the good looking guy and…

Steve: The good looking Asian dude.

Grant: Yeah, yeah, and then there’s this other guy named Mike, so that’s my [inaudible 00:54:26] Mike out there, he’s my partner on Ecom Crew and we give each other grief all the time, but Mike’s a good guy. We talk business and we pretty much talk about everything that we do. So we try to be an open book and definitely enjoy being on your show too Steve. I hear nothing but good things from you about Mike, so I’m very happy to be able to have the opportunity to be on your show.

Steve: Cool yeah likewise. I mean I chat with Mike pretty regularly and I just visited him in SD and to see that you guys don’t live closer or you guys could hang out a little bit more but yeah I’ve got nothing but good things about you as well and thank you for coming on the show.

Grant: Yeah I appreciate it.

Steve: All right, take care.

Grant: You too.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. What I love about Grant is that he’s highly analytical and he knows his stuff. Go check out the Ecom Crew podcast as well. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode163.

And once again I want to thank Seller Labs. Their tool Ignite is what I use to manage my Amazon PPC campaigns. Instead of the old tedious way of generating reports and analyzing your ad campaigns in excel, Ignite aggregates all the info for you in one place and allows you to quickly visualize your data to make decisions fast.
Not only does it save time, but it also makes managing your Amazon campaigns so much easier. So head on over to sellerlabs.com/steve and sign up for a free 30 day trial, once again that’s sellerlabs.com/steve.

I also want to thank Klaviyo which is my email marketing platform of choice for ecommerce merchants. You can easily put together automated flows like an abandoned cart sequence, a post purchase flow, a win back campaign, basically all of these sequences that will make you money on auto pilot. So head on over to mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/ K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

Now I talk about how I use these tools on my blog and if you’re interested in starting your own ecommerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away via email, thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

162: How To Leverage Influencer Marketing To Grow Your Brand With Jessica Thorpe Of Gen.Video

How To Leverage Influencer Marketing To Grow Your Brand With Jessica Thorpe Of Gen.Video

Today I am thrilled to have Jessica Thorpe on the show. Jessica is the President of Gen.Video which is a site that matches businesses to influencers especially in the video space.

Now if you’ve been selling anything online, you know that influencer marketing is huge. One of my prior guests Emmanuel Eleyae in episode 57 used You Tube influencers to generate 65K in 4 months and is now making 7 figures.

Anyway, Jessica’s company Gen.video is at the forefront of influencer marketing and we’re going to pick her brain today about the best ways to leverage influencers to promote your business.

What You’ll Learn

  • Why Jessica decided to start Gen.video
  • Which product niches work best for influencer marketing
  • What’s the process for finding an influencer
  • What’s a good click through rate for videos on You Tube
  • What makes for a successful campaign
  • How to measure results of an influencer campaign
  • How a content creator can make money with influencer marketing.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Ignite.Sellerlabs.com – If you are selling on Amazon and running Amazon Sponsored Ads campaigns, then Ignite from Seller Labs is a must have tool. Click here and get a FREE 30 Day Trial.
Ignite Logo

ReferralCandy.com – If you’re already getting steady orders every month, adding a refer-a-friend program to your store can give you a new sales channel. And ReferralCandy is the best in the business. Click here and get a FREE $50 credit towards your account.
referral candy

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and delve deeply into what strategies are working and what strategies are not with their businesses.

Today I’m thrilled to have Jessica Thorpe on the show, and Jessica is the president of Gen.video which is a company that specializes in influencer marketing and ecommerce video. Today we are going to explore how to leverage influencers online to promote your products and ecommerce brands.

Now before we begin I want to give a quick shout out to Seller Labs who is a sponsor of the show, and specifically I want to talk about their brand new tool Ignite which helps sellers manage their Amazon sponsored ads. Now right now I’m actually using this tool to manage my Amazon sponsored ad campaigns, and it makes things a heck of a lot more convenient.

So number one I’ve always found it a major pain to generate my PPC reports on Amazon, cut and paste the data over to an excel spreadsheet and use pivot tables before I’m able do any analysis. Now Ignite pulls all that info for you automatically and allows you to easily see what keywords are working and what are not immediately, no need to manually create reports or play with excel.

Second of all unless you’re a data geek, Amazon campaign data can be hard to understand, and what’s cool is that Ignite makes keyword and bidding recommendations on the fly that can be applied with just a couple of clicks.

So let’s say one of my hankie keywords is bleeding money, well Ignite will alert me of that fact and I can reduce the bid immediately. So bottom line Ignite makes managing your Amazon sponsored ads so much easier and the fact that they provide me with alerts means that I no longer have to monitor my campaigns like a hawk.

So if there are keywords that are doing well, Ignite will tell me to add them to my exact match campaigns, and if my keywords are losing money, Ignite tells me to either remove the keyword or to reduce the bid. So head on over to sellerlabs.com/steve where you’ll find awesome tutorials on how to run Amazon PPC ads and the opportunity to try Ignite for 30 days for free. Once again that’s sellerlabs.com/steve.

Now I also want to give a quick shout out to Klaviyo who is also a sponsor of the show. Now I’m super excited to talk about Klaviyo because they are the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store, and I depend on Klaviyo for over 20% of my revenues. Now you’re probably wondering why Klaviyo and not a different provider. Well Klaviyo is the only email platform out there that is specifically built for ecommerce stores, and here’s why it’s so powerful.

Klaviyo can track every single customer who has shopped in your store and exactly what they bought which makes it extremely powerful. So let’s say I want to send an email to everyone who purchased a red handkerchief in the last week, easy. Let’s say I want to set up a special autoresponder sequence to my customers depending on what they purchased, that’s a piece of cake, and there is full revenue tracking on every single email.

Now Klaviyo is the most powerful email platform that I’ve ever used and you could try them for free at mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O. Now on the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.
Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I’m thrilled to have Jessica Thorpe on the show. Now Jessica is the president of Gen.video, which is a site that matches businesses to influencers especially in the video space.

Now if you’ve been selling anything online you know that influencer marketing is huge, and if you listen to my podcast one of my prior guests Emanuel Eleyae in episode 57 used You Tube influencers to generate over 65K in four months and his company is actually now making seven figures based on influencer marketing.

Anyways Jessica’s company Gen.video is actually at the forefront of influencer marketing and we are going to pick her brain today about the best ways to leverage influencers to promote your business. And with that welcome to the show, how is the going Jessica?

Jessica: Hi Steve thanks so much for having me, things are going great.

Steve: So Jessica give us a quick background story and tell us why you created Gen.video in the first place.

Jessica: So about two years ago myself and my co-founder Bill Hildebolt saw a need in the marketplace to bring together influencer marketing in ecommerce. Prior to starting Gen Video we had worked together for a number of years in the video space and working with user generated content, and so we were excited to find an opportunity to bridge the gap between influencer and ecommerce.

Steve: So at the time were you guys running any sort of ecommerce businesses yourselves or were you guys influencers yourselves?

Jessica: No, interestingly enough he came from a banking — investment banking background and I came from the media side so I was very familiar with video production and the media landscape. So we saw an opportunity to help brands through the story telling and in the visual nature of video as a medium to help bringing their products and brands to live through video, and then of course as the importance of a rich media experience became important on the ecommerce side, really saw some synergies between those two and again set out to develop a product and a platform that could really unlock that opportunity for brands and sellers of all sizes.

Steve: Interesting, I was just a little curious like when you’re starting a company that manages influencers as well as businesses, this is like a chicken and egg problem in the beginning, so who did you guys go after first, was it the influencers or the businesses, how did you get it done all to come together?

Jessica: Yeah it’s a good question and it’s very much a chicken and an egg situation and it’s still is to some extent in terms of making sure that the network isn’t so large and vast that there is not enough opportunities for them to partner and engage with brands on one side, or if that isn’t necessary to making sure that you’re building enough features and tools and services to allow them to get more value out of things they’re already doing on the social media side.

But then also as brands can come in and across all categories we’re not category Gnostic and so someone who sells a beauty product can come in and two minutes later someone that sells a pet product can come in. It’s making sure that that network of content creatives is always there. So we’ve actually built the team in such a way that we’re constantly focused on both sides of those business opportunities.

But it is something that all social platforms, certainly market places don’t have built technologies to enable the match making if you will, it’s something that everyone I think is trying to balance as best as they can. The last thing you want is to have too many content creators not fully engaged, because when there is something for them they might have checked out or tuned out a little bit if you’re not constantly bringing value to them.

Steve: Sure, actually let’s take a step back, what is Gen Video, why are you guys different, because there are other competing platforms out there, so what do you guys specialize in?

Jessica: We really specialize on bridging the gap between influencer and ecommerce, and so that means something different for the content creators then the brands. So on the content creative side of things we very much appreciate the fact that it’s probably really scary to have all your eggs in the YouTube basket. So we think about other feature sets and monetization opportunities for them that go beyond the walls of YouTube or and in other social platforms.

So we build some technology that helps them automate the creation of affiliate links, and so what we found was not a lot of YouTubers, it certainly wasn’t just getting suddenly necessarily understand the Amazon associate program, and even if they do want, using it actively because it was pretty time consuming, so built some functionality to help ease the ability for influencers to augment, and have them make money off of YouTube.

So the affiliate revenues one we also have made it easy for them to license pre-existing videos, and so a brand can come to the platform and if they see an influencer already made a product video from one of the products that they sell, with a couple of clicks of the button that influencer can make that existing content available, and so again thinking about how to give them other ways to monetize their content.

Then on the brand side what does that mean? Similarly we don’t think that there’s only value to be had publishing a video to YouTube. So when I think about the influencer marketing landscape or the dozens if not hundreds of platforms that say that they can play matchmaker between influencer and brand, a lot of times that’s being looked at from more of a top funnel awareness rich perspective. It’s true YouTube is a fantastic platform, Instagram is a fantastic platform to reach your target audience and get in front of them.

Influencers are a trusted source for product information but why have that video be trapped on YouTube where after a couple of months 80, 90% of the viewership has happened and the value starts to slowly decline over time, when that’s an amazing video, it’s on brand, it’s talking about the product features and benefits.

So what we did is said why don’t we build something that really allows a seller to get more value out of that content and use it on your website, use it in other marketing, use it in advertising and most importantly we focus on the ecommerce angle is getting that video on product pages of retailers where you’re selling products.

Amazon being one of the primary, Wal-Mart a close second and then dozens of others are available, but it’s again unlocking the potential of that social content and bring into the ecommerce environment where it can impact more people than just the audience of that influencer, then also the ability to drive traffic from the social platforms into Amazon to bring more consideration to the product pages. So it’s really finding those opportunities for brands to get more value out of influencer to drive sales.

Steve: So let me just kind of summarize what you just said, so what you’re telling me then is that I can have an influencer record a video that goes on YouTube as well as Amazon as well as Wal-Mart as well as other places like the same exact video is indicated across all those platforms?

Jessica: That’s exactly right.

Steve: Okay, and so traditionally then I guess the usual model is that I would just pay a YouTuber and it would just live on YouTube, but now you’re actually getting more value out of that same piece of content, is that right?
Jessica: Yes, it’s through the way that we’re collecting the content and again for brands that are maybe aren’t looking to post the content on YouTube and it’s really more of ecommerce play, I want to optimize my product page, and I know that having a how to video would really help drive conversion, what we do is we ask all of the influencers for their content only and then someone who may own a part can speak to whatever their product needs are, but you don’t want that video published on YouTube, there is an opportunity to do that as well. So it really allows the seller to cater their campaign based on their needs and only their needs.

Steve: So I could have someone just do a sales video for me essentially is what you’re saying?

Jessica: Yes.

Steve: Okay, all right so let’s make this super practical, like let’s say I am a brand, I’m a brand new business and I want to do influencer marketing. So let’s say I approached you directly Jessica, first of all a couple of questions here, influencer marketing, is there like a certain product or product category that kind of works best for this or can I actually just take any mundane item like a garlic press and make sales through influencer marketing, like what type of products work best for this?

Jessica: You know we could ask that question all the time and I believe this answer to be true but it always seems a little self serving when you first say it. I think any product that could have a story told through a video, through a person, there is a place for influencer marketing. So the example that you gave I was thinking, I’m like oh I wonder what he’s going to say to try to stop me.

A garlic press, I mean there are so many influencers that make amazing recipe content on YouTube, and so you look to the influencers to find that creative connection between your brand and the product so that it can resonate with their audience first and foremost, and then what our platform does is then make that available to anyone who is shopping.

So chances are if you’re buying a garlic press you need garlic for something, for what, a recipe, and so there are very natural applications or ways in which influencers can integrate your product into a piece of content. So it really requires a little sharing of information and understanding the product, but that’s what they’re good at, they a master at their craft making video content and bringing a product to life and in their own words and in their own needs.

So you get kind of a two for one in the sense where you’re getting their review of the product, you’re seeing a product demonstration so you’re getting a little bit of a how to, and what we’re hearing from shoppers online is it is the next best thing to touching and feeling a product in store.

So the more you can remove whatever the barriers are which would prevent someone from buying that specific product online versus feeling the need to go into a store, video really can close that gap a bit because through the words of actual online shoppers, we’re hearing them say just that, it’s great for product comparison but it’s also the next best thing to touching and feeling of product before making that purchase.

Steve: Okay so let’s kind of expand upon that a little bit. I’ve been thinking about this too because we actually used your platform to do an influencer campaign and I was thinking about a lot of these things when I was deciding like what type of campaign to do. What kind of videos tells what the best, like straight off testimonials, kind of like mentions, kind of mixed in with the content so to speak like branded in with some other piece of content, or like just seeing the item in action and then just casually mentioning it, what’s worked the best for the people using your platform?

Jessica: Yeah also we have brands of all sizes using the platform and so I’ll give kind of middle of the road answer, but you painted the right picture in terms of the spectrum of content. So if the primary need is product education and working to help convert people to buy certainly product reviews, unboxing tutorials, how tos, those are all things that are pretty endemic to the shopping experience.

So if you’re watching a video on a page on Amazon, a product detail page, you’re probably looking for more specific information. Either you’re just about to buy or you’re just looking for some final information to validate, yes it is going to solve the problem that I have, those are the types of videos that work well. That being said because you’re tapping into experts in your category and folks that have social presences, you can actually get more value by letting them think about how to creatively integrate your product into their video.

So I’ll use beauty, beauty is actually a really good category, so video and it’s popular on YouTube. Get ready with me videos are very popular, they drive a lot of viewership and they’re the perfect backdrop to integrate a brand and product into it. But those videos are ten, 12 minutes long, I mean she’s doing her hair, her makeup, her clothes, you name it, she’s talking about it in that video.

Getting the influencer to integrate your product into the first minute or two minutes of the video of a 14 minute video is a great way to get in front of her audience and get them to click on the link in her description to drive traffic to your product page, but you probably don’t want or don’t need that 14 minute video on Amazon. I will say that we see like well over 50% completion rate for most of the videos that get syndicated to the related video strip.

So it’s not to say that the shopper doesn’t get value out of it, but for some of our clients we actually even cut out that one minute clip and only put that up on the product pages. So again I think that’s the beauty of working with influencers, they are very accepting of your needs and can find the right way to integrate your product, and that maybe a single two minute video like just as a product review and works on her channel and works on the product pages but maybe not.

Our platform and our services allow you to get the festive both worlds and just requires you to know what you’re looking to get out of it up front and then they’re very eager and happy to collaborate with you, and we make it really easy through our messaging system to have those one on one dialogues with the influencer which helps you enjoy the – you get what you want the first time around.

Steve: Okay so let’s walk through a campaign actually which will probably make it easier. So let’s say I go on the platform, what’s my process, like what will my criteria be for selection?

Jessica: Yeah so depending on your what your product…

Steve: Let’s go with the garlic press example for example.

Jessica: Perfect, okay so you decide the platform and then we’ve got a pretty intuitive, well we call that campaign what’s there, again it’s a five step process where you first would let us know what your distribution needs are. So we’ve got the ability to work with influencers across a number of social platforms not just YouTube, so YouTube, Instagram, Twitter, Facebook, basically any platform that’s been focused on a video experience and has an API we’re working with.

So you can say I want to work with someone who’s both on YouTube and Instagram because I really want to make sure that I can tap into that foodie culture that’s on Instagram, but I really need YouTube because I want someone to be good at creating video content and I want that video to live on Amazon as well. So you check off YouTube, Instagram, and Amazon. If you also sell on Wal-Mart, we’ve got a level of service that includes both Amazon and Wal-Mart distribution.

So you check off what social platforms you want the video or piece of content published to and then you check off Amazon or Amazon or Wal-Mart depending on where you sell, and then from there we start to ask you to fill out some pretty basic information around who your target customer is, age, gender, area of interest. So for this I would say you most likely are picking maybe male and female in a pretty broad age range, but you might type in the word recipe or foodie.

By giving us those types of tags, it filters down the set of influencers that we have in our network, so we can recommend to you people that are already creating this type of content and have an audience that is totally receptive to videos where a garlic press may be integrated in to it.

Steve: Are these, the things that I’m typing in, is that a human looking at that, or are you matching people based on like an algorithm?

Jessica: It’s all data driven by the information in the platform and so because we have everyone connect their YouTube channels, we’re pulling in all their channel audience information, we know their date of birth, we know if they have kids.

Steve: I see okay.

Jessica: They put their types in, so it’s a matching system based on the data in our platform, and then we do then turn it over to you to manually look at each channel and decide who you would want to work with. So after you provide the targeting information which basically says who this product is right for and what type of person you would want making the video, we move in and ask you for some budget parameters or channel size…

Steve: Yeah what are some good guidelines there? So let’s say I put in like I want food or people who create videos about food at that point, so how do I narrow down – like these are all questions I would have if I was doing influencer campaign, how do I narrow people down, what’s some good criteria and how much is it going to cost me based on their audience size, what are things to look for?

Jessica: So what I tell is first and foremost if you’re not looking to get the video published in their social channel you can order a video for as low as $500 and that’s kind of the minimum where we feel the production quality of the influencer is sufficient and high enough quality to stand up to sitting on your product page. It’s one thing to work with influencers on YouTube but another thing to bring that content on to your product page and you spend so much time optimizing that is so much closer to the point of purchase.

So it starts at 500 but then it really scales up infinitely based on the size of the channel, and so I think about a garlic press and again let’s say you want to target a mum blogger who likes to cook and is actively talking about creating meals for her family. You could probably work with an influencer who has 200,000, 300,000 subscribers on YouTube and maybe a relatively similar audience on Instagram and work with them for $4000, $5000.

Steve: Is this for one video then?

Jessica: This is for one video except the thing there is when you start to work with the larger channels, you’re really tapping into their audience, and you would think about it almost the same way you would decide if you’re going to spend some money on Facebook ads or other more traditional advertising. And so it’s not just the cost of the content, it’s the content plus her big an audience.

Steve: Sure of course.

Jessica: And so that video on average could get a round 100,000 plays and I’m just using kind of big general numbers here, but what we see is that any program when you’re working with the right influencer that matches your product in a very organic natural way, we can see click through rates of the link in the description that goes to your product detail page in the 4, 5, 6% range.

Steve: Interesting.

Jessica: We’ve seen some programs that go to 10%, and so you could easily drive a couple thousand people to your product detail page to learn more about your product and hopefully buy. The great thing about the programs are that content will also live on the product page, so you’re not just getting the value from the YouTube publishing and topic but now any other visitor to that page from other marketing you’re viewing, if there is organic search from Amazon, that video sits there too, so you have the second opportunity maybe to help convert people by them watching those videos.

Steve: So I know like I never click on the links below the YouTube videos especially if I’m watching something on mobile, do people really go to the product page by clicking like a large percentage, like 5% sounds like a lot to me.

Jessica: Well so it is a lot especially if you think about it relative to what a typical click through rate is in an immediate campaign. Some good Digital Lab campaigns, a 1% click through rate is super high, sometimes with video or [inaudible 00:24:12] you’re looking at 0.9% click through rate. So it is certainly high relative to other media spending, and then even from a YouTube click through rate perspective I think you’re typically seeing on average maybe around a 3 or 4%.

But again everything that we’re looking at is optimizing around the shopping experience, and so unless someone is using the platform and looking just for rich something just purely entertainment based, we’re always going to recommend and our platform is going to suggest people that do a better job bringing together the social and ecommerce. So we look at people and understand what their click through rate and conversion rates are, and are using that to just get smarter and smarter about our recommendations to you.

So that’s why we’re for sometimes seeing higher click through rates, and the thing is they may not buy immediately after clicking that link, but they’ve watched that piece of content and now you’ve got your brand in their consideration set, and so getting them to come back is where there are other interesting opportunities as a seller to bring them back to the site. A 5% click through rate is actually really high relative to other marketing tactics.

Steve: I want to take a moment to thank ReferralCandy for being a sponsor of the show. Now in this day and age word of mouth is a huge driver of business for most ecommerce stores, and the best way to amplify word of mouth marketing is through a referral program. This is where ReferralCandy shines, with just a couple of clicks to the mouse you could add a referral program to your ecommerce store and reward your customers for telling their friends about your shop.

And this tactic works wonders; and in fact it is not uncommon to get a ridiculous return on investment. So for example Greats Footwear who is a ReferralCandy customer is currently seeing a 20X ROI. Referral word of mouth marketing is also useful for building up your social media presence as well, because everyone is talking about your company with their friends on Facebook and Twitter.

And the best part is that ReferralCandy is a set it and forget it service, requires no technical setup and they are giving My Wife Quit Her Job listeners 50 bucks to try them out if you go to promo.referralcandy.com/steve. Once again it’s promo.referralcandy.com/steve to get a $50 credit to try out the service risk free. Now back to the show.

Let me ask you this, so you mentioned subscriber base and then you actually mentioned video views, is that a better way to judge the influencer, like I suppose the number of subscribers they have but I actually consider it based on the actual views they get per video, like what are you paying for here exactly? Are you paying for subscribers, are you paying for views on the scale?

Jessica: Well so what I would say is as you are going through the process and once you fill out all this information and the campaign is live and you’ve got influencers applying, you certainly want to look at the relative views per subscribers, and so we provide some average view data and the user profiles and you want to start to think about it from a cost per view perspective.

There is some hard costs for them in making the video but really if a channel is not driving at least 10% of their subscribers and viewership, so their 100,000 subscriber channel, you’d like to see 10,000 views come out of that. There are some channels like in consumer electronics, there is this guy in particular that I’ve seen counter come through, he’s got close to 400,000 subscribers. Easily his videos get 150,000 to 200,000 views and so he’s really good at engaging his subscriber base.

But as the channels go up, if the engagement rates go down you don’t want to pay a ton of money just because they have a million subscribers. You really want to make sure a good amount of them are actively engaging with their content and watching it or you’re not getting what you paid for.

Steve: So what’s a good guideline for the amount of money that I would want to pay based on the number of views that the videos actually get, like how much would I want to pay per view?

Jessica: Every category is different and it’s kind of like supply and demand. Some categories that are pretty niche in nature, the influencers can charge a little bit more because there is fewer of them, but I like to make sure that the influencers that we’re suggesting brands are working with see 10% in terms of viewership to their subscriber base.

Then relatively speaking an average cost per view it really ranges by vertical and also by size of influencer and so with 30 cent, 25 cent cost per view is good, and then that can go down quite significantly with scale as you work with larger influencers. Then obviously that is capped out or dictated to some extent based on the size of the brand and their marketing budgets in any month, but that’s a good target I think for people looking to get started.

Steve: One of my other concerns like if I were to use a platform is like I pay someone to do a video for me, what if I’m unsatisfied with the video, how are disputes resolved in case they do a job that is like not optimal, and I can’t really end up using their video or they just don’t do a good job on their YouTube channel?

Jessica: That is something that we take really seriously and we always work to make the seller happy, and so if that means finding another creator or stepping in if for some reason the creator goes quiet for a little bit of time, we try to build up enough tools to really make it self-service and the influencers have the ability to collaborate pretty closely with the brands.

But from time to time some things happen, like gets in the way or maybe there was just some miscommunication or just general not satisfied with the content. It’s our job to make sure that the seller has a good experience, and so we get to really work to resolve any of those disputes I mean worth case scenario, refunding any money that would have been put down.

But our priority is to ensure that they get the video they were looking for and so if that means starting over we do that, or we’re engaging a new content creator that meets all of their needs and one that we know because we’ve worked with them directly before are some of the things that we’ve done.

It doesn’t really happen that often and again you know the really interesting thing is influencers, some of them have quit their jobs and this is their job and so as the space evolves and matures you start to see on the other hand that the camera they are looking at it as a business as well, and as that continues to take place there is I think less and less concern –

I mean it will always be there, but the reality of having that kind of that experience should be pretty low if you’ve done your job kind of pre vetting things ahead of time and setting it up for success up front.

Steve: Okay, no that makes sense, yeah if these people are treating it like a business; they’ll probably want to please the brand as well. Okay so here is another concern that I always have with this type of marketing like how do you measure the results?

Jessica: There is two things here, so there is the social component, the distribution there, and so from that perspective it’s understanding what the expectation was in terms of viewership. We share play data engagements rates, and so engagement rates meaning likes, comments and shares, and so that’s another metric for brands to look at in terms of did this piece of content resonate with their audience, and so place and engagement rates are two metrics that we share about.

Then the third from the social side of things that kind of starts to bridge that gap into what does it mean from ROI standpoint is the click through rate, and so we share back in the platform the number of visitors that that video drove to your product page on Amazon. So that probably one of the equation is…

Steve: Is that just for Amazon or that works for your own site as well, do you guys collect data on clicks to the site also?

Jessica: Yes and so there are two options when you’re setting up your campaign, you either can attach the ASIN that you want the traffic driven to, and then that will go to the Amazon product page, or you can put your own custom landing page URL and we track those clicks. And so if you have a direct to consumer website and you would prefer the traffic to go there versus on Amazon, you would provide that URL that would get included in the description and our systems tracks that and it would get reported back on your site.

So there is viewership, there’s the traffic and then the third component and this is the one where right now requires a little help from the seller is really looking at that pre post analysis, and so we’re really good at getting the content up on Amazon and right now the retailers are really good about providing play data and viewership data, so percent watched and the typical metrics that you would associate with video.

However, you would be able to see, you as the seller will be able to look at conversion rates and sales pre video and post video, and what we’re seeing is across a number of different categories on average up to a 30% increase in conversion rates for shoppers that were watching the video and even seeing upwards of 15% increase in spend levels with just the presence of video there. But currently that specific information around your sales or conversion rate growth would be something you would see on your site within whatever analytics [inaudible 00:34:18] you’re looking at the seller central.

Steve: So it sounds like the way I would measure this is I would take like a baseline and then the day the video goes live I would analyze that data and just compare it against the control so to speak, right?

Jessica: Exactly we do a lot of pre post analysis so even for videos that maybe were live for an extended amount of time, some year over year, for a 30 day or for a quarter or something like that but exactly. You guys know best what other promotional activity is going on, and so it allows you to kind of isolate those things and really look at the data, but yes exactly is what were your sales like prior and what were your sales like after enriching the page with a piece of video.

Steve: So it’s important I guess then to not run any of these overlapping so to speak?

Jessica: It certainly makes a lot easier for you to isolate what thing is working, but of course with some of the larger brands and sellers that we work with this is one tactic of many, this is still common side with promotions and so certainly from merchandising events like Mother’s Day is going on right now, Father’s day is right around the corner.

I’d certainly say that ensuring content is up and live before you invest in other traffic driving activities is something I’d recommend because again if you think you manage it from a is it working standpoint, it does make it a little harder to isolate what, but I have seen enough data to know that placing a video does drive up those conversion rates, sales, basket size and just certainly if you’re spending all the dollars to drive more traffic, you’d want to make sure that you have the most optimized page possible.

Steve: What are some video metrics that are good guidelines to follow like how do I know what good engagement really means in your experience?

Jessica: Percent watched is a metric that gets looked at a lot from a peer video perspective, and so if you compare that to whether a traditional 30 seconds pod [ph] is like there is either two things, it’s time watched, and so getting someone to watch for at least 30 seconds or a minute or completion rate per second watch. So what we’re seeing is on Amazon we’re seeing people watching video for on average a minute if not more and from average completion rate standpoint for videos that are under two minute let’s say watching close to 70, 80% of the video.

So I think there is this misconception in the ecommerce environment the video is going to be really short, they’ve got other things they really want to do, but the reality is especially when it’s coming from an influencer, if it’s helpful information and if it’s either answering their questions or providing information on the features and benefits of the product, they’ll tune in and they’ll stay engaged, and it’s because it’s saving them time in the long run like they’ll be more satisfied, they don’t have to shuttle around so much.

So it’s not always about really showing really quick pieces of content, I think it’s about being smart with the information and who’s bringing it to them. Going back to the original question it’s definitely percent watched is one.

Steve: I guess what I’m trying to ask is like I produced the video with you guys, how do I know it’s actually good, like what percentage of people that watch 75% would be like a good metric to judge whether that video was a good one or not?
Jessica: So I think it’s the three things that I intended, the percent watched and if people are watching for more than half of the video, it’s a good indicator to me…

Steve: What percentage would be a good percentage, if like 80% of the people watch 75% of the video?

Jessica: I see, well yeah I think the way that we report the data and sorry I’m probably not answering this correctly, it’s the average completion rate. So we’re saying of the people that watched it they’re watching for more than 50% of it, and so I think the reality is there are very few people that drop off right away. So if you look at it from like a trend line perspective the majority of the people are watching for at least 50% of the video, and then there is a much smaller percentage that are watching for less.

So the benchmark for me and for us is typically around 50% completion rate but I’d say…

Steve: Really?

Jessica: Close to over 80% of them are staying too not that much because once they – there are two things that are happening. The audience of that influencer tunes in to them; they get emails when they publish their videos and so they are wanting to hear what she has to say. Then the other people that get there from search whether from Google or going straight to YouTube searching for – they were looking for a garlic press or they were looking for a recipe and so you’re getting these people that are kind of already leaning in.

So if you pick the right person you know that they are good at what they’re doing and they are great at producing content, you’re not just blasting out a piece of media to this like look alike audience. It’s a tapped in engaged audience, and so therefore you’re seeing a high engagement off of that.

Steve: Let me ask you this question, do the influencers – like can you have them insert your brand or keywords into the video title, is that something that’s typically done?

Jessica: When you’re setting up your campaign, you can provide keywords and you can ask them to include them both in the title and descriptions, so this can help optimize all that video being discovered in search. So that’s absolutely something that you can do and when we’re talking directly to brands, we often suggest a healthy mix of both branded and non branded key terms and then leaving it up to the influencer, because the one thing I‘d say if you try to be too prescriptive on what the video title is, it may not resonate as well.

So you can give them the keywords and then they will find good ways to integrate that both in the title and description, again so that can help optimize for search.

Steve: So Jessica on the tracking side again, like when I ran my own personal campaign using Gen Video, actually very few people I found clicked on the link and most of the sales that I got were actually through type and traffic. So would you say that the before and after method is like the best way to track your campaigns and is there actually a better way to do it?

Jessica: Definitely tracking pre and post video publishing is the preferred path in terms of being able to really monitor the impact of the video content, and so there are two different things. There is the traffic coming from the site and as we talked about a little earlier depending on the size of the influencer’s channel that you’re working with, you’re seeing roughly 3 to 5% click through rate on average. Some campaigns depending on the verticals can be upwards of like 10% in terms of a click through rate.

So if you’re working with smaller influencers, and really testing things out with a smaller budget, the traffic in and of itself isn’t really where you will look in terms of understanding the ROI and the value. What I would recommend is looking at the analytics that you have either on your website if you chose to drive the traffic directly to your brand site or through the data that is provided to you from Amazon and look at what your sales were relatively – I take 30 days or so before the video was published and 30 days after.

If there is a bit seasonality with your product, the other thing that you could do is look at that same time period from the year before. Really what you want to do is understand after placing that video on your product pages on Amazon, were you seeing higher conversion rates than prior, and then the traffic is kind of a secondary component to that. Again that really becomes a little harder to do though unless you’re looking at influencers that are driving more substantial traffic to the site.

Steve: Okay, well let’s switch gears a little bit and talk about this from the perspective of a content creator. So I’m a content creator, I run a blog, so what kind of advantages does your platform provide like how can a content provider make money and what’s the cut that you actually take?

Jessica: So for creators we like to invest in features on the platform that help them monetize all of the content that they’re creating. So some influencers are publishing videos on a weekly basis, sometimes multiple times a week, but not all of those are part of brand sponsorships, and so what we want to do is ensure that there are other ways for them to monetize that content.

So there are three things that we’re doing, we’ve created the tool that made it really easy to create, and place affiliate links from the Amazon associates program directly into the descriptions of videos that are managed through the Gen Video platform. That allows affiliate revenue to be made for any of the viewers of that video that clicks on one of their links and then goes on and shops within that session on Amazon.

So Gen Video doesn’t take a cut of any of that affiliate revenue. We pass through all of that back to the content creator, and for us it’s really how do we create a tool set that enables influencers to leverage us to manage all of their content, not just the brand sponsorship. For us really the value is the ability to understand the dynamics of the traffic coming from social, what shoppers are buying after watching a video and the data that we can then share back with the brands that are leveraging the platform.

So any content creator that would be leveraging the affiliate link service that we provide will earn 100% of the revenue they would have made on their own with just a little ease of use in the creation and placement of those links. Then beyond that we offer creatives the ability to license any pre existing content that they have, and so a good kind for instance would be I know technology influencers spend a lot of time covering the latest iPhone or the Samsung 8 that just came out.

But there are all these peripheries that come around; there is some chargers, cases, things like that. Those are products that get – there are lots of them out there and they receive a lot of coverage in terms of top five cases for under $50, or those types of editorial content. So for a brand that may not have the budget or desire to create something from scratch but found a video on YouTube from an influencer already, as long as that influencer is within our network you can go in and license that content.

So it’s another way for the content creators to get this flat one time video license pre-existing content that they created without any sort of sponsorship behind it, and then of course we make available to them all of the opportunities for sellers and brands like what you did to apply and be considered for a more direct relationship with the brand.

Steve: I’ve always been curious about this, so if I found a YouTube video of someone making a testimonial of my product, I can’t just put that YouTube video on my site?

Jessica: You can embed the video using the YouTube player on your brand’s website, however in order for that video to live on let’s say on Amazon or Wal-Mart page you actually would need the physical asset to then upload it directly into one of the retailers platform.

Steve: I see okay.

Jessica: And so the relationship we have on the creator’s side, we have them upload the content through Gen Video and then publish it to YouTube which allows us to have the asset for other ecommerce distribution as well.

Steve: Okay that makes sense, so it seems to me like one of the things I’d like to buy your service, the main value add in my mind was the ability to put the video underneath the Amazon product, because this is something that you can’t really do on your own, like you need to have some sort of in with Amazon in order to put the video underneath the product?

Jessica: Yeah there is definitely different parts vendor central and vendors are able to get content up in the image block and that’s a service that we provide to some of our larger clients, but the related video shots right now, it’s pretty difficult to get a piece of content in. We invite our programming partner to Amazon video shots which is what is enabling us to put some of this content through.

So we built our platform kind of on top of the Amazon APIs to make it really easy for you to either source your content from influencers and then get them into related shots or take existing content that you may have, let us know what ASINs those videos are for and then get those videos placed on your product pages. But yeah right now it’s not as easy as I think anyone would like it to be which is why we are happy to have built a platform that we think serves two needs, the sourcing of the content and then getting it out there in front of shoppers.

Steve: What has been some of the ROI benefits just kind of editorially from some of your clients regarding those related short videos on Amazon products; do you have any data on that?

Jessica: Yeah it’s a little difficult to share specific data from any of the campaigns that we’ve run, but I will say that all categories are different and when we look at things kind of more broadly in the past, we’ve seen upwards of 30% increase in conversion rate with just the presence of video, and so that’s thinking about a page that had zero videos within that related video strip or anywhere on the product page and then enhancing those pages with videos, and other metrics that we typically see go up when shoppers are watching video is basket size, purchase intent and then of course the conversion rate.

So I’ve seen some categories go upwards in the 50% increase in conversion rate for shoppers that are watching a video, but on average we’re seeing in that 25 to 30% range, and again really looking at that pre post activity and then search for more of the sophisticated brands that maybe sell directly on their site. You can look at hard sales numbers, but that’s a little top for us on the platform to really understand because it’s looking at your own data that we’re not privy to.

Steve: Okay and so these numbers that you quote are just based on like straight before and after so it might not be an exact science, but there is definitely a strong correlation towards those numbers?

Jessica: That’s right and we’re always excited to dig into the data with our clients, and so whether the data that’s available in the Amazon portals or your own analytics, Google analytics, things like that. We are happy to help with the analytics behind it and again we understand that it’s not necessarily the easiest to isolate in any of these ecommerce platforms right now, the presence of video, the number of place the video had.

So certainly for now until we all get a little bit more sophisticated about things as shoppers seek out more video content and video content finds its way into the ecommerce ecosystem a bit more, you definitely need to look at a couple of different data sources, and so we’re always open to partnering with customers to help them understand things and be able to make smart choices and having the best for them.

Steve: Okay, oh hey Jessica we’ve been chatting for quite a while and I want to be respectful of your time, where can people find more about your company and how can they get a hold of you?

Jessica: You can learn more about our company at Gen.video, that site provides a lot of the information on the influencer network and the ecommerce syndication, and then I’d be happy to talk to anyone, and so you can email directly to me at Jessica@gen.video as well.

Steve: All right, well thanks a lot for coming on the show Jessica, I really appreciate it.

Jessica: Yeah thanks Steve, it was great, take care.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. In light of Amazon’s ban of incentivized reviews, influencer marketing is actually a great way to get real eye balls on your products, and I’ll actually be publishing my experiences with the Gen.video platform on my blog very soon. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode162.
And once again I want to thank Klaviyo.com for sponsoring this episode. Klaviyo is my email marketing platform of choice for ecommerce merchants, and you can easily put together automated flows like an abandoned cart sequence, a post purchase flow, a win back campaign, basically all of these sequences that will make you money on auto pilot. So head on over to mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/ K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

I also want to thank Seller Labs as well. Their tool Ignite is what I use to manage my Amazon PPC campaigns. Instead of the old tedious way of generating reports and analyzing your ad campaigns in excel, Ignite aggregates all that info for you in one place and allows you to quickly visualize your data to make decisions fast.

Not only does it save time, but it also makes managing your Amazon campaigns so much easier. So head on over to sellerlabs.com/steve and sign up for a free 30 day trial, once again that’s sellerlabs.com/steve.

And if you’re interested in starting your own ecommerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away via email, thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

161: How To Ditch Your Average Job And Start An Epic Business With Daniel Dipiazza

How To Ditch Your Average Job And Start An Epic Business With Daniel Dipiazza

Today I thrilled to have my buddy Daniel DiPiazza back on the show. Now if you don’t remember Daniel, I had him on my podcast back on episode 103 where he talked about how he got 130K Instagram subscribers in 6 months.

He’s the owner of Rich20Something.com where he teaches young people how to start their own freelance businesses. But a lot has happened since we last spoke.

For one thing, he acquired Under30CEO.com which is another huge entrepreneurship site. And he has published his very own book entitled Ditch your average job, start an epic business and score the life you want.

Today we’re going to talk about the best way to make money as quickly as possible. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • How to make money when you have very little money to invest.
  • The best advice for getting freelance gigs
  • Why Daniel decided to write a book
  • What the heck is the marsupial method?

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Ignite.Sellerlabs.com – If you are selling on Amazon and running Amazon Sponsored Ads campaigns, then Ignite from Seller Labs is a must have tool. Click here and get a FREE 30 Day Trial.
Ignite Logo

ReferralCandy.com – If you’re already getting steady orders every month, adding a refer-a-friend program to your store can give you a new sales channel. And ReferralCandy is the best in the business. Click here and get a FREE $50 credit towards your account.
referral candy

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and delve deeply into what strategies are working and what strategies are not with their businesses. Today I’m thrilled to have Daniel DiPiazza back on the show, and last time I had Daniel on to talk about how he grew his Instagram account to 100K followers, but today we’re going to discuss easy ways to make money when you don’t have a lot of money to invest in a business.

Now before we begin I want to give a quick shout out to Klaviyo who is a sponsor of the show. Now I’m always super excited to talk about Klaviyo because they are the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store, and I actually depend on Klaviyo for over 20% of my revenues. Now you’re probably wondering why Klaviyo and not another provider. Well Klaviyo is the only email platform out there that is specifically built for ecommerce stores, and here’s why it’s so powerful.

Klaviyo can track every single customer who has shopped in your store and exactly what they bought which makes it extremely powerful. So let’s say I want to send an email to everyone who purchased a red handkerchief in my store, easy. Let’s say I want to set up a special autoresponder sequence to my customers depending on what they purchased, piece of cake, and there is full revenue tracking on every single email.

Now Klaviyo is the most powerful email platform that I’ve ever used and you could try them for free at mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

I also want to give a shout out to my other sponsor Seller Labs, and specifically I want to talk about their brand new tool Ignite which helps sellers manage their Amazon sponsored ads. Now right now I’m actually using this tool to manage my own Amazon sponsored ad campaigns, and it makes things a heck of a lot more convenient.

So first of all I’ve always found it a major pain to generate my PPC reports on Amazon, cut and paste the data over to an excel spreadsheet and use pivot tables before I would do any analysis at all. But Ignite pulls out all that info for you automatically and allows you to easily see what keywords are working and what are not immediately, no need to manually create reports or play with excel.
Second of all unless you’re a data geek, Amazon campaign data can be kind of hard to understand, and what’s cool is that Ignite makes keyword and bidding recommendations on the fly that can be applied with a couple of clicks.

So let’s say one of my hankie keywords is bringing money, Ignite will tell me that and I can reduce the bid immediately. So bottom line Ignite makes managing your Amazon sponsored campaigns so much easier and the fact that they provide me with alerts means that I no longer have to monitor my campaigns like a hawk.

If there are keywords that are doing well, Ignite tells me to add them to my exact match campaigns. If my keywords are losing money, well Ignite tells me to either remove the keyword or reduce the bid. So head on over to sellerlabs.com/steve where you’ll find some awesome tutorials on how to run Amazon PPC ads and the opportunity to try Ignite for 30 days free. Once again that’s sellerlabs.com/steve, now on the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I have my buddy Daniel DiPiazza back on the show. Now if you don’t remember Daniel, I actually had him on the podcast way back in episode 103 where we talked about how he got 130,000 Instagram subscribers in six months. He is the owner of rich20something.com where he teaches young people how to start their own freelance businesses, but a lot has actually happened since we last spoke.

For one thing he acquired under30CEO.com which is another huge entrepreneurship site, and he has published his very own book entitled Ditch Your Average Job, Start an Epic Business and Score the Life You Want. Anyways I often get asked what the best way to make money is if you have no money to invest whatsoever.

People come to me and they say hey Steve I want to start a business, I don’t have any money, what should I do, and I often reply to them that starting a business isn’t necessarily the best idea if you have no money, and instead I point those people to freelancing. So today what we’re going to do is we’re going to talk about the best way to make money as quickly as possible which just happens to be Daniel’s specialty. And with that welcome to the show Daniel, how is the going man?

Daniel: It’s going great, you have a great radio voice too, I didn’t realize how much I liked it until I heard my name with your voice without like a back headed now statistic self compliment, that was the word.

Steve: It’s like a humble brag I guess.

Daniel: Sure, I didn’t realize how much I liked it till you talked about me. But thank you, thank you again for having me back, I really appreciate it. And look that’s interesting that you asked that question because I was doing a webinar a couple of days ago and we were going over different ways to set up websites, and I was going over one of these software programs called ClickFunnels.

If anyone doesn’t know ClickFunnels is just a landing page software, it’s a program where you can make different pages so people can find your website and start off your email list. I was telling my audience, I was like look, it’s $97 a month and some people on the webinah were like, oh my God now you said a dollar a month, I can’t do that. Well if you can’t do $97 a month you’re not going to start a business, I’m not trying to be mean but you should…

Steve: No totally.

Daniel: That’s not a moral judgment, it’s just like the facts, but there is something to be said for starting free or cheap, and I think a lot of people would benefit by figuring this out, but I want to pause you a question and we’ll sort around. My question to you would be when you started My Wife Quit Her Job, was there a pain point that you were trying to solve?

Steve: So when I started the blog I already had a successful ecommerce business, and the main pain point that I was trying to solve was everyone was just asking me questions about it and I thought it would just be interesting to document everything. What ended up happening that was funny was none of the people who were my friends read it at all, and I just started getting random people reading it.

Daniel: It always happens like that, no one in my family or my friends has actually read my book yet, it’s only been like random people, but that’s a good, that’s a really good point that you’ve made and the thing that I always tell people when they’re looking to start a business especially when they don’t have a lot of money to start off.

I’ve found is a good thing honestly that they don’t have a lot in the beginning is that you need to identify a problem other people are having before you start thinking about how much money you should be spending or where you should be allocating your time, because often what happens if you don’t start with a pain point or if you don’t focus on solving a problem first that you invest money in things that seem like a good idea but you’re really just copying someone else.

An example might be people see that Snapchat just IPOed for – got off from out of billions dollar and they say, oh well that’s obviously a good business idea, let me try to replicate that, and obviously it’s not going to work. That happens a lot with all these different business models, and so what I tell people to do is I say, look before you go starting a business, stop thinking about you and think more about other people because you’re going to be serving those people.

The first place you can look are places like forums and forums that people are talking about things that are going on with them. One of the places I like to look is Quora, do you go on Quora?

Steve: I have an account there but I just kind of look, I never answer any questions actually.

Daniel: That’s okay, I mean I’m a looker too, but the lookers are good because we can get a good like a 40,000 foot view of what’s going on with other people. So for instance let’s say that you’re into that you’re good at fitness or you’re good at childcare or you’re really good at painting or drawing or you have some other skills.

One thing that you might want to do is you might want to go on a forum like Quora or go on a Facebook group or look to where other people are talking about the types of things that you’re good at and see what problems people are having. One you identify the problems people are having, then you can engineer a service around that, and you can start testing and see if people will pay for it.

Steve: Interesting, I know you have a lot of students in your class, can you just pick like one example that we can kind of go through in depth?

Daniel: Yeah okay so let’s think of an example. Do you want to go through like one of my examples; do you want to go through a student’s example?

Steve: Let’s go through one of your student’s examples, I think that would be interesting.

Daniel: Okay so a student example. Let’s take for instance one of my students, her name is Ali Garcia okay. So Ali is a personal trainer, but she wasn’t really sure how to get work outside of her – she works I think it’s out of the YMCA or [inaudible 00:09:10]. She wasn’t sure how to get clients outside of her existing job and she knew that she wanted to start something on the side, but she didn’t know how to expand and how to use her skills to start a business rather than work inside someone else’s business.

So the first thing that she did was she started looking online to see what — if there was a specific problem she could solve outside of general fitness because being a personal trainer while it’s admirable isn’t something that I would say specific enough to warrant having a business that stands out. So the first thing she did was she looked for a certain group that she could serve with those skills.

So in her case what she did was after doing some research, looking out Quora, looking out – she looked on places like CafeMom, places on mom blog, looking at Facebook groups. She found that a lot of times moms have trouble after they have a kid getting back into shape and getting back to their pre baby weight, or just maybe if it’s not pre baby weight, just a weight they feel comfortable with, they feel good with.

So what she started doing, she started making YouTube videos specifically for moms on how to get back in pre baby shape, and she just started making free content and the good thing about this is that she wasn’t selling anything, she wasn’t pitching anybody, she wasn’t trying to do anything special at first. Honestly a lot of her fitness advice wasn’t something that only moms could benefit from. There aren’t a lot of exercises that are just for moms, these are just basic exercises to tone you up and to keep you in shape.

Bu the way that she positioned herself was say, hey look I’m Ali and I’m here to help busy moms get their body back, and because that was her headline, because that was the way that she described herself and actually people gravitated towards her. She didn’t even do anything special, she had ran ads. So she started doing these YouTube videos and the big thing was she was consistent, she was doing like two or three a week.

Steve: Just curious, what is the production quality of these videos, like was she just filming them on her phone?

Daniel: I think she started off on her phone, but I’d recommend that you get – I’d say a mid grade like what’s called prosumer [ph], it’s like not professional but like a high rank consumer camera after you’ve had some experience with how you want to shoot and what you want to do. So after about three or four months she decided to upgrade herself and she got a nice camera.

Steve: I’m just curious because I get questions like this a lot where people just get stuck in a handle where like they want to do video but then there is the added in part; there is the equipment, so how did she get over those problems?

Daniel: I think that those are like perceived problems because what happens is we look at other YouTube videos that – let’s be honest YouTube now is terribly in cordial, a lot of it is really good.

Steve: Yeah it is yeah.

Daniel: The editing is like never quality, the video itself people are shooting in 10 ABP, I mean we’re shooting our podcast now in 4K. You don’t need to shoot in 4K though, and so what you do is you start with what you have, because at the end of the day a search engine like YouTube is for finding content, and the content that’s ranked in a search engine like YouTube is ranked by the quality of people watching it and the quality of that material not of how it looks.

People care about the information, a lot of the best videos that are viral out there right now aren’t the best looking ones, we’ve seen this over and over again. So she started shooting these videos, she grew a small following and she grew a small niche personal training practice around training moms online by giving them like meal plans and workout plans. And now she has like 40 to 50 students at a time and all paying like $100 a month and she’s able to basically make a side business and then turn it to a fulltime business just by putting out content that attracted the right type of people, not even trying to go big time.

Steve: That’s interesting, so how did she transition from YouTube, like was she just getting YouTube subscribers or did she point those people back to her site, like what were the steps?

Daniel: A couple of things, one there’s lots of different ways you can encourage people to interact with you further, so if you really want to go the basic time tested route it’s always going to be email list at least for now, maybe that’s going to change in the next couple of years. I already see a change and I think what’s happening now is just there are more channels. I think that what people were afraid of is that there will be fewer channels, but now it’s just that there are more channels and a lot of them work.

With her she just set up basic a ClickFunnels to her target, and she’s like, hey this is Ali, I do weekly videos but if you want more information I have a newsletter which is just – a lot of times they were just reposts of her videos with some writing, a newsletter I send out every week and you can go to my email list, and there’s more we can talk about like the simple ways to set that up if you want, but it’s very simple to set that up.

So it’s just a matter of finding little pockets of people who want specific information based on what people are saying in the real world in the while and then just giving them that stuff.

Steve: Yeah so you’re saying that at the end of her video there’s just a call to action to a ClickFunnels page where she gathered emails and then just slowly amassed email subscribers that way?

Daniel: Yeah and you can put that link in your description box. I wish there was like a more complicated thing that I could say that would maybe make a light bulb go and people are like that’s the secret, I didn’t know that but now I get it. Well that’s really it though.

Steve: What about people who can’t afford the $97 a month?

Daniel: First of all the ClickFunnels page isn’t for the software, that’s not even essential, they have a lot of free software out there, but here’s the thing you have to either going to invest time or money. ClickFunnels is a time saver because it has all the stocks set up looking pretty nice so that you can just pay and plug and play and it is $97 a month, and that $97 is really representative of the fact that you don’t need to spend time making them look nice.

Now if you want to do for free there’s a bunch of free things you can do with software like WordPress and there are free ways to collect emails with softwares like MailChimp, all that could be done for free but it’s going to cost time, it’s either time or money. Now if you don’t want to put time or money into your business, then you don’t want to do business.

Steve: Right okay. Let’s talk a little bit more about the research because that’s where people seem to get stuck. So you mentioned Quora, do you just look deep into your own skill set and then just kind of type in stuff on Quora randomly or like what’s your strategy?

Daniel: Well I don’t know, I think one of the things that helped me to identify pain points over the years is I’m just interested in psychology. I like – in a way I kind of take a sick pleasure in hearing people complain, not because I like their pain but because I like to see what makes people mad, and so that’s allowed me to keep my radar on.

When people are angry about something, usually a strong negative emotion is a sign of interested in a solution. So if you look at moms who are so frustrated, and so – I’m just using as an example here – but so frustrated and at their body that they will see if anything has changed and you think, oh there is a solution I can introduce there.

But just like often you don’t even know where to start researching, there are a couple of things you can think about in terms of like how to get ideas going. So the first is what skills you’ve been doing at your job already, so for instance you’re a software engineer correct?

Steve: I was a hardware engineer.

Daniel: Hardware engineer okay hardware engineer. Now there are certainly ways that you can freelance that and you could with consult that, you did not want to do that because your wife quit her job and now you quit your job. But you could certainly find work doing that because you win all that attainable skills, and a lot of people have attainable skills that they’re doing at their job and there is a way to cut the middle man.

An example of this is was when I used to teach as a teen SAT test prep and I was making $18 an hour to do that, and I saw that the agency that I was working for was making $100, it was pretty clear to me that I didn’t really need them but they needed me because I had the skill set, so if I could figure out how to market myself, then I could take the full 100.

Steve: Okay that makes sense.

Daniel: Yeah because they were targeting marketing campaign. The other example of my mom used to do like pre divorce, like pre litigation for people who wanted to get divorced but didn’t want to go to court, these ones like end the thing easily. And I thought to myself and she never ended up doing this, but I thought to myself they are billing these clients like $100 or more dollars an hour, hundreds of dollars sometimes for you to this work and you’re taking a certain amount of dollars per hour away from that.

What would happen if you just set up like a very simple boutique like end it in a weekend service where you could just do all the stuff yourself, because you’re doing all the work but the attorney is billed so much for this?

So I like to think about – that’s the first place, I think about my current job what I’m doing at work, and if there is a middle man that I can cut out, and then it’ll be up to you to figure out how to market that but if you’re listening to this you’re smart because you’re smart so you can figure it out, that’s the first thing.

The second thing is what are people always asking you for? So I call my brother in law, I mean she’s basically my wife we’ll get married soon, but my brother in law – I get a mock at it, I’m young, she’s stronger than me so give me a second okay. My brother in law has this gigantic track and every weekend people are like, Caleb can you help me move my couch, can you help me move me stuff and after a while he’s like yeah I can help you but it’s $60 an hour, that’s his business, because people keep asking him for that.

So I think there is this tendency and if you listening right now the audience right now you’re thinking, oh I can’t think of anything.
I think there is this tendency to think, yeah everyone else has something but I don’t have something, and I think you need to start being a little more aware of what’s going on in the environment around you.

Steve: Let’s talk about your SAT prep thing, that is backed by an organization and you’re just one person, so how did you funnel – did you funnel existing customers away from that service to yourself?

Daniel: [inaudible 00:19:26] oh no, well here is the thing, the interesting thing about those types of organizations; I was working for Kaplan I mean you’ve gone through all the schools if you know about Kaplan. If anyone has taken a Kaplan course before you know that the instructors there are the main points of contact, and that’s one benefit of working at a job like that is that essentially the teachers, the instructors are the representative of the brand.

So actually case in point that’s a good thing of personal training too and other really client focused jobs, usually the trainer, the consultant, the teacher, the person is the face, and so if you do decide to leave a lot of people will go with you, and I certainly did have some students who left and came with me. But what I really found was that the goldmine for me there was finding other people who already had my existing clients and partnering up with them and I call that the marsupial method.

Steve: Okay let’s talk about this marsupial method.

Daniel: Yeah so marsupial, okay so can you name any marsupials?

Steve: Kangaroo right?

Daniel: Yeah that’s the easy one, can you name any more?

Steve: Koala, aren’t those marsupials?

Daniel: Yeah I think so they have a pouch, possums have a pouch, wallabies have a pouch, and I’m going to get into what the method is, but you know some of these pouches are sideways and sometimes the baby falls out.

Steve: I did not know that.

Daniel: Because like the Koala pouch is vertical but I think the possum pouch is like [inaudible 00:20:59] is weird, it’s crazy. But anyway I call it marsupial method because what happened with marsupial baby is the pouch is like this extra womb that it grows up in and it shields it from the elements of being on top and do the same. What I thought of myself as when I was growing in my entrepreneur agency was a little baby.

I thought who can I take, who can I find that will take me into their little pouch under their wing – now I make some animal metaphors – and who can help me grow without me being exposed to the elements. So what I thought was all right who do I already know who has the people that I want to serve but isn’t providing them with the service that I provide? And so I did a little bit of research, again Google is your friend.

I was in Atlanta at the time, I typed in SAT – I typed in a pre college counselor Atlanta because I wanted to see if there are people who were already working with my students, and that’s one question you want to ask yourself, who is already working with my ideal client but isn’t providing the service.

So I found these pre college counselors, and what I learned was they essentially help you prepare these essays, they help you package yourself. If you want to go to Harvard, Stanford, Yale, these places they’ll package you because you have to have a great package, but they don’t teach you the pre-college, you have to go to Kaplan or Princeton Review for that.

So what I did was I came to these people and said, look I have this Kaplan pedigree, you know if I teach for Kaplan I have to be embedded some good at what I do, but what I’ll do for you is I’ll come into your business and you could essentially white label me, or you could essentially take me under your wing and I’ll perform the service for your clients and then I’ll give you 10% of the money that I make.

The benefit is you get to add an additional service on to your business without adding any additional manpower or actual work and you get paid and I immediately get some clients. So I went from having zero clients to approaching my first consultant, his name was Mark, a great guy and he threw me ten clients in the first week and I had a business overnight.

Steve: That’s interesting, and you were young I would imagine, a teenager?

Daniel: No I was like early twenties.

Steve: Early twenties and so you just went up to an organization and said, hey give me your clients – I mean not give me your clients…

Daniel: Give me your clients now.

Steve: Let’s work together. How did you establish trust, like why would they count on you, was it just the Kaplan name that allowed you to get it?

Daniel: I think Kaplan is a big part of it and because they know if I worked for Kaplan that I had to be 90% tried and tested. I knew I was good at it and that I had already been trained which is helpful, but I think there definitely is an element of trust there, and to be fair I think that Mark who I worked with in the beginning was overly trusting, and it worked out because I’m a pretty guy and
[inaudible 00:24:03] guy so it worked out.

But what I recommend to build the trust going forward – and this isn’t just for test prep; this applies to any business relationship. What I would say is look, I’m going to work with a couple of your clients for free and if I do a great job, when I do a great job then we can talk about like what our percentages will be, what it’s going to be and what the deal is moving forward. But make it as low or no risk for them as possible.

Steve: I see that’s good advice. So in the case of your student then did she pursue that route or did she just go straight to YouTube?

Daniel: She went straight to YouTube but you know kids these days, they want to go straight to the end, but I think it could have worked too. So like help me brainstorm, what are some organizations that might be able to pair up with?

Steve: There is a ton of these mothers groups.

Daniel: A ton of them man.

Steve: Yeah.

Daniel: There is a ton of these and there are also a lot of groups that serve her demographic but don’t train the moms.

Steve: Yeah absolutely.

Daniel: And so it’s no brainer.

Steve: Yeah she totally could have gone that route as well, I guess it’s more legwork which is maybe why she just went straight to the YouTube route, right?

Daniel: Yeah and I think also there’s more to it, there’s no wrong way either, it’s just that with the YouTube route now she’s training people online and I think it opens her up to make courses if she wants to do that which is always a good thing. When I was doing the SAT stuff, that was kind of a little bit before – well I could have gotten online courses but I didn’t really understand that route too much, so it seemed more natural for me to teach people in person.

Steve: I want to take a moment to thank ReferralCandy for being a sponsor of the show. Now in this day and age word of mouth is a huge driver of business for most ecommerce stores, and the best way to amplify word of mouth marketing is through a referral program. This is where ReferralCandy shines, with just a couple of clicks of the mouse you could add a referral program to your ecommerce store and reward your customers for telling their friends about your shop.

And this tactic works wonders; and in fact it is not uncommon to get a ridiculous return on investment. So for example Greats Footwear, who is a ReferralCandy customer is currently seeing a 20X ROI. Referral word of mouth marketing is also useful for building up your social media presence as well, because everyone is talking about your company with their friends on Facebook and Twitter.

And the best part is that ReferralCandy is a set it and forget it service, requires no technical setup and they are giving My Wife Quit Her Job listeners 50 bucks to try them out if you go to promo.referralcandy.com/steve. Once again it’s promo.referralcandy.com/steve to get a $50 credit to try out the service risk free. Now back to the show.

Okay well actually let’s since you brought that up let’s talk about the transition, so you’re freelancing, you’re making some money on the side, when is the right time to transition and what’s the process?

Daniel: To leave your job?

Steve: Not to leave your job but to transition from your freelance stuff, like for example your SAT prep stuff that still required your time, right?

Daniel: Yeah, yeah, yeah that’s true, that’s very true. Look here is the thing and I was talking about this earlier, there is a difference between freelancing and entrepreneurship, and I didn’t want to believe this. One of my favorite authors and thinkers Seth Godin said this a few years ago and I was so mad at him, it’s like no Seth you don’t understand I am an entrepreneur. He said the difference between freelance and entrepreneurship is that a freelancer trades their time for dollars and an entrepreneur creates systems to get the same results.

I don’t know whether I understood at the time like I do have systems, look I have like excel or whatever. But what I’ve come to realize now is that there is a definite difference between providing a service whether it’s hourly or whether it’s project based or whether there is a certain duration, and then hiring people and designing essentially an ecosystem so that a product is produced and you get paid as a result of that product.

For me the transition came really when I had done several of these freelance businesses and people kept asking me about the freelance business to the point where I became better because they weren’t asking about like how did you start teaching SAT, they were more asking, how did you get people to hire you, and that’s a different question than how do you get SAT clients, right?

Steve: Yeah for sure.

Daniel: So there I started thinking about maybe there is a product here, and then that’s when I had to move from freelancing to building products and doing entrepreneurship.

Steve: But did you stop the freelancing like cold turkey or did you develop the product, sell it first, and then stop the freelancing?

Daniel: That’s actually it’s a good story. I was developing the products on the side like I started doing the freelancing on the side and then I did some job, and then I was starting to develop the products on the side before I did the freelancing. So I always kind of had one foot on one log and the next log and the next log and it got to the point with the products where I had a successful launch, the first launch we did was pretty successful, and then I had too many new customers with the product to even allow me the time to take care of the freelance clients.

So I had to fire some clients, I had to be like look it’s great — and I did it in a nice way to tip it off, I didn’t completely cut them off the same day, but I was like look I’m just not going to be able to do this anymore, and then I had to make the transition. But then once I moved on to entrepreneurship it was completely all heads on deck.

Steve: And then that led to – did rich20something come first or did the product come first and then you created rich20something around that?

Daniel: Rich20something was man it was – you’re going to laugh at me when I say this, but I’ll be 29 in about a month, I’ll be 29 in eight weeks actually, and I only now just realize that this is my career. Within the past six months that I realized, oh man I made a career for myself in this space, I’m like dude this is like the thing that I do, people know me for this.

I only now realize that because rich20 turned up as a blog and it wasn’t even intend to be much more than – this is before MediaMe existed. I wanted something that I could just publish my own personal thoughts and reflect on them later kind of like you were talking about how you want to just track what you were doing, and I started doing that.

I’m like this is pretty fun, and then I started to get more attention, and I think it only got attention because I had a few, not even viral but like pretty well received articles on this bigger site called under30CEO which I eventually ended up buying.
Steve: That’s hilarious, so you got some traffic from under30CEO to get you started?

Daniel: Yeah and then I bought it, it’s very like liking a circle of life stuff. So I got some traffic from under30CEO, started building people, they asked for it. I don’t know who said this but I did hear an interesting quote the other day and they said, “You shouldn’t start a business unless people ask you for it.” I’m not 100% sure if that’s true all the time, but I do know that was the case with me, people kept asking me for it.

So rich20 was there from the beginning, it’s been around since 2012, but it really wasn’t a business until 2015, and that’s when I started taking it more seriously and then only now recently 2017, it’s early 2017 as I recall this I’m like, oh man I have like a major book now in stores, this is my career, that’s pretty cool.

Steve: Wait so did the site come first or the course come first, which is what I was trying to get at?

Daniel: The site came first.

Steve: The site came first, okay and so you launched the course – you already had an audience then?

Daniel: Yeah but it wasn’t that big though, it wasn’t big.

Steve: Okay and when you were doing your SAT prep, was rich20something around?

Daniel: Mm-hmm yeah it was.

Steve: It was okay, so it seems like the whole time you had your hands in different pots, you had the content to build an audience and you were earning freelance income and you were kind of preparing yourself to transition it seemed?

Daniel: Yeah although I’m not 100% sure that was – I think retroactively retrospectively we always look back and we piece the things together to make sense, like we were talking before the call and we were talking about anti fragile [inaudible 00:32:38] celebrities just pick up, and one of the things he talks about is like retrospective piecing together of the events to make them seem logical.

Steve: Sure, even though that wasn’t your intention, right?

Daniel: Right but of course all piece together in a nicely well sequence planned out, but that totally wasn’t the intention you know.

Steve: Okay and so that course that you were talking about, are you still selling it today?

Daniel: Yes for Freelance Domination, you go to freelancedomination.com.

Steve: Oh okay, so is that your primary bread and butter today then?

Daniel: Well we have a few different flagship courses. We have one Freelance Domination which is essentially the step by step hands on approach to how these freelance businesses started for me and how to grow and how to do yourself, so there is that. In the middle a few different other products, one of them is not one of our flagships called Startup From the Bottom, which teaches people how to use content to drive eyeballs and to create a business around things that you care about.

So whereas freelancing is more about providing service, start from the bottom teaches you how to create content whether it is a podcast or a blog or a YouTube channel that drives traffic to products and that’s what we do.

Steve: Let’s talk about that for a minute because a common complaint that I get is that all these platforms are saturated now, blogging, YouTube, podcasting. What is your response to that and how do you get your students to kind of stand out with their platforms?

Daniel: I mean that is correct, it is saturated. I was watching a webinar last night with someone who was giving some stats on how the info product space is growing and how that’s a good thing because it shows that there is so much demand in the world, market share is going up and such and such building to our industry and all that’s true, but there are a few things to remember. There is such a thing as market share in this industry, and I do think that there are in some cases really saturated markets it’s going to be hard to stand out.

But I will tell you this, the reason why it’s hard to stand out is because people start these blogs, these podcasts, these YouTube channels, and they get up to like I think the stat on podcast is 98 from August; I’ll go back to episode six. What we’re seeing is we’re seeing all of this content but not a lot of follow through or consistency, and so there is this illusion of there is over saturation.

But once you get past the scrum at the bottom, really even past the first year or 18 months of creating content consistently, the air kind of thins out, it is kind of leaving the atmosphere, it’s kind of like you’re in a ray and you leave all the smog and at the top – yeah that’s true, it’s clean up there. So the key to standing out really is consistency, I always say this over and over again consistency is clarity and you need a clear message.

Look at a guy like Tony Robbins man, how many people are doing motivational speaking, a lot of them, but he’s been doing this for 30 years, so you can’t get any clearer than that. No you don’t need to wait 30 years to be successful with this, but you have to be consistent enough with the content you’re putting out and consistently are getting better and over time you will rise to the top, it’s just that most people get discouraged.

Steve: Actually that’s my philosophy; I don’t actually start anything content related unless I’m willing to do it for five years.

Daniel: That’s really, that’s boss man because that’s about the amount of effort it’s going to take and seriously rich20 has only been around for about five years now, and well now we have a book coming up, now we have this, now we have that and that’s kind of what it takes and I’m glad that it takes that long, it’s supposed to be hard.

If everyone was able to do this in six months, then it would be a waste of everyone’s time because there would be a lot more inexperienced people leading the pack, and so we need people who will pass some battle scars on.

Steve: So how do you train these people to be that patient though?

Daniel: I think that the patience is something that is like it’s self evident. The thing about the time is it’s going to pass either way, patience is a skill that you develop, but honestly the reality is like it’s a good thing that they’re going to be people around you who can’t stand the wait. You have to develop your patience by falling in love with the craft, and that’s why it’s really good to pick something that you enjoy.

So there are sometimes where it’s smart to go into a market that seems like it’s hot, but if you’re not going to be able to go that five years, you’re not going to enjoy getting good at it enough to want to do it. I was reading another Facebook thread from a friend and I actually think it was Ryan Holiday and he’s like, look you shouldn’t start a podcast unless you’re going to have an interesting different angle or you’re willing to do it for a long time. Are you friends with Jordan from Art of Charm?

Steve: Yeah, we just had lunch the other day actually.

Daniel: Yeah he’s a great dude and Art of Charm has been around for ten years, ten years on a podcast, okay.

Steve: Which is even before it was popular at all actually.

Daniel: Totally and they’ve already pivoted once, they were a pick up podcast which was like a whole different type of podcast. So you’ve got to be willing to go through, there is no secret thing, it’s just this long term consistency, but he loves podcasting because he gets to talk to all these interesting people, he gets to talk to Larry King, he just had Mike Rowe on there.

Yes there are the Tim Ferriss’s of the world who go on there and get a 100 million downloads a year and a half, but Tim Ferriss also had a decade of work buying the books, so we already planned these ten years in. So that’s just what it is and so I would say five years, and if you can really figure out ten years you’re definitely going to make it, you’re 100% going to make it if you last ten years. If you can go five or ten years and you don’t make it, you’ve not been doing anything.

Steve: So that means that the people who take your class you kind of encourage them to start these blogs or content properties with stuff that they’re passionate about?

Daniel: Totally and look the thing is too here are some caveats to that, just because you start to see more success at five and ten years doesn’t mean that you can’t also be successful with that business earlier than that. Rich20 was profitable – well we started – our first product launch was 2014, it was September 2014 and we were profitable from day one and at that point we had only been in existence for like two years and change.

So obviously you can – that’s not a hard and best rule, but if you set your standard up that you’re not going to be disappointed where after two and half years you don’t see the results you want.

Steve: Sure, sure now that makes sense. You’re also Daniel?

Daniel: Yeah but you’re also Steve, we’re just people.

Steve: Okay so I’m curious like how that – because we hadn’t talked for over a year I would say on the podcast, how did the under30CEO acquisition – what was the strategy behind that, were you just trying to instantly tap into a larger audience?

Daniel: Steve I called them up and I said, what’s your number, give me a number, how much are you going to sell it for, and I said I’ll wire over the money. No, you know what Matt and Gerald have become really good friends and they have a new company now called under30experiences now really focused on travelling around the world now.

They take people on these incredible adventures where they go all over the world in different countries and they curate these experiences, and they just didn’t want to do the content game anymore and it just so happened that I love the content game and it was a good fit.

My goal with that was just to broaden my audience instantly with an audience that was a perfect fit, and I knew it was a perfect fit because it was the audience that accepted me.

Steve: Did you inherit his stuff as well or?

Daniel: No, no, no, they only had maybe like three or four people running the site but we inherited the property.

Steve: Okay got it, and the email list and social media and everything?

Daniel: The email list and the social media yeah.

Steve: All right, let’s switch gears a little bit because I do want to talk about your book. It has quite a long title I might add.

Daniel: Well there is actually a story behind that. So the title is Rich20something, the subtitle is ditch your boring day job, build another business, create the life that you love or create the best life forever. The crazy thing and you’ll see this when I send you the book and you could see that on Amazon, you go to rich20something.com, search book, you can see it, the interesting thing about that cover and this is something to keep in mind when you are seen out there and publish your first book in big culture which I know people love.

When you do that you are at the — I would say the mercy of a lot of different people’s opinions as to how you want things to look and feel, and so I actually do – I like the cover now. The idea was we wanted to create an image that looked similar to an Instagram photo because that’s one of the social media platforms I’m strong and we talked about this last time on another podcast that we did.

Steve: Right aha.

Daniel: And so we want to go for that effect and this is like the result, this cover that we have now was a result of a lot of different people’s input, and so I kind of like it now because it represents a lot of people coming together, coming up with what they thought would be cool and then kind of a result of that. And so it’s like this really big funky chunky letters which I haven’t seen before in a cover, and it wasn’t what I had originally envisioned in my head, but now that I look at, it doesn’t look like any other book out there and I think that that’s cool.

Steve: Let me ask you this and I’ve always been curious about people who write books the traditional way. So why a book and why go with a traditional publisher?

Daniel: Because I wanted to be fancy obviously, well no look can I just say point blank that I just right out of the gate that part of it is an ego thing. Part of it is an ego thing because I’ve always wanted to see my book in stores, and I had this dream since I was a kid that I would walk into Barnes & Noble and see my book on the little center table even though Barnes & Noble is becoming increasingly out of lead apparently and [inaudible 00:43:08] is already dead.

I had this dream and it was a big part of my culture growing up, my American culture, it was a big part of my life when I’m at the bookstore. So having a traditional publisher is the only way right now that you get into bookstores, so if I wasn’t going to be in bookstores for me it wasn’t an option.

But then there are also practical benefits of that and the first thing is that one you get much wider immediate distribution with a traditional publisher than you do with a self published book because they have all those mechanisms in place to send your book all over the world. So if you have an audience, when you team up with a good publisher it can multiply that effect which is really good, plus…

Steve: Are you implying like international distribution?

Daniel: Yeah international distribution which is really good and then it also allows you to get into places easier like for instance getting on national press, people take traditional publishers more seriously. We publish with Penguin Random House which is like pretty much the biggest publisher in the world, so we’re going to have access to different opportunities for press, and I’m recording my book with audible.com right now which is kind of a cool thing and it’s a big deal for me.

All those things are like credibility enhancers because whether you see us fortunately or unfortunately the best authors are still publishing traditionally, so that’s the route we want to go, and also to be honest there is a book events and bought and they gave me a good advance on that. So for me it was a kind of a no brainer and I know that there are opportunities to make more money long term by self publishing, but I thought of this first run I wanted to go traditional.

Steve: Interesting, I understand someone just got on Ebony.

Daniel: Take that entire back the whole thing, so you guys can’t see me, but I look Potolican but I’m actually black and Italian, and one of my things growing up was like, man I don’t know where I fit in, I definitely don’t feel black enough, like why can’t I grab the whim, and then a couple of days ago I got profiled in Ebony Magazine which is like the main magazine for black people which is really – it’s an interesting pretty thing, but I thought it was cool but this is another example, not a thing that I couldn’t have done it, self published, but my publisher set that up, so this is not a good example.

Steve: Okay, hey Daniel we need to wrap up here because I’ve been talking to you for quite a long time. For those people I would say who are struggling right now, they don’t have enough money for like ClickFunnels or whatever, what is – if you could just sum up everything we talked about today in like a short paragraph, how would you want these people to proceed?

Daniel: Okay so the first thing is identify the pain point that you want to solve by doing your research and then if you don’t have a lot of money and you want to get started, then you’re going to need to set aside at least a few hours a week to figure out a few of the logistical components for doing this business side.

What this is going to mean is that is that you’re going to have to spend some time, put aside some time for research, put aside some time to figure out how to set up a basic website and go from there. But the most important thing that I want you to remember is that done is better than perfect at this point, and you don’t have to have – I mean look our website is while we’re getting it redone NOB ready for the new book launch, but even our website right now with us being successful is not very impressive.

You don’t have to have the best looking videos, the best sounding podcast, the best looking website in order to get your start, and just know that people care about what it is you have to say and how you deliver it can continually improve over time as I’m sure you felt with your podcast as I know I felt with my writing and all that kind of stuff. So get started now and fall in love with the craft and over time as you get better with your craft, your delivery will also become better.

Steve: Great job Daniel, hey where can people find you online and where can they grab your book?

Daniel: If you go to rich20something.com/book you can grab my book, and if you’re so inclined as to follow me all writings around the web you can just type in a little @ symbol rich20something, I don’t know what I’m going to do in about a year and a half, but that’s another podcast.

Steve: I just want to give Daniel a quick plug here because I actually used to watch him on Periscope, I watch him on Facebook live. The dude is amazing like impromptu speaking. I feel like I could just point a camera on you and you could just talk for like an hour and not run out of stuff to say, I find that talent very amazing actually.

Daniel: You know what the secret is?

Steve: What is the secret?

Daniel: It’s having a great interviewer seriously, seriously.

Steve: Oh look at that, look at that, the praise is coming back in both. All right Daniel, thanks a lot for coming on the show man, really appreciate your time.

Daniel: Much appreciated Steve, thank you.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Daniel was one of my favorite entrepreneurs who is both a great writer and a great speaker as well, so go check out his book right now and the link is in the show notes. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode161.

And once again I want to thank Sellerlabs.com for sponsoring this episode. Their tool Ignite is what I use to manage my Amazon PPC campaigns. Instead of the old tedious way of generating reports and analyzing your ad campaigns in excel, Ignite aggregates all that info for you in one place and allows you to quickly visualize your data to make decisions fast.

Not only does it save time, but it also makes managing your Amazon campaigns so much easier. So head on over to sellerlabs.com/steve and sign up for a free 30 day trial, once again that’s sellerlabs.com/steve.

I also want to thank Klaviyo.com for sponsoring this episode. Klaviyo is my email marketing platform of choice for ecommerce merchants, and you can easily put together automated flows like an abandoned cart sequence, a post purchase flow, a win back campaign, basically all of these sequences that will make you money on auto pilot. So head on over to mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O and sign up, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/ K-L-A-V-I-Y-O to sign up for free.

And if you’re interested in starting your own ecommerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away via email, thanks for listening.
Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

160: A Deep Dive Into Running Amazon Sponsored Ads With Jeff Cohen And Brandon Checketts

A Deep Dive Into Running Amazon Sponsored Ads With Jeff Cohen And Brandon Checketts

Today I’m thrilled to have both Jeff Cohen and Brandon Checketts on the show. Now Jeff has already been on the podcast in episode 120 where we talked about reviews and how to get ranked in Amazon.

But today we are blessed to have Brandon Checketts on the show as well. Brandon is actually the founder of Seller Labs and was the original programmer and developer of Feedback Genius and Ignite.

What I like about Jeff and Brandon is that they are always on the ball when it comes to Amazon and I wanted them on the show to talk about the product launch process especially in regards to Amazon sponsored ads. Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • How the Amazon landscape has changed since last year
  • The best way to run Amazon Sponsored product ads
  • What is a reverse ASIN lookup and how does that help
  • How to find high converting keywords immediately
  • How to run a product launch today.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Ignite.Sellerlabs.com – If you are selling on Amazon and running Amazon Sponsored Ads campaigns, then Ignite from Seller Labs is a must have tool. Click here and get a FREE 30 Day Trial.
Ignite Logo

ReferralCandy.com – If you’re already getting steady orders every month, adding a refer-a-friend program to your store can give you a new sales channel. And ReferralCandy is the best in the business. Click here and get a FREE $50 credit towards your account.
referral candy

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and delve deeply into what strategies are working and what strategies are not with their businesses.
Today I’m thrilled to have both Jeff Cohen and Brandon Checketts from Seller Labs on the show, and between the two of these guys they have tremendous experience when it comes to selling on Amazon and they work with so many different companies to formulate their strategies. In today’s episode we delve super deep into how to run profitable Amazon sponsored ads the right way.
Now before we begin I want to give a quick shout out to Seller Labs who is a sponsor of the show, and specifically I want to talk about their brand new tool Ignite which helps sellers, you guessed it manage their Amazon sponsored ads. Now I’m excited to talk about Ignite because I’ve been using this tool to manage my own Amazon sponsored ad campaigns, and it makes things a heck of a lot more convenient.

Number one, I’ve always found it a major pain to generate my PPC reports on Amazon, cut and paste the data over to an excel spreadsheet and use pivot tables before I’m able to do any analysis. Well Ignite allows you to aggregate and visualize your data quickly right within the tool to see what keywords are working and what are not immediately, no need to manually create reports or play with excel.

Second of all unless you’re a data geek, Amazon campaign data can be hard to interpret, and what’s cool is that Ignite makes keyword and bidding recommendations on the fly that can be applied with a couple of clicks.

So let’s say one of my hankie keywords is bringing money, Ignite will alert me of that fact, and I can reduce the bid immediately. So bottom line Ignite makes managing your Amazon sponsored campaigns so much easier and the fact that they provide me with alerts means that I no longer have to monitor my campaigns like a hawk.
If there are keywords that are doing well, Ignite tells me to add them to my exact match campaigns. If my keywords are losing money Ignite tells me to either remove the keyword or to reduce the bid. So head on over to sellerlabs.com/steve where you’ll find awesome tutorials on how to run Amazon PPC ads and the opportunity to try Ignite for 30 days for free. Once again that’s sellerlabs.com/steve, now on the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I’m thrilled to have both Jeff Cohen and Brandon Checketts on the show. Now Jeff has already been on the podcast back in episode 120 where we talked about reviews and how to get ranked on Amazon, but today we are blessed to have Brandon Checketts on the show as well.
Now Brandon is actually the founder of Seller Labs and was the original programmer and developer for Feedback Genius and Ignite. Anyways things have changed dramatically since that first interview that I did with Jeff a while ago, for one thing incentivized reviews are no longer allowed which has forced a lot of people to understand how to launch a product without shortcuts and how to use Amazon sponsored product ads.

Anyways what I like about Jeff and Brandon is that they’re always on the bar when it comes to Amazon, they are the brands over at Seller Labs, and chances are if you’re selling on Amazon you’re probably using one of their awesome tools already. So for example right now I’m using Feedback Genius, and recently I’ve actually been using Scope to peer into what keywords competing products are ranking for, and I’ll probably write a blog post about that soon to report my results.

Anyways I wanted Jeff and Brandon on the show today to talk about the launch process, an up-to-date launch process especially in regards to Amazon sponsored ads. And with that welcome to the show Jeff and Brandon, how are you guys doing today?
Brandon: Great, thanks for having us on.

Jeff: Thanks Steve, thanks for having me back.

Steve: Yeah so Jeff and Brandon why don’t we start off with what has changed relatively recently and how that has affected the launch process?

Jeff: Yeah Steve, so we all know kind of what happened in October and basically for those that are not aware Amazon in October came out and said that if you’re giving products away in exchange for a review it’s now a violation of terms of service, and a lot of sellers were using this technique to get their initial sales and to drive sales to their products and to get reviews for their products.

So it leaves this problem in the world where sellers have to have reviews to get sales but they need sales to get reviews. And so today Amazon sellers have to look for new ways to kind of launch their products.

Steve: Yeah and so how has things changed, I don’t know if you remember our first interview but getting these incentivized reviews was actually a big part of that, and so how has this strategy kind of evolved over time

Jeff: So the way that I kind of describe it is there is black hat tactics, there is grey hat tactics and then there is white hat tactics, and for people that aren’t familiar black hat tactics are those that are going to get you immediately suspended. I typically don’t talk about black hat tactics, but there is a couple that I want to share because I think a lot of sellers are not completely aware of this.

If you’re a seller on Amazon you’re probably getting approached either on Skype or on Facebook or even through your seller central account being asked if you want somebody to rank you for SEO. Typically these people are coming from India and they’re making these big bold claims that they’ll rank you on page one. Most all of their tactics are black hat and are going to get you in trouble, and anything that you do with them is going to be very temporary in what’s done.

To really build a business that’s sustainable over a long period of time you need to look to build tactics in your business that are going to help your business grow and not get your business in trouble. And so I really try to caution people that these might sound very incentivizing and they might sound very attractive the first time you see them, but they’re not worth the effort or the gain that you get from them because Amazon is cracking down on them really hard.

So that kind of leaves us with this big question I like to ask, it’s WWJD, so what would Jeff do? When it all comes down to it we need to have a new way of thinking about our products and about our launch. And so I really break this down into four categories.
I break this down into reviews, sessions, conversions and ranking, and so we can kind of walk through all of this and talk about how all of this kind of builds into the launching of a product. Ultimately Steve it all starts with getting your product ranked and optimizing for that rank.

Steve: Okay, so let’s walk through the process.

Jeff: Great so to make it really simple poor listings equal poor search, and as an Amazon seller you have to look at your listing and understand what your listing is telling the Amazon algorithm. So the Amazon algorithm is a bird that’s going to look at all of the information that you give and it’s going try and match things up and it’s going to – I like to use the example of an apple slicer so I’ll stick with that one.

If I tell Amazon that my product in the title is an apple slicer and somebody searches for apple slicer, Amazon can connect my product with the buyer’s search desires, but if I call my product a fruit corer and somebody searches for an apple slicer then Amazon can’t necessarily connect what the buyer is looking for and my product. So you really have to start with optimizing for search and to keep it really simple poor listings get you poor search and good listings get you good search.

Steve: Okay and specifically what you’re talking about right now are the backend keywords and the title right now not necessarily the quality of the listing, right?

Jeff: Correct, so I like to say that we deal with quality of listing when we get to conversion, so in short if you don’t tell Amazon what your product does, it’ll never rank for that term. So this is kind of what you were alluding to when you were opening that if your product is new on Amazon you can actually use your competitor’s data to determine what keywords you actually need
to use in your listing. So how about I walk you through kind of a really simple example of that.

Steve: Yeah let’s do it.

Jeff: Okay so what I would do if I was listing a new product on Amazon is I would find my competitor and I would pull them up and I would use what’s called a reverse ASIN tool, and so you could use the tool by Scope or there is other tools that are out there, and what these tools are going to do is they are going to tell you what keywords that ASIN is ranking for. And what’s important about that is that the way Amazon’s algorithm works is that if a product is ranking really high for a keyword that means that that keyword is driving sales for that product.

So I want to use that information to help build my listing, so I can take the most important keywords from my competitor’s listings and I can use those keywords to build out my title, my bullet points, my descriptions and my backend keywords. This is feeding the Amazon algorithm all of the important information that’s necessary about my product and I’m no longer guessing what actually my product is going to – I’m not actually guessing how a user is going to describe my product, I’m using actual search terms that are driving conversion.

Steve: Okay yeah that’s really powerful. I think traditionally the way people were doing this is they were using Amazon auto campaigns to kind of mine keywords that they wouldn’t think of. I guess this is where you can kind of jump straight to see what the other competitors are using and just start using those keywords directly and kind of bypass that automated step, is that right?

Jeff: Yeah so the use of sponsored product ad auto campaigns was definitely the way that you would get competitive information in the past, but now you’re actually able to get that information before you start selling, so by being able to use that information before you start selling you can kind of bypass that whole process.
So what I recommend is that when your product sets are coming over or you’re getting ready to list them you’re waiting for Amazon to add them to the warehouse inventory that’s when you want to build your listing for rank, and that’s when you want to use your competitor keywords to build your listing because those are the most rich keywords that you can use at the beginning of your launch cycle.

Steve: Okay and once you have those keywords and assuming that you’ve created your listing correctly what is the next step, like we don’t have incentivized reviews anymore, so do we just let it organically go, or what is your advice there?

Jeff: So the next step is really to follow exactly what you said which is that you can use a tool that Amazon has called Amazon sponsored product ads to start driving traffic to your listing. There is kind of this misconception that you have to have reviews to get sales, but that’s not necessarily true. So I launched a product after October and I wanted to launch the product strictly with sponsored product ads to demonstrate that you could do this.

What I was able to do is I was able to get my first five or ten sales. Now I will be totally honest with you I actually lost money on those products because I wasn’t trying to have a profitable click to conversion ratio with my sponsored product ads, I was just trying to use Amazon’s traffic to drive sales for my products. I then followed up with my follow up sequence and was able to convert a couple of those to reviews.

Steve: Okay so your ACOS was so high that you weren’t profitable?

Jeff: Oh I think it was like 200%.

Steve: Okay, so is that necessary today like when you have no reviews obviously the sponsored ads aren’t going to be as effective, right? So are you suggesting that we should just run sponsored ads with zero reviews just to get those initial five or ten reviews on our product?

Jeff: It’s not the only way for you to launch a product but it’s definitely a way that you can launch your product, and I don’t think that you have to do a 200% ACOS to start driving sales, I think you’ll start driving sales. I don’t think people who look at sponsored products ads and click on the ad are as concerned about reviews as normal shoppers are, and so I think with zero reviews or even just one or two reviews your sponsored product ads start to work.

Steve: Okay so one thing I’ve actually started noticing is that ever since October when they banned incentivized reviews my sponsored product ad costs started increasing, I guess because people started flocking to it, right? And so in my mind at least for me I feel like we have to make more efforts in optimizing these campaigns now because everyone is flocking to these tools, are you guys seeing the same thing?

Jeff: Yeah and I think that’s why we recommend kind of a different way to run a sponsored product ad campaign, so I’m going to kind of walk you through the old way of doing it and then I’ll let Brandon kind of jump in and talk about the new way of doing it and why it’s more effective.

Steve: Okay yeah that sounds good.

Jeff: So the old way of running a campaign was that you would do what Amazon calls an auto campaign. An auto campaign is basically connecting an ASIN to a sponsored product campaign and Amazon just starts to figure out all the different keywords that a product might or might not rank for. And so if we’re using my apple slicer using an auto targeted campaign, Amazon might show my ad for a fruit cutter, they might show it for a kitchen gadget; they might show it for a pineapple slicer.

So Amazon is going to try to throw as big of a net in your auto campaign as possible. The old technique was really that you would run this campaign for seven to ten days, you would then get all of this data back, the impression data, and what’s called search term data which is the actual search term that a seller is looking for, and then you would take that data and you would use that to make your manual campaigns.

In some cases seven to ten days wasn’t enough, you needed up to 21 days to start getting enough data before you could start optimizing your campaigns. So we’ve kind of developed a different methodology that allows you to start on day one and start to run campaigns that matter, so I’ll let Brandon kind of explain that.

Steve: Actually before we jump to that just I had just a quick question about auto campaigns. We know that Amazon like the conversion rate really matters, so do these auto campaigns – sometimes they throw really random keywords, at least that’s what I’ve noticed looking though the spreadsheets. Does that actually hurt the listing by allowing Amazon to run these automated campaigns outside of just wasting money on these keywords?

Brandon: I guess the thing I’ll say rather is just try to find definitive data on whether a wrong conversion rate helps you or hurts you, but there’s definitely a higher conversion rate is definitely going to help you not just on your campaigns but on your products in general.

Steve: I guess what I’m trying to ask is by focusing on those keywords that you know are going to convert, does that help you more than just – does running auto campaigns kind of hurt you because you’re now driving traffic for these keywords that could be irrelevant?

Brandon: It’s definitely going to be more of a waste of money than doing some of those more targeted and like I said it’s hard to find definitive evidence one way or another if like your automated campaigns are using poorly targeted keywords actually hurts your campaign. It’s definitely a waste of money because you’re advertising and people are clicking on things that are not relevant and they are not likely to buy your products, and there is anecdotal evidence there’s people who would say more definitively that it does hurt your campaign or kind in the ball pack like it’s still is a little hard to tell.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: But I see people definitely saying like yeah they definitely hurt your campaign, and I think there is cases to be made for that.

Steve: Okay so in that case let’s talk about the new methodology that you guys have.

Brandon: Yeah so the thing that we recommend doing now is to – Jeff mentioned earlier these tools are like reverse ASIN tool. Essentially what they do is that they allow you put in an ASIN of either your product or a competitor’s products, and it’ll tell you all the keywords or the user search terms that that product ranks for. So using a tool like that against all [inaudible 00:17:18] one called Scope and there’s other ones out there, but they really tell you like what keywords or what user search terms people are looking for.
If something ranks really well for one of those keywords those are generally will be pretty effective terms for you to use in your advertising, and so you can really just narrow really quickly on what really works.

Steve: Can we talk a little bit about how such a tool would work, like how do you know what people are searching for, for all the different products on there? You guys have a tool, right, so how does it work?

Brandon: Yeah it’s actually really complicated technical challenge because we have to perform searches on like 80 something million keywords, and then go through and find out the results for those and then save all the results then go look backwards in the database, look up a product and see which keywords it ranked for.

Steve: Okay, okay so you guys actually…

Brandon: It’s really technical.

Steve: You guys just actually type in keywords and then make note of what’s ranking for what and then just keep all that in a database, right?

Brandon: Yeah that’s not too hard, if you say like that it doesn’t sound very complicated but try to do that at scale across 80 million keywords it’s a challenging work.

Steve: Oh yeah I was just trying to simplify it for the listeners, if we get too technical then – yeah, okay.

Brandon: It’s not very hard to do, you can arbitrarily you would do it but the problem is like we don’t know where those keywords are ahead of time, so we have to kind of go through all of them.

Jeff: Yeah so a seller – Steve a seller could actually do this manually on their own, they could go to Amazon and type in the keyword and look at what results are coming up, but what we’re able to do is actually by looking at so many keywords we’re able to tell you what keywords are actually being used that you would never think of. So you might not ever think of calling your apple slicer a fruit corer and that’s kind of the advantage that you can get by looking at the data in a whole.

So most sellers are probably used to tracking keywords in their keyword position, that’s a tactic that’s been used by sellers for a very long period of time, but that’s only tracking keywords that you know you want to track. What we’re able to do through our methodology is actually track 80 million plus keywords, and so we’re tracking keywords that you’ve never thought of and actually able to suggest keywords to you that you should be including in your campaigns or in your listings that are actually driving sales for your competitors.

Steve: Okay so once – like assuming that all these tools work really well and I have a set of keywords, then would I just bypass that automated step all together, then the auto campaign?

Brandon: Yeah we’ve seen a lot of people just bypass that all together. In general we recommend you can still run an automatic targeted campaign because they tend to do gather a little bit of data but I would use that as the primary source of things. It’s really easy just to start with those focused keywords that we already know are ranking and they perform a lot better than automatic targeted campaign does.

We see a lot of sellers that do, if you go that automatic targeted route like it can take you 7 to 30 days in some cases to gather some relevant data and costs hundreds of dollars in the meantime just spending money experimenting with keywords. So we really short cut on both time and money by using modern tools.

Steve: So let’s go a little bit more specific now, so let’s say I had these keywords, do you suggest doing phrase match, exact match, like how would you set up your campaign from the start assuming this is like a brand new product?

Jeff: Yes so what I would suggest is that you jump in and you start with a broad match. So you want to use Amazon’s – let me explain broad phrase and exact for people that don’t understand, that’s probably a good place to start. So Amazon has three what we call manual match types, broad, phrase and exact and broad is if you consider broad like on the far left it’s going to be the
most open of all the categories.

And so if I’m using the word apple slicer it’s going to use words like apple cutter, red cutter for slicing apple, slicer for cutting apple, it’s going to look at terms with my keyword before, middle and after. Phrase is going to keep my term apple slicer together, and exact is only going to look at that actual term. It might add a misspelling or a plural or something like that.

So what you want to do is use your competitor’s keywords and one of the tricks that we’ve kind of identified is that you want to make sure the keywords do not overlap, and that’s kind of a big thing that we’ve been sharing with our customers. So when you look at what I call overlapping keywords, if you have an apple cutter and you have an apple slicer, those are not overlapping keywords, but you wouldn’t also want to include the word apple cutter slicer because that’s an overlapping keyword and it’s going to steal impressions.

So you want to take these keywords and you want to put them all in to the broad match type and now you want to start running your campaigns and letting Amazon tell you from there what additional search terms you’re missing and which ones should move to phrase and exact. So you are essentially bypassing the whole first step that you were doing before.

Steve: It’s more like a structured automated campaign so to speak, meaning you’re starting with the baseline?

Jeff: That’s a really good way to explain it and I think what Brandon was trying to explain earlier is that we don’t suggest that you stop doing auto targeting campaigns, but you want to get your broad match campaign really going first and then you want to look at your auto targeted campaign maybe a little bit more down the road to find some additional keywords, because you’re going to keep the bid on that really small at that time.

Steve: Okay and then when you mentioned non overlapping keywords what did it mean by stealing impressions, does that imply that you’re competing against yourself?

Jeff: I’ll let Brandon kind of give a technical explanation to that.

Brandon: Yeah one of the things we see people do is with the advent of these reverse ASIN tools, one of the tactics we saw people using initially was I might have found 400 keywords that my products ranks for, or my competitor’s product ranks for and they just take all those to the sponsored product campaign and then they start running ads on them. But what ends up happening is a lot of these keywords will be specified, only end up getting one or two or five or ten clicks, and so your budget gets spread out among so many keywords that it’s hard to figure out which ones are working and which ones are irrelevant just because there’s not enough density of clicks on any one of them.

Steve: Okay I see.

Brandon: So what we’re trying to do and tell people to use like the non overlapping keywords, what we’re really trying to do is like figure out the more broad keywords that you can get more data and more impressions and more clicks around, so that you can make better data decisions on those things. So instead of saying like I had five clicks on that and one sale, you might roughly think that’s a 20% conversion rate, but mathematically it’s a little bit hard to say that because five clicks is just not enough data to really figure out your conversion rate as on a large scale.

So if you can densify those around broader keywords and you can get keywords that have 15 or 20 or 50 clicks around them, you can make a lot better data driven decisions at that level.

Steve: Does that imply then that the phrases that you should be entering in to Amazon should be like relatively short ones like two or three words at most?

Brandon: That’s probably the case in most things, it depends on the size of your niche, and I like our use case of the word apple slicer in this case because this is part of what comes back to a little bit of art to this. If we want to go very broad we could just say apple but then the human intelligence will tell us apple is going to be a very poor performing keyword because there are so many searches for apple, they are probably intending to buy an apple branded phone or iPad or something.

So you have to figure out how to use your human intelligence along with the data in this case to figure out like apple slicer is probably a good search term, it’s going to have enough velocity without being too niche, but if I start specifying apple slicer red, that’s going to probably drive down – it’s going to make it a lot more specific and get a lot fewer impressions and clicks on that.

Steve: Just to clarify for the listeners, so apple slicer if we bid on that on a broad match whatever Amazon will come up with would contain apple and slicer but in any order in the entire phrase?

Brandon: Yeah that’s correct, that’s kind of the definition of a broad match is that it will take the words you specify in any order along with any other words in there as well.

Jeff: Steve to add, for those that are visual learners we’ll give you a piece that you can attach in to your show notes that’ll give people a kind of a visual representation of auto versus broad versus phrase versus exact, so they can kind of see how all of these kind of work in with one another.

Steve: Okay yeah I’m just trying to clarify all these terms for the listeners just in case they don’t have a strong grasp, but yeah that would be an excellent resource that I’ll attach for sure.

Jeff: Yeah and Steve I think this is where it really comes down to understanding sponsored product ads is really understanding that it’s both an art and a science. Steve was joking before we started hitting the record button and he might throw some of this back end, but Brandon and I play off of each other, because Brandon is much more of the science kind of guy, so he’s looking for the hard science behind something to make a decision.

The whole idea of overlapping keywords is that if you don’t have enough data you can’t make a decision, but there is also a real art to a lot of this which is that everybody has to kind of decide how much data they need to make a decision, because to get statistically correct you need a lot of data, and so a lot of the methodologies that are taught aren’t necessarily based on statistical correctness, they are just based on a little bit of gut and a little bit of science.

So as a seller is learning to master sponsored product ads they really have to realize that this is not a part of Amazon or a part of selling that you can set and forget, so when you’re doing your follow up email reviews, you come in and you set that whole process up and you move on and you deal with something else. Sponsored product ads do require the seller to understand their own product, understand the numbers and to keep checking on them on a somewhat regular basis, so it’s not something that needs daily attention, but it is something that needs to be looked at on a regular basis.

Steve: I think it can be interesting since you guys are kind of yening yang, then we can use the apple slicer example. It would be interesting to see how both you guys approaches would be different for the apple slicer, and where you guys would differ in terms of the gut versus the data. So how would you guys proceed, so which keywords would you bid first on apple slicer, and then what would be like your process for refining the campaign?

Jeff: We’ve probably been working together for too long on the term apple slicer that will be, but I’ll go first and then let Brandon kind of correct me. So I did exactly what Brandon said, the first time I ran a campaign I went and I did a reverse ASIN, look up for ten of my competitors, I did a duplication of all of the lists, I put all the keywords into a broad match campaign and I let them run looking for the data to kind of give me the answer.

I had a lot of overlapping keywords that were stealing impressions from one another and to be quite honest with you I had a frustration point where I basically took the whole campaign and I threw it away because the data wasn’t making any sense to me, and I just didn’t feel like I had the time and the energy to continue to do it. So the idea of the overlapping keywords makes a lot of sense and as I cleaned up my campaign with the removal of overlapping keywords, I was able to get more data.

But it still provides a big hole in my mind because the data is not conclusive, and so I’m willing to take action on things that have a lot less clicks, I’ll take action on something that has between five and ten clicks and choose to move it to a broad or an exact match. I think that’s probably the biggest area where Brandon and I differ.

Steve: I want to take a moment to thank ReferralCandy for being a sponsor of the show. Now in this day and age word of mouth is a huge driver of business for most ecommerce stores, and the best way to amplify word of mouth marketing is through a referral program. This is where ReferralCandy shines, with just a couple of clicks of the mouse you could add a referral program to your ecommerce store and reward your customers for telling their friends about your shop.

And this tactic works wonders; and in fact it is not uncommon to get a ridiculous return on investment. So for example Greats Footwear, who is a ReferralCandy customer, is currently seeing a 20X ROI. Referral word of mouth marketing is also useful for building up your social media presence as well, because everyone is talking about your company with their friends on Facebook and Twitter.

And the best part is that ReferralCandy is a set it and forget it service, requires no technical setup and they are giving My Wife Quit Her Job listeners 50 bucks to try them out if you go to promo.referralcandy.com/steve. Once again it’s promo.referralcandy.com/steve to get a $50 credit to try out the service risk free. Now back to the show.
I’m just curious like if you could out spend your problem, like if you put more budget on a daily basis, could you bid on more overlapping keywords and still get the data that you need, or does it not work that way?

Brandon: Yeah there is some point to that, you definitely could but you also can’t create impressions on Amazon like there is only so many people searching for things, so just because you spend – you have a higher bid or a higher budget doesn’t mean that you can create 1000 people searching for something in a day, you are limited by actual search line.

Steve: So to kind of redefine these overlapping impressions what it’s basically doing is it is diluting your data set across a bunch of similar keywords so that it is harder to collate the data, right?

Brandon: Yeah so if you go back to – and just examples like a really good case for when I was looking at his campaign he had done all like 200 keywords or something in there and a lot of them would have two clicks three clicks and maybe you have three clicks and one sale, maybe we’d have three clicks and zero sales. Statistically I look at that and I can’t really tell statistically the difference between the two.

And Jeff was more of like I’ll take a look at it, and three clicks and with zero sales might mean I’m going to turn that one off and set it as a negative keyword. When you spread yourself out like among all those keywords you’re kind of forced to either make those decisions early or wait a really long time and spend a bunch of money along the way.

Steve: So there is no upper limit on the number of keywords you would suggest when starting out, just make sure that they aren’t overlapping, right?

Jeff: I think we’ve evolved in our recommendations and I think that when you’re really getting started try to target between 50 – so campaign organization, we’ve defined three areas of success for sponsored ads. Campaign organization is number one, we can talk a little bit about that because we haven’t really mentioned that, keyword selection is number two and then optimization is number three.

So when you’re doing your initial broad match campaign maybe you shoot for like 50 to 100 keywords. I don’t know that today I would go for 200 or 300 or even 1000 keywords because more is not better. Amazon still treats those broad match terms and finds the actual search terms. So there is a difference, there is a keyword which is the term that I’m telling Amazon that I want and there is a search term, that’s the term that the buyer is actually using to find the product.

If I find the right 50 or so keywords and I put them in the broad match I’m still going to get hundreds and hundreds of search terms based on those keywords, and so I would rather let Amazon really define the search term without having the overlap than trying to define all of those myself so that I can get to the optimization faster because that’s where you start to save yourself money.

Steve: Okay so that being said let’s say we do have statistically significant data, what is the next step?

Brandon: I guess we will again set sort of an optimized phase of that, so you got a campaign set up, you got a number of keywords, you’re collecting data. Once you got some good data on there then – I mean the optimization steps…

Steve: Actually let’s define good data, actually let’s define statistical significance first, how do you know when a keyword is good that you want to actually do something about it?

Brandon: This could sound to maybe a mathematical question, there’s a mathematical maybe definition, there’s more of a practical definition. So I think we like to see around 50 to 100 clicks to get started to get you a relevant number of clicks. If you can see 100 clicks and zero sales I would say you would be pretty confident that’s a poor performing keyword, but if you can see 50 clicks with few sales you can have a little bit more confidence than if you had fewer numbers of clicks.

So the more clicks you have on stuff the better confidence you can have in conversion rates and that’s your ACOS and all those other metrics.

Steve: So your data is or your statistical significance metrics are based on clicks and not necessarily conversions, is that correct?

Brandon: Yeah the number of clicks after somebody clicked on something they either convert or not, so if you have say I’ll just use 100 clicks is a nice round number, 100 clicks and ten sales off of that you got a pretty good idea your conversion rate is going to be around 10%, it might be a plus or minus a little bit around there, but it’s probably going to be on that 10% rage.

Jeff: So are you looking at ACOS at this point or are you looking at conversion rate?

Brandon: I would typically make most decisions around ACOS, the nice thing about ACOS is it kind of bundles into there the actual cost for click as well, so some keywords might perform really poorly, but they also might be really, really inexpensive. So the ACOS is kind of a nice metric because it kind of takes into account both your conversion rate and the cost per click.

Jeff: Okay can I stop you guys for a second?

Steve: Yes.

Jeff: You guys are geeking out a little bit, so ACOS is the advertising cost of sale because I don’t think we defined that.

Steve: Yes that’s a good job Jeff, keep us in line man.

Jeff: Yeah and this is kind of where we were talking about Brandon and I ying ying yeng. So one of the challenges is that ACOS is not really defined inside of Amazon, and inside sponsored product ads. It’s not done at the search term level that allows the seller to make quality decisions, am I right Brandon?

Brandon: I think the search term report actually reports ACOS and so that’s data, I don’t know that Amazon kind of defines it in a couple of places. We can get a little specific definition you want to go there but in general it’s just kind of an overall performance of the keyword and you think about [inaudible 00:36:31] like it’s a well rounded one because it takes into account conversion rates and cost per click. It’s a good sort of in metric to look at.

Jeff: Yeah I think what I was trying to say sorry was that it’s a number that you can get to within the report but you have to download those reports; you have to build pivot tables off of those reports to be able to take action off of that data. It’s a little bit challenging in the current interface of sponsored product ads to use ACOS as a metric.
This is also where I differ from Brandon because Brandon is very scientific and he says 50 to 100 clicks and I look at heaven I say I’ve been running my campaign for four months on one of my new products and I still don’t have 50 clicks on some of my search terms. So I’m willing to take action on things with a lot less clicks, I’m willing to take action on things with five to ten clicks and start making decisions because I might not get to a statistical relevance with some of my number. That’s where the art of this comes in and it’s not just a straight science.

Steve: Interesting so you’ll make decisions off of five or ten clicks assuming there is a conversion in there, right?

Jeff: Correct, so if I have ten clicks with no conversions I might lower my bid. If I have ten clicks with one conversion I might move it to a phrase match, if I have ten clicks with three conversions I might move it straight to an exact match. So I’m willing to take less data and make action on it because I can still redefine what I do in those other categories, I’m just trying to kind of pull out broad when I can make a decision.

So if I have ten clicks with no actions I might look at the number of impressions, I might look at the keyword and decide if I need to make it negative or just lower the bid. So that’s really where the art of this comes in because there are so many different things you can do to start optimizing a campaign. You can create negative keywords, you can lower bids, you can increase bids, you can move things from broad to phrase, phrase to exact, those are all the different things that you can start to do when you start looking at campaign optimization.

Steve: So a couple of things I just want to summarize based on what you just said Jeff. I actually have a post that shows you how to extract the reports manually from Amazon, it is quite a tedious process and it does involve excel, but ACOS is the number that I tend to look at. But in terms of what you were just talking about Jeff like making these decisions like let’s say you do find a keyword that is working for you, you mentioned a bunch of things, but what would be your next step, and how would you determine what that next step will be once you find that keyword that works?

Jeff: So if I find a keyword that works and it’s kind of working, then I’m going to move it to a phrase match and I’m going to try to find other phrases that that keyword is on, and when it’s in the phrase match I’m going to bid more. So I’m not going to necessarily remove the keyword, I’m moving the search term, not the keyword, I’m moving the search term from broad to phrase and I could potentially negative that keyword in the broad. But if my phrase match has a higher bid then that will kind of take over the idea of stealing impressions.

So a typical campaign organization is going to have your highest bid with exact and then phrase and then broad. Sometimes you can get cheaper clicks in either phrase or an exact match, and if you start to get cheaper clicks then you want to negative the keyword in broad or negative the search term in broad so that your phrase match is getting the click not your broad match.

Steve: It’s interesting that you say that you don’t negative it right away and you just rely on the higher bid, is that something that you always do?

Jeff: I don’t always – this is where the science — the art comes in. I don’t always do it; some of it is a little bit of a gut and a little bit of a decision. So to be honest we use a system now that has built in some intelligence and can make some recommendations to us so that we don’t have to use the pivot tables, but back in the day of kind of using the excel spreadsheets and the pivot tables, I would probably take a little bit more of a hard line and when I move something from broad to phrase I would negative it in broad just to kind of clear it out and keep my data clean.

Steve: Okay just to summarize this for the listeners, the reason Jeff would put the phrase or the exact match keywords as negatives in the broad campaign is so that you don’t end up bidding on both the broad campaign and the phrase or exact match campaign.

Jeff: Or bid against yourself.

Steve: Or bid against yourself yeah exactly. Brandon I’m curious what your perspective is on this.

Brandon: From my perspective as a software developer I’d say it’s much easier to always do something than just remember what you did and what you didn’t do, so I don’t see any harm in setting it as a negative keyword. So I would suggest every time you move something from broad to phrase you might as well set the phrase as a negative match on the broad campaign, there is no harm and it kind of shows that you do what you intend.

Steve: And when you’re deciding like what to bid, what are some guidelines, like say you found this working keyword like how much do you up the bid?

Brandon: So the bid is just a mathematical decision, besides most people have like some target ACOS for all they’re trying to hit, whether that is 30% or 100% depends on your products, but if you’ve got a goal of 30% and you know the conversion rate is whatever maybe 15%, you can do some math and figure out exactly what the appropriate bid is.

Steve: And like the follow up question to that is you just mentioned a 30% ACOS, let’s just assume that most people on Amazon have a 66% margin, which basically means that 30% ACOS is almost break even right, what is your philosophy on that, do you try to just break even in hopes that Amazon will just bring you more organic sales, or do you actually try to make a significant profit on your Amazon sponsored ads?

Brandon: Well it’s different concepts for different phases of your products, different things, so I would say there’s definitely some sort of halo effect that goes on, it’s pretty well understood I guess if you use sponsored products to drive sales that you will rank better organically and thus sell more organically as well. So that’s a very common strategy is just to at least break even on your sponsored product sales and understand that you’re going to rank better somehow organically for the halo effects. That’s a really common thing we see.

Jeff: What Brandon is saying there is if you’re launching your product that’s where you might want to consider your ACOS even being 100% and being okay, that’s the same as kind of the old incentivized review, you’re giving your product away for free. If you have a mature product and you’re just trying to grow your sales, then you might be looking at whatever profit margin you want from that and if you’re trying to maintain your rank or even increase your rank, then that’s where you might want to go more to that break even. So it kind of depends on what your goals are within your business.

Steve: Okay, we’ve talked a lot about – we’ve gone to a lot of specifics in terms of running the campaign, I’m just curious how often you guys monitor your broad campaigns to pick out these keywords?

Jeff: No more than…

Brandon: Most people do it probably once a week or every other week is kind of a good case or what were you going to say there Jeff?

Jeff: I was going to say no more than once a week, I think that one thing that sellers do is try to over optimize their campaign, and they want to look at it daily and you really have to let the data tell you what the answer is.

Steve: I’m kind of the opposite to be honest with you guys like I don’t look at it very often at all, I peak at it just to make sure the ACOS isn’t out of control, because I find that it is kind of tedious to kind of monitor all the different keywords because of all these different steps. Is that what you guys are finding as well?

Brandon: If you go down to that route of downloading reports and putting it on pivot tables I can see that that will be super tedious to do over and over again.

Steve: I’m just curious I mean you guys talk to a lot of sellers, is that what people do right now?

Jeff: I think a lot of sellers start sponsored product ads, they run it for some period of time, they were probably running an auto targeted campaign, they lost total track of what to do when trying to download their reports. They looked at it from a very, very high level, they determined that it was either profitable or not profitable and they turned it off.
I think there is a next set of people who were learning how the data works and went into some optimization and then there are a small group of people who have learned how to terribly kill it if you will.

Steve: Okay, I’m going to attempt to kind of summarize our entire 40 minute discussion up to this point, and you guys can just poke holes in case I’m saying something wrong. But it sounds like the first step is to use a tool like Scope and do a reverse ASIN, find out what keywords are ranking for some of the best selling products, and then include those search terms in a broad campaign to start out with.

Make sure you’re not using overlapping keywords and then gather some data and depending on whether you’re Jeff or Brandon you can use your gut or go straight on statistical significance, find out the keywords that are converting and then start refining them into phrase or exact match campaigns, increase the bid on those so you dominate those keywords, meanwhile putting those in negatives for your broad campaigns, rinse and repeat.

Jeff: Yes, but I’ll give three things on that. One is that don’t optimize too early, so make sure you get your initial data, don’t over collect and don’t over optimize, and I think that you have to let that data kind of collect and sit and get to some type of level to make a decision. So if you make a decision on a keyword today, you have to basically restart your timer if you will and let more data collect before you make the next decision. You can’t come in tomorrow and change that same keyword or search term.

Steve: Okay and one thing I didn’t touch upon was the increase in bid, what was the methodology there, like let’s say you’ve found a good keyword, like how much would you up your bid for example in the apple slicer case?

Brandon: So I think up it by around 20%, if something is performing really well, 10 to 20% is a nice way to make proper bid. If you raise it by 10 or 20% and it’s still performing well you can keep raising a little bit. At some point it doesn’t make sense to increase, if your bid increases way beyond what your cost for click is you’re probably already behind and increasing your bid more beyond that doesn’t do you much good.

Steve: How often do you check, so at some point like your ACOS might be out of control too, so how long do you wait before checking?

Brandon: At the beginning weekly or biweekly patterns is pretty useful and works well for a lot of people, so checking it once every week or every other week. It’s pretty good to check into – obviously if you’re spending tens of thousands of dollars a month on your campaigns you might want to check into it more frequently, but if you’re spending $100 a month you don’t have to do it as often. So it depends on your business model and your risk tolerance level there, but the more you spend on the product the more often you want to check on it I suppose.

Steve: Okay as I mentioned before like one of the reasons why I don’t monitor that often is because it’s tedious. So I want to give you guys the opportunity, I mean I really thank you guys for coming on the show today, but I did want to give you guys an opportunity to talk about your latest tool that kind of automates the process. So go ahead and describe how it helps and how it simplifies this entire process.

Brandon: So I guess I’ll start off from the sciency side, so from a sciency data driven guy I find it really intriguing to go through and like learn about all this stuff and then make algorithms to help the computer implement it. So that’s essentially what our tool does, it takes most of the best practices that we learn from talking with people, from talking with our sellers, talking with customers who bought it, it takes all those for the best practices I think including all those steps we just talked about earlier in this show, and it kind of makes it so you can organize your campaign center in like the best way and automates and makes suggestions around all these same things that just talked about.

Steve: So by suggestions, that implies that I don’t even have to look at the data for the keyword like it will just tell me what keyword is doing well then I can click a button and move that to an exact or phrase match campaign?

Brandon: Yeah Jeff tell him the specifics, we’ve got the data geek version or the Jeff version or the Brandon version.

Steve: For this question by the way I have not used this tool yet, I plan on using it, I’ll probably report my results on the blog but – sorry Jeff I didn’t mean to interrupt, go for it.

Jeff: No you’re okay, so I think that the way that Ignite works, so the Seller Labs tool is called Ignite, and if you look at it from just a straight Amazon seller experience we connect to either an existing campaign or you can create a new campaign. We attach that campaign to your product, we give you suggestions of keywords, so we can actually help you make the keyword suggestions, we do the duplication for you, and we start running your campaign.

It’s all integrated directly in with Amazon sponsored product ads, so there is no more need to kind of look at something on an excel spreadsheet and then go back in to managing your campaigns. Then all of our managed campaigns, the Ignite managed campaigns have suggestions built in to them. So as the data becomes statistically accurate and you actually have a control over what we call the confidence of our recommendation, we make suggestions to either add a bid, decrease the bid, move something from broad to phrase, broad to exact, add negative keywords, archive a keyword because it’s not performing.

So we look at all of these things and we really optimize your campaign based on the ACOS that you define for your campaigns. So you come in and when you set up the campaign you tell us I’m shooting for a 20% or a 40% ACOS, and then all the suggestions that we make are based on the ACOS that you’ve told us that you’re targeting.

So what sellers really like about our tool is that you don’t have to download search term reports anymore and do all the pivot tables, we actually have all the detailed search term reports in our tool, and if you’re kind of the more data geeky guy you can dive into that data and take action right from those reports inside our tool.

Steve: Okay, I mean one thing that I find extremely tedious about PPC is you’re running these broad campaigns and there is going to be phrases that you want in your negatives and it’s really tedious to go through and add those negatives. Does your tool actually add those negatives or ask me where I just click the button and just throw those into the negatives in the campaign?

Brandon: Yes, so we’d actually paused down those search term reports automatically and you can browse through them and there is a call, there’s an actions button over the left hand side that you can choose to set up those negative keywords just right there.

Steve: Okay yeah that would be profoundly useful for someone who does this. Guys thanks a lot for your time. If anyone wants to find you guys or check out your tools, where can they find you.

Brandon: The best way to do it is just go to sellerlabs.com is our website; we’ve got a bunch of these resources around sponsored products at sellerlabs.com/ppc, it’s got a page on, it’s got some blog posts, some of our videos we’ve done about it and links to some resources about it including a link to sign up for a trial of Ignite.

Steve: Yeah for everyone listening out there I’ve actually used scope and I find that Scope is a tool that allows you to do the reverse ASIN look up on the keywords, and I actually look forward to try Ignite and report on my results.

Jeff: Yeah we would love for you to give it a try and be able to report on what you’re currently doing versus using the tool. Anyone can go to sellerlabs.com/ppc, have a whole host of resources there to learn more, we covered a lot of terminology so if you’re kind of new and you got lost, there is a lot of terminology definitions on that page. We also get into some of the methodology and we break these down into some of the individual components.

I think ultimately this probably wasn’t the most exciting podcast for people to listen to, but sponsored product ads are clearly something that all sellers on the Amazon platform need to understand, and they are becoming more and more important to how you overall run your business and for your overall product success.
If you’re not running product ads and it’s not part of your current vision, then you’re really missing out on a significant potential revenue source in the Amazon platform because they do dedicate a lot of space to the sponsored ads on the mobile side, the application side as well as the desktop side for Amazon.

Steve: Yeah, hey Jeff I’m going to have to disagree with you there, I think the listeners the reason they listen to the podcast is to get like really in-depth and nitty-gritty on the stuff, and I think we did a pretty good job of that today.

Jeff: Yeah I think we did. Sometimes Brandon and I have to – we hang up from these things and we say well did we go too far, did we not explain enough things. So yeah give us feedback, let us know if we didn’t go deep enough and you want us to go deeper, share that and we’ll keep an eye on the blog notes and comments there as well.

Steve: And for sure like I always do these case studies, so I’ll be definitely doing a case study on this just to kind of report on my results at some point, but yeah thanks a lot both to you for coming on the show. I learned a lot and I’m sure the listeners will get a lot of value out of this.

Jeff: Hey Steve, how about I give away a six months free trial of Ignite for people that have listened all the way through to the end and now know about it.

Steve: Yeah that sounds good, when this goes out I will create a contest in fact and that would be great man, that sounds like a great giveaway.

Jeff: Okay so you can kind of decide how to pick the winner and we can have them post or something and pick a winner and we’d be happy to do that.

Steve: Yeah that will sound great. Thanks guys.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. As you can probably tell Jeff and Brandon really know their stuff and we kind of geeeked out on Amazon ads, and if you also couldn’t tell this episode was recorded a while back and I’ve since been using their tool Ignite to manage my campaigns. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode160.

And once again I want to thank Sellerlabs.com for sponsoring this episode. Their tool Ignite is what I use to manage my Amazon PPC campaigns. Instead of the old tedious way of generating reports and analyzing your ad campaigns in excel, Ignite aggregates all that info for you in one place and allows you to quickly visualize your data to make decisions fast.

Not only does it save time, but it also makes managing your Amazon campaigns so much easier too. So head on over to sellerlabs.com/steve and sign up for a free 30 day trial, once again that’s sellerlabs.com/steve.

And if you’re interested in starting your own ecommerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away via email, thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

159: Larry Kim On How To Run Profitable Google Adwords Campaigns

Larry Kim On How To Run Profitable Google Adwords Campaigns

Larry is the founder and CTO of Wordstream and Mobile Monkey which is a service that develops online marketing software and helps companies optimize their PPC ad campaigns.

He is considered one of the most influential PPC experts in the world and he’s a frequent blogger for Search Engine Land, MOZ, Search Engine Journal and other top business publications.

In this episode, you will learn about how he started Wordstream and how to run profitable PPC campaigns the right way.

What You’ll Learn

  • How Larry came up with the idea to start Wordstream
  • How to run a brand new PPC campaign for an ecommerce store
  • How Larry leverages content to run profitable ads.
  • The common mistakes that people make with Google Adwords
  • How to raise your quality score
  • How leverage RLSA

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Ignite.Sellerlabs.com – If you are selling on Amazon and running Amazon Sponsored Ads campaigns, then Ignite from Seller Labs is a must have tool. Click here and get a FREE 30 Day Trial.
Ignite Logo

ReferralCandy.com – If you’re already getting steady orders every month, adding a refer-a-friend program to your store can give you a new sales channel. And ReferralCandy is the best in the business. Click here and get a FREE $50 credit towards your account.
referral candy

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and delve deeply into what strategies are working and what strategies are not with their businesses.
Today I’m thrilled to have Larry Kim on the show, and if you’ve been doing SEO or any search engine marketing for the past couple of years, chances are you’ve heard of Larry. He is widely regarded as one of the foremost experts in Google PPC, and today we’re going to have him teach us how to run profitable AdWords campaigns.
Now before we begin I want to give a quick shout out to Seller Labs who is a sponsor of the show, and specifically I want to talk about their brand new tool Ignite which helps sellers manage their Amazon sponsored ads. Now I’m excited to talk about Ignite because I’ve actually been using this tool to manage my Amazon sponsored ad campaigns, and it makes things a heck of a lot more convenient.

So number one I’ve always found it a major pain to generate my PPC reports on Amazon, cut and paste the data over to an excel spreadsheet and then use pivot tables before I can do any sort of analysis. Well Ignite allows you to aggregate and visualize your Amazon sponsored ads data quickly right within the tool to see immediately what keywords are working and what is not.
There is no need to manually create reports or play with excel, everything is right there for you right on the interface. And second of all unless you’re a data geek, Amazon campaign data can be hard to understand, and what’s cool is that Ignite makes keyword and bidding recommendations on the fly that can be applied with a single click.

So for example let’s say one of hankie keywords is bringing money, well Ignite will actually alert me of that fact and I can reduce the bid immediately with just a couple of clicks. So bottom line Ignite makes managing your Amazon sponsored ads so much easier and the fact that they provide me with alerts means that I no longer have to monitor my campaigns like a hawk.
So if there are keywords that are doing well, Ignite tells me to add them to my exact match campaigns. If my keywords are losing money well then Ignite tells me to either remove the keyword or to reduce the bid. So head on over to sellerlabs.com/steve where you will find awesome tutorials on how to run Amazon PPC ads and the opportunity to try Ignite for 30 days free. Once again that’s sellerlabs.com/steve, now on the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I’m thrilled to have Larry Kim on the show. Now I had Ryan Deiss on the podcast a couple of weeks ago and I actually met Larry through Ryan’s conference Content and Commerce. Now Larry is the founder and CTO of WordStream which is a service that develops online marketing software and helps companies optimize their PPC ad campaigns.

What I like about Larry is that one is he’s an electrical engineer just like I am and two he’s a family man. Anyway Larry is considered one of the most influential PPC experts in the world and he’s a frequent blogger for Search Engine Land, [inaudible 00:03:05], Search Engine Journal and other top business publications. If you read any of those, chances are you’ve seen his face on there.

He’s also the author of the most shared PPC article of all time which I did not know until I read his bio, and today we’re going to learn about how he started WordStream and how to run profitable PPC campaigns the right way, and with that welcome to the show Larry, how are you doing today?

Larry: Hey doing great thanks Steve, how are you?

Steve: I’m good, I’m good. You know I read your bio but I’m sure like there’s a bunch of people in the audience who do not know about WordStream, so one what gave you the idea to create WordStream and was it your intention to create a software company, or did it kind of happen by accident?

Larry: Well probably like a lot of your listeners I started out just as doing internet marketing consulting, so I used to go one man show, occupy myself with one or two clients, and as you mentioned my background is in electrical engineering, so originally…

Steve: Hardware guy or software guy?

Larry: Well actually they are kind of indistinguishable at this point, like if you’re building geeks or something like it’s all software. But yes basically just wrote some software to make my life easier like the keyword researching and the grouping and all that stuff. So initially it was six, seven years ago, so I was just – I’m lazy so I wanted to not have to do the same stupid things over and over again and just was using that to make my life more efficient.
And then the light bulb went off and like wait a minute if this is so helpful to me maybe I can start the user interface on this thing and sell to companies as opposed to just using it internally for myself just to make my own life easier. So that’s kind of how we got started, I started pitching the idea to venture firms.

To think about software is so competitive, there’s so many other companies, you can’t cut a lifestyle your way into a software business, we’re in a competitive market, you know what I mean. You got to be in it, all in to win, that kind of thing. So I wanted to raise money and then they all said no, but they all gave me good reasons like, oh you need more customers, you need more partners, you need more team that kind of stuff.
So over the next year I bootstrapped the business using just consulting revenues to hire people and some marketers and sales people and engineers and basically finally after a year later went back to all those people who said no and two of them ended up making offers for our company of four million or so give or take, and that’s kind of history like that’s how we got started or I got started.

Steve: It’s interesting that you felt like you needed funding because I’ve had a lot of people on the podcast who’ve kind of bootstrapped their software companies as well, is it because you had much higher aspirations for your revenue numbers I guess?

Larry: Well yeah basically there was – the thing about software is you have to have an interesting like work technology has an infinite lifespan if you know what I mean. There’s enough pain in the market and someone is going to solve that pain, and then at some point it’s going to go away. So I just felt a lot of pressure because there were other companies that were doing PPC management software, they were two or three years ahead of me, and it was kind of like win or take these kind of things for competitive reasons largely.
That process like software is ridiculously expensive to build like I employ 30 engineers right now and so that’s like it’s a lot, so it’s nice to be using someone else’s money.

Steve: Yeah no totally that’s true in the risk perspective. But on the other hand they have higher expectations too.

Larry: Of course, that’s a game you’re playing, there is a lot of pressure too to try to grow the company as fast as you can and you lose all the control over your destiny actually.

Steve: So what does your software do exactly for the benefit of the listeners and how does it differ from just using the AdWords editor for example?

Larry: There is nothing you can’t do in our software as AdWords editor, the difference is in AdWords editor it’s kind of like an expert driven workflow, so you kind of have to know Steve what you want to do, you’re like, oh I’m going to add some keywords now, I’m going to now add some ads. Like you need to be able to know what it is you’re diagnosing and then go in and fix those things.

So WordStream it’s more a machine guided work flow, so it does the analysis for you and just tells you like, look Steve here’s three things I want you to do this week and it will take you like five minutes to do because often times there’s millions of advertisers, not all of them are like full time marketers, a lot of them are like think of other things going on.
So it’s kind of like how millions of Americans use something like trouble tax to prepare their taxes. They don’t really need to know anything; it just tells you what to do.

Steve: So basically it allows a non expert to use AdWords effectively?

Larry: Yes prioritizing the impacts of the workflow they are doing because we just don’t want spending too much time in there, so it’s like search marketing you could spend 80 hours a week on this stuff if you wanted, but we all know that maybe 10 or 20% of the stuff that we do will generate most of the income, most of the leverage.

Steve: Yes and because I teach this stuff I can say that the AdWords interface is probably one of the most complicated ones to explain, because there is like so many switches.

Larry: Yeah it can be intimidating like it’s hard for marketers to understand this, but like if you’re just a business owner and marketing is one of 20 things you need to do, this is intimidating.

Steve: Yeah totally, so it’s rare to have a PPC expert on the podcast, you kind of lose the [inaudible 00:09:22] online ads, so I thought it would be interesting to see Larry how you would actually run a Google PPC ad campaign for a completely brand new ecommerce store that just launched from complete scratch. And so my first question actually is do you believe that most
businesses can profit from AdWords and are there certain companies that just are not cut out for either Shopping or AdWords from ecommerce perspective?

Larry: Well I mean it’s not everyone can be successful; it depends on what it is you are selling, I mean really you want to be in some kind of a niche where the items are a little harder to find, like it’s not something you just pick up and it’s a CBS or something. Ideally there is some margins in there because it is a specialty item and ideally there would be some opportunities for repeat business as opposed to just buying this thing forever and never having to replace it.

So yeah there is definitely niches that would do better than others like I’m thinking off the top of my head there is this one guy I met that we were looking into the account and they were selling like Amish gazebos, like oh my god this is like a high priced item, very specialty thing. So like that’s like the perfect example you know what I mean. So of course it depends on your niche but those are some of the characteristics that I would think of.

Steve: Let me rephrase that question a little bit, so what would you say your margins, general guidelines we need to meet actually even have a chance at AdWords.

Larry: Well generally speaking you cannot spend more than one third of your profit margin on the cost of customer acquisition. So if you’re only making a dollar profit on this thing, if you’re spending more than 33 cents to acquire the customer it’s likely that you’re not going to be able turn a profit because you need to see some margins for running the business or fulfilling the orders or all the other stuff, you see what I’m saying?

Steve: Okay yeah, yeah, so let’s say we’re selling product that has fairly competitive keywords like clothing or jewelry, how would you proceed with an ad campaign with a limited budget, pretend you’re just starting from scratch and you only have like thousands of dollars to invest let’s say. Would you start with Shopping, AdWords, how would you begin?

Larry: So the worst thing you can do is just kind of unbranded keywords on Google AdWords, that really is a suicide mission at this point because you’re competing against all these other ecommerce vendors. I think you need to have some kind of unfair advantage before, you know what I mean.

Steve: Aha, yeah.

Larry: So if you have $50 or some small number of marketing budget, you don’t want to just buy clicks at $2 or a dollar a click, that’s crazy. So you know what there is so much of this – is this a new site like obviously the low hanging fruit of PPC is actually remarketing, so going after all those people who put stuff into the cart but didn’t check out which is like 70, 80% of shoppers. I think one of the challenges is if you’re really new ecommerce vendor you might not even have a good amount of traffic to your site to begin with of people of low hanging fruit to go after.

One of the first things that I would going after is sort of like brand awareness campaigns but in a targeted way. So I would think really hard about who the target market is for this thing, it’s like in the case of Amish gazebos it’s got to be like home owners who live in rural areas, outside of cities who are Amish, that kind of stuff who exhibit like maybe they like the Home Depot or [inaudible 00:13:40] that kind of stuff.

I’d be thinking really hard about who the target market is, and then I would be show casing those unique products in a very memorable inspiring way, so like the most memorable and inspiring thing you could do is a video like show case the products. Create some kind of video and upload that video offering to your target market on things like Facebook just to create some awareness of the market, you see what I’m saying?

Steve: So you’re just trying to get clicks to content essentially?

Larry: Yeah and the cheapest way to do that is with really, really high engagement content, so basically on Facebook the ad prices inversely proportional to the engagement rate, so if you got a 10% engagement rate, that will be maybe 20 cents a click or maybe 10 cents a click, but if you can get that to like 30 or 40% engagement rate, maybe it’s like one penny a click.
So I would just try really hard to come up with a compelling offering – sorry a compelling creative that’s just like wow, a lot of people who see this are blown away by it, and just get that in front of the right people.

Steve: So what you’re saying actually is you wouldn’t actually start with Google Shopping or Google AdWords, you would start by building a remarketing list, is that what I’m hearing?

Larry: I think so because shopping believe it or not Steve people don’t just randomly buy stuff from stores, their purchase decision is a reflection of their underlying tastes and preference for brands that they’ve known and heard of. So especially with shopping where the trust bar is higher up because consumers have taken a cough of their credit card and shipping and all this other personal information.

I think one of the most critical things is to build some brand affinity for your business. Of course it varies by industry but that to me sounds like an interesting approach.

Steve: You know what’s interesting to me is like when I first started my Google Shopping campaigns they were actually profitable right off the bat early on, and I think I attribute the fact that there was my offering and there was the price and so if someone were to click on that ad there was a much higher probability of buying it. And so from what I’m hearing from you right now brand affinity carries a huge part in Google’s Shopping ads as well, is that what you’re saying?

Larry: Sure, customers are two to three times more likely to click on and then two to three times more likely to convert through on ads where they’ve heard of or are familiar with the business. Now there’s some caveats like if the thing you’re selling is such a commodity item like drone propeller blades or something, like I just need that now, I don’t really care where I’m getting from, maybe there’s exceptions. But generally people tend to transact at the companies that they’ve heard of and know and love in terms of their brand preferences.

Like when you started your shopping campaigns was that like – did you have no presence online before and you just like day one did these shopping campaigns, or was there kind of like an ecommerce presence that preexisted and then you layered on top of that on shopping ads?

Steve: Yeah that’s a good question. So I started out with the merchant center which was free back in the day, I can’t even remember what year that was now, was it like three years ago, four years ago, I can’t remember.

Larry: More than that.

Steve: More than that, yeah so I started out with AdWords actually, AdWords was – and this is a while ago, AdWords actually generated like huge portions of my revenue early on and then once the merchant center came out I used that and that started working well. So I guess there was already a little bit of brand affinity, because AdWords came out way before Shopping.

Larry: So just keep in mind the question you asked me was a brand new site…

Steve: That’s correct, yes.

Larry: That never had any affinity at all. Now it’s a completely different scenario if you have like lots of visitors and a preexisting site that has a good amount of traffic. I would go after those sections first like using Google Shopping and remarketing if you had a brand presence.

Steve: Okay so you recommend putting out a compelling piece of content and then using Facebook first to get some traffic over there and gradually building up your remarketing list. So once you have this remarketing list then what do you do next?

Larry: Now you remarket to them but not to every one of them because not everyone who visits your site is a perfect fit for the products and services you’re selling. What you could do is you could filter those audiences, maybe it’s like people who put stuff in the cart, maybe it’s people who had a very, very long session duration or maybe they have certain demographics that are favorable like they are very, very wealthy people or have certain desirable demographics where you just filter out that audience.

Then the ones who do pass through your filter you should be marketing to them very, very hard like showing up in their feeds everyday just to make sure that they finish whatever it was you were hoping for them to buy.

Steve: Do you feel like the Google demographic data is accurate, so one more time I just took context of Google, all those demographics, do you use those to narrow down your marketing list?

Larry: It’s all based on search history, that’s how Google does their stuff so I mean yeah I think it’s reasonably accurate, yeah I think so.

Steve: I guess what I’m trying to ask is with Google remarketing it’s different because they were search intent, and so would you further limit down your remarketing list from those people, whereas Facebook I feel is a little bit different, right?

Larry: Sure, sure, basically if your main traffic source is just from like targeted Facebook ads or targeted search ads, then fine maybe you don’t have to boil it down a lot, but what if like a lot of your traffic is just coming from organic sources that you don’t even know where it’s coming from, you see what I’m saying?

Steve: Yeah sure.

Larry: In that case you would have to kind of boil it down and kind of get to your top 5% of that audience, but you’re right.

Steve: So I mean you do this a lot for a lot of companies and so I was just wondering if you could just kind of comment on what are some of the most common mistakes that you see people make when they’re trying to run their own campaigns?

Larry: The biggest problem of all time is just lack of activity; the greatest thing about these PPC campaigns is that there are very measurable, like they give you a lot of data on what the cost per click is and how many clicks there are to go after. So the biggest mistake people make is they don’t learn and improve from the campaign data that has been provided to them.

Steve: Okay are you referring to like negatives or what are you referring to specifically?

Larry: It could be negatives, it could be looking at say the return on an ad spend for different types of products, maybe that’s very valuable data, like you should be going and expanding your product catalog to those types of niches where it looks great. Like just not unconversely like if you’re like 1% click through rate on some particular products, maybe that’s not a very –
the market is telling you something, maybe that’s not a very interesting product to be offering. So it’s just not taking the data and synthesizing it to make business decisions.

Steve: I guess what I’m trying to ask is so we started out by making content and we’re using remarketing now, when is it time to add Shopping and AdWords to the mix, like how do you dip your toes in the water?

Larry: The low hanging fruit would be things like retargeting based shopping ads and retargeting based Facebook product ads, those really are the low hanging fruit. Like if someone has – now we have your audience of people going to the site, only 2 or 3 or 4% of them are actually going to buy your stuff like on the first shot.
So at that point when you have like a thousand sessions or something like that that meet your filters, that’s kind of a minimum because like it won’t work with fewer than that, but basically that’s when I would be layering and things like Facebook product remarketing and also Google Shopping through remarketing. It’s kind of like Steve you can always exchange quantity and price, it’s like the cheapest conversions are going to be your remarketing stuff.

You can expand those efforts to non remarketing targeted ads and you’ll get more quantity, it’s just that the economics may or may not be as attractive; they probably won’t be as attractive.

Steve: I want to take a moment to thank ReferralCandy for being a sponsor of the show. Now in this day and age word of mouth is a huge driver of business for most ecommerce stores, and the best way to amplify word of mouth marketing is through a referral program. This is where ReferralCandy shines, with just a couple of clicks of the mouse you could add a referral program to your ecommerce store and reward your customers for telling their friends about your shop.

And this tactic works wonders; and in fact it’s not uncommon to get a ridiculous return on investment. So for example Greats Footwear, who is a ReferralCandy customer, is currently seeing a 20X ROI. Referral word of mouth marketing is also useful for building up your social media presence as well, because everyone is talking about your company with their friends on Facebook and Twitter.

And the best part is that ReferralCandy is a set it and forget it service, requires no technical setup and they are giving My Wife Quit Her Job listeners 50 bucks to try them out if you go to promo.referralcandy.com/steve. Once again it’s promo.referralcandy.com/steve to get a $50 credit to try out the service risk free. Now back to the show.
So based on the models that you kind of just presented just now, so one you have content which creates your marketing list and then you have just plain old keyword AdWords campaign where you’re just bidding on keywords outright and of course it’s going to depend on the type of company, but which strategy do you tend to go for more today, the content remarketing strategy or more like the outreach with keywords like very specific keywords?

Larry: Well if you can get just regular keywords to work for you like if you’re running regular keywords with your – I call these vanilla [ph] keywords because it’s just going after people who are searching for these keywords, no additional strings attached. If you can get that to work for you, well then by all means do it.
That’s great because why wouldn’t you, because it’s so measurable and if you’re acquiring customers below a third of your margins so that means there is plenty of margin left to drop to the bottom line kind of thing, then yes you are very lucky, that means you are in a very interesting, not terribly competitive space, but AdWords has been around for like 16 years.

Steve: Yeah forever.

Larry: So there’s 3.5 million advertisers on this thing, so a lot of times the challenges like they try doing this and they’re paying for a $20 product maybe they’re spending $10 on the ad spend, so that’s not going to work. So then it becomes like okay so what do we do now and the answer is like well you can’t just do business as usual, you have to kind of change it up.
So that’s why I’m advocating like a lot of times for those really hyper competitive markets a way to kind of get an unfair advantage is to actually rather than just directly going after people by keywords, you sell to those same people but a little bit more a roundabout way of doing it which is to get them really excited about your products through content and then remarket to them to those who meet your screen after, so it’s kind of like…

Steve: That totally makes sense, that’s how I run all my Facebook ads as well incidentally, it just works out cheaper that way.

Larry: Well yeah I think because the Facebook ads in particular, the way that option works it’s a lot more advertiser friendly than the AdWords option, the AdWords option is people – one idiot can like screw up the bids for everybody, because it’s like the cost you pay it’s directly proportional to the guy who is ahead of you in terms of AdWord.

So when you get these very specific keywords with like 500 queries for a week or something like that, that’s very low inventory, so one idiot can screw it up for everyone, but in Facebook ads you’re going after demographics of people with larger audience sizes, and you can hit this person up for ads like they might be browsing for an hour a day, so that’s like many, many opportunities to get in front of that person.

It’s like kind of supply and demand basically, it’s just Facebook – and plus Facebook there’s just less ads running through there. They only make about a third as much as Google does in terms of AdWord campaign.

Steve: Let’s switch gears a little bit. In terms of running not Shopping campaigns but just AdWords campaigns for example, what does your landing page look like for an ecommerce store, is it a category page, product page, home page or like a lead page to gather leads?

Larry: Wow I mean, this really depends on…

Steve: It does, I’m just giving a scenario, I’m just curious how you would approach the problem.

Larry: You know usually the first try will just be to send them to a category – sorry to the money page like going to the product page. I mean that would be your first try, and then you would just see what the metrics are like and if it’s working, and then you’ve got a conversion rate of like more than 8, 9, 10% then that’s a pretty good signal that you’ve got a pretty good intent like matching the intent with the search.

So anything 8, 9, 10 and above percent conversion rate that’s pretty good. If the conversion rates were closer to like 1 or 2% well then I would shake stuff up a little bit, you know like try those other ideas, like maybe, oh this isn’t exactly what I’m looking for so I’m going to send them to the category page and have them look around and browse from ten different types of [inaudible 00:29:39] or whatever it is that they’re looking for, because maybe it’s such a broad or blue dresses like maybe it’s very hard to know what type they were looking for, so they need to see a selection of them.

So basically the guiding factor is your conversion rate like I was saying anything three or two, you should feel very safe in experimenting and making changes, because there is not a lot of downside risk, but if you’ve got something 8, 9, 10% and above then that’s pretty remarkable and I would stay put kind of thing.

Steve: So in the beginning, let’s say you’re just starting out with the campaign, are you bidding just high to get like the top rank just to check your conversion rate, and then gradually dial it down, like what is your bidding process like and how do you reduce your bids over time?

Larry: Well I mean bids is half of the thing and usually yeah I think you do need to bid a little more just to get some history and some of that quality scourge is flowing through your account. Google likes to favor the accounts that appear to be doing well and the loop hole is that it needs a little bit of a kick to get started, so yeah I would do that.
In terms of pulling back on the bids, one of the things that happens is that as your company builds more brand affinity that raises click through rates, and so you can basically maintain the same ad rank for less cost in theory. So you should be able to pull back a little bit, but of course…

Steve: The reason why I’m asking that question is often times you go on AdWords and you bid on a keyword and for example my keyword like it told me like the minimum bid was like $1.75 per click or something like that. And so when I start out – and this might not be the right strategy, but this is just kind of how I do it. I always bid like to get the top rank and then today I’m paying like 30 cents a click.

Larry: Yeah so those minimum first bids, those minimum bid estimates are usually wrong, they are off by a factor of five times as much, so actually that kind of fits your description where you’re paying 30 cents even though it’s saying the minimum is like a $1.70 so it’s roughly five times. So you don’t – maybe you use those like initially but certainly there is room to go down like a lot.

Steve: Okay I’m just trying to get an idea of your flow, so you got to plan the pump so to speak at first right by paying higher bids just to give Google some data, right?

Larry: Yeah, another way to plan the pump is go for branded keywords, so quality is scored, all these things are computed at the account level as well as at the keyword level. So it’s kind of like how your mid terms and your finals for your course grades is 80% on your final and 20% on your mid-term or something, so there’s an account based component of your score.
So if you have like these branded keywords where you’re spending 5% of your ad budget on the stuff but you’re getting like 60% click through rates, that really will increase the average score for all the other campaigns.

Steve: So that also applies that you should be removing all the keywords that don’t have good click through rates at all from your account all together?

Larry: I mean I would kind of delete the bottom 5%, usually there is a few of account that is kind of draining all the money and it’s like not working at all and people they’re like but I need to give it a chance, but like you’re actually better just counting your losses because it’s a bit like a cancer in that it impacts other keywords and campaigns.

Steve: Here’s the thing though, what if you’re bidding on these keywords but people aren’t buying right away, and then later on you bring them back to like Facebook retargeting but Google AdWords doesn’t get credit for the click, how do you track these conversions?

Larry: So it’s just you, you have to be very skeptical, like very skeptical about – especially when it comes to attribution, Google AdWords is really great at being positioned at a very, very bottom of the funnel here. So they tend to like overestimate their value within the food chain…

Steve: Sure of course

Larry: But just be looking at the relative analysis, so like using the same flat metric comparing like how did it change, forget the absolute number but did it go up or down or doing a comparison between your product A, Product B and product C and then looking at the same metric of bench marketing against each other so that by doing so the level of analysis, the error kind of
cancels itself out, you see what I’m saying?

Steve: Sure. So how do you raise your quality score, because that determines how much you have to pay, so what are some tactics to do that?

Larry: It’s just raising the click through rate and that’s like an 80% of the algorithm right there. The best way to raise your click through rate is actually two things, have more interesting stuff to sell, sometimes if you have this garbage thing that you’re selling it can feel like pushing a rock up a hill, but like who says that you can’t change your product offerings. So like just selling drones instead of picnic pants.

Steve: Does that imply then that you should write your ads in a click biddy sort of way?

Larry: Yeah of course because the higher the click through rate, if you can get people excited about clicking on your ads, that certainly will carry through to purchase, like if you look at doing [inaudible 00:35:57] on all click through rates and conversion rates of the products in your account, yes generally it’s the case that if you can get people excited to click on something, they will be more excited to also buy it.
It may end and you’re like, wait a minute, I don’t want to pay for these damn clicks but like the higher click through rate reduces the cost per click for all of the clicks, you see what I’m saying?

Steve: Aha.

Larry: So it’s a pretty good idea yes.

Steve: That’s interesting, okay yeah because I was just thinking in the exact same thing as what you said, as long as you don’t over promise in your ad, right?

Larry: Yeah like free kittens in there, there is no free puppies to be had, well yeah that’s kind of like really going too far, but yeah up to the line and as far as you can go absolutely.

Steve: Okay and we talked about remarketing a little bit already, but can we talk about RLSA for a little bit, first of define what it is and then are some ways that you use this feature more effectively in both your search and in your shopping ads?

Larry: Sure RLSA remarketing list for search ads is just search ads like keyword based ads, but to people who are searching the keywords you’re interested but who have also recently visited your site. So it’s really a conversion detector so think of your spend Steve, like if you’re spending $1,000 on search ads, on average something like two thirds of those conversions that come out of that are going to be people who have brand affinity and have visited your site recently, do you see what I’m saying?

Steve: Yes.

Larry: And only a third of those conversions are kind of like net new like people who have just stumbled upon you on the first search, and the thing about that is typically what we see is that the remarketing spend, so the spend of the people who have visited you recently is like one tenth of the total spend. So I’m saying like you can generally speaking with RLSA you can get 66% on average of that conversion volume at one tenth of the total spend, so in terms of like the low hanging fruit and all this stuff that’s really where you should be focusing.
For super competitive niches I would be going after RLSA only campaigns, so dumping vanilla search because that really is the most unproductive spend, you see what I mean?

Steve: Yeah.

Larry: It’s like 90% of the spend producing a third of the results and then you start deploying that ad budget elsewhere for example like a radio ad or some other way to get people to know about your brand, that’s more scalable and cheaper.

Steve: So when you have these lists do you end up bidding higher or lower on your remarketing list?

Larry: It’s kind of complicated, so if you have competing kind of non RLSA ads for reasons unknown like it’s something to do with the option like I find that you do have to bid them up a little bit. Even if you’re applying those RLSA audiences as exclusionary, there must be like a million things that this action takes into consideration, like when serving these ads, but if you’re just doing RLSA only and that’s the only opportunity for these ads to run, then I feel like you don’t have to bid them up this much.

Steve: Okay, what is atypical up bid for like RLSA ad?

Larry: Right now for Shopping they could be like 25 cents something like that for USA based stuff, but that’s just the bid that’s not actually what you pay.

Steve: Sure yeah of course.

Larry: Your cost is usually lower than what you’re bidding.

Steve: I think mine is like 20% right now, I don’t know f that is the best practice, or not, that’s just what I’m doing.

Larry: Yeah I think it varies but yeah sure.

Steve: What else was I going to ask, oh one thing that I’m doing personally now is using the look alikes that Google offers, what is your experience been with them and how did they perform?

Larry: So in general look alikes it’s going to do better than no audience targeting associated with the keywords because what you’re saying is that the people who are searching for these things also meet sort of these bio persona characteristics, so it’ll do a little bit better. But the reason why RLSA works so great is because there’s brand affinity, so like they’ve actually visited your site, and they’ve consumed some memorable inspirational video content about why this Amish gazebo is so great, how it’s going to change your life.

So the problem with some audiences is while they have the right demographics interesting behaviors, they don’t have the prior kind of brand affinity experience that is so integral to raising the click through rates, and raising the conversion rates, so it’s kind of like in between. So it’s like you’re going to get more clicks and more conversions because you’re kind of casting a wider net, but that net is more diffuse and it’s not going to result in the same types of conversion metrics and ROI metrics as RLSA.

Steve: So if I could just summarize everything that we kind of talked about, you want to put content out there to get them on a list, and then you want to use remarketing first. Would look alike audiences be your next logical step before doing the just generic AdWords to broad audiences?

Larry: Of course, of course I guess it’s kind of an intermediary step better than nothing and then of course generically targeted vanilla keywords with no associate audiences I think is kind of the least interesting, because generally you’re paying the most there for the least qualified searches.

Steve: Okay and what about the display network, like when does that factor in outside of remarketing?

Larry: There is a lot of interesting developments in display marketing, so I think Google is feeling the pressure to kind of up their game there because Facebook and Google display networks are kind of competing for display ads essentially social ads are kind of like display ads. They’ve recently very quietly changed their targeting for Google display ads so that when you’re doing keyword targeting it used to be largely based on what the content of the page was, but now they’re making it based on search history, you see what I’m saying?

Steve: Okay.

Larry: So I think keyword targeting especially if you’ve got kind of unambiguous keywords that could be really great opportunities for ecommerce display targeting. The other one is they’ve always had customer affinity audiences, so that’s just like based on your search history we think that you’re trying to buy a car, or we think you’re trying to buy a house or something like that. There’s like 2,500 of these affinity markets – customer affinity in market segments sorry and those are very interesting non remarketing ways of getting in front of people who are likely to buy your stuff.

Steve: Okay and one thing I did want to ask you personally because this has been my experience, like I used to sue all the other comparison shopping engines like shopping.com, Shopzilla but just like within the last year and a half I would say I’ve been getting all these bogus scripts to the point where I know it’s all back clicks too because I can track the metrics. So are they effectively dead, like what’s your view on those guys

Larry: I haven’t been using those for like two years, so yeah I mean if you can get it to work great, but it wouldn’t be on my top ten.

Steve: I mean shopping.com used to work so well for me, I don’t know what happened to them in like the last year I would say, but…

Larry: I suspected it’s like Google tweaked their organic algorithm so like less of that valuable Google traffic is getting to them and that means your ads that show there are going to be a little less qualified, that kind of stuff. I think Google is trying to tighten the screws a little bit of all this free value they’re giving away.

Steve: And then my final question for you is you’ve run your store, and you’ve got marketing dollar, do you spend those on SEO or SEM, like how do you make the decision?

Larry: Well I think that SEM works it’s – like if you’ve been following what we’ve been talking about like I’m saying that SEM works at its very best when you’re amplifying your best organic content, do you see what I’m saying. So like if you have this like you unicorn video like the [inaudible 00:44:54] video asset which is kind of an organic asset, and then you promote kind of that, that’s a winning strategy. So I think you need both obviously, otherwise you just won’t have anything great to amplify.

Steve: You keep mentioning video over and over and over again, so it implies that video is like the medium of the future as opposed to just good old text content?

Larry: Yeah because that’s where all the time on the internet is being spent on mobile and just like video is so much of more optimized for delivery for mobile. Like just think about you’re doing other stuff, you’re on the go, this thing is so much more memorable and you can make it so much more information, yeah it sticks.

Steve: Okay is that what you’re doing with like WordStream for example now when you’re running your ads for your own site, like is it all landing pages with video?

Larry: That is our like over the last six months we’ve been investing heavily in that and yes like video. We’re creating like all these video ads and stuff like that yeah.

Steve: Okay, oh cool Larry, we’ve been chatting for quite a while now, it doesn’t feel like it but I want to be respectful of your time, where can people find more about you and the services that you have to offer?

Larry: For me personally the easiest way to get hold of me is on Twitter, this is @larrykim, for my company WordStream obviously just go to wordstream.com and we’ve got thousands of pages and videos of stuff that you can read or browse through.

Steve: Cool, thanks a lot for coming on the show Larry, really appreciated.

Larry: Thanks Steve

Steve: All right take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. Larry really knows his stuff, and actually since we recorded this episode he’s actually stepped down from WordStream and has started a brand new company so stay tuned. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode159.
And once again I want to thank Sellerlabs.com for sponsoring this episode. Their tool Ignite is actually what I use to manage my Amazon pay per click campaigns. Instead of the old tedious way of generating reports and analyzing your ads campaigns in excel, Ignite aggregates all the info for you in one place and allows you to quickly visualize your data and make decisions fast.

So not only does it save time but it also makes managing your Amazon campaigns so much easier. So head on over to sellerlabs.com/steve and sign up for a free 30 day trial, once again that’s sellerlabs.com/steve.
And if you’re interested in starting your own ecommerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away via email, thanks for listening.
Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

158: How Noah Kagan Grew Sumo.com To An 8 Figure Company

158: How Noah Kagan Grew Sumo.com To An 8 Figure Company

Today, I’m really happy to have Noah Kagan back on the show. Now Noah was actually one of my very first guests way back in episode 7 and he took a chance on coming on a podcast that hadn’t even launched yet.

Anyway since we last spoke, Noah has gone on to create an 8 figure company in the span of 3 years in Sumo.com and today we’re going to find out exactly how he did it. Noah also started a podcast called “Noah Kagan Presents” which you can all check out by clicking here

What You’ll Learn

  • How Noah decides on his yearly goals for his company
  • The intricacies of having a freemium model with your SAAS business
  • Noah’s philosophy on paid advertising
  • What’s worked well for Sumo.com and what hasn’t worked so well
  • Random Actionable Noah-isms

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Privy.com – Privy is my tool of choice when it comes to gathering email subscribers for my ecommerce store. They offer easy to use email capture, exit intent, and website targeting tools that turn more visitors into email subscribers and buyers. With both free and paid versions, Privy fits into any budget. Click here and get 15% OFF towards your account.
Privy

ReferralCandy.com – If you’re already getting steady orders every month, adding a refer-a-friend program to your store can give you a new sales channel. And ReferralCandy is the best in the business. Click here and get a FREE $50 credit towards your account.
referral candy

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and delve deeply into what strategies are working and what strategies are not with their businesses. Today I’m thrilled to have your boy Noah Kagan aka rhino, aka rabbi [inaudible 00:00:14], aka DJ PB back on the show.

Noah was actually guest number seven on my podcast way back in the day. The guy took a chance on me when I didn’t have an audience at all and I thank him for that. And now he’s actually started his own podcast called Noah Kagan Presents which I highly recommend that you check out. Normally I listen to all my podcasts at 2X speed, but with Noah’s podcast I listen to every single episode straight through from start to finish at 1X speed.

Anyway today Noah and I are going to be talking about sumo.com, and how he took his business to eight figures.
But before we begin I want to give a quick shout out to Klaviyo who is a sponsor of the show. Now I’m super excited to talk about Klaviyo because they are my email marketing provider of choice that I personally use for my ecommerce store, and I depend on Klaviyo for over 20% of my revenues. Now you’re probably wondering why Klaviyo and not another provider. Well Klaviyo is the email platform out there that is specifically built for ecommerce stores, and here’s why it’s so powerful.

Klaviyo can track every single customer who has shopped in your store and exactly what they purchased which makes it extremely powerful. So let’s say I want to send an email to everyone who purchased a red handkerchief in the last week, easy. Let’s say I want to set up a special autoresponder sequence to my customers depending on what they purchased, it’s a piece of cake, and there is full revenue tracking on every single email.

Now Klaviyo is the most powerful email platform that I’ve ever used and you could try them for free at mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

I also want to give a quick shout out to Privy who is a sponsor of the show. Now what’s cool is that I also use and rely on Privy for both my blog and my online store. Now what does Privy do? Privy is an email list growth platform, and they actually manage all of my email capture forms, and in fact I use Privy hand in hand with Klaviyo.

Now there is a bunch of companies out there that will manage your email capture forms, but here is why I like and chose Privy. Privy is easily the most powerful platform that I’ve ever used, and you can trigger sign up forms based on any primer that you desire. So let’s say you offer free shipping for orders over 100 bucks, well you can tell Privy to flash a popup when the customer has $90 in their shopping cart to urge them to insert one more item.

Here’s another cool use case, if someone has item A in their shopping cart, I can easily tell Privy to display a coupon code for that item or display a related item or offer. In terms of email capture, I’m showing a different email lead magnet depending on what product a customer is browsing in our shop.

So bottom line Privy allows me to turn visitors into email subs, which I then feed to Klaviyo to close the sale. So head on over to Privy.com/steve and try it for free, and if you decide you need the more advanced features, use coupon code MWQHJ for 15% off, once again that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/steve. Now on to the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I’m really happy to have Noah Kagan back on the show. Now Noah was actually one of my very first guests way back in episode seven, and he actually took a chance on coming on a podcast that had not even launched yet, and in fact back then we didn’t even know each other at all and I actually conned him to coming on by telling him it was an Asian dating podcast.

Now what’s hilarious about all this is that I told my podcast editor that Noah was coming back on, and she was terrified because the last time I had her edit out all of his F bums and they were a lot of them. Anyway most of you probably know his background already and if you don’t, go check out episode 7 of my podcast.

I’m not going to spend a lot of time going through his background, but last time we talked about his company AppSumo, and today we’re going to talk about sumo.com, and how he’s grown it into an eight figure business. I’m glad to have you on the show man, how are you doing today?

Noah: Better, better, I woke up feeling pretty lousy, I went to therapy and felt lousier, had a great lunch, felt inspired, went to the gym and now I’m on it dude, I’m with you Chou.

Steve: Are you still go on therapy, I thought you stopped that.

Noah: You know a lot of the things that we do that get us successful, you have to keep doing, and I think that’s part of the hard part is that I was reading about it this morning it was really interesting. It was like we get to this level of arrogance or assumption that we think we know everything, and then I don’t need to do this basic stuff anymore. I try to just keep myself in check and so I reflected in the past like therapy was helpful for me so I go every other week.

It’s funny because I think therapy just has a bad phrase to it, it’s more of like a mind coach, it’s my mind coach and I go there and I do all my Jewish complaining, and the guy is like that will be like 125 and then here’s your [inaudible 00:05:10].

Steve: Speaking of therapy I actually had a question for you like I remember a while ago when we were talking about Sumo, you grew it to like 20 something people, right? And you went to India and then you came back and you fired everyone, went back to basics and made it a small quadruple of people again, and now you got like what, 30 people at Sumo group, is that right?

Noah: There is around 43 of us.

Steve: Yeah 43, okay so what’s different this time? Like you grew up Sumo and then you fired everyone, why are you growing Sumo Group?

Noah: Do you think that if I told the team I was going to India again like everyone would be [inaudible 00:05:41]. Like hey guys next week I’m going to India, heads up. No I love everyone at Sumo, what’s different or what are you trying to understand?

Steve: Oh no in AppSumo you brought it back to under a quarter group of people.

Noah: Oh yeah.

Steve: So now you’re trying to grow another company, large it seems, right?

Noah: Yeah, it takes the same amount of effort and this is up here [inaudible 00:06:05] thing he told me. It’s like it takes the same amount of effort to do something small as it does to do something big, like literally the same amount of effort like you’re going to work eight hours a day you might as well try to do something bigger. A lot of the times I think decisions of mine should be like what makes a more interesting story like over the boarder choice, what makes a more interesting story?

So if you’re choosing things you’re like well there’s something kind of really big, I think that would be more interesting for my life and I can look back and have a great story for myself not just for other people. So company wise I think what – I actually had this amazing thought, I thought — that sounds so strange, it sounds so [inaudible 00:06:40], all this is an amazing thought. I had a very interesting thought for myself, it was like what if you couldn’t have a legacy and then how would you behave?

Meaning what if your kids are going to die right after you so you couldn’t have kids as your legacy, or like everything you do gets erased 50 years after you die. So the idea, it’s like oh I’ve got to do this stuff so I’m remembered which I think is what we’re all trying to aim for, that is like not important anymore, and like I wonder how that will change a lot of our behavior?

Steve: That’s a great question, you’ve already got money, right, so what does growing a larger company do for you?

Noah: Well the larger company it’s not time to grow a larger company just for a large company, I think a lot of people could just go hire a bunch of like low wage people then you could have – anyone can hire 20 people off Craig’s list and have a 20% company today. So I’m always kind of cautious when people want to brag about their company.

When I share myself I never try to brag about it, I’m just trying to share like here’s advice of things I’ve learned through my experience, a lot of it is for me to reflect on, it’s like my own therapy. What I’ve done through – or would I say like in terms of our evolution of the business at Sumo Group like appsumo.com or our coupon for gigs and sumo.com, our free marketing tools, it’s more of like creating what you want and then putting yourself in the right place.

So more specifically I call it finding your sweet spot, so finding the thing that you just love doing on this earth and that you’re really interested in and then really sticking around that and growing around that, and then really complementing yourself in your weaknesses and things that you’re less interested.

So specifically with sumo.com which is our free marketing tool software, helps people grow their email list, like I’m really good at starting things, I’m really good at marketing things and I really love that part. I don’t particularly like any meetings at least at this point of my life, maybe when I’m 40 I’ll be, oh yeah it’s like meeting day, I’ll say the F word fun, I know that’s what you’re saying I said in the last episode, but yeah it’s I don’t enjoy that, I don’t enjoy a lot of long term super big planning, it’s just not what I want.

I think I felt guilty about that for a long time and that was like, oh I’m weak at it let me get better. I’ve come to the conclusion in the past – more recent that I was like just go embrace the things you’re great at and improve on those, and then find people who love to do the things that you don’t. So find someone who loves to do recruiting and find someone who loves to do development or loves to do sales and then you go and focus on what you really love doing.

Obviously if you have a family and bills don’t just like quit and leave everything, oh no he said I’ve got to love this and I love you, but go and reflect in the past six months what have you worked that wasn’t work, what have you done in the past six months that you woke up early for, what in the past six months have you been excited to share with others?

And then that’s what really what we’ve done with Sumo where Ayman is amazing, he’s running appsumo.com our group on for gigs and he’s growing it to a larger size because he’s excited about it and there’s a lot of products to promote on AppSumo, and then shared my business partner with my best friends who was our CTO, he is running sumo.com, he has a bigger vision that I do for it.

The idea that I stepped out and I’m more of an advisor, I’m still involved, I’m still helpful, I’m not like 4 hour work week like not do shit. I don’t really respect that in the other people, it’s more of like I’m involved, I actually think distancing myself has actually helped me and helped the business. So specifically if you have ever gotten advice from someone that you’re like, man the advice was really good, why didn’t I give it to myself, have you ever had that happen?

Steve: Where I’ve given out advice that I should follow myself, is that what you’re talking about?

Noah: Yeah someone gives you advice; you’re like dude I feel like I tell other people that advice.

Steve: Yeah, yeah it’s happened to me before.

Noah: Yeah that happens, you’re Steve Chou so like it never happens; you have perfect advice just like your SATs. I mean you’re the perfect Asian child, I wish if I could have a perfect Jewish child that was like you, but Jewish that would be cool.

Steve: Stop, stop it, stop it right now.

Noah: No so in terms of that like I think the fact – like for anyone here who has a company even if you have a small company like you’re making 1000 a month which is amazing, it all starts somewhere, or you have a larger company, I think if you can take and step outside of your company and just give yourself advice in a more unemotional way I think that’s a very easy strategy to create a larger company.

And so for me I’ve stepped out of more the functions that I don’t really enjoy like recruiting I don’t enjoy, doing certain types of marketing I don’t enjoy, and then putting myself in terms of like doing podcast interviews or creating content in certain topics or experimenting with new marketing channels, that’s where I’ve gotten lot of my fulfillment, and so you’ve got to put yourself in that place.

I literally have this quote repeating on my to dos and I see it every day pop up and I’m really resonating with it which is, it’s always your responsibility. So for all this different stuff and creating the company you want and creating the life you want and creating the relationships you want it is your responsibility and I’m not saying you Steve, I’m saying like you, me and the 15,000 people who have this open to their ear lobes.

Steve: You know I remember back actually when you first started – it was SumoMe back then before you spent a ridiculous amount of money on a domain, by the way how is that going?

Noah: The domain?

Steve: Yeah.

Noah: You know I don’t know about you Steve, but I am so freaking, can I say that word freaking is not…

Steve: Yeah freaking is good, freaking is good.

Noah: Freaking happy about it and you know it’s so weird I literally just bought these boots that were like $100 and I’m like yeah the boots are okay, and then I got like – I’m looking over my thing, I got – what else did I get – I got this like coffee table for $300 and I’m like it’s okay, but I bought a $14 belt and I’m like unbelievably happy about this belt, and I’m just it’s not about the money, it’s just about buying and getting things you actually really want and going after them.

The domain is just something I’m so happy with. I know you’ve told me sort of your wife and you’re like you know you went after it and you got it, and obviously I want to go do that in a safe environment. My suggestion though is like with the domain it sounds like a lot of money but number one we structured it over a five year payment plan, so we paid half upfront and the rest over five years, so it’s only actually a few percent of our revenue each month if you break it down that way.

Steve: Well thinking about that way it’s like an expense I guess.

Noah: Yeah it’s literally an expense that’s umber one and number two I’m just so proud of it, like I called someone on the phone last week and I was like no it’s sumo.com and it wasn’t like, oh how do you spell that, because before it was sumome.com, they are like it’s sumo, some of me. And so yeah there’s more to that, it’s a story of persistence.

Like I think in general people need to think about what do they really want and pick things that you like, you’re willing to say like go seven to ten years afterward and I think a lot of that is fun, it’s really damn rewarding when you finally get that.

Steve: I remember you correcting me this morning when I texted you, I think I used SumoMe and you then you said Sumo, its Sumo man.

Noah: I mean $750,000 a word a letter, so yeah I paid a lot for two letters. You know one thing I heard this morning about getting things you want, I was talking to the in a hundred contacts funder Jonathan Koon who runs Wikibuy, it’s a cool chrome extension. He’s insanely impressive, he had this belief and I have to share it because so damn good. He said if you want anything in life I will give you the secret of success, and I was like you’re going to just give it to me, how much?

He’s like it’s free and I was like okay so I put on my seat belt, I was like yeah tell me Jonathan I want to know. He’s like all right, work on anything 80 hours a week for 20 years, and I was like you’re serious, he’s like that’s not even – there’s 168 hours in a week, this is less than half of your week working, but I promise you if you pick anything and you do it for 20 years and you work 80 hours a week on that, you will get the success you want. And I just thought that was kind of an interesting thing.

Steve: I had that philosophy for myself except not the 80 hours part, but like when I start something I plan on doing it forever.

Noah: How do you keep interested in it, so like I’m doing my podcast and I’m still loving it and I’m still interested in it, but like you look at turtles, so how does the turtle like – like how do you keep going with that?

Steve: So I just put it in my schedule and it’s done, so my class I’ve been running since 2011 and every single week I do a webinar for my class and I’ve been doing that for six years now straight. Same with the blog, I started that in 2009, I write one post a week, and I’ve been doing that for eight years now.

Noah: Okay, so you’re simplifying it too much, you’re like I put in the calendar and it just magically comes out like oh like your cousins in China just write it for you or something which is probably not – maybe that’s how you do it, you have like a billion people over there to hook up.

Steve: This you again on my case for this before this interview started right? Okay so go on let it out.

Noah: No, no, no I’m actually just really curious, so how do you actually keep yourself interested, is it just like you’ve built a habit muscle like your discipline habit on like sticking with something is just so strong and like you’ve just worked on that? How do you keep doing it weekly for so long on that and I think that’s impressive, I think that’s – and I do, do that with certain things but not others and I’m trying to learn and improve on that.

Steve: Yeah I mean – so each time how do I come up with content or?

Noah: No I don’t care about how you come up with it, like how do you keep yourself interested so that you can keep doing these webinars every week for the past 500 years.

Steve: I don’t know, there’s just my personality, it’s just like lifting weights. I’ve lifted at least once a week not missing any workouts since I was sophomore in high school maybe or junior in high school, so it’s just my personality, like I pick something and I just say I’m going to do it forever and I rarely drop anything like I’ll pivot, but I’ll rarely drop anything outright.

Noah: Okay so number one, you make it sound too easy but I think you actually had some – you do dude really like you do, you’re like yeah it’s just me, it’s like okay so – I guess what I’m trying to think about for everyone else and myself is that what is it really, and I think maybe it’s a key you’ve promised yourself that you’re going to do it every week and then that like commitment to something helps you stay with it?

Steve: Yeah I’m committed to it.

Noah: Do you have like an end date with that, or is it no I just like hey every week I just do this, this is like I build the habit?

Steve: I don’t have any end date for any of my stuff.

Noah: That’s actually a really interesting point; you’re just like hey I’m really excited about this or interested in this, so it’s not about an end date, this is like a continuous state like when there is no end date?

Steve: There is no end date, in fact I never even plan on selling stuff, like someone told me once that you should go on to every company with the intention of selling it at some point. I don’t have that philosophy, I mean it might happen but I don’t go into anything with the idea of selling it. Like my blog, my face is on there, I don’t think I’m ever going to sell it.

Noah: What’s the last thing you stopped and why?

Steve: What’s the last thing I stopped?

Noah: See I think you’d be great for a wife like to get married to because you know you’re not going to quit on them. I’m sure Jen is like he’s never leaving.

Steve: I don’t know man, maybe this is like…

Noah: No, no dig deep.

Steve: I don’t know, I don’t know if the listeners want to hear about me man, they are here to hear about you, let’s revisit it at the end maybe, is that cool?

Noah: Oh I like how you do it Steven. Whatever you want to do Steve, it’s your show.

Steve: All right, let’s talk about Sumo, the beginning.

Noah: Dot com.

Steve: Sumo.com, sorry. Early days like I remember when we were in Fincon and we were taking a walk, you told me you started SumoMe back then, it’s not sumo.com and you asked me to install SumoMe like 20 times in a single conversation which I eventually complied. But I want to know what your game plan was in the early days to build it up to what it was today, and – see at the time you already had a big audience and a following.

So I want you talk about it from the perspective of not having any of that stuff, and I know you talk about focusing on a single goal a lot; I’ve listened to a bunch of your stuff.

Noah: Yes Steven.

Steve: I do, I follow you man. So how did you design your goals from year to year for SumoMe – Sumo.com?

Noah: So let me just preface this because I think a lot of people were like Noah has AppSumo which is a large mailing list and OkDork.com my personal blog which you should all go subscribe to. Just because you have a large list doesn’t mean they’re going to do what you say and hopefully they do, hopefully they make their decisions and – but hopefully they also trust you and do what you recommend.

So many times in my career I’ve noticed that we’re like, hey we built this, go buy this, and people are like, no not interested. So I think people have to be aware like just having a large mailing list is no point, it’s about the quality of it and then doing things that people actually want. So when we started Sumo our original hypothesis was we would build and app store for the web. There was like the WordPress plug in directory and there is all these other directories like you have Shopify store but what about for every website.

We built that and we kind of literally just built a bunch of random apps, and we used it on our own website like we built this highlighter one, twilighter is what we called it where you could highlight text and then tweet it on your blog. I think the two interesting things that happened in the beginning of it where number one how do you prioritize your work, because everyone has the same amount of time but how prioritize the work so you get the most leverage for your work, and
I’ll say it again, how do you prioritize your work so you get the most leverage?

Let’s say you have a list of ten things, you can get them all done but if you get the first one thing done before another, how much more leverage and growth can you get out of that before you get to number ten? I think that’s where a lot of people miss, so as we did our first step like how can we better prioritize the different apps we’re building.

So we went and looked at different directories and different SaaS products that were paid and cost money and we figured out which ones are the most popular and that’s how we prioritized the different apps we made.

Steve: Okay.

Noah: So that was a really interesting concept just working backwards from like what’s popular, how do we just…

Steve: What was that app, was that the list builder?

Noah: Yeah, list builder the pop up was really popular and then share buttons. It was like we just kind of like those are really popular on other competitors and people were paying for them, I’ll just make it free. And then the second thing…

Steve: Can we talk about that real quick, why just make it free right off the bat, like the other services were paid if I recalled at the time, right?

Noah: Yeah, if I had to do it all over again I’d probably do paid.

Steve: Okay, why?

Noah: Because it tells the truth. I love the freemium model, so I don’t think I would leave the freemium model specifically, I don’t think I would leave that, but what happened is that after the first year and a half we were like man we have all these people using it. Our yearly goal for the first year was to get a billion people, unique people to see a site that had Sumo installed, that was our goal.

Then at the end of the year we were like let’s just see if these sites will pay any money, and then we went to these sites we were like do you want to pay maybe for something and a majority – maybe we didn’t have something great to offer but the majority of them were like nope. I was like we should have just tried to figure that out right away.

Steve: What percentage?

Noah: I mean it’s standard kind of SaaS software percentage which is like somewhere between like 3 and 5% and that’s an impressive number for a freemium SaaS business.

Steve: Okay, actually how much were you charging for that first – the first time you were charging people?

Noah: I’m going to share a story from like MailChimp. If you read MailChimp – I got so excited about MailChimp, my bonner [ph] popped over the microphone.

Steve: I’m going to have to edit that out I’m sorry my friend. Okay go on.

Noah: My junos [ph] knocked over that microphone, I can’t say that either. I knocked over my microphone. So MailChimp put out this blog post that kind of stuck with me that they changed their pricing seven times in like two years or some surprisingly amount of number of times. This is kind of the same thing with our business and I think with every business, and I’m not trying to encourage you, I hate when people do this.

Here’s a great way to grow your business, raise your prices. I feel like that’s like the most generic ass business advice I’ve ever heard and I hate when people say that, but I do have to think people to realize that pricing is a very powerful tool to decide who your customers are and decide how much value you’re creating for those customers. So what we realized is that recurring revenue is a lot better way to grow our company because it’s more predictable and consistent.

It doesn’t grow as fast but it definitely helps and also to make something that people want to subscribe to, like software as a service is a service that you’re giving as a software which I think people miss, but we actually started out just selling like templates for our pop up design. So we had this list builder in sumo.com that you can collect emails and then we sold the templates and it was one off, they are $5 each, and we wanted to do it to see if people would pay and much less people paid than we thought.

Then we charged like $5 to remove the branding and no one paid for that and I thought everyone would pay to get the branding removed.

Steve: Interesting okay.

Noah: So it was super interesting, I was like oh of course you don’t want to see powered by.

Steve: I just had – I interviewed Nathan Latka, I’m pretty sure you know who he is and he said when he branded his stuff, that’s how he got the majority of his traffic, was that the case for you guys too?

Noah: One more time?

Steve: When he added a link to his company Heyo I think it was at the time, he got the majority of his new customer acquisitions through that link.

Noah: Yeah so that part was great, but people actually paying to remove it, no one really cares. I think people are just kind of used to it by now.

Steve: Interesting okay.

Noah: And then so we’ve changed our pricing probably about seven times in the past two years, so what you have to do with pricing is try to – here is the simplest way, this is like the really easiest way to think about it. You should feel that people are stealing from you, like that is the easiest way to figure out your pricing and you are like what do you mean?

The price should be so good you’re like, oh my god these guys are going to go out of business, I can’t believe it’s so affordable. That is the way I love to do pricing like I’m sure we can come up with formulas and stuff, but we basically keep looking at the business and we’re like – so for example we used to sell the templates and we were like there’s got to be other advanced things, so we built advanced things for other tools in Sumo because Sumo is this app store for marketing app store for your website so you need a great website.

And so we had each of the tools had a pro version and then we were like we should make it recurring so it’s better for us and it’s easier instead of charging people for each time we have a new update. And so each app was $20 and it was like if you wanted all the apps it’s like $200 which seemed kind of expensive for all the apps, so we were like what if we had a bundle because that seems a lot fair for everyone and that’s what we would want.

So we were like well all right you can add an extra $100 or you can buy them individually. And then we thought about it and we were like there is small sites and large sites, some sites can afford a lot, some can’t afford a lot at all. So then we were like what if we just made it one price for small guys and one price for big guys, and so then we did that.

And then we realized like wow, people really want to pay for certain things and not other things, so we actually just went and looked in being like we looked in our data and said, what is everyone paying for like when they hit buy what feature are they looking at or what feature are they coming from? And so we left that paid and everything else that they are not using we just made free.

I can promise you in the next year we’ll make other changes that we think just make the product so effective that is great. I think one suggestion for almost any product out there, anybody who’s got ecommerce or anyone who’s got a SaaS business or info business whatever it is like get the people engaged first, get them kind of like I don’t want to use a drug analogy, but basically get them addicted to what you make, get them getting the value.

Steve: I like get them pregnant.

Noah: Oh god man you took it to the next level which I like, but yeah you want to get them kind of hooked on your service and like putting up barriers or like not letting them invite people. So you want to get them engaged and you want to get them to be able to bring people with them to your product. The more I think you can do those things and have it at a price that they’re like, this is such a good price, I just think well you’ll have a business that will be successful.

Steve: Does that imply like a freemium model then or no?

Noah: I don’t think freemium one is the only way to go, there is always [inaudible 00:26:30] to a lot of this stuff, I’m just saying like it works because freemium is basically a marketing strategy. If you don’t do freemium that’s fine, it’s just that you have to do employ – use, employ, what the hell does the word stand for?

Steve: Employ.

Noah: Employ yeah I guess employ other marketing strategies. I like the freemium model in general because it’s like a trial before you buy, like before you buy a car you test drive it. So I think the question then is for people who have like ecommerce may be they are gateway drugs, can they have smaller items for people to get experience, is there something like my buddy does it from fitflyshaker.com. He gets people, the first ones free, all they have to do is pay for shipping.

Steve: That’s what we’re doing right now with hankies believe it or not.

Noah: And what have you noticed with that?

Steve: People buy hankie and then they come back and they buy a big set.

Noah: Really?

Steve: A small percentage yeah, believe it or not there’s people out there who collect handkerchiefs and use them all in the house. Our demographic is 55 years of age or older, I discovered that recently through Facebook.

Noah: How did you discover that, you were like upload your email lists?

Steve: Upload the email lists, look at insights, and then just run a bunch of tests.

Noah: What do you mean run a bunch of tests? This is where I want you to be a little more specific.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank ReferralCandy for being a sponsor of the show. Now for any ecommerce store word of mouth is huge, and when a customer is super happy with their purchase they will tell all of their friends. Now what if there was a way to amplify word of mouth about your company, what if there was a way to reward referrals for your business? This is where ReferralCandy shines, with just a couple of clicks of the mouse you can add a referral program to your ecommerce store and reward your customers for telling their friends about your shop.

And this tactic works wonders; in fact it’s not uncommon to get a ridiculous return on your investment. So for example Greats Footwear, who is a ReferralCandy customer, is seeing a 20X ROI. Referral word of mouth marketing is also useful for building up your social media presence as well, because referrals share with their friends on Facebook and Twitter.

And the best part is that ReferralCandy is a set it and forget it service, requires no technical setup and they are giving My Wife Quit Her Job listeners 50 bucks to try them out if you go to promo.referralcandy.com/steve. Once again that’s promo.referralcandy.com/steve to get a $50 credit to try the service. Now back to the show.

Okay so I would take an ad where I just put together a nice video of all the handkerchiefs, and then I create a look alike audience and then I just send that ad out to all the different age demographics and just kind of split test it across them.

The 55 year old people and up, there was like an overwhelming demand for that demographic and then the younger people didn’t care at all.

Noah: So do you sell like the handkerchief right away or do you give it for free and they just pay for shipping.

Steve: Free plus shipping.

Noah: Oh they just pay for the shipping.

Steve: They just pay for the shipping but after they add the free thing to their cart I kind of up sell them with like something that’s like 40% off and see if they’ll buy, and I do that to just kind of pay for the cost of the ad. It ends up that that little extra up-sell more than pays for the ad and then I have them on my email list in the back end.

Noah: That’s cool.

Steve: That’s how I do it; sorry I interrupted you, go on with your story.

Noah: I don’t remember where we were with it.

Steve: You had a friend who did a free plus shipping model for something.
Noah: Oh yeah Dustin yeah and that’s actually – I mean the point is that for ecommerce people figure a way that if it’s like a bigger purchase like how can you get them on the phone, how can you get them like – I think ultimately with a lot of this is like how do you get people to trust you, to believe what you’re saying will be true.

I think with the product there is number one thing is, is it valuable to that person that you’re trying to target, and then do they believe that what you’re actually offering will give them the satisfaction they are hoping for in a physical product or a digital product or even in a meal. And so that’s really what you’re trying to accomplish, so figure out ways that you can build that trust, like I think about it like a coach.

I have a chess coach and I think more people should get coaches, so if you’re trying to learn anything or improve anything go get a coach, and I don’t have a coaching business so I’m not selling you anything. But if you want to improve go find someone who is already better than you and then they’ll teach you.

Steve: You have a ping pong coach right?

Noah: Ping pong coach, chess coach, Hebrew coach, mind coach.

Steve: I had to say this on the air, Nevel said that he beat you on ping pong, he doesn’t have a coach.

Noah: Oh my god, he like one time it’s like he beat me once and then it’s like I’ll put it on his tombstone I bet.

Steve: All right sorry so let us go back. So I’m curious myself like how did you come up with that goal of one billion people for that first year, like what was the reason for that?

Noah: I think that was incorrect if I had to look back on it. One is like similar goals because I think it unites the company. The thing that I would probably do is have a goal that doesn’t end within a short period of time, like right now we have a five year 2020 goal and I think that kind of helps continue, so at the end of the year — because what happens is we hit our goal like let’s say November, we‘re like what do we do now because we have another month before the next year, do we just like show. No we already know where we’re going in 2020 like keep working towards the longer term goal.

The goal like how do you choose a goal. The way I like to think of it is specifically is like it should be realistically impossible, so what that means is it’s realistic and there is a chance you can do it and it’s impossible, you’re like I may not be able to hit it. So for instance my podcast Noah Kagan Presents, so if they are going to listen in they want to hear more of me, they go check that out. If they like me, they don’t then they should probably listen and they can hate me more but Noah Kagan Presents.

So my goal is 100,000 downloads in episodes. I think putting it out there and having a similar goal helps you prioritize your decisions, so I wonder if I market Facebook and it makes things easier. Like I was working on OkDork.com my blog and I was like, well we need to make a change and I was like which change will help the podcast grow more, it’s like this one, it’s like let’s do more of those.

Steve: What was that change?

Noah: The change was our autoresponder series. It was like do we put a link to YouTube in it, to YouTube videos I’m working on or to the podcast, and I was like what’s the goal, podcast, easy.

Steve: What are you linking to on your podcast, are you linking to the iTunes page or another page that instructs people how to subscribe?

Noah: I’ve listened to the instructions page but I don’t know if that’s really well optimized.

Steve: Okay and are you…

Noah: How do you recommend?

Steve: I’m just curious, are you diverting them, do you just care about iTunes subscribers or do you care about the other ones too?

Noah: I think if everything goes through Libsyn it’s overall.

Steve: Right yeah that’s true.

Noah: Okay the similar goal – and I think the similar goal just like we have a dashboard that you see literally every single day, everyone knows our goal in the company, it just kind of unifies the company. Then there is obviously like key performance indicators or [inaudible 00:33:06] or whatever acronym somebody wants to use that each team is responsible for to help hit that goal. But I just think it unifies people, so I’d say in terms of like how we chose that goal, it was like realistically impossible, so it should be something you should probably do within some set period of time.

And then I would say if immediately you know it’s not even going to be close, change it. So for example our second year we were like let’s try to make $10 million in our first year of charging for things and literally in our first month we made like 50,000. I was like there is no way impossible we were going to make 10 million, like that is just not – it’s never been done which doesn’t mean it can’t be done, but that just seems like way too – that’s like unrealistically impossible.
And so then we shift our goal to a million dollars because like…

Steve: Sorry I want to hear the details on this, so you hit 50,000 in the first month, then how did you…

Noah: Honestly it might have been lower than that, like let me go; I’ll look it up as we’re talking.

Steve: Okay so how did you pivot from there, like what were you doing wrong, what changes did you make?

Noah: Yeah so I think the two things there was — there was two separate things. It’s like one is the product off which is yes and then there was the goal off which was yes. Right so here I’m looking it up, bad all time. I’ll look at our first month, our first month – oh my god it was $17,000 of revenue, so twenty times twelve, it was basically we were going to make a quarter of a million dollars by the end of the year which is not good.

Steve: And your goal was 10 million you said?

Noah: Yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Noah: So it was like that’s just never going to happen, it’s very unrealistic, so that’s number one. Then we were like – then we had to go back into the product and figure out okay what the hell do people actually want to pay for, and that’s where we started making a lot of pricing changes, that’s where we started improving, okay which products are people really using and then let’s go improve those more than other things.

I think that’s something that a lot of people miss out on, they are like let’s just do – it’s like marketing, let’s do all the marketing channels. I’m like if you’re going to do one which one would you do, this one. If you had to stop which one would you stop, that one, okay?

Steve: Can I ask you a question, for the ones that people aren’t using that much, like why even bother having it because it takes engineering resources to maintain it, right?

Noah: Yeah so we started hiding them. Okay, that’s kind of what Brain Dean has been talking about and like what I did on my blog, it’s like I removed all my old blog posts that I just didn’t think were quality, same with my YouTube. Because I think of it like a restaurant, it’s kind of my favorite analogy. You go to a restaurant you have shady meals, you’re not coming back to the restaurant no matter how – if you had a dessert that was good but all the other dishes were [inaudible 00:35:34], you’re like no I’ll try another place.

It doesn’t mean that your old dishes that are classics can’t stay there but maybe you need to refresh them or maybe they are just a classic and you keep it. I just think in general focus on what’s working and then you got call, either like kill it, remove it or improve it, the things that aren’t working or people aren’t using.

And lastly I would say for like ecommerce or any business out there if you try to understand what people will pay for just go talk to them which I know people don’t want to hear this because they’re like, oh no I’m trying to do a passive income business where I can avoid real feelings in people. But I’ve noticed that if you try to grow a larger business you have to get your hands dirty and do some of the bitch work sometimes. Like you have to go either survey people, like hey why didn’t you buy this, just tell me.

Like literally if you guys go ask your customers, hey why didn’t you buy this, they’ll tell you, and the people who bought it you’re like, hey what made you want to buy this, they’ll tell you. And then you can just go fix those two things.

Steve: I can support that, I had to answer phone calls on Cyber Monday for my store and I actually discovered a couple of usability issues with my site by just talking to people who couldn’t really surf the web, like these are like we have an older demographic and so they didn’t know how to actually navigate a web browser, so I would never have found that out if I wasn’t answering phones on Cyber Monday.

Noah: What did you change?

Steve: There were some things where like on our cart people would try and remove something on the cart by making the quantity zero whereas I had this big checkbox to remove the item, people weren’t using that checkbox, they were just entering in quantity zero and expecting the item to go away, so something stupid like that.

Noah: Well I think that’s a really important point, so if anyone who’s got ecommerce either A get them on the phone which some people are like no I don’t like phones, or B get on live chat, or C like an easiest one – so two here’s a stupid one we forgot to do and now we’re doing again is like when someone unsubscribes or someone wants to return something just collect that information.

So we collected and we force it like hey please give us information why you’re unsubscribing or why you’re returning it so that you can go and make your business better, and you can do the same thing to people who are buying and I think that’s a great thing.

Steve: Can I ask you how you’ve used that feedback to improve, like give me an example?

Noah: Yeah so a lot of people, so with Sumo and we look at [inaudible 00:37:43] we have a weekly kind of discussion about why are people returning – you can’t really return it but why are people cancelling it, and then we like rank it and we see some of them is unrealistic like they are just small sites where they have no money. You can’t optimize losers and it’s not like we don’t like everyone, we like most of them, it’s just like you can’t help everybody. What is it help everyone; you help no one kind of thing.

The ones that you can actually fix are the ones that you should be considering, so for us it’s like hey I didn’t use it, okay what happened there? So and going and talking to them, so we started offering now like a concierge service, we’ll go help set up Sumo for people.

Steve: Interesting, okay.

Noah: Hey I didn’t get enough value out of it, so I didn’t get enough value because email is just actually not that important to them or they didn’t know how to set it up correctly, and is there a thing we can improve in the product to really solve that like maybe we need to improve our autoresponder, so once they join they can learn how to use it better.

So I think it’s just more of like, okay make a list of all the different things why people are cancelling or returning something, prioritize it like just sort it by most popular and then see which ones are actually solvable and then go and solve them and then you keep doing that, you’ll have a business that will be successful.

Steve: I’m just curious; do you actually go out and call these people?

Noah: They are talked to by the support and success team, so most afternoons we have a support team that kind of does reactive complaints like people that are now coming in to complain and then there is success which kind of proactive support. So you go into new customers and either answer the questions ahead of time or helping them optimize their current business.

Steve: Okay so the purpose is just to learn, it’s not to actually get them back per say?

Noah: You know I think it’s kind like a relationship with a girl or it’s like building a house. You have to have a good foundation and then by the time someone is churning in a business it’s already too late at that point. So you have to actually – it’s kind of like it’s first impressions that people had of me. If people are listening to me right now on your show, by now they like me.

Steve: They do.

Noah: They do, it’s not alien, but I’m trying to make an example. If they hated it they would be like, I’ve heard Noah before, I hate all the stuff he says, I don’t get anything out of it. It’s already too late, by now they are not here, but the people that are here because I have given enough value and ideally things that they can use in their own live, they are like, man what else is he going to say because I want to keep listening.

That’s the same thing with your business, the more that in the beginning you create a good relationship and you maintain it and you keep delivering on it, the less you have to worry about churn. When they are already at the end it’s too late, like you never go a store and you plan to return something, it’s too late, it’s already too late then. The best you can do is not have them walk away, complain to everybody else and then try to learn something so that you can improve for the other customers.

Someone said this to me once for email businesses, because email has been a big thing in my life, don’t optimize the unsubscribe page. I spent like a month on AppSumo optimizing the unsubscribe page and my friend said to me, so you’re optimizing the people who hate you, why don’t just go optimize more of the people who like you. I was like that’s a good point.

Steve: Interesting I didn’t know that – what does it mean to optimize an unsubscribe page, what does that mean?

Noah: Oh put a picture on it, change – have options for frequency, have options for time of the week, have options for which emails they get, put the Twitter button there, Facebook whatever, RSS. But it’s like why are you trying to cater for the people who don’t like you. The only consideration is that they just don’t want an email and they want to get communicated in the other medium, that’s one consideration, but if someone doesn’t like you get them out the door and focus on the winners.

Focus on the people who already do like you and double down and invest more in them instead of being destructive with all the negativity or the hate of the people who don’t, you can’t make everyone like you.

Steve: Once you started earning down your product what strategy did you use to grow, what worked for you in terms of growing the most?

Noah: Well free is a damn good one, I’d say about a third of our customers come from free.

Steve: But you still have to let people know that it’s free right, and so I know you reached out to me, was influencer marketing kind of your main things or what other things did you do?

Noah: Yeah it’s been a little bit, so it’s been three years at Sumo. I would say number one was free, number two – it’s not just influencer marketing, I think people miss this in business Steve where they forget one by one, and a lot of the stuff I say is simple or cliché but frankly that’s a lot of what the answers are.

It’s that just one by one you go to people, so for my podcast literally I found having lunch with someone and this is no joke, I did it a few days ago, hey do you listen to podcasts, yeah, are you listening to my podcast, no. All right get on your phone and subscribe, I’ll wait. I did it to my friend Muddy and he’s like I don’t listen to podcasts, I’m like well you should start, let’s do it today. But I think a lot of us are just, oh I’ll send an email and kind of hope things happen.

So yeah I would say number one was free, number two one by one, so a lot of people if you have a business – let’s say you have an ecommerce business and it’s not growing really fast, go do this, get out a spreadsheet right now and go spreadsheet and then just make a list of 100 friends that you think should buy your product, or make a list of ten friends, this even could be simple that might know someone that will buy your product and literally you do that today, you’ll make more sales, that is a promise.

I don’t think of any other business or any way possible that you can make more sales by just writing a list and then reaching out. Number three you have to understand who target customer is, so who is your exact customer, and where are they? So our customers have email providers like AWeber and MailChimp, whatever, so we went and guest posted partnerships with them. Who’s our customer, people who send emails, where are they, reading the blogs of the service providers, so we went and worked with the service providers.

Steve: What’s their incentive to work with you?

Noah: We’re helping people grow their email list which is how they get more money, so we went to them and we did a lot of guest posts or we do a joint webinar or we give some discounts back in the day, we don’t discount any more, but we’d give offers just for their people, that worked really well. You have to — directories so like what are complementary products, so if you go to like WordPress, people are looking for social share buttons, okay well we should probably be in these directories where people are looking for complimentary tools.

Another tactic we’ve used more recently is cross promotion, so how can you partner with people that are complimentary but not competitive. So for example with Sumo we help people grow their email lists, it’s really a lot of the value we provide so there are other partners like social media like let’s say Buffer or [inaudible 00:43:57] or MeetEdgar or share this image, whatever different providers that are complimentary but not competitive.

And we would be like, hey why don’t we give away your product for free if people buy Sumo, or why don’t we both email our lists recommending each other’s products or like even podcasting. Hey I’ll interview you on my show to your audience and vice versa to your audience, whatever, you get what I’m saying.

Steve: Yeah, yeah, yeah.

Noah: It’s as easy as like rap, it’s like music. Have you ever noticed that music, everyone always featured on another person’s album, why is that?

Steve: Yeah just like concerts, there is always someone opening for someone else also, right?

Noah: Exactly, it’s a chance to go and expose someone to a new audience and generally on both ways, so yeah cross promotions are really helpful. I generally discourage people spending money on ads because one it’s easy to lose a lot, and two I don’t spend money on ads until I have something that makes profit. So you can actually try to understand the economics of what the hell you’re doing, I think it’s too easy to kind of prematurely just waste a lot of money.

Steve: Interesting, would that be the case for an ecommerce store as well for you?

Noah: Yeah like if you don’t have any sales don’t start spending it, I think that’s the stupidest idea I’ve ever heard, because it’s too easy to blame an ad instead of the actual business. For example I bought Google ads, they went to the landing page, people gave me an email address, I sent out a PayPal thing or I built a Shopify store then, now it’s two months later by the way and now I have a store and then I told these people to go buy and they didn’t do anything.

And I’m like couldn’t you just like called a few people or posted in a Facebook group or gone to your LinkedIn network and found that people didn’t want this right away. No, no I definitely need to Shopify because people couldn’t PayPal me.

Steve: It’s interesting; I grew my ecommerce store based on AdWords way back in the day, so I’m a little surprised.

Noah: Yeah I would say, one you also went to Stanford so you’re intellectually really smart, two it’s kind of getting into Stanford, do you think it’s harder now or before?

Steve: It’s much harder now, yeah for sure.

Noah: Exactly, it’s the same thing with online marketing, you don’t think Google is more expensive and more complicated now, it’s more expensive. So my overall point is that I’m sharing with people the way I get to my destination, I’m not saying it’s the only way.

Steve: Sure, sure, okay.

Noah: I think you can buy a bunch of ads and make it work, but I think you could potentially lose a lot of – you’re more likely to lose on money than other ways you could do it for free, figure it out, and then actually buy ads when it makes sense.

Here’s the problem with it Steve, it’s more fun to buy the ads; it’s more fun and safe and easy and playful to buy ads. You’ll be like, well the ads didn’t work, it’s okay, while you’re just sitting on your ass in your boxers or in your bikini whatever it is that we wear.

But the hard part is going out and finding people who actually want it and then you can go scale the business. I think people put the scale ahead of the business.

Steve: You’re still wearing the underwear that I got you?

Noah: Which one but I wear all your underwear. Which one did you give me?

Steve: I got you the CK one – was it the C — no, no, no it was a Lululemon’s.

Noah: Oh dude I’m actually not wearing it today but for the most part – it’s been interesting with my outfits, it’s kind of like we were talking about with business like do more of what works and less and remove less of what’s not working. I kind of been thinking of the phrase focus on the essentials – no, no it’s not about clothing, it’s about everything, focus on the essentials for everything in life like what are the essential friends that really you love, what is the essential work you really want to do, what’s the essential clothing you really want to wear.

So I literally pretty much have the exact same pair of underwear, so your Lululemons are the only ones I don’t have, but every other pair of my [inaudible 00:47:20] is like very specific type of Saxx underwear, or like right now I’m replacing all my socks with the exact same pair of socks, and my shirts I pretty much just like only wear three types of shirts.

I wear a sumo.com shirt, I wear a Myles shirt which is Myles Apparel, or a pistol like shirt and those are the only three types of shirts I wear. It’s just like makes life simple and it’s like man I don’t wear any of these other clothes, why do I keep it around.

Steve: That’s like the Steve Job’s mindset, right?

Noah: I think it’s actually a bigger concept that people could actually really benefit in all their life like remove decisions from everything except what really matters, like you shouldn’t ever have to think about breakfast, you shouldn’t ever have to think about your clothes, and that frees up – because I do believe we have creativity and will power in a certain allocation of all this of decision juice or decision power. If you’re using it on like stupid crap, then you’re going to basically not have as much for the more important decisions.

I think frankly like for clothing, if you actually took out only the things you really wear like for the month, you’re like I only really wear 20% of it and I keep 80% around for once a year. My belief is just get rid of it and then if you actually need it add it back into your life. So a simple example for anyone listening is like on your our phone, open your phone right now, I’ll do it with you, you can do it with me Steve. Look at your apps on screen two or screen three, which ones are you actually using all time?

Steve: I just did this the other day man; I removed all the stuff that I don’t use.

Noah: Yeah, so like here remove Austin 311 because I don’t really need that, which other ones have I not used in a while, I don’t use zoom on my – I actually do use – I don’t use Plex on my phone, I just delete that. I’m just like removing all the ones – oh 360 cam I don’t use that. Anyway the point being is the way I’ve noticed it is removing things it helps you add things back in, and then you’re like, man these are the things that I really, really love and it just removes the distraction so that my mind is more clear to focus on the things that really matter.

Steve: You do that with friends too?

Noah: I’ve done it with everything, like I had a friend come to town, and I was like I don’t really like getting out with you and so I’m not hanging out with then, we’ll have a lunch next week and I actually don’t mind the guy, I like the guy but I don’t love the guy and I just have other things I want to spend my time on. I think we’re too cheap with our time, meaning that we give out our time way too freely.

The time never comes back and the older you get the more you realize it, and it’s like we’re like oh yeah have lunch, sure I’ll take time to go do these things or yeah I don’t mind. It’s like go pay for things that will save you time, anything you spend your time on, go pay for it if it saves you time. If you can, if you can afford it, go do it.

Secondly if you’re spending time on things like look at your calendar today or tomorrow, look at it one day ahead, is there anything tomorrow that you don’t need to do or you’re not really pumped to do, even if you don’t, if you have to have a job fine, there’s parts of you you’re going to have to give in, but like is there anything else so you can just like I don’t really like that.

Let me give you a crazy example of what happened today Steve. I went to the W Hotel and had lunch with this guy. We literally walked in and I had a table, it’s like we sit at this table, I’m like what do you mean, it’s like we just go to this table, I’m like okay tell me more. He’s like I tip $100 on our meal, I’m like what are you talking about, he’s like I tip $100 on a meal every time and he wasn’t bragging.

He’s like but I just want it to be streamlined, I don’t want to wait, I don’t want to bill, I don’t want to wait for my car. So I come in, the food is basically ordered for me, they know what I like and they bring it to me so everything is streamlined, he removes the friction and that gives him the opportunity to not waste time on things and also spend his mental energy on just with the things he really wants to spend it on.

Steve: Did he order for you also?

Noah: I got the same thing he ordered because he actually he got it really often.

Steve: Okay that’s interesting.

Noah: He does it at the movie theatre too, he actually prepays at the movie theatre so he can just walk in and they text him ahead of time and be like what time are you coming, it’s like here, this time and then they have the food ready when he sits in, as soon as he moves there, so they bring your food in Austin. But anyway I think conceptually it was just an interesting reminder of A, how can you remove friction, B how do you remove non essentials and then C spend energy on the things that really give you excitement.

That’s something I like, I can’t say I’m perfect at it but I can tell you I’m working through it and I’m thinking about it a lot.

Steve: Well let’s talk about it a little because you just decided to a launch a podcast, so what aspect of your life is that fulfilling for you?

Noah: Similar to what you said when we were chatting pre show is like one it gives me a chance to meet people, and two it kind of forces me to create content and be thinking about things on a regular basis. So like today I’m recording an episode about alcohol, I’ve been sober for 55 days which you can’t…

Steve: [crosstalk 00:51:44] town really, I did not know that, oaky.

Noah: You can still be sober without standing like you were an alcoholic and it’s not even about that but I actually think it’s a really interesting topic that I’m trying to have more fun with it and that’s not what we talked about. But I think it’s an interesting topic, it forced me to explore it and I’m grateful for it and so I’m excited to share the story, and the podcast kind of gave me that outlet for it.

Steve: Interesting.

Noah: And I was also kind of as a marketer or something who is curious how things are promoted, I was curious what the medium of podcasting has been like and it’s very different than en email list which is what I spend a lot of my career building and then helping others build.

Steve: Here’s a question that we kind of touched on this before the interview, I should have recorded the before the interview part actually. I just quit my job on October and it looks like you’ve kind of not divorced – maybe divorced isn’t the right word but you have gems working on the different parts of your business now and so we both have free time now. How do you choose to kind of devote your time in terms of fun versus working?

Noah: I think there’s different people with different parts of life so I can’t tell anybody else what to do.

Steve: No I was asking you.

Noah: And even the people at Sumo like I want everyone there doing what they really want to do and I think that’s what it comes down to. I don’t think work should not be fun, I think work should be fun. To keep it simple I think work should be fun, I don’t think it should be this thing that no matter what kind of work like there are people who are nurses that love to be nurse and they should go be a nurse. There are people who love making coffee for people and having tattoos so they should be a barrister and I think that’s where I want to spend my time.

So how I’m likely to spend my time. I really love helping Sumo so wherever it needs help in the business I spend about a day doing that, creating podcasts or videos or blogging, I spend about two days doing that. One day a week I plan nothing, so I’m doing a lot of experiments and challenges with the podcast and Noah Kagan Presents podcast for everyone listening, get it on your phone.

So I did an experiment where is pent like a whole week alone and I spent a whole week with nothing planned and I was like there’s good and bad about it which you can hear in one of the episodes, but what I realized from that was that man I really liked it, it was liberating not to have anyone with me and to be very unplanned for day for that week. So now once a week I have like an unplanned day, there is nothing.

Steve: I hear it works better if you go to India.

Noah: Yes, yes I’m going right to India. No so like yeah one day a week with Sumo, more or less if you look at the time two days a week on like content creation, one day unplanned and one day I’m kind of building side projects that will help Sumo. So like one is a chrome extension that I built, because I’m curious about that and then one is like a recruiting tool because recruiting sacks and try and make it easier for our company.

Steve: Okay hey I know you got an appointment to go to pretty soon so I want to be respectful of your time. Where can people sign up for your podcast and take a look or listen I should say?

Noah: Yeah Noah Kagan Presents just search it the Google store KAGAN or Google or iTunes podcast. It’s also OkDork.com search podcast for I guess if you’re on a desktop, but everyone on the phone just go right now Noah Kagan if you want to hear.

Basically I’ve been on interviews, I’ve been on these really interesting book reports that are like unnormal, and then I’ve been doing kind of like challenges reporting back on that, and then a few case studies where I’ll talk to someone in different types of businesses and then try to relay like one or two action items related to a specific thing like SEO or ecommerce or I had one guy who’s like trying to do freelance video consulting.

Steve: One thing I like about Noah’s podcast a quick plug here is that I never know what to expect, like you don’t have any patterns per say, so every episode is kind of unique in its own way, so I recommend that all you guys go check it out.

Noah: That’s interesting, thanks man. Yeah it’s funny because it’s actually one of the things I struggle with where each week it’s different and it actually causes a lot of mental energy on that, so what we’ve done this week is try to create more of a formula and template where it’s like here’s the types of shows we do and then here’s the order of content we want to do it in, and then line up the podcast and YouTube and blog so that each week it’s like the same thing and it kind of makes it easier for us to operate that.

What’s an interesting thing is old Asian dudes said to me this in breakfast a few days ago maybe it was your uncle, he’s like look around – he said it, I thought it was so powerful, you can do their accent because you’re better than me. But he said, look around and make life easier, and he said this over some — I was literally getting a croissant or something like that, I think a scone and I was like what are you talking about. He’s like look around and make life easier and I thought that was a just a very interesting thing because he was getting a tray and I was trying to carry all the stuff in a plate and he’s like dude just look around and make life easier.

So I think that’s a great word to end the show where it’s like in all aspects of your life, in your friendships, in work, in your health, whatever it is, look around and be like how can I make this better, what are things that I can improve like what’s already working that I like doing or that seems to be working well that I can just work better or make easier, and I thought that was a really good concept to kind of reflect on.

Steve: I think that’s a good way to end this episode man, thanks a lot for coming on.

Noah: Steve Chou every one.

Steve: Take care dude.

Noah: Ah brother, keep it real.

Steve: Right, hope you enjoyed that episode. What I love about Noah is that he’s honest, sincere and always straight up with you, like the guy does not sugar coat anything and he always provides insightful takeaways about his philosophies and his experiences. So go check out his podcast Noah Kagan Presents now. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode158.

And once again I want to thank privy.com for sponsoring this episode. Privy is the email capture provider that I personally use to turn visitors into email subscribers, they offer email capture, exit intent, and site targeting tools to make it supper simple as well. I like Privy because it is so powerful and you can basically trigger custom pop ups for any primer that is closely tied to your ecommerce store. So if you want to give it a try it’s free, so head on over to P-R-I-V-Y.com/steve, once again that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/steve.

I also want to thank Klaviyo which is my email marketing platform of choice for ecommerce merchants. You can easily put together automated flows like an abandoned cart sequence, a post purchase flow, a win back campaign, basically all of these sequences that will make you money on auto pilot. So head on over to mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, and once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/ K-L-A-V-I-Y-O for a free trial.

I talk about how I use these tools on my blog, and if you’re interested in starting your own ecommerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away via email, thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

157: How To Create An 8 Figure Amazon Business Selling Electronics With Bernie Thompson

How To Create An 8 Figure Amazon Business Selling Electronics With Bernie Thompson

Today I‘m lucky to have Bernie Thompson on the show. Bernie runs an 8 figure business called Plugable.com which is a company that sells USB and Bluetooth devices online.

Now what’s cool is that his company is global. Plugable sells its products in many different countries all over the world. And what’s also cool is that Bernie built all of his own tools in house to manage his Amazon business named Efficient Era.

Now I’ve actually started using Efficient Era myself to manage the feedback for my shop and the tools are really useful. Anyway, the reason why I have Bernie on the show today is to talk about how to be successful selling electronics on Amazon and the exact processes and tools he uses to make money. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Bernie got into ecommerce and what made him choose to sell electronics.
  • How Bernie comes up with product ideas
  • Bernie’s strategy for going into new markets.
  • Why Bernie decided to sell internationally early on
  • Bernie’s main criteria for selecting products to sell.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Privy.com – Privy is my tool of choice when it comes to gathering email subscribers for my ecommerce store. They offer easy to use email capture, exit intent, and website targeting tools that turn more visitors into email subscribers and buyers. With both free and paid versions, Privy fits into any budget. Click here and get 15% OFF towards your account.
Privy

ReferralCandy.com – If you’re already getting steady orders every month, adding a refer-a-friend program to your store can give you a new sales channel. And ReferralCandy is the best in the business. Click here and get a FREE $50 credit towards your account.
referral candy

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and delve deeply into what strategies are working and what strategies are not with their businesses. Today I have

Bernie Thompson with me on the show. Now Bernie runs an eight figure Amazon business called Plugable where he sells electronic equipment which is quite possibly the most competitive and the most cut throat niche that you can possibly go into on Amazon.

He also runs a popular Amazon software service called Efficient Era which allows you to match up your product feedback directly to a specific customer on Amazon. Now I actually use this software and as far as I know it is the only software out there that allows you to do this. In any case Bernie is an amazing guy, and enjoy the interview.

But before we begin I want to give a quick shout out to Klaviyo who is a sponsor of the show. Now I’m super excited about Klaviyo because they are the email marketing platform that I use for my ecommerce store, and I depend on Klaviyo for over 20% of my revenues. Now you’re probably wondering why Klaviyo and not another provider. Well Klaviyo is the only email platform out there that is specifically built for ecommerce stores, and here’s why it’s so powerful.

Klaviyo can track every single customer who has shopped in your store and exactly what they bought which makes it extremely powerful. So let’s say I want to send an email out to everyone who purchased a red handkerchief in the last week, easy. Let’s say I want to set up a special autoresponder sequence to my customers depending on what they purchased, it’s a piece of cake, and there is full revenue tracking on every single email.

Now Klaviyo is the most powerful email platform that I’ve ever used and you could try them for free at mywifequitherjob.com/Klaviyo, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

I also want to give a quick shout out to Privy who is also a sponsor of the show. Now what’s also cool is that I use and rely on Privy for both my blog and my online store. Now what does Privy do? Privy is an email list growth platform, and they actually manage all of my email capture forms, and in fact I use Privy hand in hand with Klaviyo.

Now there are a bunch of companies out there that will manage your email capture forms, but here is why I like Privy. Privy is easily the most powerful platform that I’ve ever used, and you can trigger sign up forms based on any primer that you desire. So let’s say you offer free shipping for orders over 100 bucks, well you can tell Privy to flash a popup when the customer has 90 bucks in their shopping cart to urge them to insert one more item.

Here’s another cool use case, if someone has item A in their shopping cart, I can easily tell Privy to display a special coupon code for that item or display a related item. In terms of email capture, I’m showing different email lead magnet depending on what product a customer is browsing in our store.

So bottom line Privy allows me to turn visitors into email subscribers, which I then feed to Klaviyo to close the sale. So head on over to Privy.com/steve, once again that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/steve, and try it for free, and if you decide that you need some of the more advanced features, then use coupon code MWQHJ for 15% off. Now on to the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I’m lucky to have Bernie Thompson on the show. Now Bernie runs an eight figure business called plugable.com which is a company that sells USB and Bluetooth devices online. So first off those of you who have followed me for a long time know that I generally advice against going into the electronics business.

Not only is there the threat of your products going obsolete but the quality assurance and the [inaudible 00:04:03] required can be very daunting as well. And then you couple that with the fact that China can produce electronic knock offs fairly quickly makes it even tougher as well.

Anyway Bernie has managed to create an incredibly successful Amazon business selling USB and Bluetooth devices, and what’s cool is that his company is global. Plugable sells its products in many different countries all over the world. What’s also cool is that he built all of his own tools in-house to manage his Amazon business, and then he decided to take those tools public and his company is called Efficient Era.

Now I’ve actually already started using these tools myself to manage the feedback for my shop and they are really powerful. Anyway the reason why I have Bernie on the show today is to talk about how to be successful selling electronics on Amazon and the exact processes and tools he uses to make money. And with that welcome to the show Bernie, how are you doing today?
Bernie: Great to see you, great to talk to you.

Steve: Yeah so Bernie I know that from your background you used to be a software engineer, how did you go from software engineer to ecommerce?

Bernie: Yeah I was a software engineer, actually kind of like you Steve I was a low level kind of guy, so I worked on the device driver layer, so all these hardware devices that we use every day, they have a bunch of software that interfaces between that device and the operating system and that’s what I used to work on and I used to then manage the USB and Bluetooth teams at Microsoft, and that led to creating this USB and Bluetooth devices business.

Steve: So why electronics of all things?

Bernie: Yeah I think interestingly Plugable is electronics company first and then Amazon seller second, so it really was because we had to go on building a better device company that when I started Plugable in 2009, the experience buying things like USB and Bluetooth peripherals was pretty dismal. They seemed to work most of the time but when they didn’t work you had horrible information and horrible call center style of support.

So we wanted to go direct using all of these new capabilities that were coming with Amazon and FBA and the ability potentially to sell globally, and do kind of that information and support in a much different, more customer centric online way with fast feedback loops and doing the right things for customers and getting rewarded with good reviews.

So yes Plugable was an electronics business, design is electronics business first and really selling on Amazon was secondary. We really wanted to solve issues that were out there for all the USB and Bluetooth device companies that they really were providing poor support call center style. We saw the opportunity to do it online with better information and a more customer centric approach using all the new tools that were coming in the form of Amazon and the Amazon FBA and it’s worked out pretty well.

Steve: So here is the thing, I looked at some of the products on the Plugable website, so for example you sell like a USB hub, but if I go out there is like – I would say there’s hundreds if not even thousands of those out there. So how did you come up with which particular electronic products to sell, and I guess what was the first product that you launched?

Bernie: The first product we launched actually was trying to take some off the shelf hardware and use it in a different way. We took USB docking stations which were new in 2009, and were turning them into USB thin clients, and I actually because I’m a software engineer I actually did a bunch of unique work in Linux to make that possible. So we did a unique product as our first product and as it turns out it failed.

Steve: Okay and why did it fail?

Bernie: It failed because the USB thin client market never took off. Around the same time you started having less and less expensive Windows laptops and tablets, you started having Chrome books a few years in, and so the benefits that you got from taking a single computer and connecting a bunch of thin clients and turning that one computer into many, you’re really looking at mostly a cost benefit there, and that cost benefit people were getting in different ways so just having their PCs being cheaper.

Steve: So when you decided to sell this product – I guess what I’m trying to get at is like what is your process for figuring out or making sure that a product doesn’t fail when you bring it to market?

Bernie: Yeah, when I first started I thought we would be a single product company. As it turns out that product failed and I faced the choice of, well do I stick with this and keep trying harder in this USB thin client market or do I go wider, and I made the decision to go wider. So at that point it really kind of switched from a mindset of we’re a thin client company to I’ve got to launch a bunch of products in the hopes that one or two of those will be successful. I kind of thought it might be like a five to one ratio or something like that, so almost like a VC mindset.

As it turns out in the early years 2009, 2010, 2011 it actually was more like one out of every two was successful, it was a very high hit rate, and we can talk about maybe why that was. And then over the years that has varied a lot starting in 2012, 2013 a huge influx of sellers often from mainland China where most electronic factories are located, and our hit rate went down significantly.

Also at that time you started having the review gaming which we never participated in, so we really had a lot of head wins against us because our competitors were launching products and having hundreds of reviews within a few weeks, whereas we took months to get hundreds of reviews.

That was a huge disadvantage that we suffered, so recently our hit rate has actually been going up because we’ve continued to refine our processes and now Amazon has cramped down on the fake reviews. So it’s not as good as it was in the early years but we’re probably talking about like a one out of every four products is a hit.

Steve: Okay and just to be clear do you design all of your own stuff in-house or you don’t do any sort of private labeling or white labeling of products that are existing, right?

Bernie: We do the full [inaudible 00:10:44] from basically products that already exist and bringing the model of the Plugable brand to actually getting involved with a little bit of low level PCB design and other things, but most of our products fall in the middle where we kind of do ground up research.

We know what chip sets are coming out from the IC makers and we go out and seek factories that are experienced using those chip sets, and we put in our FQs and try to get them to build a product that uses the chip sets that we’re looking for and has the features that we want.

Steve: Interesting, so do they perform all of the testing and everything for you then?

Bernie: Yeah we do a lot of testing but really it’s mostly kind of from the user perspective and high level testing, so our factory partners are heavily involved with the low level testing also.

Steve: I see so in terms of like schematic design and all that stuff, that’s all handled by your designer?

Bernie: Yes.

Steve: And are most of your products created over in Asia?

Bernie: Yes, the original designs come from all around the world. Most of the designs originally come from the chip set makers; the IC makers from the reference designs and so just as an example of a lot of our products use chips from a company called DisplayLink which is a USB graphics company.

They are located in Cambridge England, so a lot of the original reference designs are coming out of Cambridge and then they get picked up by the factories, they modify them to fit a form factor or adjust the cast or adjust our request for features and that’s how the low level design gets done.

Steve: So to do what you guys do requires some amount of technical knowledge is that accurate?

Bernie: Yeah, I think you said earlier in the call you generally recommend against electronics. Yeah I mean there’s a lot of barriers here, I’ve worked at — and even though I’m a software guy I’ve worked at two chip companies, a chip graphics chip company called S3 in the 1990s.

Steve: Yeah I remember those guys.

Bernie: I worked at DisplayLink themselves, I was a VP at DisplayLink. So I’ve been able to use this knowledge of how these chip companies work and how the supply chain works to not just be a passive actor, but actually to be an active participant in all these choices that ultimately end up determining whether the product is a quality and whether the product is differentiated from other products that are out there in the market.

Steve: Okay and so I’m just curious to achieve your revenues how many product skews do you have and what country are the majority of your sales coming from?

Bernie: So we have over 100 products at this point, we have about 110 and by far our leading market is the US. US is greater than all of our other geographies combined although all the other geographies are growing and they are fairly healthy too.

Steve: And in terms of skews you mentioned you had like a one in four hit rate, what do you do with the three that fail, do you just kind of discontinue them right away?

Bernie: No we don’t discontinue them right away, I mean because we’re doing products that are unique in many cases, will have unique aspects, we’re dealing with relatively large MOQs, minimum order quantities usually 1000 or 3000 at least and so it takes some time. When we do have something that’s not a hit frankly we’re stuck with the inventory for quite a bit of time usually a year or two.

So what we’re trying to do over that year or two is basically try again and again different communication strategies, different emphasis on the feature aspects of the product to try to find a strategy in terms of how we’re marketing or what

we’re saying in our marketing to get that product to take off. It’s funny it’s a lot like starting a campfire or something, sometimes you get a situation where it just fails to light with the few attempts and then just for some reason on the fourth or fifth attempt it lights and that happens with products too.

Steve: Okay and then when did you actually decide to expand overseas to other countries?

Bernie: It was actually pretty early on. When you’re doing unique products that you’re investing a lot in ahead of time, any market that you’re not in is a missed opportunity. You’re giving oxygen to your competitors by giving them a market that you’re not competing with them in. So we try hard to be as aggressive as we can be to reach every market around the world, although that said we tend to focus on Amazon. So we focus most on the markets that Amazon covers but we do also try to reach the other ones.

Steve: Okay so I want to talk a little bit about your product selection process without getting technical at all. What is your main criteria when you decide to bring something to the market, what is your process and what price point and margins do you like to see?

Bernie: I think we do with electronics where the Plugable brand we’re connecting this with that, so the number one issue is compatibility, are we able to make a very broad statement that if you have an HDMI monitor that this product will connect your laptop to it or whatever. Very often in electronics it’s not so simple, the compatibility story is inherently complex.

Maybe let’s say the product is a DisplayLink graphics product and the drivers on Mac just aren’t that good or the operating system support for DisplayLink is not that good. So we spend a lot of time trying to create a product with the maximum compatibility possible, and then whatever is left just is a limitation. We work really hard to try to communicate that accurately and upfront to the consumer so that they know what will work and what won’t.

Steve: So I imagine you have several competitors on Amazon, right?

Bernie: Yeah many, I mean literally it’s electronics so we literally have hundreds of competitors.

Steve: And so how do you stand out?

Bernie: We try to get the little details of compatibility right, and sometimes that’s firmware thing, sometimes that’s a tweet to the hardware, and then we try to get the expectations setting right. Often we have an advantage there because all of our staff is here in the US where actually I used to work in Microsoft here in Washington, and so we got some great technical people around. So we’re able to describe the product more precisely and so we don’t have people for whom the product is not going to work buy it and then write a negative review.

So in addition to compatibility issue it’s features. We’re trying to make sure that when we look at all the products in the market out there that we’ve made at least a few choices that move the feature bar forward. Although we don’t focus on price as much as some other people, we want to make sure that at the feature level we’re on that the price is competitive. So there’s really a lot of market research that goes into every product before we launch it.

Steve: I’m sure.

Bernie: Then if we think we have that right mix of features, compatibility, and price that we’re able to produce something
competitive, then it’s a matter of really doing kind of all of our execution right in terms of selling on Amazon and doing ecommerce so that we can drive the Amazon fly wheel and push that product up in search results through proving to Amazon that when people glance at the product they choose to click on it, when they click on it they choose to buy it, and when they buy it they have a good experience.

Steve: And I’m just kind of curious what the margins – can you kind of give us an idea what the margins are like for electronics?

Bernie: Yeah the margins are really tight for electronics. If you’re able to net out after everything a 5 or 10% that’s probably considered norm.

Steve: Wow, okay I didn’t realize it was that low.

Bernie: Yeah that’s after everything, support and everything.

Steve: Sure of course yeah, and in terms of the time frame from inception to getting a product ready to go to sell what is like a time frame for a typical product of yours.

Bernie: We try to make it as short as possible. When you’re producing custom product that is being manufactured in Mainland China there is just inherently some fairly long latency, some long delays. Even on a product that is settled that we’re just doing a reorder the delay is anywhere between two to four months depending on chip set availability.

So for a new product it can be as long as nine months but we try to get it down to maybe four months or so on a new product.

Steve: Okay and then typically like what’s like a minimum investment for like the first purchase?

Bernie: It depends on the cost of the product.

Steve: Of course.

Bernie: We sell products that are $200 docking stations and we sell products that are $10 cables. So if you kind of multiply out a wholesale cost on that by 1,000 or 3,000 units plus the bunch of time invested, you’re usually talking about a minimum of tens of thousands of dollars on a new product.

Steve: Okay, all right so let’s switch gears away from the actual product design, because I’m pretty sure like the actual product development is probably a little too technical for anyone who is listening even though I would be personally interested in all that stuff.

Bernie: Right yeah you have all the background for this.

Steve: Like trying hard not to ask you those questions right now. All right so you got your product, you’ve sent it over to Amazon, so what is your strategy for getting it visible on Amazon. So let’s start from the beginning like it’s got no reviews, what is your strategy for launch?

Bernie: You know it’s so tough – even when we started and certainly now here in 2017 if you launch a product on Amazon it could be the best product in the world at the best price, and it will sit there at the bottom of search results and no one will buy the damn thing, so strategies are absolutely necessary.

So let’s talk in terms of the funnel because I think that thinking of a funnel is the correct way to think about this. So our first challenge is to get anybody to go look at the product at all regardless of what their reaction will be to it. And so our strategies for doing that are number one is content marketing. Every product has a story, every product has a reason for existing, every product has problems that it’s solving.

There are people out there who are having those problems, who are having those frustrations who if they were aware that there was a solution they would be excited about it, so our job is to reach them, this is marketing. The only thing that’s changed about marketing is video is so much easier now because we can use tools like posting videos on YouTube and posting videos on Facebook and we can use targeted marketing on Amazon, on Facebook, on Twitter, on Google honing in on the searches and the keywords and the interests of customers.

So our first job is to break our product down into what are the problems it solves, what are the customers who would be interested in that kind of problem and solution and then what are the keywords that are relevant to them and what’s the content that would be compelling for them, often the videos, sometimes blog posts, sometimes maybe a cross post or an article on another site and creating hat content.

Steve: So you’re creating content and I think in the case of Plugable you guys do a lot of how to type of videos, or feature videos?

Bernie: Correct.

Steve: Okay.

Bernie: It’s kind of interesting, with electronics it’s hard but there’s a lot to talk about because there’s a lot of how to and a lot of interesting new things that is sometimes possible with technology, so yeah so we use all of those excuses to create some – tend to create some compelling content.

Steve: So you have the content but how do you get people to actually look at it?

Bernie: So a lot of it is patience, that building an audience takes a lot of time, there are so many gigantic problems with ecommerce, we talked about how you launch a product on Amazon and it sits at the bottom of search results and nobody finds it. That is true for your content too; until you’re able to build up an audience, it can be frustrating. You can have a very compelling video sitting out there on YouTube and no one will go view it.

So a lot of it is really about pushing a snowball down hill and having the patience to have that snowball build in size. Today Plugable has over 8,000 YouTube subscribers and we have several million video views on YouTube. It took eight years to get to those numbers, and so there is a bit of that is that planning and setting aside your time and your budget to give yourself enough time to have that snowball build some size and become self reinforcing in the end. Your past content is in a sense creating the audience that is going to be viewing your future content.

Steve: So I’d like you to take me back to your first successful product like when you had nothing, and were you doing content well before the launch of the product?

Bernie: Yeah we had the content strategy from day one, so if I would look back at the plugable.com site right now I could find blog posts from the fall of 2009. At that point we figured we were trying to reach the most dedicated possible audience for our products, so we focused on very tactical blog posts that would really get a core group of people very excited about what we were doing.

I also was speaking at conferences about the product and I was trying to reach that same sort of audience. So I guess there is a lesson there in terms of being realistic about what audience is likely to be excited about you, and even though ultimately you want to reach a wider audience, first focus where you’re strongest and establish some momentum and some credibility where you’re strongest and then kind of build on that and expand on that.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank ReferralCandy for being a sponsor of the show. Now for any ecommerce store word of mouth is huge, and when a customer is super happy with their purchase they will tell all of their friends. Now what if there was a way to amplify word of mouth about your company, what if there was a way to reward referrals for your business? This is where ReferralCandy shines, with just a couple of clicks of the mouse; you can add a referral program to your ecommerce store and reward your customers for telling their friends about your shop.

And this tactic works wonders; in fact it’s not uncommon to get a ridiculous return on your investment. So for example Greats Footwear, who is a ReferralCandy customer, is seeing a 20X ROI. Referral word of mouth marketing is also useful for building up your social media presence as well, because referrals share with their friends on Facebook and Twitter.

And the best part is that ReferralCandy is a set it and forget it service, requires no technical setup and they are giving My Wife Quit Her Job listeners 50 bucks to try them out if you go to promo.referralcandy.com/steve. Once again that’s promo.referralcandy.com/steve to get a $50 credit to try the service. Now back to the show.

Okay so you advice anyone who is launching a brand new product from complete scratch to start thinking about their audience and start producing content for that audience?

Bernie: Yeah I would say so. There’s strategies that don’t involve content marketing and certainly actually there’s a lot of successful Amazon businesses that don’t do content marketing. But I think that there is a fragility to that, that the content marketing because it is a snowball that rolls down a hill and grows, it creates a more sustainable momentum for your brand and your products that even though it’s sometimes painful to get that rolling to start with, ultimately it’s what can build a strong, large and sustainable business.

Steve: So in terms of the sales of your first successful product then, was it Amazon customers that were browsing the marketplace, or were they people that you were driving either through email or your content to buy that Amazon product?

Bernie: So on the first product which was a unique USB thin client product, it was mostly us driving people to Amazon and I think even the terms that people would think to search for if they were looking for such a product weren’t very clear. And then as we expanded our product line, we went into very well understood commodity areas like USB hubs and USB keyboards and mice and USB graphics adaptors.

In those areas there was an existing body of people on Amazon already searching for those products, and then we just needed to focus on coming up high for those searches that were already happening.

Steve: Okay so essentially kind of using your terminology like the fly wheel going, right?

Bernie: Exactly, so we talked about kind of filling the top of the funnel with content marketing. So then the next step – and this is somewhat what’s unique about Amazon and powerful about Amazon is Amazon is really using and looking at using all the metrics about your products. Amazon’s philosophy is very customer centric, they want customers to have great experiences on Amazon, and they want to help that to happen through data.

So they want to reward products on Amazon that when somebody is driven to the Amazon site for whatever reason or searches on the Amazon site there is a product that they are attracted enough to click on. Then when they click on it that there is a high percentage of the time that they buy that product, and then when they buy that product that there is a high percentage of the time that they a have a good customer experience.

So Amazon is literally taking those metrics, those conversion metrics for your product and feeding that back into the search results. So it is a fairly beneficial kind of feedback loop of if you do right by customers on Amazon, Amazon will reward you with a higher position in search, and so a lot of the focus of our business has been on making sure that that customer centric feedback loop is spinning the Amazon fly wheel and driving sales.

The final part of it is that when that feedback loop is working and you’re getting pushed up in search, well that results in more sales which results in more statistics which reinforces that hey this product is a good product that is increasing its sales. So that’s how you kind of get this fly wheel effected, and in fact if you can push your product up in the Amazon search to where it is one of the top sellers and people are having good experiences with it, it’s very self reinforcing and it’s actually hard for competitors to knock that product out of that position except by slowly growing there with a better product and better experiences for customers.

Steve: So can we talk about some of your specific processes that you use for Plugable to kind of push this fly wheel and get a positive feedback loop going?

Bernie: Yeah absolutely, so a lot of the really successful sellers who started earlier on the Amazon platform and I have met a bunch of them – it’s interesting a lot of us were software developers, and part of the reason why that happened was Amazon provides a lot of tools for sellers, but they don’t do all of the essential things.

So a big part of making sure that the feedback loop goes well and that the fly wheel is spun is identifying all loop wings in all these things that happen on Amazon where communication with the customer or being very fast to respond to things that are happening with Amazon will help produce better experiences.

So one of the early things that I did in 2010 was begin developing software that for example every time an order shipped from Amazon FBA I would send out an email to the customer that had a bunch of helpful support information, and also establish a rapport with the customer and said that after you have a chance to use the product for a while we’d love to have a product review with your experiences.

So at this point here in 2017 is great because there is actually a lot of services that will do that for you, you don’t need to develop software for it, and we’ve actually now taken all the software that we developed for Plugable and made that available on efficientera.com, so we’re one of those services too. So that was the key thing is establishing contact with the customer.

Steve: Can we talk about your email flow like how many emails are you sending out?

Bernie: Yeah so we’ve had a philosophy from day one that we don’t want to annoy customers by sending them multiple emails, so it was actually interesting when we created Efficient Era and took our internal system and offered it to others because other competitor tools allow you to send multiple emails for a single order.

So we went ahead and did that in Efficient Era, but Plugable still to this day does not use it. We send out a single email that is more about customer service than it is about asking for a review, and we send it out when the item ships so that the email will arrive right before the product does, that’s how Plugable does it.

We have a heavy support component with all of our products because we’re connecting this with that and when something goes wrong, it can get complex about why is something not working. So customer support is a huge part of how we can mitigate negative reviews or avoid negative reviews and encourage positive reviews through good experiences.

Steve: So from what I understand then you are not actually sending out a review link in this email then?

Bernie: We do actually send out review link but we qualify it with after you’ve had a chance to use the product for a few weeks.

Steve: Interesting okay.

Bernie: Yeah it’s an interesting middle ground. I know a lot of our competitors would break those two up, they might send a support email when the product first ships and then send a review request email a few weeks later and our system supports that, but I know we still are sticking to this thing of it’s not in the customer’s interest to receive multiple emails per order and we don’t want to be annoying, so yeah it’s interesting.

Steve: So they actually have to remember to go back to that email then to leave a review, is that right?

Bernie: Yeah that’s right yeah.

Steve: Okay, I know for electronics because one of my friends sells electronics that often times they are quick to a negative review if something doesn’t work.

Bernie: Yes.

Steve: And so when you’re dealing with them on the phone – you have phone support, right?

Bernie: We actually don’t, we only are online support, and that’s one of the reasons why we send that email because we want to say in that email, you can contact us by email just reply to this mail to contact us.

Steve: Okay do you ever – like once a successful support email has been sent out do you send them a review link then?

Bernie: Yeah we may or just generally encourage it, because we do want to treat every customer service incident as an opportunity to avoid a negative review and if we’re able to provide a really positive experience or better experience than maybe they’ve had before we get an opportunity for a positive review.

Steve: Okay, I’m just curious so how do you deal with negative reviews like what is your strategy?

Bernie: Our strategy is just simply to treat them as a customer service incident. I think in electronics that is a little easier to take that philosophy because usually they just have a simple goal of getting two things to work together, and so either that’s working or it’s not. So when somebody writes a negative review and that’s one of the things that is tough that Amazon kind of makes it tough for you, a negative review is usually just kind of a request for help in a sense.

They’ve had a bad experience and at least in our world a lot of times they could have had a good experience if we had had an opportunity to help them. They often jumped to a negative review before they even contacted us for service, but Amazon doesn’t really provide a good way to contact the customer, really the only mechanism you have is to post a comment on their review.

Unfortunately the reviewer is often not notified that that comment is there, and it’s really not an appropriate place to have a customer service interaction where you have to exchange information back and forth. So one of the things our tool does is it digs through all of your orders as a seller and all of the reviews and is able to do a buyer review matching so that when you have an Amazon verified purchase that came from your seller account, we’re actually able to send you an email and we do when you get a negative review, and it has the Amazon order number that that review came from.

So now once you have that you can just take that link to seller central and contact the customer. So we get that notification for every single negative review that happens on any of the Amazon geographies around the world and those go straight into our customer service ticketing system, and we just try to help the customer and turn that situation around.

Steve: So how do you get them to kind of retract their review?

Bernie: Well we’re not pushy about it; in fact Amazon terms are clear that you can’t be pushy about it. We focus first on just trying to – whatever was in the review that caused them to have a bad experience, our focus is very clearly just on trying to solve that problem. Then once we’ve solved that problem we will often say something like, oh that’s great, it’s working now, if you have a chance to update your review we’d really appreciate it, or something like that or if you have a chance to write the full experiences up in review we’d really appreciate it.

We really leave it at that and we don’t do follow up mails, we don’t do pesters, and I think in most cases the person who is angry and created that negative review because they were having a good experience in most cases they are so happy to have that problem solved that they’re really in a mindset at that moment that they do want to have that be reflected in the reviews. So we get a really good response rate even on that light and very customer oriented guidance.

Steve: And incidentally for everyone listening out there, this is actually the main reason why I’m on Efficient Era, the fact that you can actually find out who left the review and then contact them directly is actually a huge boost for customer service, because when I think about how I run my own business like we contact customers who are unhappy right away, and the sooner you do it actually the better because they start fuming and it builds up over time.

Bernie: Yeah and we’re able to get that email to you as a seller that there was a negative review and what order it came from in less than 24 hours from when the review was posted, and then on the Plugable side when we are the users of that ourselves we try to get back to the customer within 24 hours of getting notified. So basically in a relatively short period of time the customer gets contacted back with an apology and an offer to help.

Steve: Okay so it sounds like the way you run Plugable is with a strong focus on customer service, right?

Bernie: Yes.

Steve: Are there any other things that you have done to accelerate your Amazon sales?

Bernie: Well there is a lot of – the main event for interacting with a customer is the post order email and then responding to reviews. There is also a bunch of other smaller but important events. For example one is Amazon will send you an email when you receive a return or question from customers. Very often customers will tend to not write a negative review until they have the money back and then they’ll write a negative review.

So you have a time window there to also treat that as a customer service incident and offer to help solve whatever problem is leading to that return request, so that’s another thing that Efficient Era does is it captures those events and turns those into customer service requests for you.
Steve: Have you had success like turning around a return request?
Bernie: Yeah absolutely, and it’s sometimes in the form of they haven’t actually sent the product in yet and we’re able to get the product working. Other times it’s just simply – well if it’s a product that the reviews are really critical to us right now like let’s say it only has a few reviews, we might actually do something like, well we‘re sorry you had a bad experience, we really want to understand what went wrong here, we’re actually going to send you a free unit and work with you to get that working just so we can understand what happened here.

And of course that’s very much in the customer’s interest, the customer is getting the return and the refund of the product and they are getting the product they originally tried to get working. That happens in our space, sometimes compatibility is complicated and we really are in the dark about why something is going wrong and in a sense that customer is helping us to understand something that may also impact other customers, so in our minds between the review and between learning it’s worth it to us to work with this customer and try to figure out what went wrong.

Steve: I see and then by doing that I would image no negative review is ever left when you’re just giving away units, right?

Bernie: Yeah if the person hasn’t submitted a negative review yet, they want to see how it all resolves. I mean if they have your engagement, very few customers are going to write a negative review while it seems like you’re honestly trying to help them, because it might work out still. There are some people who are just in a negative frame of mind that they’re going to write a negative review no matter what, but that’s the minority of customers.

Steve: And in terms of just boosting your sales, do you guys ever use like discounts or lightening deals or anything along those lines?

Bernie: We do, not heavily though, a lot of our competitors in electronics use like deals and best deals very heavily. We have more of kind of an everyday low pricing and fixed margin model for our products, so if we’re doing a lightening deal we’re probably losing money on each unit. So especially now as of this fall Amazon has moved to a system where lightening deals have to come from an approved list that Amazon reflects back to you, and each lightening deal has a cost associated with it, $150 currently.

There is only a limited number of circumstances for us where lightening deals make sense, so actually it’s really not our primary means of getting the fly wheel started on Amazon.

Steve: Okay and how do you guys manage inventory like how do you know how much product to order, do you systems in place for that.

Bernie: We do, they are actually not part of our Efficient Era tools right now; they might be in the future. There are actually today a massive number of spreadsheets with a lot of scripting between them, so we basically have a custom in-house inventory system that tells us that current run rates, how many weeks of stock do we have left, because it’s hard.

We’re trying to steer a ship that a decision we make today has its impact three or four months from now because basically if we order one product from our suppliers today, it can be that long until we receive it. So it really feels like you’re steering an ocean liner at times, and it’s very hard to make those forward looking decisions, so we have a lot of analysis around that.

Steve: What about tracking your revenues and like your inventory like when Amazon loses some stuff, how do you manage all that stuff?

Bernie: The Efficient Era tools do have a functionality in that area, we basically have time series graphs that allow you in aggregate for your whole account and for each product to be able to see the graph of your sales and your inventory over time so that you can see when inventory has been dropping when you’re making that decision about whether to place a purchase order.

Amazon is kind of good about giving you data in numeric form for right now, but sometimes that data is deceptive. You might have had just in the last week or two this massive sales spike and then you think – and so you’re looking at your stock you’re going, oh no I’m down to five weeks of sales, but if you look at it in a historical context you might realize that that’s way off the normal trend for this product and I need to be careful and wait for a few more weeks of sales data to confirm the new trend.

So we try to use that historical perspective on our sales and our inventory levels to make better decisions.

Steve: Okay and I have to ask this question, I noticed on your site that all links point to Amazon. Is there any reason why you don’t take orders on your own site?

Bernie: Yeah it’s a tough decision because it’s scary to be so dependent on Amazon and even though we’re an electronics company first and an Amazon seller second we are very dependent on Amazon, and it’s because we’re so good at Amazon, we focused on that and Amazon has really been eating everybody else’s lunch.

That said we’ve tried every other ecommerce service, we’re really on Jet, we sell on Wal-Mart, we sell on eBay but basically if you’re trying to do your own sales on your own ecommerce site, the fly wheel has a lot of resistance. Yes you can build a brand and get people to think about your brand first before they buy a product and come to your site, but boy is that hard. Unless you’re a GoPro or you’re a Dell, chances are you’re going to have a very hard time getting that particular fly wheel spinning. More likely people are going to buy past your site and head directly to Amazon and start searching in.

So our philosophy has been to be really stuck about that, that there is too much friction on the fly wheel for us to have people think of Plugable first, so we’re going to focus on driving those sales to Amazon and pushing Amazon fly wheel for our products.

Steve: So in terms of your content marketing efforts, are you gathering customer data, email addresses and that sort of thing?

Bernie: We do a bit; we’re actually not heavily into that and again our philosophy of not pestering customers. We don’t actually have email marketing that goes out other than if people kind of very proactively subscribe to our blog with their email address, yeah so we have not used cold email marketing actually at all.

Steve: Okay interesting and do you do any paid advertising?

Bernie: We do lots of paid advertising and it’s very focused on that breakdown we were talking about earlier of customer segments, why they will buy the product, what they’re searching on, and we spend that marketing money on a mix of Amazon, and Facebook and Google and really a lot of online channels so that when people are searching for something, that our product is a solution for that, that we’re trying to get our product up in front of them.

Steve: So what’s the plan moving forward, I understand that Plugable uses Efficient Era for all of their processes, like you’re eating your own dog food essentially?

Bernie: Exactly.

Steve: And so what is the future, like are you focusing efforts on Efficient Era, are you focusing efforts on Plugable, what is the game plan going forward?

Bernie: So all the tools that are in Efficient Era were originally created just internally for ourselves, in fact let me not — I personally did most of the tools in the early years and then started having to build a team as the tools got more and more complicated. So kind of hit the point where wow this is a huge competitive advantage for us, but if we just keep it to ourselves, we’re investing all this money for just one Amazon business when these tools would be useful for many and we could kind of amortize the costs, pretty large costs of developing these tools across a lot of businesses.

So we made the decision to spread it out and give up our competitive advantage and offer it to other people. And so now at this point they’re really independent businesses, it’s kind of nice because we have a big in-house customer Plugable who helps guide the feature set and make sure that it’s really relevant and that it’s solving problems for Plugable, and that it works every day without fail.

Then on the Efficient Era side we now have over 200 companies that are using it and they are getting all the benefits from it, and we’re able to kind of amortize our cost of keeping the software moving forward across all those businesses.

Steve: Yeah I mean there is a lot of annoying things about selling on Amazon; like I just looked at my listing the other day and I noticed that Amazon inserted a bullet point for me.

Bernie: Yeah.

Steve: Stuff like that happens; does your software monitor that tuff too?

Bernie: It does, those features are actually just coming out right now.
Steve: Oh they are okay.

Bernie: We have a listing monitoring notification service, so we’ll send you emails if any of the key fields of your listing change, we’re calling the Amazon APIs and also looking at the page and notifying you of discrepancies and changes.

We’re also doing a lot of stuff now with sales notifications where if any of your products hit a new record sales for this week we’ll notify you about that, because that might also be interesting or factor your decisions with purchase orders.

So yeah all of those things where Amazon’s own seller central tools are not doing it for you, we’re trying to automate as much of that as possible.

Steve: Cool Bernie, hey I appreciate your time for coming on the podcast today and just giving us a glimpse into what it’s like to sell electronics online. If anyone has any questions for you or maybe just want to check out your tools, where can they find you?

Bernie: Just email me at Bernie@efficientera.com and of course visit efficientera.com, we’ve got a lot of content up there.

Steve: Cool, well hey Bernie thanks a lot for coming on the show, I really appreciate your time.

Bernie: Oh appreciated Steve, thank you, bye.

Steve: All right, take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. Bernie is actually one of the few people I know who has been able to make a profit selling electronics, and I love the fact that he developed his own software Efficient Era to help his own Amazon business. So definitely go check out Efficient Era to manage your feedback if you end up selling on Amazon. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode157.

And once again I want to thank privy.com for sponsoring this episode. Privy is the email capture provider that I personally use to turn visitors into email subscribers, they offer email capture, exit intent, and site targeting tools to make it supper simple as well. I like Privy because it is so powerful and you can basically trigger custom pop ups for any primer that is closely tied to your ecommerce store. And if you want to give it a try it’s free, so head on over to privy.com/steve, that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/steve.

I also want to thank Klaviyo which is my email marketing platform of choice for ecommerce merchants. You can easily put together automated flows like an abandoned cart sequence, a post purchase flow, a win back campaign, basically all of these sequences that will make you money on auto pilot. So head on over to mywifequitherjob.com/Klaviyo and sign up for free, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/Klaviyo.

Now I talk about how I use these tools on my blog, and if you’re interested in starting your own ecommerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away via email, thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

156: How My Student Carmen Makes 6 Figures Selling Kaftans Online Without Amazon

How My Student Carmen Makes 6 Figures Selling Kaftans Online

Today I’m really happy to have Carmen Rivas on the show. And Carmen is actually a student in my Create A Profitable Online Store Course from Australia.

She joined over a year ago and she’s been doing amazing with her business Vizcosa.com. Now I often get questions from listeners whether it’s possible to run a viable ecommerce business outside of the US and the answer is of course.

Carmen sells kaftans and resort wear and what’s cool about her story is that she validated her niche using Facebook before investing a lot of money into her business.

Today, she’s doing very well. She just had a baby and she’s able to run her business while taking care of her child! Enjoy the interview.

Want To Learn How To Start A 6 Figure Ecommerce Store?

Create  A Profitable Online StoreDid you enjoy listening to Carmen’s story? If you would like to create your own profitable online store and join a community of like minded entrepreneurs, then sign up for my full blown course on how to create a profitable online store.

My course offers over 100+ hours of video and includes live office hours where you can ask me questions directly.

If you want to learn everything there is to know about ecommerce, be sure to check it out!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Carmen came up with her niche
  • Her motivations for starting her business
  • How Carmen validated her niche before placing a large order
  • Her platform of choice
  • How Carmen generated early sales for her online store.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Privy.com – Privy is my tool of choice when it comes to gathering email subscribers for my ecommerce store. They offer easy to use email capture, exit intent, and website targeting tools that turn more visitors into email subscribers and buyers. With both free and paid versions, Privy fits into any budget. Click here and get 15% OFF towards your account.
Privy

ReferralCandy.com – If you’re already getting steady orders every month, adding a refer-a-friend program to your store can give you a new sales channel. And ReferralCandy is the best in the business. Click here and get a FREE $50 credit towards your account.
referral candy

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and delve deeply into what strategies are working and what strategies are not with their businesses. I’m Steve Chou and today I’m thrilled to have another student in my Create a Profitable Online Store Course on the show.

Carmen Rivas is a student from Australia who is now making a five figure monthly income selling kaftans on her own site, and in fact I don’t believe she has transitioned to Amazon yet, but she’s doing really well and you guys are going to really enjoy her story.

But before we begin I want to give a shout out to Privy who is a sponsor of the show. Now, I’m super excited to talk about Privy, because I use and rely on Privy to build my email list for both my blog and my online store. Now what does Privy do? Privy is an email list growth platform, and they manage all of my email capture forms, and in fact I use Privy hand in hand with my email marketing provider.

Now there are a bunch of companies out there that will manage your email capture forms, but I like Privy because they specialize in ecommerce. Privy is easily the most powerful platform that I’ve ever used, and you can trigger sign up forms based on any primer that you desire. So for example let’s say you offer free shipping for orders over 100 bucks, well you can have Privy flash a popup when the customer has $90 in their shopping cart to get them to buy one more item.

Here’s another cool use case, if someone has item A in their shopping cart, I can easily tell Privy to display a unique and special coupon code for that item or to display a related item or offer. In terms of email capture, right now I’m showing a different email lead magnet depending on what product a customer is browsing in our shop.

So bottom line Privy allows me to turn visitors into email subscribers, which I then feed to my email provider to close the sale. So head on over to Privy.com/steve that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/steve and try it for free, and if you decide you need the more advanced features, use coupon code MWQHJ for 15% off. Once again that’s privy.com/steve.

I also want to give a quick shout out to Klaviyo who is also a sponsor of the show. Now I’m really blessed to have Klaviyo as a sponsor because they are the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store, and I actually depend on them for over 20% of my revenues. Now you’re probably wondering why Klaviyo and not another email provider. Well Klaviyo is the only email platform out there that is specifically built for ecommerce stores, and here is why it’s so powerful.

Klaviyo can track every single customer who has shopped in your store and exactly what they purchased which makes it extremely powerful. So let’s say I want to send an email to everyone who purchased a red handkerchief in the last week, that is easy. Let’s say I want to set up a special autoresponder sequence to my customers depending on what they purchased, that’s a piece of cake, and there’s full revenue tracking on every single email sent.
Klaviyo is the most powerful email platform that I’ve ever used and you can try them for free at mywifequitherjob.com/Klaviyo, and that’s spelled K-L-A-V-I-Y-O. Once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/Klaviyo, now on to the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I’m really happy to have Carmen Rivas on the show. Carmen is actually a student in my Create a Profitable Online Store Course and she lives in Australia, she joined over a year ago and she’s been doing amazing with her business vizcosa.com. Now I often get questions from listeners whether it’s possible to run a viable ecommerce business outside of the US and the answer is of course.
Carmen sells kaftans and resort wear, and what’s cool about her story is that she validated her niche using Facebook before investing a lot of money into her business. Today she’s doing very well, she just had a baby, and she is able to run her business while taking care of her child. And with that welcome to the show Carmen, how are you doing today?

Carmen: I’m very good Steve, how are you, thank you so much for having me.

Steve: I know, thanks for coming on, I just still continually find it amazing that I’m in the United States and you are in Australia and we are talking today.

Carmen: I know, it was a bit hard to find the time but here we are.

Steve: So Carmen how did you come up with a niche and the idea for selling kaftans online — first of all what is a kaftan?

Carmen: A kaftan is a very glamorous gown; it’s pretty much a dress that women can wear in summer and you can wear it to a wedding, you can wear – especially something that you take to your holidays, but it’s just pretty much really glamorous, very elegant and it just comes from many years ago.

Men used to wear kaftans and I think men still wear kaftans, but with the evolution of fashion now it’s a very fashionable gown that you just wear for an evening, for a cocktail, for a party and especially it’s really beautiful to wear at the beach during the holiday, because it’s very free flowing, very comfortable, mostly made of silk or luxurious fabrics and they are always decorated with stones, they are very colorful, so it’s something that will bring a very happy feeling when you wear.

Steve: Okay and how did you come up with the idea of selling those?

Carmen: I am a lover of summer and I really love fashion. I knew I wanted to start a business that was pretty much within the fashion industry, and if you see me during summer I will always be wearing a dress, long maxi dresses and anything that has to do with color and with free flowing fabric. So I really had this idea that I wanted something similar, and I actually had another business before, one of them was tape [ph] wear.

It was something similar to spanks [ph] and that didn’t really go very well because it’s something that I love to wear, but I was trying to sell it without really finding what women really wanted. So when I decided that I was going to change my business within the fashion industry and go for something that was clothing, I started to ask around and ask before not necessarily something that I wanted to wear but what they want to wear, what they like, how they feel, what they wear it for.

So I used two medias to validate that idea, one was Facebook and the other one was a survey that I did in Survey Monkey to my friends, and that’s how I came up with specifically kaftans.

Steve: So real quick back in your other business when you were selling spanks like products, why didn’t those work out exactly?

Carmen: I think it was I didn’t have the knowledge. I think if I start again now with that business it’s going to do well because it’s actually a really good product, but back then I didn’t have any mentoring, I didn’t know what I was doing, I was trying to sell wholesale, I was trying to sell online, but I was just trying to do Google AdWords and everything was all over the place.

I wasn’t niching down the product, I wasn’t being specific, I was trying to be a little bit of everything, but I was doing nothing at the end because I wasn’t really targeting anyone in particular.

Steve: Okay can we talk a little bit about the survey that you sent out; you mentioned that you were just trying to validate your niche, what were some of the questions on the survey?

Carmen: It was pretty much, I really wanted to find out who these women were, so I started with age group, with occupation, income and also what they wear like what do you feel beautiful wearing, and also for different occasions because you might wear something to work and something different to a party, so I asked them everything, what do you wear to this and this and this different occasions.

I gathered enough information to sort of – and I also knew that I wanted to go with summer wear and dresses, but I was very open to different opportunities. So at the end of that survey everything really pointed out to the kaftans.

Steve: So who did you send the survey to?

Carmen: I sent it to friends, pretty much to friends, I did it literary because in Survey Market you can actually buy an audience, so I did buy a little more audience but I also sent it to my friends.

Steve: Okay and how many people actually responded to your survey just curious?

Carmen: It was a while ago I don’t remember, I think it might have been no more than 20 people maybe; it wasn’t a lot of people actually.

Steve: Okay and then when you were validating on Facebook, what was the process for that?

Carmen: Okay so listening to – basically when I joined your course that’s when I started to have a lot of direction on what really I needed to do and the first thing was sort of knowing what people were looking for online. So I used a couple of different programs just to see what people were looking out for online, so it was with Google, Terapeak was one of them.

So I decided – there was an interview that you have with Ryan Daniel Moran from Freedom Fast Lane. He was talking about how he started — it was I remember some business selling yoga mats, and that really gave me the idea to start a Facebook page just to start adding value having a little bit of information about clothing just to see what the response was going to be.

That’s how I started the business, I didn’t even have the website yet, but I decided to really communicate with people through that. I started to really get a lot of information from them, what they wanted, what they wanted it for. I was very responsive if I got any questions and all of this was before even I have the website, and that really helped me to validate the idea.

Steve: So you just created a Facebook page from scratch, how did you get early fans of your page?

Carmen: It was with Facebook likes, so it was just the usual Facebook likes, I just would find dollars I remember at the beginning on to the page and people started to like it and every night I remember I will upload a couple of pictures and the pictures were just generic pictures that I took from Google.

So everything was really generic, I was just trying to find out if people – what they like, where did they click like the most or if they put a comment, which pictures they were commenting on and things like that. That’s how I started; I just wanted to know where they were going pretty much.

Steve: Interesting, so when you were posting these pictures, these were kaftan pictures that you just found on Google?

Carmen: I did, some of them were kaftans, some of them were celebrity pictures wearing similar items. So I was posting everything that I wanted to sell, so similar items, they were not only kaftans but they were a little bit of different type of clothing just to still continue to understand what women wanted and what they really like, so pretty much.

Steve: And just curious how big did you build up the space, like how many likes did the page end up having?

Carmen: At the moment it has 10,000, a little bit almost 11,000. April we only had about 100 likes when I decided to start my online store.

Steve: Oh wow okay.

Carmen: It was very soon.

Steve: And so you posted different pictures and then based on the level of engagement, that’s kind of how you chose which ones that you wanted to sell in your store?

Carmen: Exactly because I noticed that it was a very good addition, so everything happened within probably a month. So probably by the time I have 500 likes I was very comfortable. I already felt, okay there is a – because I had a business before I knew that it wasn’t that easy to get even these 500 likes, and I knew with the business that I had before the engagement was really low. With this one even though it was only 500 people, they were very engaged.

So I knew that this was enough for me to start. I made my first sale within that month because of the conversation I was having with customers and they were asking me for advice and I was giving them so much advice until this – I remember one of the women just I really I need this outfit for a wedding I think she was having, I don’t know what to wear and I started to sort of back and forth ask her what her style was, what time was the wedding, every question.

She said, okay I really need that dress and I remember posting a picture of a garment that I thought was beautiful for the occasion and she said, oh I would really like to have that one. I said okay you can have it, and I went and I found it locally, I tried to find that garment everywhere I could and I found something very similar, and I created my website and I told her this is the link, you can buy it.

Steve: Interesting, okay so you just bought it from a retail store and then sold it?

Carmen: Correct yes, I was only at the stage of validating the idea and I saw, okay somebody wants to buy it, I don’t want to miss the opportunity.

Steve: So on your Facebook page you were having conversations with people, did you ever try to pre-sell any of your products?

Carmen: Not at that stage but very soon after but only within another week I started to source the product. I went to look for a supplier overseas and I got a few samples and everything was really quick, it’s really where I had samples on the website and I started to sell them.

Steve: Okay and in terms of your suppliers how did you find them and where did you look?

Carmen: I looked in AliExpress and I looked in Alibaba and I found a couple of suppliers there and there were various endless stages. I didn’t stay with so many of them, the suppliers that I have at the moment I actually asked them and I found them because I was trying to make my own designs, and I was trying to understand how you can make your own prints and how to print in silk and in fabric, and doing those searches I found actually my current supplier.

I goggled him and I found him and I have a couple of suppliers now, but the biggest one was a little bit outside of Alibaba, but you can still find people there for sure.

Steve: Okay but you started out selling other people’s designs first before?

Carmen: Yes for only a couple of weeks, it was a very short time. When I understood that I was on to something, I really wanted to have my own business and I really wanted to have my own label and I wanted to be very original and doing my own things, I really rushed into finding my own brand really early on.

Steve: Okay, I have a couple of questions just related to clothing like how do you decide how many of a certain size to buy and that sort of thing?

Carmen: At first it was a risk, I just had no idea how many I needed, so I started with very small amounts and very small quantities and I just pretty much I will order a little bit of…

Steve: How large was your first order?

Carmen: It was probably just 20 items, it was really small and they actually thankfully they have quite big minimums, but I managed to – on your course you mention all the time you can always sound like you are not exactly the final person they’re talking to, and so I started to sound like a bigger business and I said, look we really need samples to start with. So my first order was a sample order and that sample order sold really fast, and that’s how I started to build up on my bigger orders.

Steve: So your first order was 20 you said, right?

Carmen: Yes.

Steve: Was that different sizes or you did you just go with the common sizes?

Carmen: It was different sizes yes. So obviously I kind of run out of one size and then run out of the other. It was a struggle at the beginning just to get it right when it came to sizes.

Steve: Okay and then after that your orders – what were some of the minimums that you were encountering?

Carmen: I started to order 15 minimum and then they started to have minimums when it came to a particular print, and obviously when you start making your own print, then the minimums are bigger because they need to do a production run for something that they didn’t have, and it’s something that is exclusive to you. So the minimums started to build up a little bit, so at the moment – I mean it was very slow and they were quite flexible at the beginning, so I would order 15 here, 20 there until I stated to build it up on my own prints.

Steve: Okay, I’m just curious did you look locally at all for sourcing or did you go straight overseas?

Carmen: I went straight overseas, however yes at the beginning it was a local supplier the very first ones. Yeah I definitely went overseas and actually I had looked in America back in the day when I first I had this idea, because originally I’m from Colombia so in my way there I actually looked in America for suppliers and there is actually good ones there, but at the moment I’m not working with any American suppliers.

Steve: Okay and I’m just curious what is the price differential from going to China versus like the US or Australia for example?

Carmen: At the moment I’m working with India and I think the prices might be quite similar.

Steve: Oh really?

Carmen: Yes, it probably might be a little bit more expensive than to go to America and a little bit cheaper to go to China I will say, but the prices are not – it’s just not that massive. I think when it comes to silk; silk is not cheap anywhere so I think is very similar regardless, yes.

Steve: Okay, so if that’s the case why are you still going overseas as opposed to going locally?

Carmen: No what I say is similar when it comes to doing America or…

Steve: Okay.

Carmen: Yes, yes.

Steve: Okay got it.

Carmen: Nothing local, at the moment I don’t have anything local, I think the quality one — I haven’t really explored someone that can actually make my own garments locally. You can find local people but obviously they are sourcing it from overseas.

Steve: Okay and when you first got started how many designs – like there is this misconception that you have to have like a huge variety when you launch. I’m just curious how many styles you had when you first launched your store?

Carmen: Yes definitely it doesn’t have to be a lot of styles and like myself and I used to have that belief as well, I have to have a massive store for people to come and buy and they need to have all these options. But no, at the beginning as I said the first time was one dress that one particular lady wanted to purchase, so I had that one on the website, and then I started to upload a couple, so probably when I first launched the website I have five designs and I started to build it from there.

I didn’t have a lot of designs and I don’t think when it comes to someone wanting to buy your product, I don’t think they are very worried about you having a massive amount of choices. I think it is all about offering quality, being trustworthy and offering something that they really want and need and being there for your customer and building that relationship. They don’t really care that you have a lot. At the moment I have somehow many more designs but I didn’t start with that many.

Steve: Okay and then what platform did you ultimately choose to run your store on?

Carmen: At the moment we are on Shopify and I do have experience with having open cart when I had the underwear business and that was very difficult. So I recommend to everyone just go to Shopify, it’s much faster.

Steve: Did you do your own website design on Shopify?

Carmen: Yes I did.

Steve: Okay and just curious how long did it take you to get your store up and running assuming you had all the photos and everything ready to go?

Carmen: It was really quick, I did it probably in a weekend, but I’m not saying that it’s something that is that easy to do. I did it that fast because I spent years before with my other business. So I already made all these mistakes, I already had a little bit of experience with Photoshop, I knew how to sort of the photography, I really knew photography well, I already knew more, I really knew how to organize a photo shoot. I really understood the whole process; I understood a little bit of design because I learnt all of that from my previous business.

So it was very fast when I started this part of the business, just setting up the shop because I had the experience and I also had an open cart website before, so I was involved with a little bit of coding and a little bit of everything. I understood a little bit. Not very technical but I understood.

Steve: Okay and just curious like you mentioned are you designing your own patterns for your kaftans or just the prints?

Carmen: Everything at the moment.

Steve: The patterns too?

Carmen: Yes, yes.

Steve: Okay, does that mean that you know how to design clothing?

Carmen: Well I will say maybe yes.

Steve: Or did you hire someone to design it for you?

Carmen: No at the moment I do the whole design, the whole process.

Steve: Okay.

Carmen: Yeah at the moment I do everything, obviously I’m not a graphic designer, so I do work with graphic designers to help me put it all together, but I do solve everything, the inspiration, how I want it to look, how the sleeves look, how long is it going to be, how wide, all the measurements, all the patterns, everything. I am, different samples everything together and give them the instructions to get it all done.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank ReferralCandy for being a sponsor of the show. Now for any ecommerce store word of mouth is huge, and when a customer is super happy with their purchase they will tell all of their friends. Now what if there was a way to amplify word of mouth about your company, what if there was a way to reward referrals for your business? This is where ReferralCandy shines, with just a couple of clicks of the mouse you can add a referral program to your ecommerce store and reward your customers for telling their friends about your shop.

And this tactic works wonders; in fact it’s not uncommon to get a ridiculous return on your investment. So for example Greats Footwear, who is a ReferralCandy customer, is seeing a 20X ROI. Referral word of mouth marketing is also useful for building up your social media presence as well, because referrals share with their friends on Facebook and Twitter.

And the best part is that ReferralCandy is a set it and forget it service, requires no technical setup and they are giving My Wife Quit Her Job listeners 50 bucks to try them out if you go to promo.referralcandy.com/steve. Once again that’s promo.referralcandy.com/steve to get a $50 credit to try the service. Now back to the show.

So what software do you use to do that, I’m just curious?

Carmen: Photoshop.

Steve: Oh Photoshop okay, so you just lay out the measurements in Photoshop?

Carmen: Exactly yeah.

Steve: Okay so there is nothing special in terms of software or graphic design?

Carmen: There is a bit at the end, when they are going to print it they have other softwares that they need to put it all in to their softwares and then they need to print on to the fabric. So I don’t do the printing because that all is done overseas, but I put together the design and how everything is going to look and what the measurements are and I send it to them, then they need to put it on their own systems just to get it finalized pretty much.

Steve: Okay and in terms of what you’re sending them, is it just like each individual piece of fabric cut out?

Carmen: No they do everything overseas, so what they get from me is the actual designs and the measurements, and if they need something physical I will
send them something physical.

Steve: Oh no that’s not what I meant, I meant like when you’re laying it out in Photoshop, is it on a per piece basis like a kaftan might have different pieces of fabric sown together. When you’re sending them in the Photoshop, are you sending them a design of each individual piece of fabric and then they put it together?

Carmen: Yes correct, so it’s a lot of specifications and a lot of measurements, and I actually do everything at home and I start to try them at home and I try it on. I also have my sewing machine here if I need to put something together. So I try to do as much as I can until I am comfortable with it and then I can tell them, because a lot of things can get lost in translation as well. So I make sure that I understand and they understand what the final is going to look like, and then we just do one sample and they send me the sample, and then it’s a little back and forth until I am happy.

Steve: Okay that’s amazing, so you’re like a one stop shop yourself, like you understand how to design the clothing and you even put together a sample yourself like a prototype?

Carmen: Yes, yes I also I always have loved clothing and that type of clothing, so I had an idea and my family has always been involved in fashion and my mum is very good at sewing and making clothes. So I kind of have a lot of that idea of what is involved making clothing so yeah.

Steve: Okay, all right well let’s shift gears and talk about sales, so you got your first sale off of your Facebook page, how are you making consistent sales today?

Carmen: It’s actually the same, so it has continued to be Facebook but over the times, it’s been about a year that we have been within on the business and it has started to grow a little bit outside the Facebook but it is still a community that we have there. Now that I started to gain regular customers, so I have continued other relationship with them through email as well, and that’s pretty much how we have continued either a little bit of influencer marketing, some couple of bloggers that have been working with us to build the brand, but it’s pretty much still Facebook page.

Steve: Okay can we talk about your Facebook page then, how do you maintain it like how often do you post, what do you post?

Carmen: I post at least three, well sometimes nothing but ideally it is at least three times per day just to continue with the consistency, and I found that my customers really love it. I just make sure that everything is about engaging with them and everything is about having that conversation and everything is about them, and every time somebody comments being there for them straight away.
Even if they say well I love this and this is beautiful always reply thank you so much, thank you for the love, we can’t wait to show you what’s coming. It’s all about staying in touch with the customers.

Steve: How do you decide what to post, are you just posting pictures of products or are you posting content?

Carmen: At the moment well it was pretty much through that but right now we’re posting little bit of content, so slowly started to do a couple of blog posts but even each picture on its own has a little bit of content on it. So it’s not only the photo, but the photo might have a little bit of [inaudible 00:28:08], it might say this particular color will look beautiful with this particular type of shoes or this particular location.

So even that picture has a little bit of information and a little bit of advice and I think that’s what our customers love because it’s not about only telling them buy this, it’s all about what do you need, I’m here to help you and I’m here to give you advice. Are you going to a cruise ship, this is what will be beautiful to wear for thin air, that’s what – this is beautiful for the pool side, so they really respond to that.

Steve: So are you posting these questions on the group as well?

Carmen: Yes, it’s only a Facebook page, we don’t have a group.

Steve: Facebook page, okay so you’re like doing customer service on your Facebook page essentially?

Carmen: Exactly yeah.

Steve: Okay and are you still buying likes at all anymore?

Carmen: No not anymore, so we stopped very – probably we stopped at 3,000 likes I think or less. So all the rest, we have almost 11,000 likes and
everything has been organic.

Steve: Do you remember how much you paid for those 3,000 likes early on?

Carmen: I remember back on the day I was probably investing $5 or $10 a day and getting maybe 20 likes.

Steve: About 25 cents a like?

Carmen: Yes something like that, but very early on I stopped yes.

Steve: Okay and I’m just curious when you’re running a Facebook page now like when you post something the reach is very low, so are you boosting your posts, are you paying for ads?

Carmen: Ads, so at the moment it’s all ads based and that’s how we reach and continue to reach customers, so it’s pretty much ads every day and there’s a combination of ads and a little bit of email marketing, yeah that’s pretty much.

Steve: Okay do you feel comfortable talking about your ads a little bit?

Carmen: Yes let’s talk a little bit.

Steve: Okay all right so what does the ad copy look like and who are you targeting?

Carmen: The target is – do you want to be too specific about the particular target?

Steve: Sure.

Carmen: But I mean a little bit in general, I do different ads for different targets, and then I see which one is going to take off, so it’s a constant trial and error all the time.

Steve: Are you pointing your ads directly to your kaftans or do you point them to like a content page?

Carmen: No it’s actually to the product.

Steve: To the product okay.

Carmen: Yes to the products. I remember you mentioning a lot what you do pointing it to content, no but I do directly to the product. There is something I might explore a little bit of going to the content but people really actually like to see the products really like.

Steve: Okay and then so you’re making more money than you’re spending on these ads obviously?

Carmen: Oh yes they are really profitable yes.

Steve: Okay and are you selling only on your site right now, are you selling on Amazon or anywhere else?

Carmen: No I sell on eBay actually.

Steve: eBay interesting.

Carmen: Yes but not a lot, just a little bit because of the price point. We have an early rush, our cheapest price is $120 so probably eBay, there’s not a lot of people on eBay that will see – they will go and spend that kind of money probably, but I have an eBay page and I have people coming through it and making purchases as well and they are really happy as well, I get beautiful feedback from the people there, yes.

Steve: So I’m just curious why eBay and not Amazon?

Carmen: It’s just been a lack of time probably, Amazon is definitely something that I will be exploring soon, but Amazon is just being probably lack of time, my being just busy with the website and to be honest my original idea was to go on Amazon. That was my objective and I never even wanted to start my website that soon within a week.

What I was going to do is the Facebook page, use it to start my Amazon business, but because I saw that the business has started to not only be an online store but it started to become a little bit of a brand, I decided, okay I might just stay within my website, it’s something that I probably will have more control of. Amazon is a little bit more difficult being in Australia, so it is just at the end even though that was the idea, I think it turned out a little bit better for us to stay within our own website and build our own label in our own realistic rather than being in Amazon.

Steve: I’m just curious, so that means you’re carrying your own inventory, is that correct?

Carmen: Correct yes.

Steve: So where are you storing everything?

Carmen: Everything is at home.

Steve: Really?

Carmen: Yes.

Steve: Okay.

Carmen: There is a lot of stock.

Steve: So does that mean that you do your own shipping and fulfillment as well?

Carmen: Yes I do everything, not for long, I think is we’re getting to the point where it’s just not going to happen for everything to stay here for me to do everything, so yes, so very soon it’s going to change, and we got nothing with fulfillment.

Steve: So I’m just curious how do – I mean you have a new born, so how does your day look?

Carmen: Well I’m very busy; it’s not a lot of sleep. For new mums out there they understand what it is like but I also will say to any new mum in business that it is definitely possible and it is actually a good idea to start before hand before you have the baby, but it doesn’t matter what stage you are at. So it’s pretty much when the bay sleeps I work, that’s how my day is like, and I have a good baby in terms of he’s easy going when he goes to go out.

If I need to go and run errands for the business he’s let me and he’s very good, but pretty much I wake up in the morning, I feed the baby, I get ready to start my day, I put the baby to sleep and I do some work and then it’s all about going back to feed, going back to play for the baby, I’m going back to work for me. So that’s a very busy day.

Steve: Do you get a lot of phone calls?

Carmen: I do but I don’t offer – so pretty much there is no numbers on my website.

Steve: There isn’t, okay.

Carmen: No it’s only when someone contacts us by email and they say they want to talk to someone I will definitely give them the number. I do have a number for the business, so I do give them the number and they’re happy to call where I said to them I’m happy to give you a call back with this number to those and that’s how we do it.

Steve: Okay so here’s a couple of rapid fire questions that I’m just curious about, so how much money did you invest to start this business?

Carmen: It was only pretty much just the cost of the website and the cost of the first garments and it took off from there, so it was probably around $500.

Steve: $500 okay.

Carmen: Yes I will say it’s not a massive investment, and obviously the investment on the course, because I think everything really took off when I started the course with you. So I think that has been my best investment today for sure.

Steve: And how long did it take you to put up your site?

Carmen: Just to get it up and running?

Steve: Aha.

Carmen: It was also it was over the course of a weekend but I’m not saying…

Steve: Like you had experience with it.

Carmen: Exactly.

Steve: Okay.

Carmen: It’s not like it’s something so easy to do, before that I tried having a website and it was on an open cart, it was called PrestaShop, I don’t
know if you heard of it.

Steve: Yes PrestaShop aha.

Carmen: It took me six months to have the website and even after those six months I was literary crying, I had all these developments and people though – please help me because I couldn’t even get it to work. So I learned so much by having that website that now having a Shopify website everything is so much faster and so much easier, and I had the experience just to get it all working.

Steve: Okay and if you had to pick one thing, what would you say your main struggle was in starting out?

Carmen: It was definitely finding the niche, it was finding the niche and obviously connecting to people, and once that happened everything became not on a smooth sail but everything started to make sense. Another struggle is definitely sourcing the product, finding people that you can trust, because you need to understand what quantities you need and you need to take so much risk especially for me because I’m carrying all my inventory and everyday I’m making this business but also everyday I’m buying more and more and more inventory.
You need to really find people that you trust that they want to send you the quality that you really want.

Steve: Can we talk about your vendors a little bit, so are you going with your original vendors, or have you switched a bunch?

Carmen: I do have new ones but I had these ones for months and months at the moment.

Steve: Okay and how did you get them to ship you such small quantities because it sounded like you started out with very low quantities?

Carmen: Yeah I was just lucky I think. When I first contacted them they are very good vendors and the quality is amazing, so they can just be very difficult and say no we only do these minimums, but I was just lucky and I said, look this is a business that is going to be amazing and I said to them, it’s already a big brand but I need to know your products first, and I need to know if your product is the quality that we’re looking for and I really need samples.

So at the beginning that’s how we did it, so they sent me samples and they saw that I was serious because mine is all necessary to be bigger as I promised, and I said mine is all necessary going to be bigger and bigger and that’s what has been happening month after month and I think they trust me and now we have a good relationship.

Steve: Let me ask you this, are the same vendors that you started with early on, are those the same ones that are manufacturing your own designs now?

Carmen: Yes correct. I changed a little bit so I now have a vendor that I stumbled across just trying to find something else and that one is my main vendor at the moment, so that was a bit hard, that was like a lucky strike to find, but I will say Alibaba, AliExpress is still good places to find people.

Steve: Okay and then this other one you just said you found through search or?

Carmen: Yes through search as well yes, so I just been lucky with those ones.

Steve: And when you are approaching someone randomly like on search, how do you vet them, is it the same process you ask for samples and then you just go back and forth?

Carmen: Yes and I really like the fact that there were not very sellsy either, I think they were very private, they are very hard to find and very hard to get in contact with. So to me that sounded like a good thing, and at the same time they were also a little bit skeptical who are you anything, and I think it was a little bit of back and forth to get to know each other and that’s how we got there.

It was a trusting relationship and they started to send me samples and it was all about doing everything. I tried to be very professional, I sent them a questionnaire before anything with every question I can possibly have, and I said to them once you answer these questions to me these are our terms.

So please make sure that everything you answer that’s how you – everything about minimums, everything about privacy, everything, so make sure that you’re happy with that, everything about shipping.

So they will reply and I will reply back and I said I didn’t like this condition what this means, so it like a real contract in between so I did everything — from the beginning everything was so professional, involves but it really works out.

Steve: And in terms of quality control, I mean we do handkerchiefs which is much simpler than kaftans I’m sure and we run into quality problems and I’m just curious if you have run into any quality problems and how you address them.

Carmen: There have been minor quality problems, probably I had one or two products that I had problems with and when that happens I will just say to them, look this happened, please make sure it doesn’t happen again because it’s just not a massive amount, I haven’t had any massive issues.

Steve: Okay does that mean you have inspectors over there or?

Carmen: No, no not at this stage. I definitely want to start working with inspectors just to make sure that as we get bigger everything is going to be okay, but no I’ve been lucky I’ve to say I’ve been quite lucky.

Steve: Wow it’s amazing.

Carmen: Yeah because I always get a sample before anything especially when I’m going to launch a new product. I get the sample, I try it on, I make sure, so obviously the sample is going to be fine. So it’s about trusting that the production run is going to be the same as the sample.

Steve: So Carmen there is a lot of people listening and they are kind of on the sidelines right now, and a lot of them want to know really how hard it was for you to get started, and what sort of advice would you give to people who are kind of waiting on the sidelines today?

Carmen: It is definitely not easy and I understand how everyone out there is feeling. I really want to have my business, I really want to start but I have no idea where. My recommendation is continue to learn and continue to invest on your education, find a mentor. I did your course and that gave me so much direction and also I did benefit so much from your podcast, and that’s why I’m so excited to be here because if in a small way I can tell my story and help other people, I hope that will help them just to push through.

So it’s not easy, it’s not easy to find your niche and it’s not easy to find your product, but it’s also not impossible and it’s also about trial and error. As I said before this business I started another one and that one was not only online, it was a wholesale business and I made so many mistakes but it was all about trying because every mistake that I made really taught me something new.

So don’t be afraid of making the mistakes, just make sure that the risks are calculated, that you are not investing huge amounts of money, that you make a small investments here and there with a little bit of the stock, get a few samples until you find something that will stick pretty much. It does happen and it does happen when you continue to educate yourself for sure.

Steve: One thing I liked about your story Carmen was that in the beginning you didn’t invest any money at all really, like when someone made an order you actually went out and just paid retail prices and shipped it.

Carmen: Yes.

Steve: And you did a lot of research before investing a large sum.

Carmen: Yes because I already made the mistake before, I already had another business and I had a business for a while and I had so much stock that I purchased without knowing exactly which ones were the correct ones, so I bought all this stock and it’s just I think that was the problem just going thinking this is going to be amazing, I’m going to go and buy all this stock.

So you need to find out first if it’s going to be amazing and then do very slowly, and once you’re confident then yes go for it and take a massive risk because you already known this is going to sell eventually at least. But I already made a mistake and I know many people have done it in the past, but yeah you don’t have to buy so much stock at the beginning.

Steve: Okay, hey Carmen I really appreciate you coming on. If anyone is interested in what you have to sell, where can they find you?

Carmen: They can find me on my website which is vizcosa.com, so it’s V-I-Z-C-O-S-A.com, that’s where they can find me, and if they have any questions for me I actually didn’t tell you I have a little of a side project going on which is mentoring for anybody because I get so many people asking me how did you start your business. So if anybody has any questions, they can actually get in touch with me in vizcosa.com/page/mentoring, so they can get to me and stuff.

Steve: Okay and you ship outside of Australia at the present time or just in Australia?

Carmen: Yes I get customers from – I even got a customer from Germany.

Steve: Oh wow.

Carmen: Oh my god, she’s amazing, she’s a regular customer now, and constantly emailing me, what do you have new, so definitely I do ship outside. I ship to America for sure and especially shipping to America, to New Zealand and I have customers in Europe and a little bit in South America. So even though my business is mostly in Australia, I do get customers and sales that come from overseas

Steve: Well that’s good to know, so if anyone needs a kaftan, check out vizcosa.com.

Carmen: Yes I can give you a code for your audience if they want to get a kaftan.

Steve: Well you’re going to be part of my holiday gift card again this year, right?

Carmen: Wonderful of course.

Steve: Okay wonderful. Well so you guys can look forward to a blog post where I outline a bunch of stores that some of my students have put out and obviously Carmen is going to be there.

Carmen: Of course, my pleasure, I will be more than excited to.

Steve: Okay well thanks a lot for coming on the show Carmen, I really appreciate it.

Carmen: Thank you so much for having me Steve, it’s been a pleasure.

Steve: All right take care.

Carmen: Bye, bye.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Now I often get questions from readers whether I have any international students who have been successful online, and not only is Carmen doing great but she’s making the majority of her sales on her own website as well. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode156.

Once again I want to thank klaviyo.com for sponsoring this episode. Klaviyo is my email marketing platform of choice for ecommerce merchants, and you can easily put together automated flows like an abandoned cart sequence, a post purchase flow, a win back campaign, basically all of these sequences that will make you money on auto pilot. So head on over to mywifequitherjob.com/Klaviyo, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/Klaviyo.

I also want to thank privy.com for sponsoring this episode. Privy is the email capture provider that I personally use to turn visitors into email subscribers, therefore email capture, exit intent, and site targeting tools to make it supper simple as well. I like Privy because it is so powerful and you can basically trigger custom pop ups for any primer that is closely tied to your ecommerce store. If you want to give it a try it is free, so head on over to privy.com/steve, that’s privy.com/steve.

I talk about how I use all these tools on my blog, so if you’re interested in starting your own ecommerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away via email, thanks for listening.
Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

155: Jonathan Fields On The Good Life Project And How To Find Meaning As An Entrepreneur

Jonathan Fields On The Good Life Project And How To Find Meaning As An Entrepreneur

Today, I’ve got an extra special guest on the show. He’s someone who I’ve followed and looked up to every since I started blogging in 2009 and that person is Jonathan Fields.

Jonathan is an amazing writer, speaker, podcaster and he has this incredible ability to build community. What I also like about him is that he’s a family man we share a lot of the same values when it comes to life and business. In other words, he’s very mindful of balance and living a full life.

Today, we are going to talk about the good life project and his latest book how to live a good life.

What You’ll Learn

  • Why many successful entrepreneurs aren’t happy
  • How to find meaning in your work
  • How to make forward progress with your business and life
  • How to cultivate and form meaningful connections
  • Why complexity breeds stress

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Privy.com – Privy is my tool of choice when it comes to gathering email subscribers for my ecommerce store. They offer easy to use email capture, exit intent, and website targeting tools that turn more visitors into email subscribers and buyers. With both free and paid versions, Privy fits into any budget. Click here and get 15% OFF towards your account.
Privy

ReferralCandy.com – If you’re already getting steady orders every month, adding a refer-a-friend program to your store can give you a new sales channel. And ReferralCandy is the best in the business. Click here and get a FREE $50 credit towards your account.
referral candy

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and delve deeply into what strategies are working and what strategies are not with their businesses. Today I have Jonathan Fields with me on the show.

Now Jonathan runs the Good Life Project and he’s actually an entrepreneur that is near and dear to my heart, and in fact when I first started blogging back in 2009, Jonathan actually inspired me to write from a more personal level as opposed to just putting out strange ecommerce tutorials. In any case Jonathan is an amazing guy, so please enjoy the interview.

Now before we begin I want to give a quick shout out to Klaviyo who is a sponsor of the show. Now I’m super excited to talk about Klaviyo because they are the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store, and I depend on them for over 20% of my revenues. Now you’re probably wondering why Klaviyo and not another email provider. Well Klaviyo is the only email platform out there that is specifically built for ecommerce stores, and here’s why it’s so powerful.

Klaviyo can track every single customer who has shopped in your store and exactly what they bought which makes it extremely powerful. So let’s say I want to send an email out to everyone who purchased a linen napkin in the last week, piece of cake. Let’s say I want to set up a special autoresponder sequence to my customers depending on what they purchased, easy peasy, and there’s full revenue tracking on every single email.

Klaviyo is the most powerful email platform that I’ve ever used and you can try them for free at mywifequitherjob.com/Klaviyo, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

I also want to give a quick shout out to Privy who is also a sponsor of the show. Now what’s also cool is that I use and rely on Privy for both my blog and my online store. And what does Privy do? Privy is an email list growth platform, and they actually manage all of my email capture forms, and in fact I use Privy hand in hand with Klaviyo.

Now there are a bunch of companies out there that will manage your email capture forms, but here is why I like and chose Privy. Privy is easily the most powerful platform that I’ve ever used, and you can trigger sign up forms based on any primer that you desire. So let’s say you offer free shipping for orders over 100 bucks, well you can actually tell Privy to flash a popup when a customer has $90 in their shopping cart to urge them to insert one more item.

Here’s another cool use case, if someone has item A in their shopping cart, I can easily tell Privy to display a special coupon code for that item or display a related offer. In terms of email capture, I’m showing different email lead magnet depending on what product a customer is browsing in our shop.

So bottom line Privy allows me to turn visitors into email subscribers, which I then feed into Klaviyo to close the sale. So head on over to Privy.com/steve, try it for free, and if you decide you need the more advanced features, use coupon code MWQHJ for 15% off. Once again that’s privy.com, P-R-I-V-Y.com/steve, now on to the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I have an extra special guest on the show. He is someone who I have followed and looked up to ever since I started blogging in 2009, and that person is Jonathan Fields. Now Jonathan is an amazing writer, speaker, podcaster and he has this incredible ability to build community.

And what I also like about him is that he’s a family man, we share a lot of the same values when it comes to life and business, and in other words he’s a very mindful person about balance and living a full life. I remember back in 2008/ 2009 I was going through an entrepreneurial crossroads and his blogs at the time Career Renegade and Awake at the Wheel were ones that I read whenever I needed a pick me up.

So just for fun I looked at my email archives and I found an email dated November 4th 2008 where I reached out and wrote him a fairly long email about my story, how my wife wants to quit, how I want to start a business, how I want to spend time with my family yaddi, yaddi, yadda, and he replied with a one liner, thank you for your email.

And I was like yes Jonathan Fields replied to my email, and later on he actually sent me his book Career Renegade as well and I was stocked. Anyway today we’re going to talk about the Good Life Project and his latest book on how to live a good life, and with that welcome to the show Jonathan, how are you doing today man?

Jonathan: I’m doing really well, now I’m feeling so guilty about my liner back in 2008. I’m like it’s fine with me because that was a time I think I remember where I was really – I was just very newly aligned and very newly public and I just – I was like how do I deal with this bandwidth thing and how do I – so I started taking a nod from Seth Godin who basically responds to most emails but generally it’s never long, I think it’s three to five words and look it’s good enough for Seth it’s got to be good enough for me.

Steve: Hey you know I was just happy to hear from you, you know those five words were powerful.

Jonathan: Awesome.

Steve: So Jonathan I know your work well but for the benefit of the listeners can you just tell us what the Good life Project is all about and actually if you won’t mind what happened to Career Renegade, because I must have missed some memo long ago? One day I went there and it was just gone.

Jonathan: Oh the website you mean?

Steve: Yeah the website.

Jonathan: You know it’s interesting, I’m not entirely sure, so there were two things that happened. One is that we launched that site at the same time that the book launched and started to feel that is something separate. Then is realized pretty quickly that I just didn’t have the capacity to be building content on that website and also blogging, this is in the very early days where it was really just me and a desk, I had no help and no team.

Steve: Okay.

Jonathan: So we folded — I made an announcement back then and I said, “Listen, we’re merging the content site of Career Renegade into what was then my blog which I called Awake at the Wheel and we put it all on to my main website at jonathanfields.com and which kind of intervened there. And then I stopped refreshing and updating careerrenegade.com and I didn’t pay attention to it and I noticed, I don’t know but it was either a month or a couple of months, it could even have been a few years later that I just clicked on the site and I noticed that it was somebody else.

Something must have happened where the URL expired, I never got notification, somebody was sitting on it and immediately grabbed it up. I had no idea because I hadn’t launched a long time but they had even stolen some of my graphics and the load on stuff like that I had put up there, but fundamentally it was designed just for the book and when I realized that I really couldn’t store two different properties I folded the main part of that into my personal website at the time.

Steve: But today you have jonathanfields.com and you have goodlifeproject.com as well, right?

Jonathan: I do yes, Jonathan Fields is where I decided to do some of the longer essay sound writing, and it tends to be less frequent, and Good Life Project is really where most of my focus is, most of my energy is since the beginning of 2012, and here you’re asking what in the world is Good Life Project.

There are two ways to look at it, one is sort of on a bigger picture, it’s we’re on a mission to inspire, support and educate people in the quest of living a more connected, more meaningful, more lit up lives. And one layer deeper that takes the form of media and education venture where we produce media video to audio podcasts, where we create and produce courses and events, experiences, everything from centered on our courses to a once a year annual summer camp for adults where 400 people get on plane trips and obviously not allowed to take over [inaudible 00:07:57] and then build the community.

It’s really built around this idea of establishing a clear set of values and beliefs ethos, and then sharing that and other things and saying, hey you see the work of this, when you see it come join us and we’re assisting each other.

Steve: You know what I love about the Good Life Project is that everything you do, the production quality is just always amazing, and then the guests that you have on, they just have so much depth, and what I really like about what I’ve seen so far is that money is never the focus. What I was hoping to do and just to start out with was if you can give the audience an example of one of your favorite guests, and why they particularly resonate with you, that would be great.

Jonathan: Oh man yeah you’re right money is never the focus, it’s an interesting measure, brought so much rejection that is actually not the measure and it’s a [inaudible 00:08:50] indicator and not only an indicator of a life well lived. So many incredible guests over the years, [inaudible 00:08:56] we kind of like it really it just clicked like more of lost friends and she’s such a – so, so awesome and deeply bright, her life is so open and so utterly herself.

What I love I think most about her is that she is unapologetically her; there is no herself that you have to wait, if something is on her mind she will tell you, and she will tell you just so you see her there. She’s also deeply wise, she’s a researcher, she does a lot of theory research and seeing the vulnerability and courage. So I read that she runs a real academic writer with her ideas and she actually loves the world.

And interestingly similarly, but really similar in that she’s also unapologetically herself [inaudible 00:09:49] is the author I deeply love and [inaudible 00:09:51] really just had a fantastic nature of her love treatment on the world, and she’s actually a person with [inaudible 00:10:25] also but instead of deep academic writer, she’s unapologetically like a guru as well. She believes that ideas exist in the ethos and plenty of things and are just looking for people to come and touch reality from out of us.

So I love the sort of like really pull her ox, it lands on so many things but at the same time deep and shared values there and also just a willingness to stand out and say this is who I am.

Steve: Yeah that’s the common theme of all of your guests and then here’s what I always get. The people that tend to be the happiest tend to be those who don’t hold anything back, they just act themselves, and that’s what I love about the guests that you always bring on, it’s just amazing.

Jonathan: Yeah I think that’s true and I think that’s probably one of the things that we keep want to talk to them is because I know that we’re going to have a real conversation, and what’s interesting is most of my guests also are a bit further into life, so very often they’ve been through enough on their struggle, enough challenge that they can shake in some way to starting really looking at what matters on the people that will start to let go some of the posture and position that all of us are journeying on to essential times of our lives and interested in that process of letting go and are interested in how people move into through that to that better place.

Steve: So Jonathan I actually know your back story pretty well, but just for the benefit of the listeners who might not have heard of you before, can you kind of tell us what kind of events led you to create the Good Life Project, and why you think the way that you do today?

Jonathan: Yeah so depends how far back do you want me to go?

Steve: Well you were a lawyer and you – yeah.

Jonathan: So I was a [inaudible 00:11:45] kid. I’m really like an entrepreneur, I took this weird left turn and I went to law school. I had actually barely attended class in college and I just got my first sort of legitimacy in college which I saw at the end and I got really curious about what I was into actually [inaudible 00:12:03] because I knew I hadn’t really tested that in any way in college.

So after taking a little bit of time off I went to law school and with the intention of just really focusing and seeing what [inaudible 00:12:14]. I was very fortunate, I did very well, graduated from my class and then to a great opportunity. So I ended up practicing law first at the security and exchange commission with Federal government which was a whole interesting trip. Now something like 20 years later I’m just finally able to actually start to talk about some of what really happened because we were on this barrel of sequences for a long time.

And then I went to [inaudible 00:12:39] and I went and became a deal lawyer in the securities for a mega firm in New York where we were going to hedge funds and the best being ridiculous and that’s money and doing all this creating this in. Then I ended up basically [inaudible 00:12:54], I was making a ton of money, I had the power, the prestige that so many people often desire to and I was dying inside and literally dying inside, because I ended up in emergency surgery after my system shut down.

A huge infection was munching in the middle of my body, ended up going through many tests and so not believe everything is okay but it was a wakeup call for me and it certainly be that much promotion. I had a lifelong interest both in entrepreneurship and inside of my body conviction and also in the speaker question, once you need to be your life that lived well.

So that took me from being a lawyer to making 12 bucks an hour as a professional trainer because I wanted to learn the health and fitness in this trip [ph] from the ground up. Nothing matters from the middle down but from the ground up what was really happening and where were the gaps that all of a sudden I thought I could solve, and actually did get a whole bunch.

From there I ended up launching my first facility through that, after about two and a half years sold my interests to an investor here to do a little time off to [inaudible 00:13:57]. And then opened the other CDM in Hellskitchen [ph] New York City because I was getting really interested in yoga, and I saw again a gap I saw in me that wasn’t being filled. I at that point was married, I had a home, I had a three month old baby girl, and I signed on a lease specifically on the first floor on the building and actually the day before 9/11.

That led me into quite an odyssey in there and really questioning everything and dealing with the intense feelings that broke within the city. We had gotten to moving forward in launching that center and it became this beautiful solution committee where we ended up with thousands of students from all over the world and training so many teachers to go out into the world [inaudible 00:14:46].

Steve: I vaguely remember that you thought that the yoga studio was just a huge struggle and a mistake early on, was that…

Jonathan: Yeah the first year was brutal and actually there were some really big missteps that I made, everyone talks about their successes, I screwed that left and right. This was the most real atmosphere that you can ever try and open and build a business in, and we identified the fact that entrepreneurship especially to traditional brick and mortal where you have a physical facility, you have inventory, you have employees, you have all these people coming to assess, this is just a really hard and fraught and super challenging.

I remember sitting on a coach probably about a year into it with my hands just beating myself, I just want to know is this going to work or it isn’t going to work. Just give me a sign, I almost there was a window I probably I almost didn’t care if I succeed or fail, I just wanted some certainty.

Every entrepreneur gets through that even the most successful, we all had windows of time where it’s up, up, up, up and then we’re like, okay for me to push to the next level, I’m going to have to sit back and into that sit of uncertainty again and I don’t know what’s going to happen. If you never do that, then you end up going sideways and actually not backing up.

So I went through that in the early days for sure, then later we know the deep emotion on top of that and what we were building and the fact that we were building functionally what I call a business of belonging, a business where we’re building, it was based on a community and inspiration to elevation and providing source of belonging for people and it was really powerful and at the same time very challenging.

Steve: Are you still running that studio today?

Jonathan: No, it ended 2008. So right around the time that you found me actually, so I guess it was at the end of 2007 I started to really become interested in writing, and I decided to sell my first idea for both [inaudible 00:16:54] so it was written on it and I kind of knew at that point that I was starting to be more checked out in this physical business and it wasn’t fair.

I had a great management team, at that point we were really flourishing, we were doing well, we were established for seven years, but I knew it wasn’t my future and I also knew that because it was based largely on community, the community needs somebody who cares as a leader and I was checked out. I cared but I wasn’t really super invested any more, I wasn’t their commitment either.

So I think 2008 I sold the entire company and I started as this small fellow on writing, and speaking and building business in the digital space, which I did and made some different iterations, got enough growth and then actually everything kind of came together. The company and this thing called Good Life project in January 2012 which literary started as an annual refreshing blog post [inaudible 00:17:54] what I want to do.

That turned into a 40 page designed annual report which I kind of released that into the world and that thing kind of took off in its number is 100 times. At the end of it I pieced this thing called my ten commandments of that big business and also this thing called Good Life project which I didn’t honestly know what it was going to be. But I just knew that I want to create something, and I knew that I wanted to produce me at a completely higher level and take my quest to learn from other embodied teachers and turn it into a more mature business in my location, and be able to turn around and share what I was learning.

Steve: You know what’s interesting about your story is that I get emails from readers and listeners that they’re going through the same thing. They start a business and they might be doing really well, but they’re just not happy and on the flip side there is also people that feel stuck at their jobs but they aren’t happy either.

And so I know your latest book kind of covers this and I was hoping we can go through this a little bit, what is missing with these people and how do you figure out what’s going to make you happy?

Jonathan: Yeah, so one, feeling happiness is the wrong nurture. We get our purpose obsessively on happiness and as you can hear in the background by the way I’m near [inaudible 00:19:19] actually so you can hear the occasional siren and this is legit MRC, so you’re getting the full experience.

So happiness is great, happiness is something that we all want to experience, happiness can also – when you focus on like making that a primary metric for your living a good life, it can actually make you less happy, because everything you do you know like I’m happy, I’m not happy, I’m happy. We start to realize that a lot of times you’re not happy but here’s the thing, nobody is happy all the time and try to actually – when you set yourself up for I just want to be happy all the time, you set yourself up for failure.

Happiness is a fleeting space; it snaps on your life, it’s not the movie of your life. When you try to make it the movie of your life, it makes you less happy than happy, you’re are going to try that, we also have genetic settings for happiness. So we’re not entirely in control of our happiness, so you will get somebody next to you who is giggling most of the time and you’re not that way we think well it’s my job, it’s my relationship, it’s something else.

No probably it’s just your wiring and that’s okay. Be as happy as you can be. So I think the much more important metric that I’ve seen is a sense of am I doing something that lights me up, is it allowing me to use my strengths in a way that I feel strongly utilized, is it allowing me to use whatever natural gifts and talents I have in a way that feels like I’m competent and confident. Is it providing me a sense of true legal meaning? We’re in the classic and it’s just central crisis which is really what you’re talking about here. It’s not a crisis of happiness, it’s not a crisis of love, it’s not a crisis of money, it’s a crisis of meaning.

So when you stop asking okay what’s going to make me happy and say how can I add meaning to my life, what happens is a couple of things. One meaning is a metric that you can build and create an enduring business, meaning it’s also something that you can develop and cultivate even when you’re not in your happiest moods, in fact sometimes deep suffering becomes a profound source of meaning.

At the same time when you pursue meaning happiness tends to insulate as a byproduct of that pursuit and that so much help your way to pursue it. So for somebody who is sitting there and saying okay I’ve either built a cage of my own creation as an entrepreneur or I feel stuck in a job, I’m just not happy, part of the expression for me is, okay first feel back inside. There is a really good chance that you actually have no clue who you are, what matters to you, what lights you up, what your strengths are.

So before you actually say okay like just start doing things. The first thing that you could actually do is spend a little bit of time in self discovery, so with my newest book how to live a good life there is a whole section I call contribution just basically about how you bring yourself to the world and what I haven’t said it explicitly, but it is set up, it’s like the first half of that whole section is really a whole bunch of conversations around ideas that are about self discovery, self knowledge.

The second half is okay now that I know a little bit more about myself and who I am and what matters to me, how can I move that on to the world and start to apply this, how can I actually interact with the world. So if you’re stuck at a job, you’re not going to know how to get unstuck until you know who you are, what matters to you and what you care about and then at that point you can start to say, oh now I see why I feel this way and now I have a much clearer picture of where the misalignments are, the lack in fulfillments are and now I understand where the focus of what to do to resolve this.

The truth is that many people actually don’t have to leave a job to feel better, to find more meaning, to get happier. They just have to know all about themselves which is really good news if you’re in the middle of your life and you have responsibilities and a family. People think they have to blow it up, but very often they don’t.

Steve: You said a lot of stuff there and actually it kind of parallels my life. I just actually recently quit my job, I had been extremely happy working my day job in addition to all these side businesses and it was just recently that I realized I want to spend more time with my kids and so I just finally pulled the trigger, but it was just a very gradual process, nothing huge, I didn’t blow anything up.

Jonathan: Yeah and for most – it’s interesting for I tend to be actually a little bit more of a seller than the average seller, so I’ve blown things up in the past, but I also I’m fast to let people know my example should not necessarily be your example, because most people are actually not wired the same way that I am, and also most people over estimate the speed at which they’ll be joined for in their next iteration and how joyful they’ll be, and they underestimate the pain of the disruption that will be caused by blowing things up.

So the big advisory there is you may have to actually do that to go to where you want to be but that may be part of your process. But if you don’t have to I think it’s so much better to take the path of seeing if you can optimize your current reality particularly watching it first before blowing it up.

There is a whole [inaudible 00:24:43] as long as it’s not a job [inaudible 00:24:45] that is actually researched and published and documented that describes how all sorts of things that you can do to potentially redefine the job that you have or redefine the role that you have or redefine the path and make it your own without having to leave it, and sometimes at the end you’re like you said [inaudible 00:25:04] and I optimized it and it was good and it was just time I really know.
At the same time what you did was you built the next step on the side to a point where it was very easy to just kind of transfer laterally into it without having to go through the pain disrupting, and for most people even if you do make a decision that I have to leave, that’s very often serve the most bearable weight there.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank ReferralCandy for being a sponsor of the show. Now for any ecommerce store word of mouth is huge, and when a customer is super happy with their purchase they will tell all of their friends. Now what if there was a way to amplify word of mouth about your company, what if there was a way to reward referrals for your business? This is where ReferralCandy shines, with just a couple of clicks of the mouse you can add a referral program to your ecommerce store and reward your customers for telling their friends about your shop.

And this tactic works wonders; in fact it’s not uncommon to get a ridiculous return on your investment. So for example Greats Footwear, who is a ReferralCandy customer, is seeing a 20X ROI. Referral word of mouth marketing is also useful for building up your social media presence as well, because referrals share with their friends on Facebook and Twitter.
And the best part is that ReferralCandy is a set it and forget it service, requires no technical setup and they are giving My Wife Quit Her Job listeners 50 bucks to try them out if you go to promo.referralcandy.com/steve. Once again that’s promo.referralcandy.com/steve to get a $50 credit to try the service. Now back to the show.

You know here’s the thing, I get a lot of emails also from people who and again this is kind of where you were talking about where people have problems finding their strengths. They’ll say, “Hey Steve I don’t have any particular talents to give to the world, I can’t think of anything that will make money.” What are some of the exercises that you would prescribe to kind of help people figure these things out?

Jonathan: Yeah first separate those two questions like I can’t figure out what are my strengths and what will make money, because if you try and answer that within the same continuum you’re pretty much always going to lose, because if you have a strength where there is a very clear conventional path to make a living doing that, that’s awesome.

But some people do but a lot of people don’t and then what they do is instead of saying, well this is my strength but there is no conventional path to earning a living, so I’m going to try and brainstorm and figure out unconventional paths. They actually tell themselves well this can’t be my strength then because it’s not going to make me money and they invalidate that strength which is massively destructive, because then they will write out themselves and say, I don’t really know what my strengths are or what my gifts and abilities are because they can’t make any money and that’s not a metric.

They are your strengths and capabilities whether they generate money for you or not and may end up being the thing that you can build a career or a company around, and at the same time they may end up not being the thing, they may end up being the thing that you do on the side, and increasingly I feel like that’s okay.

As long as you understand, really understand what they are, they don’t necessarily have to be the thing that earns you, that becomes primary source of income for you. If they are that’s great, that’s really the holy grail, hey I wake up in the morning and the thing that allows me to fully utilize my strengths and abilities and feel lit up is also the thing that allows me to earn everything I need to take care of myself and my family, that’s fantastic, that’s not always possible.

So the question sometimes becomes, okay how do I get so committed to my life in a way that makes me okay – I mean if the thing that lets you earn more than anything on earth is being a parent, we don’t derive a paycheck from that. But if you feel like the god of the universe or whatever is putting you here because you have this astonishing gift in parenting and that’s where you’re feeling lit having reached below this, that’s fantastic and if at the same time you’re somebody who has to generate, who has to contribute to the family income, there may be a way to somehow figure out how to leverage that but there may not.

So having the option of saying okay I’m going to create a way to generate an income that’s fine, it’s okay. That doesn’t empty me out, but it’s also not the thing that makes me utterly lit up but it makes me baseline okay, it makes me feel like I’m not struggling and stuff in my life. I’m not just constantly reacting from a place of scarcity and fear, and that allows me to then go home and be really doing the present in the thing that does light me up and then what I do believe is my greatest contribution which is my role as a parent.

We’ve invalidated that especially in the entrepreneurship world especially in the online world, we’ve invalidated that option, we said that is not okay. I think we do a massive disservice with people who don’t know their lives, ideally not because they do believe that is the best option.

Steve: But it is not [crosstalk 00:30:25] though. It’s hard to separate the two, right because people have needs and often times it’s monetary needs and they want to find something that they would enjoy doing and make money…

Jonathan: Yeah and if you can that’s fantastic, to me that’s the best, the first line, but what I’m saying is allow the possibility that that is not actually going to happen. So I would say like, okay so you guys I mean the original question is how do we figure out our space and my gifts or whatever is my capabilities. So there are a couple of different tools, in the book I talk about two different strength successes. One is called the VIA strengths inventory and the other is something which is more common that people know about which is strengths under [ph].

Those are great tools that you can use where you literary takes you about 20, 30 minutes to take normal assessment. One is [inaudible 00:31:17] and they will give you really good sense for those things that really – you feel like when you contribute to the world, when you live, when you act in the space, you really feel connected, you feel a big sense of meaning and joy. You feel lit up.

At the same time there are sets of ways to live [inaudible 00:31:36], think about it; take yourself back to when you were nine years old. Forget about when you were getting a PHD, we don’t need that. Then just ask yourself what did I do, what did I do that I loved, what did I watch that I just couldn’t get enough of. I talk about in the book these things I call the spots, the five hidden spots, and one of them is what is called things to do is figure out what is your spot or what are your blinded spots.

So the first stops are purely [inaudible 00:32:03] you have a burning question, are you’re willing to solve a problem, what is fascination, is there an interesting topic or field or something you’re deeply fascinated by. Three is – I’m in a blank on this, right?

Steve: No it’s okay.

Jonathan: Three is – so if we go through them, three is immersion, an immersion of an interesting activity that you love to be immersed, it’s like you’re getting to that first state when you do. You don’t do it for any other reason, you’re not trying to solve a problem, you’re not thirsty about how to do it, you just love doing this thing, you feel alive when you do it.

Four is a mastery spot; you are most lit off when you’re pursuing progress, when you’re pursuing mastery in something. You find this as a service spot; you’re most lit up when you’re being in service of some other being even if that being is an animal or nature.

So most of us have a [inaudible 00:32:52], we also have one that’s really struggling to dominate, so ask yourself, go through those five, then say okay what are my spots and what is this spot that really lights me up that I tend to always live by. And then start to dig out, okay is there some conventional way, is there some conventional path to build my living on a business around the ability to be engaged in those spots and my strengths.

For many people there will be an answer, for some there won’t be an answer and then the idea is, okay I’m convinced here and that’s where you just start getting creative and seeing that there is a brainstorming. Not so many people will get all sorts of different opportunities and testing next. So to me that’s more the process, when you allow people to get to where we’re like yeah I had it figured out either conventionally or unconventionally, I was in the dial that in.

But some people will still get to that point and they’re like, you know what I know what lights me up, I know what my strengths are, I know I’m simply being [inaudible 00:33:54], I know all these things and looked at the conventional path, and there is not a path there. I’ve seen a ton of time looking unconventionally and I’m not going to give up on that, but I really just don’t see it yet, and does that mean that I’m just doomed to live a life where I’ll never serve and never light up, there is no meaning?

The answer is no, but the answer is it may not be the thing that is your primary contribution to your livelihood. It may be the thing that you end up doing on the side. There is a fascinating book called Daily Rituals and this is the book that actually mark the Daily Rituals of many of the greatest creators of all time from artists, computers works, painters, across all the different things.

There is a really interesting pattern that emerges in that book which is that many of the greatest writers; artists of all time did it on the side. They had a regular nine to five work a day jobs and they never dreamed of quitting those jobs. And here is the reason why because if they quit the jobs, then that would put an immediate pressure on them to have to figure out a way to make their side in spite of the odds, generate a full [inaudible 00:35:08] living.

And that would start to put a lot of pressure on them to start to commoditize what they’re doing rather than allowing it to be a full and genuine expression of who they are without regard to whether it’s going to generate money for the family, and they didn’t want to unstring themselves by doing that. So when you look at – there are just too many examples of people who have contributed on extraordinary levels lived greatly by being really happy in like making their primary contribution, the primary thing that lit them up, making that happen not during nine to five but five to nine and on the weekends.

Seeing that over and over has really shifted my lens on validating that topic, it may not be the first path that you try to explore, but you may find that that is the path that you’re in, and to me if you asked me five years ago I’d probably say don’t keep pushing. Increasingly I don’t believe that, increasingly I believe that is a viable offer to establish.

Steve: You know one thing about your book which I actually read last night so it’s very fresh in my mind that particularly resonated with me was your emphasis on travelling in the slow lane from time to time. This is actually a revelation that I recently had because I was looking at my ecommerce business and this entire time I’ve been trying to just grow it and grow and grow it.

Whenever you grow something, that comes along with more employees and just more headaches and I asked myself, we make enough money so why do I continue to make my life a lot more complicated. That particular section really resonated with me, what is your way of thinking about it in terms of just travelling the slow lane, and when did you come to that revelation for yourself?

Jonathan: What I realized over the years is that for me on a very personal level complexity deconstructs and stress equals pain, and so probably what I really shifted my value set to do says, how do I scale a path while minimizing complexity? That’s what I’m about right now and it’s not an easy thing to do and it’s an inspiration so deeply in. But for me because I know complexity brings stress and stress is something that is just deeply negative in my life, I’m always trying to figure out, how do I dial that, I always simplify. How do I springboard?

So if we can automate stuff instead of adding inventory or keep talking to a process we’ll do that. If there is a way to take an idea and strengthen around in a way that minimizes complexity we’ll do that. That said, at the same time I’m also deeply aware of the fact that human connection is really, really important and commoditizing knowledge even though it scales really easily often does not have any real impact of bringing people together and creating environments that help develop relationships and that has complexity.

So we’re constantly balancing things out with what we do, we try and say, okay we want to build impact, we want to create engines of impact and engines of connection breathing along and at the same time is there a way that we can do it that minimizes complexity and maximizes simplicity along the way. That doesn’t mean that we’re going end up with something simple but hopefully may end up being simpler.

We mention speed and what I’ve realized also is that speed is very often not – we tend to move really quickly, we know that we can do faster if we move than more productive the more we get done. What I’ve realized is that we tend to all have a threshold where if we start to move faster than that, we create the illusion of getting work done but our error rate as you start to get back to the level, we have to start to re-trend and go back and fix.

That makes us even have to move faster because now we are in — part of the reason we have to move faster is because we are creating errors by our speed that we have to go back and fix which creates a sort of distracted silo. Not only does it not help us create our best work, but it makes it feel really bad along the way because literary we’re just rushing faster and faster and faster making more mistakes, spending more time fixing rather than creating, and we’re not making progress on our primary metrics. That to me, that’s not a business we’ll build or let [inaudible 00:39:53].

Steve: You know that’s funny, that example that you just gave is something that I’ve encountered when I was coding my sites. Like I would just try to get – pump something out and just get it out right away but then later on have to rip it apart entirely when I want to add some sort of new feature. And just by slowing down and just doing things at a deliberate pace and doing it correctly often works out much better in the long run and I’m happy as well.

Jonathan: It’s so much more fun also. I mean dialing is not bad even just 10% very often makes – it’s a leverage to do, because if you’re dialing back 10% your average probably going to make up for the drop in speed, and at the same time the joy you will experience with the process by dialing back just 10% is probably going to double. So this is like a really simple idea that needs [ph] some really big keywords.

Steve: Let’s talk about something else that resonated with me as well which is kind of related to what we’re talking about here which is the notion of prioritizing and saying no, like early on I had lots of problems doing this and it was just recently within the last couple of years where like if something is not floating my boat I will just say no right off the bat. How does one come to this state of being able to say no?

Jonathan: Yeah brutally and fixedly [ph]. After having so like being beaten down a lot by just like being sort of – because we’re taught as kids not to [inaudible 00:41:19] to speak on, you get it like be helpful, be of service which is all awesome and at the same time we know there will come a time where so many people are asking so much of you that to say yes to everyone and to tell them that for every single request means that you have to start to say no to all the stuff which is deeply meaningful to you, and which is the stuff that really matters in your life, whether it’s the relationships or the moments of peace and stillness or the creative project you’re dying to work on or nearly completing that you want to start to do on the side or building your own company, whatever it may be.

The interior starts to gain the ability to say no, you’re essentially saying no to all the stuff that matters to you instead.

Steve: What are your rules for saying yes?

Jonathan: My rules eventually it’s got to be hell yes or it’s no.

Steve: Why did you take this interview today?

Jonathan: Because a mutual friend introduced us and she’s a hell yes to me and I like her. If you’re a friend with her then it’s got to be a hell yes. Plus I was just – I’m really fascinated because I had that statement where I was like should I talk to the student like background 2008/ 2009 and I’d really love to find out what he’s up to and it sounds like it could be a fun conversation.

Steve: Well those five words that you did write back to me were very powerful, so try and freshen your mind. Yeah I know I was just curious so yeah just when you say yes it’s a hell yeah, but there is a lot of times when – I’ll give you an example of my own life.

Just recently someone asked me to coach my daughter’s soccer team with them, and then someone else asked me to coach the basketball team and then the soft ball team as well and I couldn’t say yes to all those things or any of those things without worrying about my son as well and he’s got these three sports teams as well. So how do you figure out, what is your criteria for saying yes to something?

Jonathan: For me it’s largely, it’s kind of funny; it goes back to what we were talking about earlier. It all starts from deepening just self knowledge first, so you can’t be able to say yes or no to them until you actually know what you care about, what matters to you. So like for the example that you gave, like okay so I got two kids, each kid has three sports and for each of those sports I’m being asked to coach so we have six sports that needs a coach.

If I say yes to all of them I’m going to do a terrible job with all of them and then I’m not going to be able to do some of the other work or be there with my wife, I’m going to be really [inaudible 00:43:46] and get to show up on behalf of everything. So in the name of actually being to all of them, honoring my – maybe you have a deeply held value that I want to be present and engaged and positive in the lives of my kids when I’m with them.

If you want to honor that you’re like okay so there is no way I can do that while I’m saying yes to six things. So what’s the maximum number of things that I can say yes to and still honor my values and what I know to be my strengths and the things that let me [inaudible 00:44:15]. You think, well I can say yes to coaching one, being a coach for one of my daughter’s teams, and being coach for one of my son’s teams.

That will allow me to be present and when I’m present I’ll really be there and be entirely focused, and at the same time every week I’m not there, it’s for me to focus on my honor and put relationships and let it be other things that light me up. Or maybe it’s two, maybe it’s whatever it is for you, but for me there are two parts of it. One is actually learning how to say no and with understanding and compassionate and respectful, but the other one is honestly you must say yes and no to, it’s really about understanding who you are and what matters to you.

So it’s like what lights you up, what empties you out, what do you really value, just say to really have values and believes. So like I said if your value is it’s really important for me to be present and engaged in the lives of my children, then that’s going to change the way you answer the question you just told us. If you stated your value around family definitely where if your value around family is to provide financially for the education, university education of my kids, that’s your primary family value.

You’re going to choose very differently when you have this opportunity to coach, because you’re going to say no, probably you must say because you think in your mind, okay to honor that value what I really need to do is make more money so that I know that my kids will go to whatever college they want to go to and just be able to focus on their academics and not the play.

It comes back to again spending some time on understanding who you are and what matters to you. Once you do that then the hell yes and the no is actually pretty easy, because it becomes pretty obvious to you once you really touch down on what matters on you.

Steve: That’s interesting, these decisions are always very difficult for me because I feel like I have overwrapping interests, like I want to be a parent but then on the flip side there is other things that I need to get done as well, and so it’s never black and white for me at least.

Jonathan: Yeah but at least like I know if you really know yourself well, you’ll understand what your big – so it may not be – you may say well [inaudible 00:46:39] you’re supposed to love to do that and at the same time if I do that it shouldn’t be upsetting, I can still spend less hours a week on my business which is going to make my family financially okay, and that actually would have more of a negative than the positive of you being present for that one.

So it’s a tradeoff but at least if you understand what your values are so that you can feel confident in what better place to make more I think much more intentional decisions rather than just [inaudible 00:47:06] after.

Steve: Would you say that a lot of the people that contact you saying that they don’t have enough time to pursue something, would you say that those people just have a problem of prioritization and not understanding what they actually want to get out of something?

Jonathan: I would say a lot of them. I wouldn’t say a universal blanket, but I’ll say a lot of them, there’s a tremendous in other ways, there’s a tremendous amount of creativity in the way that we live our lives and tremendous lack of intentionality. And again I’m saying understanding what to say yes and no to.

But I also want to point out another case which is that there are all sorts of people who are in a point of life where things are just hard, where circumstances are a big part also but they have locked them in a place where they got to work three jobs to take care of their family, and I don’t want to belittle the reality of that person’s life and say, oh that’s just not a priority.

Steve: Sure.

Jonathan: For many people it is, but there are also other people where I was like you know what there are just things that are brutally hard and it is genuinely something that’s just a really, really tough scenario without a lot of really clear easy ways out of them, it will just take a longer 10% of [inaudible 00:48:30].

Steve: Hey Jonathan I want to be respectful of your time, we’ve been chatting for like 45 minutes at this point. I read your book last night and I thought it was fantastic and it’s actually really quick and easy read, where can people find more about your book and more about the Good Life Project, and just more about your back story?

Jonathan: Sure, so if you go to goodlifeproject.com you’ll find details of the book and then the book is available pretty much at book sellers all over the place, online, offline and my back story is probably in there somewhere. But thank you so much for inviting me on this, it’s been so much fun kind of reconnecting with you and to your audience thanks so much for listening in and allowing me the space to share some time with you.

Steve: And right now everyone who is listening the book is 99 cents, I think I got it for 99 cents which is a ridiculous deal.

Jonathan: I know, my publisher really put the eBook version on sale for 99 cents. Right now I’m not entirely sure how long it’s going to be there, but it’s kind of insanity because this is a traditionally published book that usually costs a lot more than that.

Steve: Yeah, no brainer guys, no brainer, it’s How to Live a Good Life by Jonathan Fields. All right Jonathan thanks a lot for coming on the show, I had a blast man.

Jonathan: Thanks a lot for inviting me.

Steve: All right, take care.
Hope you enjoyed that episode. Jonathan is really an amazing guy and you really have to go and actually check out his writing to fully comprehend what I mean. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode155.
And once again I want to thank privy.com for sponsoring this episode. Privy is the email capture provider that I personally use to turn visitors into email subscribers, therefore email capture, exit intent, and site targeting tools to make it supper simple as well. I like Privy because it is so powerful and you can basically trigger custom pop ups for any primer that is closely tied to your ecommerce store. And if you want to give it a try it’s free, so head on over to privy.com/steve, and once again that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/steve.

I also want to thank Klaviyo which is my email marketing provider of choice for ecommerce merchants. You can easily put together automated flows like an abandoned cart sequence, a post purchase flow, a win back campaign, basically all these sequences that will make you money on auto pilot. So head on over to mywifequitherjob.com/Klaviyo, once again that’s mywifequitherjob.com/Klaviyo.

Now I talk about how I use these tools on my blog, and if you’re interested in starting your own ecommerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away, thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!